gettext-0.7/ 40755 230 226 0 5776113771 11621 5ustar pinardguestgettext-0.7/COPYING100644 230 226 43076 5774507623 13004 0ustar pinardguest GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. Copyright (C) 19yy This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. , 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License. gettext-0.7/ChangeLog100444 230 226 230 5776064626 13445 0ustar pinardguestSun Jul 2 01:51:36 1995 Ulrich Drepper * First official release. This directory solely contains the usual configuration stuff. gettext-0.7/INSTALL100644 230 226 15403 5746055472 12772 0ustar pinardguestBasic Installation ================== These are generic installation instructions. The `configure' shell script attempts to guess correct values for various system-dependent variables used during compilation. It uses those values to create a `Makefile' in each directory of the package. It may also create one or more `.h' files containing system-dependent definitions. Finally, it creates a shell script `config.status' that you can run in the future to recreate the current configuration, a file `config.cache' that saves the results of its tests to speed up reconfiguring, and a file `config.log' containing compiler output (useful mainly for debugging `configure'). If you need to do unusual things to compile the package, please try to figure out how `configure' could check whether to do them, and mail diffs or instructions to the address given in the `README' so they can be considered for the next release. If at some point `config.cache' contains results you don't want to keep, you may remove or edit it. The file `configure.in' is used to create `configure' by a program called `autoconf'. You only need `configure.in' if you want to change it or regenerate `configure' using a newer version of `autoconf'. The simplest way to compile this package is: 1. `cd' to the directory containing the package's source code and type `./configure' to configure the package for your system. If you're using `csh' on an old version of System V, you might need to type `sh ./configure' instead to prevent `csh' from trying to execute `configure' itself. Running `configure' takes awhile. While running, it prints some messages telling which features it is checking for. 2. Type `make' to compile the package. 3. Optionally, type `make check' to run any self-tests that come with the package. 4. Type `make install' to install the programs and any data files and documentation. 5. You can remove the program binaries and object files from the source directory by typing `make clean'. To also remove the files that `configure' created (so you can compile the package for a different kind of computer), type `make distclean'. Compilers and Options ===================== Some systems require unusual options for compilation or linking that the `configure' script does not know about. You can give `configure' initial values for variables by setting them in the environment. Using a Bourne-compatible shell, you can do that on the command line like this: CC=c89 CFLAGS=-O2 LIBS=-lposix ./configure Or on systems that have the `env' program, you can do it like this: env CPPFLAGS=-I/usr/local/include LDFLAGS=-s ./configure Using a Different Build Directory ================================= You can compile the package in a different directory from the one containing the source code. Doing so allows you to compile it on more than one kind of computer at the same time. To do this, you must use a version of `make' that supports the `VPATH' variable, such as GNU `make'. `cd' to the directory where you want the object files and executables to go and run the `configure' script. `configure' automatically checks for the source code in the directory that `configure' is in and in `..'. Installation Names ================== By default, `make install' will install the package's files in `/usr/local/bin', `/usr/local/man', etc. You can specify an installation prefix other than `/usr/local' by giving `configure' the option `--prefix=PATH'. You can specify separate installation prefixes for architecture-specific files and architecture-independent files. If you give `configure' the option `--exec-prefix=PATH', the package will use PATH as the prefix for installing programs and libraries. Documentation and other data files will still use the regular prefix. If the package supports it, you can cause programs to be installed with an extra prefix or suffix on their names by giving `configure' the option `--program-prefix=PREFIX' or `--program-suffix=SUFFIX'. Optional Features ================= Some packages pay attention to `--enable-FEATURE' options to `configure', where FEATURE indicates an optional part of the package. They may also pay attention to `--with-PACKAGE' options, where PACKAGE is something like `gnu-as' or `x' (for the X Window System). The `README' should mention any `--enable-' and `--with-' options that the package recognizes. For packages that use the X Window System, `configure' can usually find the X include and library files automatically, but if it doesn't, you can use the `configure' options `--x-includes=DIR' and `--x-libraries=DIR' to specify their locations. Specifying the System Type ========================== There may be some features `configure' can not figure out automatically, but needs to determine by the type of host the package will run on. Usually `configure' can figure that out, but if it prints a message saying it can not guess the host type, give it the `--host=TYPE' option. TYPE can either be a short name for the system type, such as `sun4', or a canonical name with three fields: CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM See the file `config.sub' for the possible values of each field. If `config.sub' isn't included in this package, then this package doesn't need to know the host type. If you are building compiler tools for cross-compiling, you can also use the `--target=TYPE' option to select the type of system they will produce code for and the `--build=TYPE' option to select the type of system on which you are compiling the package. Sharing Defaults ================ If you want to set default values for `configure' scripts to share, you can create a site shell script called `config.site' that gives default values for variables like `CC', `cache_file', and `prefix'. `configure' looks for `PREFIX/share/config.site' if it exists, then `PREFIX/etc/config.site' if it exists. Or, you can set the `CONFIG_SITE' environment variable to the location of the site script. A warning: not all `configure' scripts look for a site script. Operation Controls ================== `configure' recognizes the following options to control how it operates. `--cache-file=FILE' Save the results of the tests in FILE instead of `config.cache'. Set FILE to `/dev/null' to disable caching, for debugging `configure'. `--help' Print a summary of the options to `configure', and exit. `--quiet' `--silent' `-q' Do not print messages saying which checks are being made. `--srcdir=DIR' Look for the package's source code in directory DIR. Usually `configure' can determine that directory automatically. `--version' Print the version of Autoconf used to generate the `configure' script, and exit. `configure' also accepts some other, not widely useful, options. gettext-0.7/Makefile.in100444 230 226 6350 5776046400 13757 0ustar pinardguest# Main makefile for GNU NLS utilities. # Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ VERSION = @VERSION@ SHELL = /bin/sh @SET_MAKE@ srcdir = @srcdir@ VPATH = @srcdir@ DISTFILES = COPYING ChangeLog INSTALL Makefile.in NLS NEWS README THANKS \ acconfig.h aclocal.m4 config.h.in configure configure.in install-sh \ magic.add mkinstalldirs stamp-h.in SUBDIRS = lib @INTLSUB@ src @POSUB@ doc default: all all install install-exec install-data uninstall TAGS ID \ mostlyclean-recursive clean-recursive distclean-recursive \ maintainer-clean-recursive: config.h Makefile for subdir in $(SUBDIRS); do \ target=`echo $@|sed 's/-recursive//'`; \ echo making $$target in $$subdir; \ (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $$target) || exit 1; \ done distdir = $(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION) dist: Makefile rm -fr $(distdir) mkdir $(distdir) for file in $(DISTFILES); do \ ln $$file $(distdir) \ || { echo copying $$file instead; cp -p $$file $(distdir);}; \ done for subdir in $(SUBDIRS); do \ mkdir $(distdir)/$$subdir || exit 1; \ (cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $@) || exit 1; \ done tar --gzip -chvf $(distdir).tar.gz $(distdir) rm -fr $(distdir) tags: TAGS id: ID mostlyclean: mostlyclean-recursive mostlyclean-local clean: clean-recursive clean-local distclean: distclean-recursive distclean-local rm -f config.status maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-recursive maintainer-clean-local @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use;" @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." rm -f config.status mostlyclean-local: clean-local: mostlyclean-local distclean-local: clean-local rm -f Makefile config.cache config.h config.log stamp-h tupdate.perl maintainer-clean-local: distclean-local check: dvi info: cd doc && $(MAKE) $@ # For understanding the following see the autoconf manual. configure: configure.in aclocal.m4 cd $(srcdir) && autoconf # autoheader might not change config.h.in config.h.in: stamp-h.in stamp-h.in: configure.in acconfig.h cd $(srcdir) && autoheader rm -f $(srcdir)/stamp-h.in && echo timestamp > $(srcdir)/stamp-h.in #config.status might not change config.h # Don't rerun config.status if we just configured. config.h: stamp-h stamp-h: config.h.in config.status test ! -f stamp-h || ./config.status rm -f stamp-h && echo timestamp > stamp-h Makefile: Makefile.in config.status ./config.status config.status: configure config.h.in ./config.status --recheck # Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make not to export all variables. # Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. .NOEXPORT: gettext-0.7/NLS100444 230 226 14753 5776044742 12326 0ustar pinardguestNotes on the GNU Translation Project ************************************ A few GNU packages provide native language translation for their messages. This chapter gives the installer some useful hints. It explains how users should proceed for getting the programs to use the available translations. It tells how people wanting to contribute and work at translations should contact the appropriate team. INSTALL matters =============== Some GNU packages are "localizable" when properly installed; the programs they contain can be made to speak your own native language. Most such packages use GNU `gettext'. Some other packages have their own ways to internationalization, predating GNU `gettext'. If you found this `NLS' file inside a GNU distribution, you may assume that this distribution does use GNU `gettext', itself available at your nearest GNU archive site. By default, this package will be installed to allow translation of messages. It will automatically detect whether the system provides usable `catgets' or `gettext' functions. If neither is present, the GNU `gettext' library will be used. Installers may use special options at configuration time for changing this behaviour. The commands: ./configure --with-gnu-gettext ./configure --disable-nls will respectively bypass system `catgets' or `gettext' to use GNU `gettext', or else, totally disable translation of messages. Internationalized packages have usually many `XX.po' files, where XX gives an ISO 639 two-letter code identifying the language. Unless translations are disabled, all those available are installed together with the package. However, the environment variable `LINGUAS' may be set, prior to configuration, to limit the installed set. `LINGUAS' should then contain a space separated list of two-letter codes, stating which languages are allowed. As a user, if your language has been installed for this package, you only have to set the `LANG' environment variable to the appropriate `XX' prior to using the programs in the package. For example, let's suppose that you speak German. At the shell prompt, merely execute `setenv LANG de' (in `csh') or `export LANG; LANG=de' (in `sh'). This can be done from your `.login' or `.profile' file. Translating teams ================= GNU is going international! The GNU Translation Project is a way to get maintainers, translators and users all together, so GNU will gradually become able to speak many native languages. The GNU `gettext' tool set contains *everything* maintainers need for internationalizing their packages for messages. It also contains quite useful tools for helping translators at localizing messages to their native language, once a package has already been internationalized. To achieve the GNU Translation Project, we need many interested people who like their own language and write it well, and who are also able to synergize with other translators speaking the same language. If you'd like to volunteer to *work* at translating messages, please send mail to your translating team. Each team has its own mailing list, courtesy of Linux International. You may reach your translating team at the address `XX@li.org', replacing XX by the two-letter ISO 639 code for your language. Language codes are *not* the same as country codes given in ISO 3166. The following translating teams exist, as of June 1995: Chinese (zh), Czech (cs), Danish (da), Dutch (nl), Esperanto (eo), Finnish (fi), French (fr), Irish (ga), German (de), Greek (el), Italian (it), Japanese (ja), Indonesian (in), Norwegian (no), Polish (pl), Portuguese (pt), Russian (ru), Spanish (es), Swedish (sv) and Turkish (tr). For example, you may reach the Chinese translating team by writing to `zh@li.org'. When you become a member of the translating team for your own language, you may subscribe to its list. For example, Swedish people can send a message to `sv-request@li.org', having this message body: subscribe Keep in mind that team members should be interested in *working* at translations, or at solving translational difficulties, rather than merely lurking around. If your team does not exist yet and you want to start one, please write to `gnu-translation@prep.ai.mit.edu'; you will then reach the GNU coordinator for all translator teams. Available packages ================== Languages are not equally supported in all GNU packages. The following matrix shows the current state of GNU internationalization, as of June 1995. Listed are: internationalized packages, and languages for which work is in progress, or about to start. See note cs de es fi fr it ja nl pt sv \ .-------------------------------. chess (4) | * * | clisp (3) | * * | diffutils (2) | . - | fileutils | - | flex (1) | . - | m4 (2) | + + + - + | gettext | * * | ptx (2) | + + + | recode (2) | + . + + + | sharutils (2) | + + + + + | shellutils | - | tar | * . * . * * | wdiff (2) | + + + + | `-------------------------------' cs de es fi fr it ja nl pt sv The interpretation legend is: `.' interest shown, or invitation made `-' being undertaken, or work in progress `+' submitted, and now ready for pretest `*' distributed through an official release Notes: (1) This package has its translatable strings marked, but does not use GNU `gettext'. A convenience patch may be available separately. (2) This package is planned to switch to GNU `gettext'. For the time being, it uses temporary means for internationalization. (3) This package is translated to specific languages by methods predating GNU `gettext'. Translations are kept in the sources and memory, rather than installed in external message catalogs. (4) This package is translated to specific languages by methods predating GNU `gettext'. Translations are all kept on disk files, and sources contain numbers where one normally expects strings. If June 1995 seems to be old, you may fetch a more recent copy of this `NLS' file on most GNU archive sites. gettext-0.7/NEWS100444 230 226 1705 5776066332 12416 0ustar pinardguestVersion 0.7 - June 1995, by Ulrich Drepper * New GNU package providing functionality to internationalize and localize other programs. * Implementation of the Uniforum(*) proposal for internationalization on top of X/Open(*) style catgets functions. * Complete implementation of the Uniforum functions for system lacking either of them or those who which to have a different implementation with many advantages. * Implementation of the three tools for message catalog handling described in the Uniforum. * Emacs po-mode for handling portable message object files which are the basis of the work of the package. (*) Some history: The POSIX working groups until now could not agree on one set of message catalog handling functions for the C Library. For now there competing proposals, one by the Uniforum group, lead by Sun, and the other by X/Open. Also the later is surely implemented on more systems until now it could not take over the sole leading role. gettext-0.7/README100444 230 226 10601 5776067065 12616 0ustar pinardguestThis is the GNU gettext package. It is interesting for authors or maintainers of other packages or programs which they want to see internationalized. As one step the handling of messages in different languages should be implemented. For this task GNU gettext provides the needed tools and library functions. Because this library will soon be part of many/all other GNU packages it is also interesting for other people to install this package to make sure it compiles ok. The message handling functions are not yet part of POSIX and ISO/IEC standards and therefore it is not possible to rely on facts about their implementation in the local C library. We felt that the Uniforum proposals has the much more flexible interface and, what is more important, does not burden the programmers as much as the other possibility does. Please share your results with us. If this package compiles ok for you future GNU release will likely also not fail, at least for reasons found in message handling. Send comments and bug reports to bug-gnu-utils@prep.ai.mit.edu The goal of this library was to give a unique interface to message handling functions. At least the same level of importance was to give the author/maintainer the needed tools to maintain the message handling catalogs. The interface is designed after the proposals of the Uniforum group. So systems having this interface implemented in their C library don't need the library provided here (and it will automatically not be included). If your systems C library implements the second widely available approach (X/Opens catgets) the library will use the and only some stubs will be compiled to provide the needed interface. If neither is locally available a full implementation of the library will be compiled. The configure script provides two non-standard options. These will also be available in other packages if they use the functionality of GNU gettext. Use --disable-nls if you absolutely don't want to have messages handling code. You will always get the original messages (mostly english). You could consider using NLS support even when you do not need other tongues. If you do not install any messages catalogs or do not specify to use another but the C locale you will not get translations. The set of languages for which catalogs should be installed can also be specified while configuring. Of course they must be available but the intersection of these two sets are computed automatically. You could one and for all define in your profile/cshrc the variable LINGUAS: setenv LINGUAS "de fr nl" LINGUAS="de fr nl"; export LINGUAS or specify it directly while configuring env LINGUAS="de fr nl" configure The languages/country short forms are to be taken from ISO-639. Consult the manual for more information on this. The second configure option is --with-gnu-gettext This forces to use the library implementing the message handling regardless what the local C library provides. This possibility is much less error prone because possible unrelyable effects of the local message handling system are avoided. Other files you might look into: `COPYING' - copying conditions `INSTALL' - general compilation and installation rules `NEWS' - major changes in the current version `NLS' - current state of the GNU internationalization effort `THANKS' - list of contributors Some points you might be interested in before installing the package: 1. The package contains a file magic.add. This is intended to be added to your /etc/magic file. After adding this the `file' command will recognize GNU message catalog files (.mo files). 2. If your system's C library already provides the gettext interface it might be a good idea to configure the package with --program-prefix=g Systems affected by this are: Solaris 2.x, future GNU and GNU/Linux systems 3. Some system have a very dumb^H^H^H^Hstrange version of msgfmt, the one which comes with xview. This one is *not* usable. It's best you delete^H^H^H^H^H^Hrename it or install this package as in the point above with --program-prefix=g 4. On some system it is better to have strings aligned (I've been told Sparcs like strings aligned to 8 byte boundaries). If you want to have the output of msgfmt aligned you can use the -a option. But you also could change the default value to be different from 1. Take a look at the config.h file, built by configure. gettext-0.7/THANKS100444 230 226 1611 5776067453 12633 0ustar pinardguestThe GNU NLS utility package is the first full featured package directed to NLS support in the GNU packages. It has it's roots in the GNU C Library development and of course the (never officially released) GNU locale package, mostly written by Jim Meyering. Therefore a lot of people participated in the process of creating this software. Written in April-June 1995 by Ulrich Drepper drepper@ipd.info.uni-karlsruhe.de Special thanks to François Pinard , who did a major part of the testing and provided the Emacs po-mode including manual and the Perl interface libgettext.perl. Thanks to all of the following for their valuable hints/fixes/discussions: Bruno Haible haible@ma2s2.mathematik.uni-karlsruhe.de Greg McGary gkm@magilla.cichlid.com Jim Meyering meyering@comco.com Karl Berry kb@cs.umb.edu Paul Eggert eggert@twinsun.com Roland McGrath roland@gnu.ai.mit.edu gettext-0.7/acconfig.h100444 230 226 3136 5774565174 13647 0ustar pinardguest/* Special definitions, processed by autoheader. Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation. Ulrich Drepper , 1995. */ /* Default value for alignment of strings in .mo file. */ #define DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT 1 #ifndef __P # if defined __STDC__ && __STDC__ # define __P(args) args # else # define __P(args) () # endif #endif /* __P */ @TOP@ /* Define to the name of the distribution. */ #undef PACKAGE /* Define to the version of the distribution. */ #undef VERSION /* Define if you have obstacks. */ #undef HAVE_OBSTACK /* Define if your locale.h file contains LC_MESSAGES. */ #undef HAVE_LC_MESSAGES /* Define if you have the parse_printf_format function. */ #undef HAVE_PARSE_PRINTF_FORMAT /* Path to directory containing system wide message catalog sources. */ #undef STD_INC_PATH /* Define to 1 if NLS is requested. */ #undef ENABLE_NLS /* Define as 1 if you have catgets and don't want to use GNU gettext. */ #undef HAVE_CATGETS /* Define as 1 if you have gettext and don't want to use GNU gettext. */ #undef HAVE_GETTEXT #ifndef HAVE_ASPRINTF int asprintf __P ((char **result, const char * format, ...)); #endif @BOTTOM@ /* A file name cannot consist of any character possible. INVALID_PATH_CHAR contains the characters not allowed. */ #ifndef MSDOS #define INVALID_PATH_CHAR "\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\10\11\12\13\14\15\16\17\20\21\22"\ "\23\24\25\26\27\30\31\32\33\34\35\36\37 \177/" #else /* Something like this for MSDOG. */ #define INVALID_PATH_CHAR "\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\10\11\12\13\14\15\16\17\20\21\22"\ "\23\24\25\26\27\30\31\32\33\34\35\36\37 \177\\:." #endif gettext-0.7/aclocal.m4100444 230 226 12723 5776104663 13601 0ustar pinardguestdnl Check NLS options AC_DEFUN(ud_LC_MESSAGES, [if test $ac_cv_header_locale_h = yes; then AC_MSG_CHECKING([for LC_MESSAGES]) AC_CACHE_VAL(ud_cv_val_LC_MESSAGES, [AC_TRY_LINK([#include ], [return LC_MESSAGES], ud_cv_val_LC_MESSAGES=yes, ud_cv_val_LC_MESSAGES=no)]) AC_MSG_RESULT($ud_cv_val_LC_MESSAGES) if test $ud_cv_val_LC_MESSAGES = yes; then AC_DEFINE(HAVE_LC_MESSAGES) fi fi]) define(ud_WITH_NLS, [AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether NLS is requested]) dnl Default is enabled NLS AC_ARG_ENABLE(nls, [ --disable-nls do not use Native Language Support], nls_cv_use_nls=$enableval, nls_cv_use_nls=yes) AC_MSG_RESULT($nls_cv_use_nls) dnl If we use NLS figure out what method if test "$nls_cv_use_nls" = "yes"; then AC_DEFINE(ENABLE_NLS) AC_MSG_CHECKING([for explicitly using GNU gettext]) AC_ARG_WITH(gnu-gettext, [ --with-gnu-gettext use the GNU gettext library], nls_cv_force_use_gnu_gettext=$withval, nls_cv_force_use_gnu_gettext=no) AC_MSG_RESULT($nls_cv_force_use_gnu_gettext) if test "$nls_cv_force_use_gnu_gettext" = "yes"; then nls_cv_use_gnu_gettext=yes else dnl User does not insist on using GNU NLS library. Figure out what dnl to use. If gettext or catgets are available (in this order) we dnl use this. Else we have to fall back to GNU NLS library. AC_CHECK_LIB(intl, main) AC_CHECK_LIB(i, main) CATOBJEXT=NONE AC_FUNC_CHECK(gettext, [AC_DEFINE(HAVE_GETTEXT) AC_PATH_PROG(MSGFMT, msgfmt, no)dnl if test "$MSGFMT" != "no"; then AC_PATH_PROG(GMSGFMT, gmsgfmt, $MSGFMT)dnl AC_PATH_PROG(XGETTEXT, xgettext, xgettext)dnl INTLOBJS="\$(GETTOBJS)" CATOBJEXT=.mo INSTOBJEXT=.mo DATADIRNAME=lib fi]) if test "$CATOBJEXT" = "NONE"; then dnl No gettext in C library. Try catgets next. AC_FUNC_CHECK(catgets, [AC_DEFINE(HAVE_CATGETS) INTLOBJS="\$(CATOBJS)" AC_PATH_PROG(GENCAT, gencat, no)dnl if test "$GENCAT" != "no"; then AC_PATH_PROGS(GMSGFMT, [gmsgfmt msgfmt], msgfmt)dnl AC_PATH_PROG(XGETTEXT, xgettext, xgettext)dnl CATOBJEXT=.cat INSTOBJEXT=.cat DATADIRNAME=lib INTLDEPS="../intl/libintl.a" INTLLIBS=$INTLDEPS nls_cv_header_intl=intl/libintl.h nls_cv_header_libgt=intl/libgettext.h fi]) fi if test "$CATOBJEXT" = "NONE"; then dnl Neither gettext nor catgets in included in the C library. dnl Fall back on GNU gettext library. nls_cv_use_gnu_gettext=yes fi fi if test "$nls_cv_use_gnu_gettext" = "yes"; then dnl Mark actions used to generate GNU NLS library. INTLOBJS="\$(GETTOBJS)" AC_PATH_PROG(MSGFMT, msgfmt, msgfmt)dnl AC_PATH_PROG(GMSGFMT, gmsgfmt, $MSGFMT)dnl AC_PATH_PROG(XGETTEXT, xgettext, xgettext)dnl AC_SUBST(MSGFMT) CATOBJEXT=.gmo INSTOBJEXT=.mo DATADIRNAME=share INTLDEPS="../intl/libintl.a" INTLLIBS=$INTLDEPS nls_cv_header_intl=intl/libintl.h nls_cv_header_libgt=intl/libgettext.h fi # We need to process the intl/ directory INTLSUB=intl POSUB=po else nls_cv_header_intl=intl/libintl.h nls_cv_header_libgt=intl/libgettext.h fi dnl Construct list of names of catalog files to be constructed. if test -n "$LINGUAS"; then for lang in $LINGUAS; do CATALOGS="$CATALOGS $lang$CATOBJEXT"; done fi dnl These rules are solely for the ditribution goal. While doing this dnl we only have to keep exactly one list of the available catalogs dnl in configure.in. for lang in $ALL_LINGUAS; do GMOFILES="$GMOFILES $lang.gmo" POFILES="$POFILES $lang.po" done dnl Make all variables we use known to autoconf. AC_SUBST(CATALOGS) AC_SUBST(CATOBJEXT) AC_SUBST(DATADIRNAME) AC_SUBST(GMOFILES) AC_SUBST(INSTOBJEXT) AC_SUBST(INTLDEPS) AC_SUBST(INTLLIBS) AC_SUBST(INTLOBJS) AC_SUBST(INTLSUB) AC_SUBST(POFILES) AC_SUBST(POSUB) ]) AC_DEFUN(ud_GNU_GETTEXT, [AC_CHECK_HEADERS(locale.h nl_types.h) AC_CHECK_FUNCS(setlocale) if test "x$ALL_LINGUAS" = "x"; then LINGUAS= else AC_MSG_CHECKING(for catalogs to be installed) NEW_LINGUAS= for lang in ${LINGUAS=$ALL_LINGUAS}; do case "$ALL_LINGUAS" in *$lang*) NEW_LINGUAS="$NEW_LINGUAS $lang" ;; esac done LINGUAS=$NEW_LINGUAS AC_MSG_RESULT($LINGUAS) fi ud_LC_MESSAGES ud_WITH_NLS dnl Determine which catalog format we have (if any is needed) dnl For now we know about two different formats: dnl Linux and the normal X/Open format if test "$CATOBJEXT" = ".cat"; then AC_CHECK_HEADER(linux/version.h, msgformat=linux, msgformat=xopen) dnl Transform the SED script while copying because some dumb SEDs dnl cannot handle comments. test -d intl || mkdir intl sed -e "/^#/d" $srcdir/intl/$msgformat-msg.sed > intl/po-to-msg.sed fi dnl Generate list of files to be processed by xgettext which will dnl be included in po/Makefile. test -d po || mkdir po if test "x$srcdir" != "x."; then posrcdir="../$srcdir/po/" fi sed -e "/^#/d" -e "/^\$/d" -e "s,.*, $posrcdir& \\\\," -e "\$s/\(.*\) \\\\/\1/" \ < $srcdir/po/POTFILES.in > po/POTFILES ]) gettext-0.7/config.h.in100644 230 226 10703 5776010275 13755 0ustar pinardguest/* config.h.in. Generated automatically from configure.in by autoheader. */ /* Special definitions, processed by autoheader. Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation. Ulrich Drepper , 1995. */ /* Default value for alignment of strings in .mo file. */ #define DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT 1 #ifndef __P # if defined __STDC__ && __STDC__ # define __P(args) args # else # define __P(args) () # endif #endif /* __P */ /* Define if using alloca.c. */ #undef C_ALLOCA /* Define to empty if the keyword does not work. */ #undef const /* Define to one of _getb67, GETB67, getb67 for Cray-2 and Cray-YMP systems. This function is required for alloca.c support on those systems. */ #undef CRAY_STACKSEG_END /* Define if you have alloca, as a function or macro. */ #undef HAVE_ALLOCA /* Define if you have and it should be used (not on Ultrix). */ #undef HAVE_ALLOCA_H /* Define if you don't have vprintf but do have _doprnt. */ #undef HAVE_DOPRNT /* Define if you have a working `mmap' system call. */ #undef HAVE_MMAP /* Define if you have the vprintf function. */ #undef HAVE_VPRINTF /* Define as __inline if that's what the C compiler calls it. */ #undef inline /* Define to `long' if doesn't define. */ #undef off_t /* Define to `unsigned' if doesn't define. */ #undef size_t /* If using the C implementation of alloca, define if you know the direction of stack growth for your system; otherwise it will be automatically deduced at run-time. STACK_DIRECTION > 0 => grows toward higher addresses STACK_DIRECTION < 0 => grows toward lower addresses STACK_DIRECTION = 0 => direction of growth unknown */ #undef STACK_DIRECTION /* Define if you have the ANSI C header files. */ #undef STDC_HEADERS /* Define to the name of the distribution. */ #undef PACKAGE /* Define to the version of the distribution. */ #undef VERSION /* Define if you have obstacks. */ #undef HAVE_OBSTACK /* Define if your locale.h file contains LC_MESSAGES. */ #undef HAVE_LC_MESSAGES /* Define if you have the parse_printf_format function. */ #undef HAVE_PARSE_PRINTF_FORMAT /* Path to directory containing system wide message catalog sources. */ #undef STD_INC_PATH /* Define to 1 if NLS is requested. */ #undef ENABLE_NLS /* Define as 1 if you have catgets and don't want to use GNU gettext. */ #undef HAVE_CATGETS /* Define as 1 if you have gettext and don't want to use GNU gettext. */ #undef HAVE_GETTEXT #ifndef HAVE_ASPRINTF int asprintf __P ((char **result, const char * format, ...)); #endif /* Define if you have the getcwd function. */ #undef HAVE_GETCWD /* Define if you have the getdelim function. */ #undef HAVE_GETDELIM /* Define if you have the memcpy function. */ #undef HAVE_MEMCPY /* Define if you have the putenv function. */ #undef HAVE_PUTENV /* Define if you have the setenv function. */ #undef HAVE_SETENV /* Define if you have the setlocale function. */ #undef HAVE_SETLOCALE /* Define if you have the strchr function. */ #undef HAVE_STRCHR /* Define if you have the strcspn function. */ #undef HAVE_STRCSPN /* Define if you have the strerror function. */ #undef HAVE_STRERROR /* Define if you have the strtoul function. */ #undef HAVE_STRTOUL /* Define if you have the uname function. */ #undef HAVE_UNAME /* Define if you have the header file. */ #undef HAVE_LIMITS_H /* Define if you have the header file. */ #undef HAVE_LOCALE_H /* Define if you have the header file. */ #undef HAVE_MALLOC_H /* Define if you have the header file. */ #undef HAVE_NL_TYPES_H /* Define if you have the header file. */ #undef HAVE_STDLIB_H /* Define if you have the header file. */ #undef HAVE_STRING_H /* Define if you have the header file. */ #undef HAVE_UNISTD_H /* Define if you have the header file. */ #undef HAVE_VALUES_H /* Define if you have the i library (-li). */ #undef HAVE_LIBI /* Define if you have the intl library (-lintl). */ #undef HAVE_LIBINTL /* A file name cannot consist of any character possible. INVALID_PATH_CHAR contains the characters not allowed. */ #ifndef MSDOS #define INVALID_PATH_CHAR "\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\10\11\12\13\14\15\16\17\20\21\22"\ "\23\24\25\26\27\30\31\32\33\34\35\36\37 \177/" #else /* Something like this for MSDOG. */ #define INVALID_PATH_CHAR "\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\10\11\12\13\14\15\16\17\20\21\22"\ "\23\24\25\26\27\30\31\32\33\34\35\36\37 \177\\:." #endif gettext-0.7/configure100755 230 226 217466 5776107515 13704 0ustar pinardguest#! /bin/sh # From configure.in Revision: 1.31 # Guess values for system-dependent variables and create Makefiles. # Generated automatically using autoconf version 2.4 # Copyright (C) 1992, 1993, 1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This configure script is free software; the Free Software Foundation # gives unlimited permission to copy, distribute and modify it. # Defaults: ac_help= ac_default_prefix=/usr/local # Any additions from configure.in: ac_help="$ac_help --disable-nls do not use Native Language Support" ac_help="$ac_help --with-gnu-gettext use the GNU gettext library" # Initialize some variables set by options. # The variables have the same names as the options, with # dashes changed to underlines. build=NONE cache_file=./config.cache exec_prefix=NONE host=NONE no_create= nonopt=NONE no_recursion= prefix=NONE program_prefix=NONE program_suffix=NONE program_transform_name=s,x,x, silent= site= srcdir= target=NONE verbose= x_includes=NONE x_libraries=NONE # Initialize some other variables. subdirs= ac_prev= for ac_option do # If the previous option needs an argument, assign it. if test -n "$ac_prev"; then eval "$ac_prev=\$ac_option" ac_prev= continue fi case "$ac_option" in -*=*) ac_optarg=`echo "$ac_option" | sed 's/[-_a-zA-Z0-9]*=//'` ;; *) ac_optarg= ;; esac # Accept the important Cygnus configure options, so we can diagnose typos. case "$ac_option" in -build | --build | --buil | --bui | --bu | --b) ac_prev=build ;; -build=* | --build=* | --buil=* | --bui=* | --bu=* | --b=*) build="$ac_optarg" ;; -cache-file | --cache-file | --cache-fil | --cache-fi \ | --cache-f | --cache- | --cache | --cach | --cac | --ca | --c) ac_prev=cache_file ;; -cache-file=* | --cache-file=* | --cache-fil=* | --cache-fi=* \ | --cache-f=* | --cache-=* | --cache=* | --cach=* | --cac=* | --ca=* | --c=*) cache_file="$ac_optarg" ;; -disable-* | --disable-*) ac_feature=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*disable-//'` # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names. if test -n "`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/[-a-zA-Z0-9_]//g'`"; then { echo "configure: error: $ac_feature: invalid feature name" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi ac_feature=`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/-/_/g'` eval "enable_${ac_feature}=no" ;; -enable-* | --enable-*) ac_feature=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*enable-//' -e 's/=.*//'` # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names. if test -n "`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/[-_a-zA-Z0-9]//g'`"; then { echo "configure: error: $ac_feature: invalid feature name" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi ac_feature=`echo $ac_feature| sed 's/-/_/g'` case "$ac_option" in *=*) ;; *) ac_optarg=yes ;; esac eval "enable_${ac_feature}='$ac_optarg'" ;; -exec-prefix | --exec_prefix | --exec-prefix | --exec-prefi \ | --exec-pref | --exec-pre | --exec-pr | --exec-p | --exec- \ | --exec | --exe | --ex) ac_prev=exec_prefix ;; -exec-prefix=* | --exec_prefix=* | --exec-prefix=* | --exec-prefi=* \ | --exec-pref=* | --exec-pre=* | --exec-pr=* | --exec-p=* | --exec-=* \ | --exec=* | --exe=* | --ex=*) exec_prefix="$ac_optarg" ;; -gas | --gas | --ga | --g) # Obsolete; use --with-gas. with_gas=yes ;; -help | --help | --hel | --he) # Omit some internal or obsolete options to make the list less imposing. # This message is too long to be a string in the A/UX 3.1 sh. cat << EOF Usage: configure [options] [host] Options: [defaults in brackets after descriptions] Configuration: --cache-file=FILE cache test results in FILE --help print this message --no-create do not create output files --quiet, --silent do not print \`checking...' messages --version print the version of autoconf that created configure Directory and file names: --prefix=PREFIX install architecture-independent files in PREFIX [$ac_default_prefix] --exec-prefix=PREFIX install architecture-dependent files in PREFIX [same as prefix] --srcdir=DIR find the sources in DIR [configure dir or ..] --program-prefix=PREFIX prepend PREFIX to installed program names --program-suffix=SUFFIX append SUFFIX to installed program names --program-transform-name=PROGRAM run sed PROGRAM on installed program names Host type: --build=BUILD configure for building on BUILD [BUILD=HOST] --host=HOST configure for HOST [guessed] --target=TARGET configure for TARGET [TARGET=HOST] Features and packages: --disable-FEATURE do not include FEATURE (same as --enable-FEATURE=no) --enable-FEATURE[=ARG] include FEATURE [ARG=yes] --with-PACKAGE[=ARG] use PACKAGE [ARG=yes] --without-PACKAGE do not use PACKAGE (same as --with-PACKAGE=no) --x-includes=DIR X include files are in DIR --x-libraries=DIR X library files are in DIR --enable and --with options recognized:$ac_help EOF exit 0 ;; -host | --host | --hos | --ho) ac_prev=host ;; -host=* | --host=* | --hos=* | --ho=*) host="$ac_optarg" ;; -nfp | --nfp | --nf) # Obsolete; use --without-fp. with_fp=no ;; -no-create | --no-create | --no-creat | --no-crea | --no-cre \ | --no-cr | --no-c) no_create=yes ;; -no-recursion | --no-recursion | --no-recursio | --no-recursi \ | --no-recurs | --no-recur | --no-recu | --no-rec | --no-re | --no-r) no_recursion=yes ;; -prefix | --prefix | --prefi | --pref | --pre | --pr | --p) ac_prev=prefix ;; -prefix=* | --prefix=* | --prefi=* | --pref=* | --pre=* | --pr=* | --p=*) prefix="$ac_optarg" ;; -program-prefix | --program-prefix | --program-prefi | --program-pref \ | --program-pre | --program-pr | --program-p) ac_prev=program_prefix ;; -program-prefix=* | --program-prefix=* | --program-prefi=* \ | --program-pref=* | --program-pre=* | --program-pr=* | --program-p=*) program_prefix="$ac_optarg" ;; -program-suffix | --program-suffix | --program-suffi | --program-suff \ | --program-suf | --program-su | --program-s) ac_prev=program_suffix ;; -program-suffix=* | --program-suffix=* | --program-suffi=* \ | --program-suff=* | --program-suf=* | --program-su=* | --program-s=*) program_suffix="$ac_optarg" ;; -program-transform-name | --program-transform-name \ | --program-transform-nam | --program-transform-na \ | --program-transform-n | --program-transform- \ | --program-transform | --program-transfor \ | --program-transfo | --program-transf \ | --program-trans | --program-tran \ | --progr-tra | --program-tr | --program-t) ac_prev=program_transform_name ;; -program-transform-name=* | --program-transform-name=* \ | --program-transform-nam=* | --program-transform-na=* \ | --program-transform-n=* | --program-transform-=* \ | --program-transform=* | --program-transfor=* \ | --program-transfo=* | --program-transf=* \ | --program-trans=* | --program-tran=* \ | --progr-tra=* | --program-tr=* | --program-t=*) program_transform_name="$ac_optarg" ;; -q | -quiet | --quiet | --quie | --qui | --qu | --q \ | -silent | --silent | --silen | --sile | --sil) silent=yes ;; -site | --site | --sit) ac_prev=site ;; -site=* | --site=* | --sit=*) site="$ac_optarg" ;; -srcdir | --srcdir | --srcdi | --srcd | --src | --sr) ac_prev=srcdir ;; -srcdir=* | --srcdir=* | --srcdi=* | --srcd=* | --src=* | --sr=*) srcdir="$ac_optarg" ;; -target | --target | --targe | --targ | --tar | --ta | --t) ac_prev=target ;; -target=* | --target=* | --targe=* | --targ=* | --tar=* | --ta=* | --t=*) target="$ac_optarg" ;; -v | -verbose | --verbose | --verbos | --verbo | --verb) verbose=yes ;; -version | --version | --versio | --versi | --vers) echo "configure generated by autoconf version 2.4" exit 0 ;; -with-* | --with-*) ac_package=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*with-//' -e 's/=.*//'` # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names. if test -n "`echo $ac_package| sed 's/[-_a-zA-Z0-9]//g'`"; then { echo "configure: error: $ac_package: invalid package name" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi ac_package=`echo $ac_package| sed 's/-/_/g'` case "$ac_option" in *=*) ;; *) ac_optarg=yes ;; esac eval "with_${ac_package}='$ac_optarg'" ;; -without-* | --without-*) ac_package=`echo $ac_option|sed -e 's/-*without-//'` # Reject names that are not valid shell variable names. if test -n "`echo $ac_package| sed 's/[-a-zA-Z0-9_]//g'`"; then { echo "configure: error: $ac_package: invalid package name" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi ac_package=`echo $ac_package| sed 's/-/_/g'` eval "with_${ac_package}=no" ;; --x) # Obsolete; use --with-x. with_x=yes ;; -x-includes | --x-includes | --x-include | --x-includ | --x-inclu \ | --x-incl | --x-inc | --x-in | --x-i) ac_prev=x_includes ;; -x-includes=* | --x-includes=* | --x-include=* | --x-includ=* | --x-inclu=* \ | --x-incl=* | --x-inc=* | --x-in=* | --x-i=*) x_includes="$ac_optarg" ;; -x-libraries | --x-libraries | --x-librarie | --x-librari \ | --x-librar | --x-libra | --x-libr | --x-lib | --x-li | --x-l) ac_prev=x_libraries ;; -x-libraries=* | --x-libraries=* | --x-librarie=* | --x-librari=* \ | --x-librar=* | --x-libra=* | --x-libr=* | --x-lib=* | --x-li=* | --x-l=*) x_libraries="$ac_optarg" ;; -*) { echo "configure: error: $ac_option: invalid option; use --help to show usage" 1>&2; exit 1; } ;; *) if test -n "`echo $ac_option| sed 's/[-a-z0-9.]//g'`"; then echo "configure: warning: $ac_option: invalid host type" 1>&2 fi if test "x$nonopt" != xNONE; then { echo "configure: error: can only configure for one host and one target at a time" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi nonopt="$ac_option" ;; esac done if test -n "$ac_prev"; then { echo "configure: error: missing argument to --`echo $ac_prev | sed 's/_/-/g'`" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi trap 'rm -fr conftest* confdefs* core core.* *.core $ac_clean_files; exit 1' 1 2 15 # File descriptor usage: # 0 standard input # 1 file creation # 2 errors and warnings # 3 some systems may open it to /dev/tty # 4 used on the Kubota Titan # 6 checking for... messages and results # 5 compiler messages saved in config.log if test "$silent" = yes; then exec 6>/dev/null else exec 6>&1 fi exec 5>./config.log echo "\ This file contains any messages produced by compilers while running configure, to aid debugging if configure makes a mistake. " 1>&5 # Strip out --no-create and --no-recursion so they do not pile up. # Also quote any args containing shell metacharacters. ac_configure_args= for ac_arg do case "$ac_arg" in -no-create | --no-create | --no-creat | --no-crea | --no-cre \ | --no-cr | --no-c) ;; -no-recursion | --no-recursion | --no-recursio | --no-recursi \ | --no-recurs | --no-recur | --no-recu | --no-rec | --no-re | --no-r) ;; *" "*|*" "*|*[\[\]\~\#\$\^\&\*\(\)\{\}\\\|\;\<\>\?]*) ac_configure_args="$ac_configure_args '$ac_arg'" ;; *) ac_configure_args="$ac_configure_args $ac_arg" ;; esac done # NLS nuisances. # Only set LANG and LC_ALL to C if already set. # These must not be set unconditionally because not all systems understand # e.g. LANG=C (notably SCO). if test "${LC_ALL+set}" = set; then LC_ALL=C; export LC_ALL; fi if test "${LANG+set}" = set; then LANG=C; export LANG; fi # confdefs.h avoids OS command line length limits that DEFS can exceed. rm -rf conftest* confdefs.h # AIX cpp loses on an empty file, so make sure it contains at least a newline. echo > confdefs.h # A filename unique to this package, relative to the directory that # configure is in, which we can look for to find out if srcdir is correct. ac_unique_file=src/msgfmt.c # Find the source files, if location was not specified. if test -z "$srcdir"; then ac_srcdir_defaulted=yes # Try the directory containing this script, then its parent. ac_prog=$0 ac_confdir=`echo $ac_prog|sed 's%/[^/][^/]*$%%'` test "x$ac_confdir" = "x$ac_prog" && ac_confdir=. srcdir=$ac_confdir if test ! -r $srcdir/$ac_unique_file; then srcdir=.. fi else ac_srcdir_defaulted=no fi if test ! -r $srcdir/$ac_unique_file; then if test "$ac_srcdir_defaulted" = yes; then { echo "configure: error: can not find sources in $ac_confdir or .." 1>&2; exit 1; } else { echo "configure: error: can not find sources in $srcdir" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi fi srcdir=`echo "${srcdir}" | sed 's%\([^/]\)/*$%\1%'` # Prefer explicitly selected file to automatically selected ones. if test -z "$CONFIG_SITE"; then if test "x$prefix" != xNONE; then CONFIG_SITE="$prefix/share/config.site $prefix/etc/config.site" else CONFIG_SITE="$ac_default_prefix/share/config.site $ac_default_prefix/etc/config.site" fi fi for ac_site_file in $CONFIG_SITE; do if test -r "$ac_site_file"; then echo "loading site script $ac_site_file" . "$ac_site_file" fi done if test -r "$cache_file"; then echo "loading cache $cache_file" . $cache_file else echo "creating cache $cache_file" > $cache_file fi ac_ext=c # CFLAGS is not in ac_cpp because -g, -O, etc. are not valid cpp options. ac_cpp='$CPP $CPPFLAGS' ac_compile='${CC-cc} -c $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext 1>&5 2>&5' ac_link='${CC-cc} -o conftest $CFLAGS $CPPFLAGS $LDFLAGS conftest.$ac_ext $LIBS 1>&5 2>&5' if (echo "testing\c"; echo 1,2,3) | grep c >/dev/null; then # Stardent Vistra SVR4 grep lacks -e, says ghazi@caip.rutgers.edu. if (echo -n testing; echo 1,2,3) | sed s/-n/xn/ | grep xn >/dev/null; then ac_n= ac_c=' ' ac_t=' ' else ac_n=-n ac_c= ac_t= fi else ac_n= ac_c='\c' ac_t= fi PACKAGE=gettext VERSION=0.7 cat >> confdefs.h <> confdefs.h <&6 set dummy ${MAKE-make}; ac_make=$2 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftestmake <<\EOF all: @echo 'ac_maketemp="${MAKE}"' EOF # GNU make sometimes prints "make[1]: Entering...", which would confuse us. eval `${MAKE-make} -f conftestmake 2>/dev/null | grep temp=` if test -n "$ac_maketemp"; then eval ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set=yes else eval ac_cv_prog_make_${ac_make}_set=no fi rm -f conftestmake fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_prog_make_'${ac_make}_set`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 SET_MAKE= else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 SET_MAKE="MAKE=${MAKE-make}" fi # Extract the first word of "gcc", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy gcc; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CC'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else if test -n "$CC"; then ac_cv_prog_CC="$CC" # Let the user override the test. else IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:" for ac_dir in $PATH; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_prog_CC="gcc" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" test -z "$ac_cv_prog_CC" && ac_cv_prog_CC="cc" fi fi CC="$ac_cv_prog_CC" if test -n "$CC"; then echo "$ac_t""$CC" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi echo $ac_n "checking whether we are using GNU C""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_gcc'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.c <&5 | egrep yes >/dev/null 2>&1; then ac_cv_prog_gcc=yes else ac_cv_prog_gcc=no fi fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_gcc" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_prog_gcc = yes; then GCC=yes if test "${CFLAGS+set}" != set; then echo $ac_n "checking whether ${CC-cc} accepts -g""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_gcc_g'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else echo 'void f(){}' > conftest.c if test -z "`${CC-cc} -g -c conftest.c 2>&1`"; then ac_cv_prog_gcc_g=yes else ac_cv_prog_gcc_g=no fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_prog_gcc_g" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_prog_gcc_g = yes; then CFLAGS="-g -O" else CFLAGS="-O" fi fi else GCC= test "${CFLAGS+set}" = set || CFLAGS="-g" fi ac_aux_dir= for ac_dir in $srcdir $srcdir/.. $srcdir/../..; do if test -f $ac_dir/install-sh; then ac_aux_dir=$ac_dir ac_install_sh="$ac_aux_dir/install-sh -c" break elif test -f $ac_dir/install.sh; then ac_aux_dir=$ac_dir ac_install_sh="$ac_aux_dir/install.sh -c" break fi done if test -z "$ac_aux_dir"; then { echo "configure: error: can not find install-sh or install.sh in $srcdir $srcdir/.. $srcdir/../.." 1>&2; exit 1; } fi ac_config_guess=$ac_aux_dir/config.guess ac_config_sub=$ac_aux_dir/config.sub ac_configure=$ac_aux_dir/configure # This should be Cygnus configure. # Find a good install program. We prefer a C program (faster), # so one script is as good as another. But avoid the broken or # incompatible versions: # SysV /etc/install, /usr/sbin/install # SunOS /usr/etc/install # IRIX /sbin/install # AIX /bin/install # AFS /usr/afsws/bin/install, which mishandles nonexistent args # SVR4 /usr/ucb/install, which tries to use the nonexistent group "staff" # ./install, which can be erroneously created by make from ./install.sh. echo $ac_n "checking for a BSD compatible install""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if test -z "$INSTALL"; then if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_install'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:" for ac_dir in $PATH; do # Account for people who put trailing slashes in PATH elements. case "$ac_dir/" in /|./|.//|/etc/*|/usr/sbin/*|/usr/etc/*|/sbin/*|/usr/afsws/bin/*|/usr/ucb/*) ;; *) # OSF1 and SCO ODT 3.0 have their own names for install. for ac_prog in ginstall installbsd scoinst install; do if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_prog; then if test $ac_prog = install && grep dspmsg $ac_dir/$ac_prog >/dev/null 2>&1; then # AIX install. It has an incompatible calling convention. # OSF/1 installbsd also uses dspmsg, but is usable. : else ac_cv_path_install="$ac_dir/$ac_prog -c" break 2 fi fi done ;; esac done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" # As a last resort, use the slow shell script. test -z "$ac_cv_path_install" && ac_cv_path_install="$ac_install_sh" fi INSTALL="$ac_cv_path_install" fi echo "$ac_t""$INSTALL" 1>&6 # Use test -z because SunOS4 sh mishandles braces in ${var-val}. # It thinks the first close brace ends the variable substitution. test -z "$INSTALL_PROGRAM" && INSTALL_PROGRAM='${INSTALL}' test -z "$INSTALL_DATA" && INSTALL_DATA='${INSTALL} -m 644' # Extract the first word of "ranlib", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy ranlib; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_RANLIB'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else if test -n "$RANLIB"; then ac_cv_prog_RANLIB="$RANLIB" # Let the user override the test. else IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:" for ac_dir in $PATH; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_prog_RANLIB="ranlib" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" test -z "$ac_cv_prog_RANLIB" && ac_cv_prog_RANLIB=":" fi fi RANLIB="$ac_cv_prog_RANLIB" if test -n "$RANLIB"; then echo "$ac_t""$RANLIB" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi # Extract the first word of "perl", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy perl; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_PERL'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else case "$PERL" in /*) ac_cv_path_PERL="$PERL" # Let the user override the test with a path. ;; *) IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:" for ac_dir in $PATH; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_path_PERL="$ac_dir/$ac_word" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" test -z "$ac_cv_path_PERL" && ac_cv_path_PERL="/usr/local/bin/perl" ;; esac fi PERL="$ac_cv_path_PERL" if test -n "$PERL"; then echo "$ac_t""$PERL" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi echo $ac_n "checking how to run the C preprocessor""... $ac_c" 1>&6 # On Suns, sometimes $CPP names a directory. if test -n "$CPP" && test -d "$CPP"; then CPP= fi if test -z "$CPP"; then if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_prog_CPP'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else # This must be in double quotes, not single quotes, because CPP may get # substituted into the Makefile and "${CC-cc}" will confuse make. CPP="${CC-cc} -E" # On the NeXT, cc -E runs the code through the compiler's parser, # not just through cpp. cat > conftest.$ac_ext < Syntax Error EOF eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out" ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out` if test -z "$ac_err"; then : else echo "$ac_err" >&5 rm -rf conftest* CPP="${CC-cc} -E -traditional-cpp" cat > conftest.$ac_ext < Syntax Error EOF eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out" ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out` if test -z "$ac_err"; then : else echo "$ac_err" >&5 rm -rf conftest* CPP=/lib/cpp fi rm -f conftest* fi rm -f conftest* ac_cv_prog_CPP="$CPP" fi CPP="$ac_cv_prog_CPP" else ac_cv_prog_CPP="$CPP" fi echo "$ac_t""$CPP" 1>&6 # If we cannot run a trivial program, we must be cross compiling. echo $ac_n "checking whether cross-compiling""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_c_cross'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else if test "$cross_compiling" = yes; then ac_cv_c_cross=yes else cat > conftest.$ac_ext </dev/null; then ac_cv_c_cross=no else ac_cv_c_cross=yes fi fi rm -fr conftest* fi cross_compiling=$ac_cv_c_cross echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_c_cross" 1>&6 echo $ac_n "checking for ANSI C header files""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_stdc'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < #include #include #include EOF eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out" ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out` if test -z "$ac_err"; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_header_stdc=yes else echo "$ac_err" >&5 rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_header_stdc=no fi rm -f conftest* if test $ac_cv_header_stdc = yes; then # SunOS 4.x string.h does not declare mem*, contrary to ANSI. cat > conftest.$ac_ext < EOF if (eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext") 2>&5 | egrep "memchr" >/dev/null 2>&1; then : else rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_header_stdc=no fi rm -f conftest* fi if test $ac_cv_header_stdc = yes; then # ISC 2.0.2 stdlib.h does not declare free, contrary to ANSI. cat > conftest.$ac_ext < EOF if (eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext") 2>&5 | egrep "free" >/dev/null 2>&1; then : else rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_header_stdc=no fi rm -f conftest* fi if test $ac_cv_header_stdc = yes; then # /bin/cc in Irix-4.0.5 gets non-ANSI ctype macros unless using -ansi. if test "$cross_compiling" = yes; then ac_cv_header_stdc=no else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < #define ISLOWER(c) ('a' <= (c) && (c) <= 'z') #define TOUPPER(c) (ISLOWER(c) ? 'A' + ((c) - 'a') : (c)) #define XOR(e, f) (((e) && !(f)) || (!(e) && (f))) int main () { int i; for (i = 0; i < 256; i++) if (XOR (islower (i), ISLOWER (i)) || toupper (i) != TOUPPER (i)) exit(2); exit (0); } EOF eval $ac_link if test -s conftest && (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null; then : else ac_cv_header_stdc=no fi fi rm -fr conftest* fi fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_header_stdc" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_header_stdc = yes; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define STDC_HEADERS 1 EOF fi for ac_hdr in limits.h malloc.h stdlib.h string.h unistd.h values.h do ac_safe=`echo "$ac_hdr" | tr './\055' '___'` echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_hdr""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_$ac_safe'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < EOF eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out" ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out` if test -z "$ac_err"; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=yes" else echo "$ac_err" >&5 rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_header_'$ac_safe`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 ac_tr_hdr=HAVE_`echo $ac_hdr | tr '[a-z]./\055' '[A-Z]___'` cat >> confdefs.h <&6 fi done echo $ac_n "checking for working const""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_c_const'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext <j = 5; } { /* ULTRIX-32 V3.1 (Rev 9) vcc rejects this */ const int foo = 10; } ; return 0; } EOF if eval $ac_compile; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_c_const=yes else rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_c_const=no fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_c_const" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_c_const = no; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define const EOF fi echo $ac_n "checking for inline""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_c_inline'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else ac_cv_c_inline=no for ac_kw in inline __inline__ __inline; do cat > conftest.$ac_ext <&6 case "$ac_cv_c_inline" in inline | yes) ;; no) cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define inline EOF ;; *) cat >> confdefs.h <&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_type_off_t'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < #if STDC_HEADERS #include #endif EOF if (eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext") 2>&5 | egrep "off_t" >/dev/null 2>&1; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_type_off_t=yes else rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_type_off_t=no fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_type_off_t" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_type_off_t = no; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define off_t long EOF fi echo $ac_n "checking for size_t""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_type_size_t'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < #if STDC_HEADERS #include #endif EOF if (eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext") 2>&5 | egrep "size_t" >/dev/null 2>&1; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_type_size_t=yes else rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_type_size_t=no fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_type_size_t" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_type_size_t = no; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define size_t unsigned EOF fi # The Ultrix 4.2 mips builtin alloca declared by alloca.h only works # for constant arguments. Useless! echo $ac_n "checking for working alloca.h""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_alloca_h'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < int main() { return 0; } int t() { char *p = alloca(2 * sizeof(int)); ; return 0; } EOF if eval $ac_link; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_header_alloca_h=yes else rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_header_alloca_h=no fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_header_alloca_h" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_header_alloca_h = yes; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_ALLOCA_H 1 EOF fi echo $ac_n "checking for alloca""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_alloca'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < # else # ifdef _AIX #pragma alloca # else # ifndef alloca /* predefined by HP cc +Olibcalls */ char *alloca (); # endif # endif # endif #endif int main() { return 0; } int t() { char *p = (char *) alloca(1); ; return 0; } EOF if eval $ac_link; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_func_alloca=yes else rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_func_alloca=no fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_func_alloca" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_func_alloca = yes; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_ALLOCA 1 EOF fi if test $ac_cv_func_alloca = no; then # The SVR3 libPW and SVR4 libucb both contain incompatible functions # that cause trouble. Some versions do not even contain alloca or # contain a buggy version. If you still want to use their alloca, # use ar to extract alloca.o from them instead of compiling alloca.c. ALLOCA=alloca.o cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define C_ALLOCA 1 EOF echo $ac_n "checking whether alloca needs Cray hooks""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_os_cray'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext <&5 | egrep "webecray" >/dev/null 2>&1; then rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_os_cray=yes else rm -rf conftest* ac_cv_os_cray=no fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_os_cray" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_os_cray = yes; then for ac_func in _getb67 GETB67 getb67; do echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_func""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_$ac_func'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < /* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */ char $ac_func(); int main() { return 0; } int t() { /* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias. */ #if defined (__stub_$ac_func) || defined (__stub___$ac_func) choke me #else $ac_func(); #endif ; return 0; } EOF if eval $ac_link; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=yes" else rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'$ac_func`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 cat >> confdefs.h <&6 fi done fi echo $ac_n "checking stack direction for C alloca""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_c_stack_direction'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else if test "$cross_compiling" = yes; then ac_cv_c_stack_direction=0 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < addr) ? 1 : -1; } main () { exit (find_stack_direction() < 0); } EOF eval $ac_link if test -s conftest && (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null; then ac_cv_c_stack_direction=1 else ac_cv_c_stack_direction=-1 fi fi rm -fr conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_c_stack_direction" 1>&6 cat >> confdefs.h <&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_mmap'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else if test "$cross_compiling" = yes; then ac_cv_func_mmap=no else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < #include #include #ifdef BSD # ifndef BSD4_1 # define HAVE_GETPAGESIZE # endif #endif #ifndef HAVE_GETPAGESIZE # include # ifdef EXEC_PAGESIZE # define getpagesize() EXEC_PAGESIZE # else # ifdef NBPG # define getpagesize() NBPG * CLSIZE # ifndef CLSIZE # define CLSIZE 1 # endif # else # ifdef NBPC # define getpagesize() NBPC # else # define getpagesize() PAGESIZE /* SVR4 */ # endif # endif # endif #endif #ifdef __osf__ # define valloc malloc #endif #ifdef __cplusplus extern "C" { void *valloc(unsigned), *malloc(unsigned); } #else char *valloc(), *malloc(); #endif int main() { char *buf1, *buf2, *buf3; int i = getpagesize(), j; int i2 = getpagesize()*2; int fd; buf1 = (char *)valloc(i2); buf2 = (char *)valloc(i); buf3 = (char *)malloc(i2); for (j = 0; j < i2; ++j) *(buf1 + j) = rand(); fd = open("conftestmmap", O_CREAT | O_RDWR, 0666); write(fd, buf1, i2); mmap(buf2, i, PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE, MAP_FIXED | MAP_PRIVATE, fd, 0); for (j = 0; j < i; ++j) if (*(buf1 + j) != *(buf2 + j)) exit(1); lseek(fd, (long)i, 0); read(fd, buf2, i); /* read into mapped memory -- file should not change */ /* (it does in i386 SVR4.0 - Jim Avera, jima@netcom.com) */ lseek(fd, (long)0, 0); read(fd, buf3, i2); for (j = 0; j < i2; ++j) if (*(buf1 + j) != *(buf3 + j)) exit(1); exit(0); } EOF eval $ac_link if test -s conftest && (./conftest; exit) 2>/dev/null; then ac_cv_func_mmap=yes else ac_cv_func_mmap=no fi fi rm -fr conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ac_cv_func_mmap" 1>&6 if test $ac_cv_func_mmap = yes; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_MMAP 1 EOF fi echo $ac_n "checking for vprintf""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_vprintf'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < /* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */ char vprintf(); int main() { return 0; } int t() { /* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias. */ #if defined (__stub_vprintf) || defined (__stub___vprintf) choke me #else vprintf(); #endif ; return 0; } EOF if eval $ac_link; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_vprintf=yes" else rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_vprintf=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'vprintf`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_VPRINTF 1 EOF else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi if test "$ac_cv_func_vprintf" != yes; then echo $ac_n "checking for _doprnt""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func__doprnt'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < /* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */ char _doprnt(); int main() { return 0; } int t() { /* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias. */ #if defined (__stub__doprnt) || defined (__stub____doprnt) choke me #else _doprnt(); #endif ; return 0; } EOF if eval $ac_link; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func__doprnt=yes" else rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func__doprnt=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'_doprnt`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_DOPRNT 1 EOF else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi fi for ac_func in getcwd memcpy putenv setenv strchr strcspn strerror strtoul uname do echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_func""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_$ac_func'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < /* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */ char $ac_func(); int main() { return 0; } int t() { /* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias. */ #if defined (__stub_$ac_func) || defined (__stub___$ac_func) choke me #else $ac_func(); #endif ; return 0; } EOF if eval $ac_link; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=yes" else rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'$ac_func`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 ac_tr_func=HAVE_`echo $ac_func | tr '[a-z]' '[A-Z]'` cat >> confdefs.h <&6 fi done for ac_func in getline memset stpcpy vasprintf do echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_func""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_$ac_func'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < /* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */ char $ac_func(); int main() { return 0; } int t() { /* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias. */ #if defined (__stub_$ac_func) || defined (__stub___$ac_func) choke me #else $ac_func(); #endif ; return 0; } EOF if eval $ac_link; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=yes" else rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'$ac_func`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 : else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS ${ac_func}.o" fi done if test $ac_cv_func_getline != yes; then for ac_func in getdelim do echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_func""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_$ac_func'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < /* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */ char $ac_func(); int main() { return 0; } int t() { /* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias. */ #if defined (__stub_$ac_func) || defined (__stub___$ac_func) choke me #else $ac_func(); #endif ; return 0; } EOF if eval $ac_link; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=yes" else rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'$ac_func`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 ac_tr_func=HAVE_`echo $ac_func | tr '[a-z]' '[A-Z]'` cat >> confdefs.h <&6 fi done fi echo $ac_n "checking for parse_printf_format""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_parse_printf_format'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < /* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */ char parse_printf_format(); int main() { return 0; } int t() { /* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias. */ #if defined (__stub_parse_printf_format) || defined (__stub___parse_printf_format) choke me #else parse_printf_format(); #endif ; return 0; } EOF if eval $ac_link; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_parse_printf_format=yes" else rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_parse_printf_format=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'parse_printf_format`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 gt_cv_func_parse_printf_format=yes else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 gt_cv_func_parse_printf_format=no fi if test $gt_cv_func_parse_printf_format = yes; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_PARSE_PRINTF_FORMAT 1 EOF else LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS printf-prs.o" fi echo $ac_n "checking for obstacks""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'gt_cv_func_obstack'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext <&6 if test $gt_cv_func_obstack = yes; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_OBSTACK 1 EOF else LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS obstack.o" fi for ac_hdr in locale.h nl_types.h do ac_safe=`echo "$ac_hdr" | tr './\055' '___'` echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_hdr""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_$ac_safe'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < EOF eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out" ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out` if test -z "$ac_err"; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=yes" else echo "$ac_err" >&5 rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_header_'$ac_safe`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 ac_tr_hdr=HAVE_`echo $ac_hdr | tr '[a-z]./\055' '[A-Z]___'` cat >> confdefs.h <&6 fi done for ac_func in setlocale do echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_func""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_$ac_func'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < /* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */ char $ac_func(); int main() { return 0; } int t() { /* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias. */ #if defined (__stub_$ac_func) || defined (__stub___$ac_func) choke me #else $ac_func(); #endif ; return 0; } EOF if eval $ac_link; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=yes" else rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_$ac_func=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'$ac_func`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 ac_tr_func=HAVE_`echo $ac_func | tr '[a-z]' '[A-Z]'` cat >> confdefs.h <&6 fi done if test "x$ALL_LINGUAS" = "x"; then LINGUAS= else echo $ac_n "checking for catalogs to be installed""... $ac_c" 1>&6 NEW_LINGUAS= for lang in ${LINGUAS=$ALL_LINGUAS}; do case "$ALL_LINGUAS" in *$lang*) NEW_LINGUAS="$NEW_LINGUAS $lang" ;; esac done LINGUAS=$NEW_LINGUAS echo "$ac_t""$LINGUAS" 1>&6 fi if test $ac_cv_header_locale_h = yes; then echo $ac_n "checking for LC_MESSAGES""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ud_cv_val_LC_MESSAGES'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < int main() { return 0; } int t() { return LC_MESSAGES ; return 0; } EOF if eval $ac_link; then rm -rf conftest* ud_cv_val_LC_MESSAGES=yes else rm -rf conftest* ud_cv_val_LC_MESSAGES=no fi rm -f conftest* fi echo "$ac_t""$ud_cv_val_LC_MESSAGES" 1>&6 if test $ud_cv_val_LC_MESSAGES = yes; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_LC_MESSAGES 1 EOF fi fi echo $ac_n "checking whether NLS is requested""... $ac_c" 1>&6 # Check whether --enable-nls or --disable-nls was given. enableval="$enable_nls" if test -n "$enableval"; then nls_cv_use_nls=$enableval else nls_cv_use_nls=yes fi echo "$ac_t""$nls_cv_use_nls" 1>&6 if test "$nls_cv_use_nls" = "yes"; then cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define ENABLE_NLS 1 EOF echo $ac_n "checking for explicitly using GNU gettext""... $ac_c" 1>&6 # Check whether --with-gnu-gettext or --without-gnu-gettext was given. withval="$with_gnu_gettext" if test -n "$withval"; then nls_cv_force_use_gnu_gettext=$withval else nls_cv_force_use_gnu_gettext=no fi echo "$ac_t""$nls_cv_force_use_gnu_gettext" 1>&6 if test "$nls_cv_force_use_gnu_gettext" = "yes"; then nls_cv_use_gnu_gettext=yes else echo $ac_n "checking for -lintl""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_lib_intl'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else ac_save_LIBS="$LIBS" LIBS="-lintl $LIBS" cat > conftest.$ac_ext <&6 ac_tr_lib=HAVE_LIB`echo intl | tr '[a-z]' '[A-Z]'` cat >> confdefs.h <&6 fi echo $ac_n "checking for -li""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_lib_i'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else ac_save_LIBS="$LIBS" LIBS="-li $LIBS" cat > conftest.$ac_ext <&6 ac_tr_lib=HAVE_LIB`echo i | tr '[a-z]' '[A-Z]'` cat >> confdefs.h <&6 fi CATOBJEXT=NONE echo $ac_n "checking for gettext""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_gettext'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < /* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */ char gettext(); int main() { return 0; } int t() { /* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias. */ #if defined (__stub_gettext) || defined (__stub___gettext) choke me #else gettext(); #endif ; return 0; } EOF if eval $ac_link; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_gettext=yes" else rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_gettext=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'gettext`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_GETTEXT 1 EOF # Extract the first word of "msgfmt", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy msgfmt; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_MSGFMT'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else case "$MSGFMT" in /*) ac_cv_path_MSGFMT="$MSGFMT" # Let the user override the test with a path. ;; *) IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:" for ac_dir in $PATH; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_path_MSGFMT="$ac_dir/$ac_word" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" test -z "$ac_cv_path_MSGFMT" && ac_cv_path_MSGFMT="no" ;; esac fi MSGFMT="$ac_cv_path_MSGFMT" if test -n "$MSGFMT"; then echo "$ac_t""$MSGFMT" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi if test "$MSGFMT" != "no"; then # Extract the first word of "gmsgfmt", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy gmsgfmt; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else case "$GMSGFMT" in /*) ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT="$GMSGFMT" # Let the user override the test with a path. ;; *) IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:" for ac_dir in $PATH; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT="$ac_dir/$ac_word" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" test -z "$ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT" && ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT="$MSGFMT" ;; esac fi GMSGFMT="$ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT" if test -n "$GMSGFMT"; then echo "$ac_t""$GMSGFMT" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi # Extract the first word of "xgettext", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy xgettext; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else case "$XGETTEXT" in /*) ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT="$XGETTEXT" # Let the user override the test with a path. ;; *) IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:" for ac_dir in $PATH; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT="$ac_dir/$ac_word" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" test -z "$ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT" && ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT="xgettext" ;; esac fi XGETTEXT="$ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT" if test -n "$XGETTEXT"; then echo "$ac_t""$XGETTEXT" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi INTLOBJS="\$(GETTOBJS)" CATOBJEXT=.mo INSTOBJEXT=.mo DATADIRNAME=lib fi else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi if test "$CATOBJEXT" = "NONE"; then echo $ac_n "checking for catgets""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_func_catgets'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < /* Override any gcc2 internal prototype to avoid an error. */ char catgets(); int main() { return 0; } int t() { /* The GNU C library defines this for functions which it implements to always fail with ENOSYS. Some functions are actually named something starting with __ and the normal name is an alias. */ #if defined (__stub_catgets) || defined (__stub___catgets) choke me #else catgets(); #endif ; return 0; } EOF if eval $ac_link; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_catgets=yes" else rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_func_catgets=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_func_'catgets`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 cat >> confdefs.h <<\EOF #define HAVE_CATGETS 1 EOF INTLOBJS="\$(CATOBJS)" # Extract the first word of "gencat", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy gencat; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_GENCAT'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else case "$GENCAT" in /*) ac_cv_path_GENCAT="$GENCAT" # Let the user override the test with a path. ;; *) IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:" for ac_dir in $PATH; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_path_GENCAT="$ac_dir/$ac_word" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" test -z "$ac_cv_path_GENCAT" && ac_cv_path_GENCAT="no" ;; esac fi GENCAT="$ac_cv_path_GENCAT" if test -n "$GENCAT"; then echo "$ac_t""$GENCAT" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi if test "$GENCAT" != "no"; then for ac_prog in gmsgfmt msgfmt do # Extract the first word of "$ac_prog", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy $ac_prog; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else case "$GMSGFMT" in /*) ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT="$GMSGFMT" # Let the user override the test with a path. ;; *) IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:" for ac_dir in $PATH; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT="$ac_dir/$ac_word" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" ;; esac fi GMSGFMT="$ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT" if test -n "$GMSGFMT"; then echo "$ac_t""$GMSGFMT" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi test -n "$GMSGFMT" && break done test -n "$GMSGFMT" || GMSGFMT="msgfmt" # Extract the first word of "xgettext", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy xgettext; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else case "$XGETTEXT" in /*) ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT="$XGETTEXT" # Let the user override the test with a path. ;; *) IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:" for ac_dir in $PATH; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT="$ac_dir/$ac_word" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" test -z "$ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT" && ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT="xgettext" ;; esac fi XGETTEXT="$ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT" if test -n "$XGETTEXT"; then echo "$ac_t""$XGETTEXT" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi CATOBJEXT=.cat INSTOBJEXT=.cat DATADIRNAME=lib INTLDEPS="../intl/libintl.a" INTLLIBS=$INTLDEPS nls_cv_header_intl=intl/libintl.h nls_cv_header_libgt=intl/libgettext.h fi else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi fi if test "$CATOBJEXT" = "NONE"; then nls_cv_use_gnu_gettext=yes fi fi if test "$nls_cv_use_gnu_gettext" = "yes"; then INTLOBJS="\$(GETTOBJS)" # Extract the first word of "msgfmt", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy msgfmt; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_MSGFMT'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else case "$MSGFMT" in /*) ac_cv_path_MSGFMT="$MSGFMT" # Let the user override the test with a path. ;; *) IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:" for ac_dir in $PATH; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_path_MSGFMT="$ac_dir/$ac_word" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" test -z "$ac_cv_path_MSGFMT" && ac_cv_path_MSGFMT="msgfmt" ;; esac fi MSGFMT="$ac_cv_path_MSGFMT" if test -n "$MSGFMT"; then echo "$ac_t""$MSGFMT" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi # Extract the first word of "gmsgfmt", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy gmsgfmt; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else case "$GMSGFMT" in /*) ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT="$GMSGFMT" # Let the user override the test with a path. ;; *) IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:" for ac_dir in $PATH; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT="$ac_dir/$ac_word" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" test -z "$ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT" && ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT="$MSGFMT" ;; esac fi GMSGFMT="$ac_cv_path_GMSGFMT" if test -n "$GMSGFMT"; then echo "$ac_t""$GMSGFMT" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi # Extract the first word of "xgettext", so it can be a program name with args. set dummy xgettext; ac_word=$2 echo $ac_n "checking for $ac_word""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else case "$XGETTEXT" in /*) ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT="$XGETTEXT" # Let the user override the test with a path. ;; *) IFS="${IFS= }"; ac_save_ifs="$IFS"; IFS="${IFS}:" for ac_dir in $PATH; do test -z "$ac_dir" && ac_dir=. if test -f $ac_dir/$ac_word; then ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT="$ac_dir/$ac_word" break fi done IFS="$ac_save_ifs" test -z "$ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT" && ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT="xgettext" ;; esac fi XGETTEXT="$ac_cv_path_XGETTEXT" if test -n "$XGETTEXT"; then echo "$ac_t""$XGETTEXT" 1>&6 else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 fi CATOBJEXT=.gmo INSTOBJEXT=.mo DATADIRNAME=share INTLDEPS="../intl/libintl.a" INTLLIBS=$INTLDEPS nls_cv_header_intl=intl/libintl.h nls_cv_header_libgt=intl/libgettext.h fi # We need to process the intl/ directory INTLSUB=intl POSUB=po else nls_cv_header_intl=intl/libintl.h nls_cv_header_libgt=intl/libgettext.h fi if test -n "$LINGUAS"; then for lang in $LINGUAS; do CATALOGS="$CATALOGS $lang$CATOBJEXT"; done fi for lang in $ALL_LINGUAS; do GMOFILES="$GMOFILES $lang.gmo" POFILES="$POFILES $lang.po" done if test "$CATOBJEXT" = ".cat"; then ac_safe=`echo "linux/version.h" | tr './\055' '___'` echo $ac_n "checking for linux/version.h""... $ac_c" 1>&6 if eval "test \"`echo '$''{'ac_cv_header_$ac_safe'+set}'`\" = set"; then echo $ac_n "(cached) $ac_c" 1>&6 else cat > conftest.$ac_ext < EOF eval "$ac_cpp conftest.$ac_ext >/dev/null 2>conftest.out" ac_err=`grep -v '^ *+' conftest.out` if test -z "$ac_err"; then rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=yes" else echo "$ac_err" >&5 rm -rf conftest* eval "ac_cv_header_$ac_safe=no" fi rm -f conftest* fi if eval "test \"`echo '$ac_cv_header_'$ac_safe`\" = yes"; then echo "$ac_t""yes" 1>&6 msgformat=linux else echo "$ac_t""no" 1>&6 msgformat=xopen fi test -d intl || mkdir intl sed -e "/^#/d" $srcdir/intl/$msgformat-msg.sed > intl/po-to-msg.sed fi test -d po || mkdir po if test "x$srcdir" != "x."; then posrcdir="../$srcdir/po/" fi sed -e "/^#/d" -e "/^\$/d" -e "s,.*, $posrcdir& \\\\," -e "\$s/\(.*\) \\\\/\1/" \ < $srcdir/po/POTFILES.in > po/POTFILES if test "x$prefix" = xNONE; then cat >> confdefs.h <> confdefs.h < confcache <<\EOF # This file is a shell script that caches the results of configure # tests run on this system so they can be shared between configure # scripts and configure runs. It is not useful on other systems. # If it contains results you don't want to keep, you may remove or edit it. # # By default, configure uses ./config.cache as the cache file, # creating it if it does not exist already. You can give configure # the --cache-file=FILE option to use a different cache file; that is # what configure does when it calls configure scripts in # subdirectories, so they share the cache. # Giving --cache-file=/dev/null disables caching, for debugging configure. # config.status only pays attention to the cache file if you give it the # --recheck option to rerun configure. # EOF # Ultrix sh set writes to stderr and can't be redirected directly, # and sets the high bit in the cache file unless we assign to the vars. (set) 2>&1 | sed -n "s/^\([a-zA-Z0-9_]*_cv_[a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)=\(.*\)/\1=\${\1='\2'}/p" \ >> confcache if cmp -s $cache_file confcache; then : else if test -w $cache_file; then echo "updating cache $cache_file" cat confcache > $cache_file else echo "not updating unwritable cache $cache_file" fi fi rm -f confcache trap 'rm -fr conftest* confdefs* core core.* *.core $ac_clean_files; exit 1' 1 2 15 test "x$prefix" = xNONE && prefix=$ac_default_prefix # Let make expand exec_prefix. test "x$exec_prefix" = xNONE && exec_prefix='${prefix}' # Any assignment to VPATH causes Sun make to only execute # the first set of double-colon rules, so remove it if not needed. # If there is a colon in the path, we need to keep it. if test "x$srcdir" = x.; then ac_vpsub='/^[ ]*VPATH[ ]*=[^:]*$/d' fi trap 'rm -f $CONFIG_STATUS conftest*; exit 1' 1 2 15 DEFS=-DHAVE_CONFIG_H # Without the "./", some shells look in PATH for config.status. : ${CONFIG_STATUS=./config.status} echo creating $CONFIG_STATUS rm -f $CONFIG_STATUS cat > $CONFIG_STATUS </dev/null | sed 1q`: # # $0 $ac_configure_args # # Compiler output produced by configure, useful for debugging # configure, is in ./config.log if it exists. ac_cs_usage="Usage: $CONFIG_STATUS [--recheck] [--version] [--help]" for ac_option do case "\$ac_option" in -recheck | --recheck | --rechec | --reche | --rech | --rec | --re | --r) echo "running \${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $0 $ac_configure_args --no-create --no-recursion" exec \${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $0 $ac_configure_args --no-create --no-recursion ;; -version | --version | --versio | --versi | --vers | --ver | --ve | --v) echo "$CONFIG_STATUS generated by autoconf version 2.4" exit 0 ;; -help | --help | --hel | --he | --h) echo "\$ac_cs_usage"; exit 0 ;; *) echo "\$ac_cs_usage"; exit 1 ;; esac done ac_given_srcdir=$srcdir ac_given_INSTALL="$INSTALL" trap 'rm -fr `echo "Makefile lib/Makefile intl/Makefile src/Makefile \ po/Makefile.in doc/Makefile intl/tupdate.perl config.h" | sed "s/:[^ ]*//g"` conftest*; exit 1' 1 2 15 # Protect against being on the right side of a sed subst in config.status. sed 's/%@/@@/; s/@%/@@/; s/%g$/@g/; /@g$/s/[\\\\&%]/\\\\&/g; s/@@/%@/; s/@@/@%/; s/@g$/%g/' > conftest.subs <<\CEOF $ac_vpsub $extrasub s%@CFLAGS@%$CFLAGS%g s%@CPPFLAGS@%$CPPFLAGS%g s%@CXXFLAGS@%$CXXFLAGS%g s%@DEFS@%$DEFS%g s%@LDFLAGS@%$LDFLAGS%g s%@LIBS@%$LIBS%g s%@exec_prefix@%$exec_prefix%g s%@prefix@%$prefix%g s%@program_transform_name@%$program_transform_name%g s%@PACKAGE@%$PACKAGE%g s%@VERSION@%$VERSION%g s%@SET_MAKE@%$SET_MAKE%g s%@CC@%$CC%g s%@INSTALL_PROGRAM@%$INSTALL_PROGRAM%g s%@INSTALL_DATA@%$INSTALL_DATA%g s%@RANLIB@%$RANLIB%g s%@PERL@%$PERL%g s%@CPP@%$CPP%g s%@ALLOCA@%$ALLOCA%g s%@LIBOBJS@%$LIBOBJS%g s%@MSGFMT@%$MSGFMT%g s%@GMSGFMT@%$GMSGFMT%g s%@XGETTEXT@%$XGETTEXT%g s%@GENCAT@%$GENCAT%g s%@CATALOGS@%$CATALOGS%g s%@CATOBJEXT@%$CATOBJEXT%g s%@DATADIRNAME@%$DATADIRNAME%g s%@GMOFILES@%$GMOFILES%g s%@INSTOBJEXT@%$INSTOBJEXT%g s%@INTLDEPS@%$INTLDEPS%g s%@INTLLIBS@%$INTLLIBS%g s%@INTLOBJS@%$INTLOBJS%g s%@INTLSUB@%$INTLSUB%g s%@POFILES@%$POFILES%g s%@POSUB@%$POSUB%g s%@GETTEXTPRG@%$GETTEXTPRG%g CEOF EOF cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <> $CONFIG_STATUS <<\EOF for ac_file in .. $CONFIG_FILES; do if test "x$ac_file" != x..; then # Support "outfile[:infile]", defaulting infile="outfile.in". case "$ac_file" in *:*) ac_file_in=`echo "$ac_file"|sed 's%.*:%%'` ac_file=`echo "$ac_file"|sed 's%:.*%%'` ;; *) ac_file_in="${ac_file}.in" ;; esac # Adjust relative srcdir, etc. for subdirectories. # Remove last slash and all that follows it. Not all systems have dirname. ac_dir=`echo $ac_file|sed 's%/[^/][^/]*$%%'` if test "$ac_dir" != "$ac_file" && test "$ac_dir" != .; then # The file is in a subdirectory. test ! -d "$ac_dir" && mkdir "$ac_dir" ac_dir_suffix="/`echo $ac_dir|sed 's%^\./%%'`" # A "../" for each directory in $ac_dir_suffix. ac_dots=`echo $ac_dir_suffix|sed 's%/[^/]*%../%g'` else ac_dir_suffix= ac_dots= fi case "$ac_given_srcdir" in .) srcdir=. if test -z "$ac_dots"; then top_srcdir=. else top_srcdir=`echo $ac_dots|sed 's%/$%%'`; fi ;; /*) srcdir="$ac_given_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix"; top_srcdir="$ac_given_srcdir" ;; *) # Relative path. srcdir="$ac_dots$ac_given_srcdir$ac_dir_suffix" top_srcdir="$ac_dots$ac_given_srcdir" ;; esac case "$ac_given_INSTALL" in [/$]*) INSTALL="$ac_given_INSTALL" ;; *) INSTALL="$ac_dots$ac_given_INSTALL" ;; esac echo creating "$ac_file" rm -f "$ac_file" configure_input="Generated automatically from `echo $ac_file_in|sed 's%.*/%%'` by configure." case "$ac_file" in *Makefile*) ac_comsub="1i\\ # $configure_input" ;; *) ac_comsub= ;; esac sed -e "$ac_comsub s%@configure_input@%$configure_input%g s%@srcdir@%$srcdir%g s%@top_srcdir@%$top_srcdir%g s%@INSTALL@%$INSTALL%g " -f conftest.subs $ac_given_srcdir/$ac_file_in > $ac_file fi; done rm -f conftest.subs # These sed commands are passed to sed as "A NAME B NAME C VALUE D", where # NAME is the cpp macro being defined and VALUE is the value it is being given. # # ac_d sets the value in "#define NAME VALUE" lines. ac_dA='s%^\([ ]*\)#\([ ]*define[ ][ ]*\)' ac_dB='\([ ][ ]*\)[^ ]*%\1#\2' ac_dC='\3' ac_dD='%g' # ac_u turns "#undef NAME" with trailing blanks into "#define NAME VALUE". ac_uA='s%^\([ ]*\)#\([ ]*\)undef\([ ][ ]*\)' ac_uB='\([ ]\)%\1#\2define\3' ac_uC=' ' ac_uD='\4%g' # ac_e turns "#undef NAME" without trailing blanks into "#define NAME VALUE". ac_eA='s%^\([ ]*\)#\([ ]*\)undef\([ ][ ]*\)' ac_eB='$%\1#\2define\3' ac_eC=' ' ac_eD='%g' CONFIG_HEADERS=${CONFIG_HEADERS-"config.h"} for ac_file in .. $CONFIG_HEADERS; do if test "x$ac_file" != x..; then # Support "outfile[:infile]", defaulting infile="outfile.in". case "$ac_file" in *:*) ac_file_in=`echo "$ac_file"|sed 's%.*:%%'` ac_file=`echo "$ac_file"|sed 's%:.*%%'` ;; *) ac_file_in="${ac_file}.in" ;; esac echo creating $ac_file rm -f conftest.frag conftest.in conftest.out cp $ac_given_srcdir/$ac_file_in conftest.in EOF # Transform confdefs.h into a sed script conftest.vals that substitutes # the proper values into config.h.in to produce config.h. And first: # Protect against being on the right side of a sed subst in config.status. # Protect against being in an unquoted here document in config.status. rm -f conftest.vals cat > conftest.hdr <<\EOF s/[\\&%]/\\&/g s%[\\$`]%\\&%g s%#define \([A-Za-z_][A-Za-z0-9_]*\) \(.*\)%${ac_dA}\1${ac_dB}\1${ac_dC}\2${ac_dD}%gp s%ac_d%ac_u%gp s%ac_u%ac_e%gp EOF sed -n -f conftest.hdr confdefs.h > conftest.vals rm -f conftest.hdr # This sed command replaces #undef with comments. This is necessary, for # example, in the case of _POSIX_SOURCE, which is predefined and required # on some systems where configure will not decide to define it. cat >> conftest.vals <<\EOF s%^[ ]*#[ ]*undef[ ][ ]*[a-zA-Z_][a-zA-Z_0-9]*%/* & */% EOF # Break up conftest.vals because some shells have a limit on # the size of here documents, and old seds have small limits too. # Maximum number of lines to put in a single here document. ac_max_here_lines=12 rm -f conftest.tail while : do ac_lines=`grep -c . conftest.vals` # grep -c gives empty output for an empty file on some AIX systems. if test -z "$ac_lines" || test "$ac_lines" -eq 0; then break; fi # Write a limited-size here document to conftest.frag. echo ' cat > conftest.frag <> $CONFIG_STATUS sed ${ac_max_here_lines}q conftest.vals >> $CONFIG_STATUS echo 'CEOF sed -f conftest.frag conftest.in > conftest.out rm -f conftest.in mv conftest.out conftest.in ' >> $CONFIG_STATUS sed 1,${ac_max_here_lines}d conftest.vals > conftest.tail rm -f conftest.vals mv conftest.tail conftest.vals done rm -f conftest.vals cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <<\EOF rm -f conftest.frag conftest.h echo "/* $ac_file. Generated automatically by configure. */" > conftest.h cat conftest.in >> conftest.h rm -f conftest.in if cmp -s $ac_file conftest.h 2>/dev/null; then echo "$ac_file is unchanged" rm -f conftest.h else rm -f $ac_file mv conftest.h $ac_file fi fi; done EOF cat >> $CONFIG_STATUS <> $CONFIG_STATUS <<\EOF srcdir=$ac_given_srcdir while test -n "$ac_sources"; do set $ac_dests; ac_dest=$1; shift; ac_dests=$* set $ac_sources; ac_source=$1; shift; ac_sources=$* echo "linking $srcdir/$ac_source to $ac_dest" if test ! -r $srcdir/$ac_source; then { echo "configure: error: $srcdir/$ac_source: File not found" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi rm -f $ac_dest # Make relative symlinks. # Remove last slash and all that follows it. Not all systems have dirname. ac_dest_dir=`echo $ac_dest|sed 's%/[^/][^/]*$%%'` if test "$ac_dest_dir" != "$ac_dest" && test "$ac_dest_dir" != .; then # The dest file is in a subdirectory. test ! -d "$ac_dest_dir" && mkdir "$ac_dest_dir" ac_dest_dir_suffix="/`echo $ac_dest_dir|sed 's%^\./%%'`" # A "../" for each directory in $ac_dest_dir_suffix. ac_dots=`echo $ac_dest_dir_suffix|sed 's%/[^/]*%../%g'` else ac_dest_dir_suffix= ac_dots= fi case "$srcdir" in [/$]*) ac_rel_source="$srcdir/$ac_source" ;; *) ac_rel_source="$ac_dots$srcdir/$ac_source" ;; esac # Make a symlink if possible; otherwise try a hard link. if ln -s $ac_rel_source $ac_dest 2>/dev/null || ln $srcdir/$ac_source $ac_dest; then : else { echo "configure: error: can not link $ac_dest to $srcdir/$ac_source" 1>&2; exit 1; } fi done sed -e "/POTFILES =/r po/POTFILES" po/Makefile.in > po/Makefile; echo timestamp > stamp-h exit 0 EOF chmod +x $CONFIG_STATUS rm -fr confdefs* $ac_clean_files test "$no_create" = yes || ${CONFIG_SHELL-/bin/sh} $CONFIG_STATUS || exit 1 gettext-0.7/configure.in100444 230 226 4422 5776072763 14234 0ustar pinardguestdnl Process this file with autoconf to produce a configure script. AC_REVISION($Revision: 1.31 $) AC_INIT(src/msgfmt.c) AC_CONFIG_HEADER(config.h) AC_PREREQ(2.0) PACKAGE=gettext VERSION=0.7 AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(PACKAGE, "$PACKAGE") AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(VERSION, "$VERSION") AC_SUBST(PACKAGE) AC_SUBST(VERSION) dnl Set of available languages. ALL_LINGUAS="de fr" dnl Checks for programs. AC_PROG_MAKE_SET AC_PROG_CC AC_PROG_INSTALL AC_PROG_RANLIB AC_PATH_PROG(PERL, perl, /usr/local/bin/perl) dnl Checks for libraries. dnl Checks for header files. AC_HEADER_STDC AC_HAVE_HEADERS(limits.h malloc.h stdlib.h string.h unistd.h values.h) dnl Checks for typedefs, structures, and compiler characteristics. AC_C_CONST AC_C_INLINE AC_TYPE_OFF_T AC_TYPE_SIZE_T dnl Checks for library functions. AC_FUNC_ALLOCA AC_FUNC_MMAP AC_FUNC_VPRINTF AC_CHECK_FUNCS([getcwd memcpy putenv setenv strchr strcspn strerror strtoul uname]) AC_REPLACE_FUNCS(getline memset stpcpy vasprintf) if test $ac_cv_func_getline != yes; then AC_CHECK_FUNCS(getdelim) fi AC_FUNC_CHECK(parse_printf_format, gt_cv_func_parse_printf_format=yes, gt_cv_func_parse_printf_format=no) if test $gt_cv_func_parse_printf_format = yes; then AC_DEFINE(HAVE_PARSE_PRINTF_FORMAT) else LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS printf-prs.o" fi AC_MSG_CHECKING([for obstacks]) AC_CACHE_VAL(gt_cv_func_obstack, [AC_TRY_LINK([#include "obstack.h"], [struct obstack *mem;obstack_free(mem,NULL)], gt_cv_func_obstack=yes, gt_cv_func_obstack=no)]) AC_MSG_RESULT($gt_cv_func_obstack) if test $gt_cv_func_obstack = yes; then AC_DEFINE(HAVE_OBSTACK) else LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS obstack.o" fi dnl These are the only lines required to internationalize the package. dnl (OK, not quite, the AC_OUTPUT has also some parts.) ud_GNU_GETTEXT if test "x$prefix" = xNONE; then AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(STD_INC_PATH, "$ac_default_prefix/share/nls/src") else AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(STD_INC_PATH, "$prefix/share/nls/src") fi dnl Check NLS options if test "$CATOBJEXT" = ".gmo"; then GETTEXTPRG=gettext fi AC_SUBST(GETTEXTPRG) AC_LINK_FILES($nls_cv_header_libgt, $nls_cv_header_intl) AC_OUTPUT([Makefile lib/Makefile intl/Makefile src/Makefile \ po/Makefile.in doc/Makefile intl/tupdate.perl], [sed -e "/POTFILES =/r po/POTFILES" po/Makefile.in > po/Makefile; echo timestamp > stamp-h ]) gettext-0.7/install-sh100555 230 226 11243 5746042666 13742 0ustar pinardguest#!/bin/sh # # install - install a program, script, or datafile # This comes from X11R5. # # Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent # `make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it # when there is no Makefile. # # This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written # from scratch. # # set DOITPROG to echo to test this script # Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it. doit="${DOITPROG-}" # put in absolute paths if you don't have them in your path; or use env. vars. mvprog="${MVPROG-mv}" cpprog="${CPPROG-cp}" chmodprog="${CHMODPROG-chmod}" chownprog="${CHOWNPROG-chown}" chgrpprog="${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}" stripprog="${STRIPPROG-strip}" rmprog="${RMPROG-rm}" mkdirprog="${MKDIRPROG-mkdir}" tranformbasename="" transform_arg="" instcmd="$mvprog" chmodcmd="$chmodprog 0755" chowncmd="" chgrpcmd="" stripcmd="" rmcmd="$rmprog -f" mvcmd="$mvprog" src="" dst="" dir_arg="" while [ x"$1" != x ]; do case $1 in -c) instcmd="$cpprog" shift continue;; -d) dir_arg=true shift continue;; -m) chmodcmd="$chmodprog $2" shift shift continue;; -o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2" shift shift continue;; -g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2" shift shift continue;; -s) stripcmd="$stripprog" shift continue;; -t=*) transformarg=`echo $1 | sed 's/-t=//'` shift continue;; -b=*) transformbasename=`echo $1 | sed 's/-b=//'` shift continue;; *) if [ x"$src" = x ] then src=$1 else # this colon is to work around a 386BSD /bin/sh bug : dst=$1 fi shift continue;; esac done if [ x"$src" = x ] then echo "install: no input file specified" exit 1 else true fi if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ]; then dst=$src src="" if [ -d $dst ]; then instcmd=: else instcmd=mkdir fi else # Waiting for this to be detected by the "$instcmd $src $dsttmp" command # might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad # if $src (and thus $dsttmp) contains '*'. if [ -f $src -o -d $src ] then true else echo "install: $src does not exist" exit 1 fi if [ x"$dst" = x ] then echo "install: no destination specified" exit 1 else true fi # If destination is a directory, append the input filename; if your system # does not like double slashes in filenames, you may need to add some logic if [ -d $dst ] then dst="$dst"/`basename $src` else true fi fi ## this sed command emulates the dirname command dstdir=`echo $dst | sed -e 's,[^/]*$,,;s,/$,,;s,^$,.,'` # Make sure that the destination directory exists. # this part is taken from Noah Friedman's mkinstalldirs script # Skip lots of stat calls in the usual case. if [ ! -d "$dstdir" ]; then defaultIFS=' ' IFS="${IFS-${defaultIFS}}" oIFS="${IFS}" # Some sh's can't handle IFS=/ for some reason. IFS='%' set - `echo ${dstdir} | sed -e 's@/@%@g' -e 's@^%@/@'` IFS="${oIFS}" pathcomp='' while [ $# -ne 0 ] ; do pathcomp="${pathcomp}${1}" shift if [ ! -d "${pathcomp}" ] ; then $mkdirprog "${pathcomp}" else true fi pathcomp="${pathcomp}/" done fi if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ] then $doit $instcmd $dst && if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dst; else true ; fi && if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dst; else true ; fi && if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dst; else true ; fi && if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dst; else true ; fi else # If we're going to rename the final executable, determine the name now. if [ x"$transformarg" = x ] then dstfile=`basename $dst` else dstfile=`basename $dst $transformbasename | sed $transformarg`$transformbasename fi # don't allow the sed command to completely eliminate the filename if [ x"$dstfile" = x ] then dstfile=`basename $dst` else true fi # Make a temp file name in the proper directory. dsttmp=$dstdir/#inst.$$# # Move or copy the file name to the temp name $doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp && trap "rm -f ${dsttmp}" 0 && # and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits # If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing. If we want to # ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore # errors from the above "$doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp" command. if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dsttmp; else true;fi && if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi && if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi && if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi && # Now rename the file to the real destination. $doit $rmcmd -f $dstdir/$dstfile && $doit $mvcmd $dsttmp $dstdir/$dstfile fi && exit 0 gettext-0.7/magic.add100444 230 226 420 5750275543 13420 0ustar pinardguest# # GNU nlsutils message catalog file format # 0 string \336\22\4\225 GNU message catalog (little endian), >4 lelong x revision %d, >8 lelong x %d messages 0 string \225\4\22\336 GNU message catalog (big endian), >4 belong x revision %d, >8 belong x %d messages gettext-0.7/mkinstalldirs100555 230 226 1211 5747566530 14520 0ustar pinardguest#!/bin/sh # mkinstalldirs --- make directory hierarchy # Author: Noah Friedman # Created: 1993-05-16 # Last modified: 1994-03-25 # Public domain errstatus=0 for file in ${1+"$@"} ; do set fnord `echo ":$file" | sed -ne 's/^:\//#/;s/^://;s/\// /g;s/^#/\//;p'` shift pathcomp= for d in ${1+"$@"} ; do pathcomp="$pathcomp$d" case "$pathcomp" in -* ) pathcomp=./$pathcomp ;; esac if test ! -d "$pathcomp"; then echo "mkdir $pathcomp" 1>&2 mkdir "$pathcomp" || errstatus=$? fi pathcomp="$pathcomp/" done done exit $errstatus # mkinstalldirs ends here gettext-0.7/stamp-h.in100644 230 226 12 5776077615 13556 0ustar pinardguesttimestamp gettext-0.7/lib/ 40755 230 226 0 5776107733 12370 5ustar pinardguestgettext-0.7/lib/ChangeLog100444 230 226 305 5775361054 14210 0ustar pinardguestSun Jul 2 02:01:43 1995 Ulrich Drepper * First official release. This directory contains supplementary code taken from GNU C Library and other package's lib/ directories. gettext-0.7/lib/Makefile.in100444 230 226 5644 5775771214 14541 0ustar pinardguest# Makefile for the support library subdirectory of the GNU NLS Utilities # Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ VERSION = @VERSION@ SHELL = /bin/sh srcdir = @srcdir@ top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ VPATH = @srcdir@ subdir = lib AR = ar CC = @CC@ RANLIB = @RANLIB@ DEFS = @DEFS@ CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ COMPILE = $(CC) -c $(DEFS) $(INCLUDES) $(CPPFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) $(XCFLAGS) # If your systems has the GNU getopt functions available you may comment # out the following line. GETOPT = getopt.o getopt1.o GETOPTSRC = getopt.c getopt1.c HEADERS = error.h getline.h getopt.h obstack.h printf-parse.h printf.h system.h SOURCES = alloca.c error.c getline.c $(GETOPTSRC) memset.c obstack.c \ printf-prs.c stpcpy.c vasprintf.c xmalloc.c xstrdup.c whoami.c OBJECTS = @ALLOCA@ error.o $(GETOPT) xmalloc.o xstrdup.o whoami.o @LIBOBJS@ DISTFILES = ChangeLog Makefile.in $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) .SUFFIXES: .SUFFIXES: .c .o .c.o: $(COMPILE) $< INCLUDES = -I$(srcdir) -I.. -I../intl -I$(top_srcdir)/intl all: libnlsut.a libnlsut.a: $(OBJECTS) rm -f libnlsut.a $(AR) cru libnlsut.a $(OBJECTS) $(RANLIB) libnlsut.a install install-exec install-data: all uninstall: $(LIBOBJS): ../config.h error.o getopt.o xmalloc.o: ../intl/libgettext.h getline.o: getline.h getopt.o: getopt.h obstack.o: obstack.h printf-prs.o: printf-parse.h tags: TAGS TAGS: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) cd $(top_srcdir)/lib && etags $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) id: ID ID: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) here=`pwd`; cd $(srcdir) && mkid -f$$here/ID $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) mostlyclean: rm -f *.a *.o core core.* clean: mostlyclean distclean: clean rm -f Makefile TAGS maintainer-clean: distclean @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use;" @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." distdir = ../$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)/$(subdir) dist: Makefile $(DISTFILES) for file in $(DISTFILES); do \ ln $$file $(distdir) \ || { echo copying $$file instead; cp -p $$file $(distdir);}; \ done Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in ../config.status cd .. && CONFIG_FILES=$(subdir)/$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= ./config.status # Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make not to export all variables. # Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. .NOEXPORT: gettext-0.7/lib/error.h100444 230 226 3302 5774773240 13763 0ustar pinardguest/* error.h -- declaration for error-reporting function Copyright (C) 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifndef _error_h_ #define _error_h_ #ifndef __attribute__ /* This feature is available in gcc versions 2.5 and later. */ # if __GNUC__ < 2 || (__GNUC__ == 2 && __GNUC_MINOR__ < 5) || __STRICT_ANSI__ # define __attribute__(Spec) /* empty */ # endif /* The __-protected variants of 'format' and 'printf' attributes are accepted by gcc versions 2.6.4 (effectively 2.7) and later. */ # if __GNUC__ < 2 || (__GNUC__ == 2 && __GNUC_MINOR__ < 7) # define __format__ format # define __printf__ printf # endif #endif #if __STDC__ void error (int, int, const char *, ...) \ __attribute__ ((__format__ (__printf__, 3, 4))); void error_with_loc (int, int, const char *, size_t, const char *, ...) \ __attribute__ ((__format__ (__printf__, 5, 6))); #else void error (); void error_with_loc (); #endif /* Hook for special handling of program name printing. */ extern void (*error_print_progname) (); #endif /* _error_h_ */ gettext-0.7/lib/getline.h100444 230 226 625 5753745100 14235 0ustar pinardguest#ifndef _getline_h_ #define _getline_h_ 1 #include #ifndef __P #if defined (__GNUC__) || (defined (__STDC__) && __STDC__) #define __P(args) args #else #define __P(args) () #endif /* GCC. */ #endif /* Not __P. */ int getline __P ((char **_lineptr, size_t *_n, FILE *_stream)); int getdelim __P ((char **_lineptr, size_t *_n, int _delimiter, FILE *_stream)); #endif /* _getline_h_ */ gettext-0.7/lib/getopt.h100444 230 226 10515 5772415416 14154 0ustar pinardguest/* Declarations for getopt. Copyright (C) 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifndef _GETOPT_H #define _GETOPT_H 1 #ifdef __cplusplus extern "C" { #endif /* For communication from `getopt' to the caller. When `getopt' finds an option that takes an argument, the argument value is returned here. Also, when `ordering' is RETURN_IN_ORDER, each non-option ARGV-element is returned here. */ extern char *optarg; /* Index in ARGV of the next element to be scanned. This is used for communication to and from the caller and for communication between successive calls to `getopt'. On entry to `getopt', zero means this is the first call; initialize. When `getopt' returns EOF, this is the index of the first of the non-option elements that the caller should itself scan. Otherwise, `optind' communicates from one call to the next how much of ARGV has been scanned so far. */ extern int optind; /* Callers store zero here to inhibit the error message `getopt' prints for unrecognized options. */ extern int opterr; /* Set to an option character which was unrecognized. */ extern int optopt; /* Describe the long-named options requested by the application. The LONG_OPTIONS argument to getopt_long or getopt_long_only is a vector of `struct option' terminated by an element containing a name which is zero. The field `has_arg' is: no_argument (or 0) if the option does not take an argument, required_argument (or 1) if the option requires an argument, optional_argument (or 2) if the option takes an optional argument. If the field `flag' is not NULL, it points to a variable that is set to the value given in the field `val' when the option is found, but left unchanged if the option is not found. To have a long-named option do something other than set an `int' to a compiled-in constant, such as set a value from `optarg', set the option's `flag' field to zero and its `val' field to a nonzero value (the equivalent single-letter option character, if there is one). For long options that have a zero `flag' field, `getopt' returns the contents of the `val' field. */ struct option { #if __STDC__ const char *name; #else char *name; #endif /* has_arg can't be an enum because some compilers complain about type mismatches in all the code that assumes it is an int. */ int has_arg; int *flag; int val; }; /* Names for the values of the `has_arg' field of `struct option'. */ #define no_argument 0 #define required_argument 1 #define optional_argument 2 #if __STDC__ #if defined(__GNU_LIBRARY__) /* Many other libraries have conflicting prototypes for getopt, with differences in the consts, in stdlib.h. To avoid compilation errors, only prototype getopt for the GNU C library. */ extern int getopt (int argc, char *const *argv, const char *shortopts); #else /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ extern int getopt (); #endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ extern int getopt_long (int argc, char *const *argv, const char *shortopts, const struct option *longopts, int *longind); extern int getopt_long_only (int argc, char *const *argv, const char *shortopts, const struct option *longopts, int *longind); /* Internal only. Users should not call this directly. */ extern int _getopt_internal (int argc, char *const *argv, const char *shortopts, const struct option *longopts, int *longind, int long_only); #else /* not __STDC__ */ extern int getopt (); extern int getopt_long (); extern int getopt_long_only (); extern int _getopt_internal (); #endif /* not __STDC__ */ #ifdef __cplusplus } #endif #endif /* _GETOPT_H */ gettext-0.7/lib/obstack.h100444 230 226 46132 5772415464 14307 0ustar pinardguest/* obstack.h - object stack macros Copyright (C) 1988, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ /* Summary: All the apparent functions defined here are macros. The idea is that you would use these pre-tested macros to solve a very specific set of problems, and they would run fast. Caution: no side-effects in arguments please!! They may be evaluated MANY times!! These macros operate a stack of objects. Each object starts life small, and may grow to maturity. (Consider building a word syllable by syllable.) An object can move while it is growing. Once it has been "finished" it never changes address again. So the "top of the stack" is typically an immature growing object, while the rest of the stack is of mature, fixed size and fixed address objects. These routines grab large chunks of memory, using a function you supply, called `obstack_chunk_alloc'. On occasion, they free chunks, by calling `obstack_chunk_free'. You must define them and declare them before using any obstack macros. Each independent stack is represented by a `struct obstack'. Each of the obstack macros expects a pointer to such a structure as the first argument. One motivation for this package is the problem of growing char strings in symbol tables. Unless you are "fascist pig with a read-only mind" --Gosper's immortal quote from HAKMEM item 154, out of context--you would not like to put any arbitrary upper limit on the length of your symbols. In practice this often means you will build many short symbols and a few long symbols. At the time you are reading a symbol you don't know how long it is. One traditional method is to read a symbol into a buffer, realloc()ating the buffer every time you try to read a symbol that is longer than the buffer. This is beaut, but you still will want to copy the symbol from the buffer to a more permanent symbol-table entry say about half the time. With obstacks, you can work differently. Use one obstack for all symbol names. As you read a symbol, grow the name in the obstack gradually. When the name is complete, finalize it. Then, if the symbol exists already, free the newly read name. The way we do this is to take a large chunk, allocating memory from low addresses. When you want to build a symbol in the chunk you just add chars above the current "high water mark" in the chunk. When you have finished adding chars, because you got to the end of the symbol, you know how long the chars are, and you can create a new object. Mostly the chars will not burst over the highest address of the chunk, because you would typically expect a chunk to be (say) 100 times as long as an average object. In case that isn't clear, when we have enough chars to make up the object, THEY ARE ALREADY CONTIGUOUS IN THE CHUNK (guaranteed) so we just point to it where it lies. No moving of chars is needed and this is the second win: potentially long strings need never be explicitly shuffled. Once an object is formed, it does not change its address during its lifetime. When the chars burst over a chunk boundary, we allocate a larger chunk, and then copy the partly formed object from the end of the old chunk to the beginning of the new larger chunk. We then carry on accreting characters to the end of the object as we normally would. A special macro is provided to add a single char at a time to a growing object. This allows the use of register variables, which break the ordinary 'growth' macro. Summary: We allocate large chunks. We carve out one object at a time from the current chunk. Once carved, an object never moves. We are free to append data of any size to the currently growing object. Exactly one object is growing in an obstack at any one time. You can run one obstack per control block. You may have as many control blocks as you dare. Because of the way we do it, you can `unwind' an obstack back to a previous state. (You may remove objects much as you would with a stack.) */ /* Don't do the contents of this file more than once. */ #ifndef __OBSTACK_H__ #define __OBSTACK_H__ /* We use subtraction of (char *)0 instead of casting to int because on word-addressable machines a simple cast to int may ignore the byte-within-word field of the pointer. */ #ifndef __PTR_TO_INT #define __PTR_TO_INT(P) ((P) - (char *)0) #endif #ifndef __INT_TO_PTR #define __INT_TO_PTR(P) ((P) + (char *)0) #endif /* We need the type of the resulting object. In ANSI C it is ptrdiff_t but in traditional C it is usually long. If we are in ANSI C and don't already have ptrdiff_t get it. */ #if defined (__STDC__) && ! defined (offsetof) #if defined (__GNUC__) && defined (IN_GCC) /* On Next machine, the system's stddef.h screws up if included after we have defined just ptrdiff_t, so include all of stddef.h. Otherwise, define just ptrdiff_t, which is all we need. */ #ifndef __NeXT__ #define __need_ptrdiff_t #endif #endif #include #endif #ifdef __STDC__ #define PTR_INT_TYPE ptrdiff_t #else #define PTR_INT_TYPE long #endif struct _obstack_chunk /* Lives at front of each chunk. */ { char *limit; /* 1 past end of this chunk */ struct _obstack_chunk *prev; /* address of prior chunk or NULL */ char contents[4]; /* objects begin here */ }; struct obstack /* control current object in current chunk */ { long chunk_size; /* preferred size to allocate chunks in */ struct _obstack_chunk* chunk; /* address of current struct obstack_chunk */ char *object_base; /* address of object we are building */ char *next_free; /* where to add next char to current object */ char *chunk_limit; /* address of char after current chunk */ PTR_INT_TYPE temp; /* Temporary for some macros. */ int alignment_mask; /* Mask of alignment for each object. */ struct _obstack_chunk *(*chunkfun) (); /* User's fcn to allocate a chunk. */ void (*freefun) (); /* User's function to free a chunk. */ char *extra_arg; /* first arg for chunk alloc/dealloc funcs */ unsigned use_extra_arg:1; /* chunk alloc/dealloc funcs take extra arg */ unsigned maybe_empty_object:1;/* There is a possibility that the current chunk contains a zero-length object. This prevents freeing the chunk if we allocate a bigger chunk to replace it. */ unsigned alloc_failed:1; /* chunk alloc func returned 0 */ }; /* Declare the external functions we use; they are in obstack.c. */ #ifdef __STDC__ extern void _obstack_newchunk (struct obstack *, int); extern void _obstack_free (struct obstack *, void *); extern int _obstack_begin (struct obstack *, int, int, void *(*) (), void (*) ()); extern int _obstack_begin_1 (struct obstack *, int, int, void *(*) (), void (*) (), void *); #else extern void _obstack_newchunk (); extern void _obstack_free (); extern int _obstack_begin (); extern int _obstack_begin_1 (); #endif #ifdef __STDC__ /* Do the function-declarations after the structs but before defining the macros. */ void obstack_init (struct obstack *obstack); void * obstack_alloc (struct obstack *obstack, int size); void * obstack_copy (struct obstack *obstack, void *address, int size); void * obstack_copy0 (struct obstack *obstack, void *address, int size); void obstack_free (struct obstack *obstack, void *block); void obstack_blank (struct obstack *obstack, int size); void obstack_grow (struct obstack *obstack, void *data, int size); void obstack_grow0 (struct obstack *obstack, void *data, int size); void obstack_1grow (struct obstack *obstack, int data_char); void obstack_ptr_grow (struct obstack *obstack, void *data); void obstack_int_grow (struct obstack *obstack, int data); void * obstack_finish (struct obstack *obstack); int obstack_object_size (struct obstack *obstack); int obstack_room (struct obstack *obstack); void obstack_1grow_fast (struct obstack *obstack, int data_char); void obstack_ptr_grow_fast (struct obstack *obstack, void *data); void obstack_int_grow_fast (struct obstack *obstack, int data); void obstack_blank_fast (struct obstack *obstack, int size); void * obstack_base (struct obstack *obstack); void * obstack_next_free (struct obstack *obstack); int obstack_alignment_mask (struct obstack *obstack); int obstack_chunk_size (struct obstack *obstack); #endif /* __STDC__ */ /* Non-ANSI C cannot really support alternative functions for these macros, so we do not declare them. */ /* Pointer to beginning of object being allocated or to be allocated next. Note that this might not be the final address of the object because a new chunk might be needed to hold the final size. */ #define obstack_base(h) ((h)->alloc_failed ? 0 : (h)->object_base) /* Size for allocating ordinary chunks. */ #define obstack_chunk_size(h) ((h)->chunk_size) /* Pointer to next byte not yet allocated in current chunk. */ #define obstack_next_free(h) ((h)->alloc_failed ? 0 : (h)->next_free) /* Mask specifying low bits that should be clear in address of an object. */ #define obstack_alignment_mask(h) ((h)->alignment_mask) #define obstack_init(h) \ _obstack_begin ((h), 0, 0, \ (void *(*) ()) obstack_chunk_alloc, (void (*) ()) obstack_chunk_free) #define obstack_begin(h, size) \ _obstack_begin ((h), (size), 0, \ (void *(*) ()) obstack_chunk_alloc, (void (*) ()) obstack_chunk_free) #define obstack_specify_allocation(h, size, alignment, chunkfun, freefun) \ _obstack_begin ((h), (size), (alignment), \ (void *(*) ()) (chunkfun), (void (*) ()) (freefun)) #define obstack_specify_allocation_with_arg(h, size, alignment, chunkfun, freefun, arg) \ _obstack_begin_1 ((h), (size), (alignment), \ (void *(*) ()) (chunkfun), (void (*) ()) (freefun), (arg)) #define obstack_chunkfun(h, newchunkfun) \ ((h) -> chunkfun = (struct _obstack_chunk *(*)()) (newchunkfun)) #define obstack_freefun(h, newfreefun) \ ((h) -> freefun = (void (*)()) (newfreefun)) #define obstack_1grow_fast(h,achar) (*((h)->next_free)++ = achar) #define obstack_blank_fast(h,n) ((h)->next_free += (n)) #if defined (__GNUC__) && defined (__STDC__) #if __GNUC__ < 2 #define __extension__ #endif /* For GNU C, if not -traditional, we can define these macros to compute all args only once without using a global variable. Also, we can avoid using the `temp' slot, to make faster code. */ #define obstack_object_size(OBSTACK) \ __extension__ \ ({ struct obstack *__o = (OBSTACK); \ __o->alloc_failed ? 0 : \ (unsigned) (__o->next_free - __o->object_base); }) #define obstack_room(OBSTACK) \ __extension__ \ ({ struct obstack *__o = (OBSTACK); \ (unsigned) (__o->chunk_limit - __o->next_free); }) #define obstack_grow(OBSTACK,where,length) \ __extension__ \ ({ struct obstack *__o = (OBSTACK); \ int __len = (length); \ if (__o->next_free + __len > __o->chunk_limit) \ _obstack_newchunk (__o, __len); \ if (!__o->alloc_failed) \ { \ bcopy (where, __o->next_free, __len); \ __o->next_free += __len; \ } \ (void) 0; }) #define obstack_grow0(OBSTACK,where,length) \ __extension__ \ ({ struct obstack *__o = (OBSTACK); \ int __len = (length); \ if (__o->next_free + __len + 1 > __o->chunk_limit) \ _obstack_newchunk (__o, __len + 1); \ if (!__o->alloc_failed) \ { \ bcopy (where, __o->next_free, __len); \ __o->next_free += __len; \ *(__o->next_free)++ = 0; \ } \ (void) 0; }) #define obstack_1grow(OBSTACK,datum) \ __extension__ \ ({ struct obstack *__o = (OBSTACK); \ if (__o->next_free + 1 > __o->chunk_limit) \ _obstack_newchunk (__o, 1); \ if (!__o->alloc_failed) \ *(__o->next_free)++ = (datum); \ (void) 0; }) /* These assume that the obstack alignment is good enough for pointers or ints, and that the data added so far to the current object shares that much alignment. */ #define obstack_ptr_grow(OBSTACK,datum) \ __extension__ \ ({ struct obstack *__o = (OBSTACK); \ if (__o->next_free + sizeof (void *) > __o->chunk_limit) \ _obstack_newchunk (__o, sizeof (void *)); \ if (!__o->alloc_failed) \ *((void **)__o->next_free)++ = ((void *)datum); \ (void) 0; }) #define obstack_int_grow(OBSTACK,datum) \ __extension__ \ ({ struct obstack *__o = (OBSTACK); \ if (__o->next_free + sizeof (int) > __o->chunk_limit) \ _obstack_newchunk (__o, sizeof (int)); \ if (!__o->alloc_failed) \ *((int *)__o->next_free)++ = ((int)datum); \ (void) 0; }) #define obstack_ptr_grow_fast(h,aptr) (*((void **)(h)->next_free)++ = (void *)aptr) #define obstack_int_grow_fast(h,aint) (*((int *)(h)->next_free)++ = (int)aint) #define obstack_blank(OBSTACK,length) \ __extension__ \ ({ struct obstack *__o = (OBSTACK); \ int __len = (length); \ if (__o->chunk_limit - __o->next_free < __len) \ _obstack_newchunk (__o, __len); \ if (!__o->alloc_failed) \ __o->next_free += __len; \ (void) 0; }) #define obstack_alloc(OBSTACK,length) \ __extension__ \ ({ struct obstack *__h = (OBSTACK); \ obstack_blank (__h, (length)); \ obstack_finish (__h); }) #define obstack_copy(OBSTACK,where,length) \ __extension__ \ ({ struct obstack *__h = (OBSTACK); \ obstack_grow (__h, (where), (length)); \ obstack_finish (__h); }) #define obstack_copy0(OBSTACK,where,length) \ __extension__ \ ({ struct obstack *__h = (OBSTACK); \ obstack_grow0 (__h, (where), (length)); \ obstack_finish (__h); }) /* The local variable is named __o1 to avoid a name conflict when obstack_blank is called. */ #define obstack_finish(OBSTACK) \ __extension__ \ ({ struct obstack *__o1 = (OBSTACK); \ void *value; \ if (__o1->alloc_failed) \ value = 0; \ else \ { \ value = (void *) __o1->object_base; \ if (__o1->next_free == value) \ __o1->maybe_empty_object = 1; \ __o1->next_free \ = __INT_TO_PTR ((__PTR_TO_INT (__o1->next_free)+__o1->alignment_mask)\ & ~ (__o1->alignment_mask)); \ if (__o1->next_free - (char *)__o1->chunk \ > __o1->chunk_limit - (char *)__o1->chunk) \ __o1->next_free = __o1->chunk_limit; \ __o1->object_base = __o1->next_free; \ } \ value; }) #define obstack_free(OBSTACK, OBJ) \ __extension__ \ ({ struct obstack *__o = (OBSTACK); \ void *__obj = (OBJ); \ if (__obj > (void *)__o->chunk && __obj < (void *)__o->chunk_limit) \ __o->next_free = __o->object_base = __obj; \ else (obstack_free) (__o, __obj); }) #else /* not __GNUC__ or not __STDC__ */ #define obstack_object_size(h) \ (unsigned) ((h)->alloc_failed ? 0 : (h)->next_free - (h)->object_base) #define obstack_room(h) \ (unsigned) ((h)->chunk_limit - (h)->next_free) /* Note that the call to _obstack_newchunk is enclosed in (..., 0) so that we can avoid having void expressions in the arms of the conditional expression. Casting the third operand to void was tried before, but some compilers won't accept it. */ #define obstack_grow(h,where,length) \ ( (h)->temp = (length), \ (((h)->next_free + (h)->temp > (h)->chunk_limit) \ ? (_obstack_newchunk ((h), (h)->temp), 0) : 0), \ ((h)->alloc_failed ? 0 : \ (bcopy (where, (h)->next_free, (h)->temp), \ (h)->next_free += (h)->temp))) #define obstack_grow0(h,where,length) \ ( (h)->temp = (length), \ (((h)->next_free + (h)->temp + 1 > (h)->chunk_limit) \ ? (_obstack_newchunk ((h), (h)->temp + 1), 0) : 0), \ ((h)->alloc_failed ? 0 : \ (bcopy (where, (h)->next_free, (h)->temp), \ (h)->next_free += (h)->temp, \ *((h)->next_free)++ = 0))) #define obstack_1grow(h,datum) \ ( (((h)->next_free + 1 > (h)->chunk_limit) \ ? (_obstack_newchunk ((h), 1), 0) : 0), \ ((h)->alloc_failed ? 0 : \ (*((h)->next_free)++ = (datum)))) #define obstack_ptr_grow(h,datum) \ ( (((h)->next_free + sizeof (char *) > (h)->chunk_limit) \ ? (_obstack_newchunk ((h), sizeof (char *)), 0) : 0), \ ((h)->alloc_failed ? 0 : \ (*((char **)(((h)->next_free+=sizeof(char *))-sizeof(char *))) = ((char *)datum)))) #define obstack_int_grow(h,datum) \ ( (((h)->next_free + sizeof (int) > (h)->chunk_limit) \ ? (_obstack_newchunk ((h), sizeof (int)), 0) : 0), \ ((h)->alloc_failed ? 0 : \ (*((int *)(((h)->next_free+=sizeof(int))-sizeof(int))) = ((int)datum)))) #define obstack_ptr_grow_fast(h,aptr) (*((char **)(h)->next_free)++ = (char *)aptr) #define obstack_int_grow_fast(h,aint) (*((int *)(h)->next_free)++ = (int)aint) #define obstack_blank(h,length) \ ( (h)->temp = (length), \ (((h)->chunk_limit - (h)->next_free < (h)->temp) \ ? (_obstack_newchunk ((h), (h)->temp), 0) : 0), \ ((h)->alloc_failed ? 0 : \ ((h)->next_free += (h)->temp))) #define obstack_alloc(h,length) \ (obstack_blank ((h), (length)), obstack_finish ((h))) #define obstack_copy(h,where,length) \ (obstack_grow ((h), (where), (length)), obstack_finish ((h))) #define obstack_copy0(h,where,length) \ (obstack_grow0 ((h), (where), (length)), obstack_finish ((h))) #define obstack_finish(h) \ ( (h)->alloc_failed ? 0 : \ (((h)->next_free == (h)->object_base \ ? (((h)->maybe_empty_object = 1), 0) \ : 0), \ (h)->temp = __PTR_TO_INT ((h)->object_base), \ (h)->next_free \ = __INT_TO_PTR ((__PTR_TO_INT ((h)->next_free)+(h)->alignment_mask) \ & ~ ((h)->alignment_mask)), \ (((h)->next_free - (char *)(h)->chunk \ > (h)->chunk_limit - (char *)(h)->chunk) \ ? ((h)->next_free = (h)->chunk_limit) : 0), \ (h)->object_base = (h)->next_free, \ __INT_TO_PTR ((h)->temp))) #ifdef __STDC__ #define obstack_free(h,obj) \ ( (h)->temp = (char *)(obj) - (char *) (h)->chunk, \ (((h)->temp > 0 && (h)->temp < (h)->chunk_limit - (char *) (h)->chunk)\ ? (int) ((h)->next_free = (h)->object_base \ = (h)->temp + (char *) (h)->chunk) \ : (((obstack_free) ((h), (h)->temp + (char *) (h)->chunk), 0), 0))) #else #define obstack_free(h,obj) \ ( (h)->temp = (char *)(obj) - (char *) (h)->chunk, \ (((h)->temp > 0 && (h)->temp < (h)->chunk_limit - (char *) (h)->chunk)\ ? (int) ((h)->next_free = (h)->object_base \ = (h)->temp + (char *) (h)->chunk) \ : (_obstack_free ((h), (h)->temp + (char *) (h)->chunk), 0))) #endif #endif /* not __GNUC__ or not __STDC__ */ #endif /* not __OBSTACK_H__ */ gettext-0.7/lib/printf-parse.h100444 230 226 22445 5772415474 15275 0ustar pinardguest/* Internal header for parsing printf format strings. Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This file is part of th GNU C Library. The GNU C Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. The GNU C Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with the GNU C Library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #include #include #include #include #define NDEBUG 1 #include #define MAX(a,b) ({typeof(a) _a = (a); typeof(b) _b = (b); \ _a > _b ? _a : _b; }) #define MIN(a,b) ({typeof(a) _a = (a); typeof(b) _b = (b); \ _a < _b ? _a : _b; }) struct printf_spec { /* Information parsed from the format spec. */ struct printf_info info; /* Pointers into the format string for the end of this format spec and the next (or to the end of the string if no more). */ const char *end_of_fmt, *next_fmt; /* Position of arguments for precision and width, or -1 if `info' has the constant value. */ int prec_arg, width_arg; int data_arg; /* Position of data argument. */ int data_arg_type; /* Type of first argument. */ /* Number of arguments consumed by this format specifier. */ size_t ndata_args; }; /* The various kinds off arguments that can be passed to printf. */ union printf_arg { unsigned char pa_char; short int pa_short_int; int pa_int; long int pa_long_int; long long int pa_long_long_int; unsigned short int pa_u_short_int; unsigned int pa_u_int; unsigned long int pa_u_long_int; unsigned long long int pa_u_long_long_int; float pa_float; double pa_double; long double pa_long_double; const char *pa_string; void *pa_pointer; }; /* Read a simple integer from a string and update the string pointer. It is assumed that the first character is a digit. */ static inline unsigned int read_int (const char * *pstr) { unsigned int retval = **pstr - '0'; while (isdigit (*++(*pstr))) { retval *= 10; retval += **pstr - '0'; } return retval; } /* Find the next spec in FORMAT, or the end of the string. Returns a pointer into FORMAT, to a '%' or a '\0'. */ static inline const char * find_spec (const char *format) { while (*format != '\0' && *format != '%') { int len; if (isascii (*format) || (len = mblen (format, MB_CUR_MAX)) <= 0) ++format; else format += len; } return format; } /* FORMAT must point to a '%' at the beginning of a spec. Fills in *SPEC with the parsed details. POSN is the number of arguments already consumed. At most MAXTYPES - POSN types are filled in TYPES. Return the number of args consumed by this spec; *MAX_REF_ARG is updated so it remains the highest argument index used. */ static inline size_t parse_one_spec (const char *format, size_t posn, struct printf_spec *spec, size_t *max_ref_arg) { unsigned int n; size_t nargs = 0; /* Skip the '%'. */ ++format; /* Clear information structure. */ spec->data_arg = -1; spec->info.alt = 0; spec->info.space = 0; spec->info.left = 0; spec->info.showsign = 0; spec->info.group = 0; spec->info.pad = ' '; /* Test for positional argument. */ if (isdigit (*format)) { const char *begin = format; n = read_int (&format); if (n > 0 && *format == '$') /* Is positional parameter. */ { ++format; /* Skip the '$'. */ spec->data_arg = n - 1; *max_ref_arg = MAX (*max_ref_arg, n); } else /* Oops; that was actually the width and/or 0 padding flag. Step back and read it again. */ format = begin; } /* Check for spec modifiers. */ while (*format == ' ' || *format == '+' || *format == '-' || *format == '#' || *format == '0' || *format == '\'') switch (*format++) { case ' ': /* Output a space in place of a sign, when there is no sign. */ spec->info.space = 1; break; case '+': /* Always output + or - for numbers. */ spec->info.showsign = 1; break; case '-': /* Left-justify things. */ spec->info.left = 1; break; case '#': /* Use the "alternate form": Hex has 0x or 0X, FP always has a decimal point. */ spec->info.alt = 1; break; case '0': /* Pad with 0s. */ spec->info.pad = '0'; break; case '\'': /* Show grouping in numbers if the locale information indicates any. */ spec->info.group = 1; break; } if (spec->info.left) spec->info.pad = ' '; /* Get the field width. */ spec->width_arg = -1; spec->info.width = 0; if (*format == '*') { /* The field width is given in an argument. A negative field width indicates left justification. */ const char *begin = ++format; if (isdigit (*format)) { /* The width argument might be found in a positional parameter. */ n = read_int (&format); if (n > 0 && *format == '$') { spec->width_arg = n - 1; *max_ref_arg = MAX (*max_ref_arg, n); ++format; /* Skip '$'. */ } } if (spec->width_arg < 0) { /* Not in a positional parameter. Consume one argument. */ spec->width_arg = posn++; ++nargs; format = begin; /* Step back and reread. */ } } else if (isdigit (*format)) /* Constant width specification. */ spec->info.width = read_int (&format); /* Get the precision. */ spec->prec_arg = -1; /* -1 means none given; 0 means explicit 0. */ spec->info.prec = -1; if (*format == '.') { ++format; if (*format == '*') { /* The precision is given in an argument. */ const char *begin = ++format; if (isdigit (*format)) { n = read_int (&format); if (n > 0 && *format == '$') { spec->prec_arg = n - 1; *max_ref_arg = MAX (*max_ref_arg, n); ++format; } } if (spec->prec_arg < 0) { /* Not in a positional parameter. */ spec->prec_arg = posn++; ++nargs; format = begin; } } else if (isdigit (*format)) spec->info.prec = read_int (&format); else /* "%.?" is treated like "%.0?". */ spec->info.prec = 0; } /* Check for type modifiers. */ #define is_longlong is_long_double spec->info.is_long_double = 0; spec->info.is_short = 0; spec->info.is_long = 0; while (*format == 'h' || *format == 'l' || *format == 'L' || *format == 'Z' || *format == 'q') switch (*format++) { case 'h': /* int's are short int's. */ spec->info.is_short = 1; break; case 'l': if (spec->info.is_long) /* A double `l' is equivalent to an `L'. */ spec->info.is_longlong = 1; else /* int's are long int's. */ spec->info.is_long = 1; break; case 'L': /* double's are long double's, and int's are long long int's. */ spec->info.is_long_double = 1; break; case 'Z': /* int's are size_t's. */ assert (sizeof(size_t) <= sizeof(unsigned long long int)); spec->info.is_longlong = sizeof(size_t) > sizeof(unsigned long int); spec->info.is_long = sizeof(size_t) > sizeof(unsigned int); break; case 'q': /* 4.4 uses this for long long. */ spec->info.is_longlong = 1; break; } /* Get the format specification. */ spec->info.spec = *format++; /* Find the data argument types of a built-in spec. */ spec->ndata_args = 1; switch (spec->info.spec) { case 'i': case 'd': case 'u': case 'o': case 'X': case 'x': if (spec->info.is_longlong) spec->data_arg_type = PA_INT|PA_FLAG_LONG_LONG; else if (spec->info.is_long) spec->data_arg_type = PA_INT|PA_FLAG_LONG; else if (spec->info.is_short) spec->data_arg_type = PA_INT|PA_FLAG_SHORT; else spec->data_arg_type = PA_INT; break; case 'e': case 'E': case 'f': case 'g': case 'G': if (spec->info.is_long_double) spec->data_arg_type = PA_DOUBLE|PA_FLAG_LONG_DOUBLE; else spec->data_arg_type = PA_DOUBLE; break; case 'c': spec->data_arg_type = PA_CHAR; break; case 's': spec->data_arg_type = PA_STRING; break; case 'p': spec->data_arg_type = PA_POINTER|PA_FLAG_PTR; break; case 'n': spec->data_arg_type = PA_INT|PA_FLAG_PTR; break; case 'm': default: /* An unknown spec will consume no args. */ spec->ndata_args = 0; break; } if (spec->data_arg == -1 && spec->ndata_args > 0) { /* There are args consumed, but no positional spec. Use the next sequential arg position. */ spec->data_arg = posn; posn += spec->ndata_args; nargs += spec->ndata_args; } if (spec->info.spec == '\0') /* Format ended before this spec was complete. */ spec->end_of_fmt = spec->next_fmt = format - 1; else { /* Find the next format spec. */ spec->end_of_fmt = format; spec->next_fmt = find_spec (format); } return nargs; } gettext-0.7/lib/printf.h100444 230 226 6704 5772415505 14140 0ustar pinardguest/* Copyright (C) 1991, 1992, 1993, 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This file is part of the GNU C Library. The GNU C Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. The GNU C Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with the GNU C Library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to the, 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifndef _PRINTF_H #define _PRINTF_H 1 #include #include #include /* Need va_list. */ #ifdef __STDC__ # define __P(args) args #else # define __P(args) () #endif struct printf_info { int prec; /* Precision. */ int width; /* Width. */ unsigned char spec; /* Format letter. */ unsigned int is_long_double:1;/* L flag. */ unsigned int is_short:1; /* h flag. */ unsigned int is_long:1; /* l flag. */ unsigned int alt:1; /* # flag. */ unsigned int space:1; /* Space flag. */ unsigned int left:1; /* - flag. */ unsigned int showsign:1; /* + flag. */ unsigned int group:1; /* ' flag. */ char pad; /* Padding character. */ }; /* Type of a printf specifier-handler function. STREAM is the FILE on which to write output. INFO gives information about the format specification. Arguments can be read from ARGS. The function should return the number of characters written, or -1 for errors. */ typedef int (*printf_function) __P ((FILE * __stream, __const struct printf_info * __info, const void **const __args)); typedef int (*printf_arginfo_function) __P ((__const struct printf_info * __info, size_t __n, int *__argtypes)); /* Parse FMT, and fill in N elements of ARGTYPES with the types needed for the conversions FMT specifies. Returns the number of arguments required by FMT. The ARGINFO function registered with a user-defined format is passed a `struct printf_info' describing the format spec being parsed. A width or precision of INT_MIN means a `*' was used to indicate that the width/precision will come from an arg. The function should fill in the array it is passed with the types of the arguments it wants, and return the number of arguments it wants. */ extern size_t parse_printf_format __P ((__const char *__fmt, size_t __n, int *__argtypes)); /* Codes returned by `parse_printf_format' for basic types. These values cover all the standard format specifications. Users can add new values after PA_LAST for their own types. */ enum { /* C type: */ PA_INT, /* int */ PA_CHAR, /* int, cast to char */ PA_STRING, /* const char *, a '\0'-terminated string */ PA_POINTER, /* void * */ PA_FLOAT, /* float */ PA_DOUBLE, /* double */ PA_LAST }; /* Flag bits that can be set in a type returned by `parse_printf_format'. */ #define PA_FLAG_MASK 0xff00 #define PA_FLAG_LONG_LONG (1 << 8) #define PA_FLAG_LONG_DOUBLE PA_FLAG_LONG_LONG #define PA_FLAG_LONG (1 << 9) #define PA_FLAG_SHORT (1 << 10) #define PA_FLAG_PTR (1 << 11) #endif /* printf.h */ gettext-0.7/lib/system.h100444 230 226 5161 5776103313 14151 0ustar pinardguest/* system.h -- header for GNU gettext libiberty Copyright (C) 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifndef _SYSTEM_H #define _SYSTEM_H 1 #ifndef __P # ifdef __STDC__ # define __P(args) args # else # define __P(args) () # endif #endif /* Prototypes for helper functions. */ extern char *get_submitter __P ((char *buffer)); extern FILE *open_po_file __P ((const char *input_name, char **file_name, int use_path)); /* Wrapper functions with error checking for standard functions. */ extern char *xgetcwd __P ((void)); extern void *xmalloc __P ((size_t __n)); extern void *xrealloc __P ((void *__p, size_t __n)); extern char *xstrdup __P ((const char *__string)); extern char *stpcpy __P ((char *__dst, const char *__src)); extern size_t parse_printf_format __P ((const char *__fmt, size_t __n, int *__argtypes)); #ifndef MAX # if defined __STDC__ && defined __GNUC__ && __GNUC__ >= 2 # define MAX(a,b) ({typeof(a) _a = (a); typeof(b) _b = (b); _a > _b ? _a : _b; }) # else # define MAX(a,b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b)) # endif #endif /* Some systems do not define EXIT_*, even with STDC_HEADERS. */ #ifndef EXIT_SUCCESS # define EXIT_SUCCESS 0 #endif #ifndef EXIT_FAILURE # define EXIT_FAILURE 1 #endif #ifdef STDC_HEADERS # include #else # ifdef HAVE_MALLOC_H # include # else void free (); # endif void qsort (); # ifdef HAVE_STRTOUL unsigned long strtoul (); # else long strtol (); # endif #endif #if STDC_HEADERS || HAVE_STRING_H # include # if !STDC_HEADERS && HAVE_MEMORY_H # include # endif #else # include #endif #if !HAVE_MEMCPY # ifndef memcpy # define memcpy(D, S, N) bcopy ((S), (D), (N)) # endif #endif #if !HAVE_STRCHR # ifndef strchr # define strchr index # endif #endif #ifdef __GNUC__ # ifndef alloca # define alloca __builtin_alloca # endif #else # if HAVE_ALLOCA_H # include # else # ifdef _AIX #pragma alloca # else # ifndef alloca char *alloca (); # endif # endif # endif #endif #endif gettext-0.7/lib/alloca.c100444 230 226 33405 5746536564 14114 0ustar pinardguest/* alloca.c -- allocate automatically reclaimed memory (Mostly) portable public-domain implementation -- D A Gwyn This implementation of the PWB library alloca function, which is used to allocate space off the run-time stack so that it is automatically reclaimed upon procedure exit, was inspired by discussions with J. Q. Johnson of Cornell. J.Otto Tennant contributed the Cray support. There are some preprocessor constants that can be defined when compiling for your specific system, for improved efficiency; however, the defaults should be okay. The general concept of this implementation is to keep track of all alloca-allocated blocks, and reclaim any that are found to be deeper in the stack than the current invocation. This heuristic does not reclaim storage as soon as it becomes invalid, but it will do so eventually. As a special case, alloca(0) reclaims storage without allocating any. It is a good idea to use alloca(0) in your main control loop, etc. to force garbage collection. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include #endif #ifdef emacs #include "blockinput.h" #endif /* If compiling with GCC 2, this file's not needed. */ #if !defined (__GNUC__) || __GNUC__ < 2 /* If someone has defined alloca as a macro, there must be some other way alloca is supposed to work. */ #ifndef alloca #ifdef emacs #ifdef static /* actually, only want this if static is defined as "" -- this is for usg, in which emacs must undefine static in order to make unexec workable */ #ifndef STACK_DIRECTION you lose -- must know STACK_DIRECTION at compile-time #endif /* STACK_DIRECTION undefined */ #endif /* static */ #endif /* emacs */ /* If your stack is a linked list of frames, you have to provide an "address metric" ADDRESS_FUNCTION macro. */ #if defined (CRAY) && defined (CRAY_STACKSEG_END) long i00afunc (); #define ADDRESS_FUNCTION(arg) (char *) i00afunc (&(arg)) #else #define ADDRESS_FUNCTION(arg) &(arg) #endif #if __STDC__ typedef void *pointer; #else typedef char *pointer; #endif #define NULL 0 /* Different portions of Emacs need to call different versions of malloc. The Emacs executable needs alloca to call xmalloc, because ordinary malloc isn't protected from input signals. On the other hand, the utilities in lib-src need alloca to call malloc; some of them are very simple, and don't have an xmalloc routine. Non-Emacs programs expect this to call use xmalloc. Callers below should use malloc. */ #ifndef emacs #define malloc xmalloc #endif extern pointer malloc (); /* Define STACK_DIRECTION if you know the direction of stack growth for your system; otherwise it will be automatically deduced at run-time. STACK_DIRECTION > 0 => grows toward higher addresses STACK_DIRECTION < 0 => grows toward lower addresses STACK_DIRECTION = 0 => direction of growth unknown */ #ifndef STACK_DIRECTION #define STACK_DIRECTION 0 /* Direction unknown. */ #endif #if STACK_DIRECTION != 0 #define STACK_DIR STACK_DIRECTION /* Known at compile-time. */ #else /* STACK_DIRECTION == 0; need run-time code. */ static int stack_dir; /* 1 or -1 once known. */ #define STACK_DIR stack_dir static void find_stack_direction () { static char *addr = NULL; /* Address of first `dummy', once known. */ auto char dummy; /* To get stack address. */ if (addr == NULL) { /* Initial entry. */ addr = ADDRESS_FUNCTION (dummy); find_stack_direction (); /* Recurse once. */ } else { /* Second entry. */ if (ADDRESS_FUNCTION (dummy) > addr) stack_dir = 1; /* Stack grew upward. */ else stack_dir = -1; /* Stack grew downward. */ } } #endif /* STACK_DIRECTION == 0 */ /* An "alloca header" is used to: (a) chain together all alloca'ed blocks; (b) keep track of stack depth. It is very important that sizeof(header) agree with malloc alignment chunk size. The following default should work okay. */ #ifndef ALIGN_SIZE #define ALIGN_SIZE sizeof(double) #endif typedef union hdr { char align[ALIGN_SIZE]; /* To force sizeof(header). */ struct { union hdr *next; /* For chaining headers. */ char *deep; /* For stack depth measure. */ } h; } header; static header *last_alloca_header = NULL; /* -> last alloca header. */ /* Return a pointer to at least SIZE bytes of storage, which will be automatically reclaimed upon exit from the procedure that called alloca. Originally, this space was supposed to be taken from the current stack frame of the caller, but that method cannot be made to work for some implementations of C, for example under Gould's UTX/32. */ pointer alloca (size) unsigned size; { auto char probe; /* Probes stack depth: */ register char *depth = ADDRESS_FUNCTION (probe); #if STACK_DIRECTION == 0 if (STACK_DIR == 0) /* Unknown growth direction. */ find_stack_direction (); #endif /* Reclaim garbage, defined as all alloca'd storage that was allocated from deeper in the stack than currently. */ { register header *hp; /* Traverses linked list. */ #ifdef emacs BLOCK_INPUT; #endif for (hp = last_alloca_header; hp != NULL;) if ((STACK_DIR > 0 && hp->h.deep > depth) || (STACK_DIR < 0 && hp->h.deep < depth)) { register header *np = hp->h.next; free ((pointer) hp); /* Collect garbage. */ hp = np; /* -> next header. */ } else break; /* Rest are not deeper. */ last_alloca_header = hp; /* -> last valid storage. */ #ifdef emacs UNBLOCK_INPUT; #endif } if (size == 0) return NULL; /* No allocation required. */ /* Allocate combined header + user data storage. */ { register pointer new = malloc (sizeof (header) + size); /* Address of header. */ ((header *) new)->h.next = last_alloca_header; ((header *) new)->h.deep = depth; last_alloca_header = (header *) new; /* User storage begins just after header. */ return (pointer) ((char *) new + sizeof (header)); } } #if defined (CRAY) && defined (CRAY_STACKSEG_END) #ifdef DEBUG_I00AFUNC #include #endif #ifndef CRAY_STACK #define CRAY_STACK #ifndef CRAY2 /* Stack structures for CRAY-1, CRAY X-MP, and CRAY Y-MP */ struct stack_control_header { long shgrow:32; /* Number of times stack has grown. */ long shaseg:32; /* Size of increments to stack. */ long shhwm:32; /* High water mark of stack. */ long shsize:32; /* Current size of stack (all segments). */ }; /* The stack segment linkage control information occurs at the high-address end of a stack segment. (The stack grows from low addresses to high addresses.) The initial part of the stack segment linkage control information is 0200 (octal) words. This provides for register storage for the routine which overflows the stack. */ struct stack_segment_linkage { long ss[0200]; /* 0200 overflow words. */ long sssize:32; /* Number of words in this segment. */ long ssbase:32; /* Offset to stack base. */ long:32; long sspseg:32; /* Offset to linkage control of previous segment of stack. */ long:32; long sstcpt:32; /* Pointer to task common address block. */ long sscsnm; /* Private control structure number for microtasking. */ long ssusr1; /* Reserved for user. */ long ssusr2; /* Reserved for user. */ long sstpid; /* Process ID for pid based multi-tasking. */ long ssgvup; /* Pointer to multitasking thread giveup. */ long sscray[7]; /* Reserved for Cray Research. */ long ssa0; long ssa1; long ssa2; long ssa3; long ssa4; long ssa5; long ssa6; long ssa7; long sss0; long sss1; long sss2; long sss3; long sss4; long sss5; long sss6; long sss7; }; #else /* CRAY2 */ /* The following structure defines the vector of words returned by the STKSTAT library routine. */ struct stk_stat { long now; /* Current total stack size. */ long maxc; /* Amount of contiguous space which would be required to satisfy the maximum stack demand to date. */ long high_water; /* Stack high-water mark. */ long overflows; /* Number of stack overflow ($STKOFEN) calls. */ long hits; /* Number of internal buffer hits. */ long extends; /* Number of block extensions. */ long stko_mallocs; /* Block allocations by $STKOFEN. */ long underflows; /* Number of stack underflow calls ($STKRETN). */ long stko_free; /* Number of deallocations by $STKRETN. */ long stkm_free; /* Number of deallocations by $STKMRET. */ long segments; /* Current number of stack segments. */ long maxs; /* Maximum number of stack segments so far. */ long pad_size; /* Stack pad size. */ long current_address; /* Current stack segment address. */ long current_size; /* Current stack segment size. This number is actually corrupted by STKSTAT to include the fifteen word trailer area. */ long initial_address; /* Address of initial segment. */ long initial_size; /* Size of initial segment. */ }; /* The following structure describes the data structure which trails any stack segment. I think that the description in 'asdef' is out of date. I only describe the parts that I am sure about. */ struct stk_trailer { long this_address; /* Address of this block. */ long this_size; /* Size of this block (does not include this trailer). */ long unknown2; long unknown3; long link; /* Address of trailer block of previous segment. */ long unknown5; long unknown6; long unknown7; long unknown8; long unknown9; long unknown10; long unknown11; long unknown12; long unknown13; long unknown14; }; #endif /* CRAY2 */ #endif /* not CRAY_STACK */ #ifdef CRAY2 /* Determine a "stack measure" for an arbitrary ADDRESS. I doubt that "lint" will like this much. */ static long i00afunc (long *address) { struct stk_stat status; struct stk_trailer *trailer; long *block, size; long result = 0; /* We want to iterate through all of the segments. The first step is to get the stack status structure. We could do this more quickly and more directly, perhaps, by referencing the $LM00 common block, but I know that this works. */ STKSTAT (&status); /* Set up the iteration. */ trailer = (struct stk_trailer *) (status.current_address + status.current_size - 15); /* There must be at least one stack segment. Therefore it is a fatal error if "trailer" is null. */ if (trailer == 0) abort (); /* Discard segments that do not contain our argument address. */ while (trailer != 0) { block = (long *) trailer->this_address; size = trailer->this_size; if (block == 0 || size == 0) abort (); trailer = (struct stk_trailer *) trailer->link; if ((block <= address) && (address < (block + size))) break; } /* Set the result to the offset in this segment and add the sizes of all predecessor segments. */ result = address - block; if (trailer == 0) { return result; } do { if (trailer->this_size <= 0) abort (); result += trailer->this_size; trailer = (struct stk_trailer *) trailer->link; } while (trailer != 0); /* We are done. Note that if you present a bogus address (one not in any segment), you will get a different number back, formed from subtracting the address of the first block. This is probably not what you want. */ return (result); } #else /* not CRAY2 */ /* Stack address function for a CRAY-1, CRAY X-MP, or CRAY Y-MP. Determine the number of the cell within the stack, given the address of the cell. The purpose of this routine is to linearize, in some sense, stack addresses for alloca. */ static long i00afunc (long address) { long stkl = 0; long size, pseg, this_segment, stack; long result = 0; struct stack_segment_linkage *ssptr; /* Register B67 contains the address of the end of the current stack segment. If you (as a subprogram) store your registers on the stack and find that you are past the contents of B67, you have overflowed the segment. B67 also points to the stack segment linkage control area, which is what we are really interested in. */ stkl = CRAY_STACKSEG_END (); ssptr = (struct stack_segment_linkage *) stkl; /* If one subtracts 'size' from the end of the segment, one has the address of the first word of the segment. If this is not the first segment, 'pseg' will be nonzero. */ pseg = ssptr->sspseg; size = ssptr->sssize; this_segment = stkl - size; /* It is possible that calling this routine itself caused a stack overflow. Discard stack segments which do not contain the target address. */ while (!(this_segment <= address && address <= stkl)) { #ifdef DEBUG_I00AFUNC fprintf (stderr, "%011o %011o %011o\n", this_segment, address, stkl); #endif if (pseg == 0) break; stkl = stkl - pseg; ssptr = (struct stack_segment_linkage *) stkl; size = ssptr->sssize; pseg = ssptr->sspseg; this_segment = stkl - size; } result = address - this_segment; /* If you subtract pseg from the current end of the stack, you get the address of the previous stack segment's end. This seems a little convoluted to me, but I'll bet you save a cycle somewhere. */ while (pseg != 0) { #ifdef DEBUG_I00AFUNC fprintf (stderr, "%011o %011o\n", pseg, size); #endif stkl = stkl - pseg; ssptr = (struct stack_segment_linkage *) stkl; size = ssptr->sssize; pseg = ssptr->sspseg; result += size; } return (result); } #endif /* not CRAY2 */ #endif /* CRAY */ #endif /* no alloca */ #endif /* not GCC version 2 */ gettext-0.7/lib/error.c100444 230 226 10073 5775036426 14000 0ustar pinardguest/* error.c -- error handler for noninteractive utilities Copyright (C) 1990, 91, 92, 93, 94 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ /* Written by David MacKenzie . */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include #endif #include #include #if HAVE_VPRINTF || HAVE_DOPRNT # if __STDC__ # include # define VA_START(args, lastarg) va_start(args, lastarg) # else # include # define VA_START(args, lastarg) va_start(args) # endif #else # define va_alist a1, a2, a3, a4, a5, a6, a7, a8 # define va_dcl char *a1, *a2, *a3, *a4, *a5, *a6, *a7, *a8; #endif #if STDC_HEADERS # include # include #else void exit (); #endif #include #define _(str) gettext (str) /* If NULL, error will flush stdout, then print on stderr the program name, a colon and a space. Otherwise, error will call this function without parameters instead. */ void (*error_print_progname) () = NULL; /* The calling program should define program_name and set it to the name of the executing program. */ extern char *program_name; #if HAVE_STRERROR char *strerror (); #else static char * private_strerror (errnum) int errnum; { extern char *sys_errlist[]; extern int sys_nerr; if (errnum > 0 && errnum <= sys_nerr) return sys_errlist[errnum]; return _("Unknown system error"); } #define strerror private_strerror #endif /* Print the program name and error message MESSAGE, which is a printf-style format string with optional args. If ERRNUM is nonzero, print its corresponding system error message. Exit with status STATUS if it is nonzero. */ /* VARARGS */ void #if defined(VA_START) && __STDC__ error (int status, int errnum, const char *message, ...) #else error (status, errnum, message, va_alist) int status; int errnum; char *message; va_dcl #endif { #ifdef VA_START va_list args; #endif if (error_print_progname) (*error_print_progname) (); else { fflush (stdout); fprintf (stderr, "%s: ", program_name); } #ifdef VA_START VA_START (args, message); # if HAVE_VPRINTF vfprintf (stderr, message, args); # else _doprnt (message, args, stderr); # endif va_end (args); #else fprintf (stderr, message, a1, a2, a3, a4, a5, a6, a7, a8); #endif if (errnum) fprintf (stderr, ": %s", strerror (errnum)); putc ('\n', stderr); fflush (stderr); if (status) exit (status); } void #if defined(VA_START) && __STDC__ error_with_loc (int status, int errnum, const char *file_name, size_t line_number, const char *message, ...) #else error_with_loc (status, errnum, file_name, line_number, message, va_alist) int status; int errnum; char *file_name; size_t line_number; char *message; va_dcl #endif { #ifdef VA_START va_list args; #endif if (error_print_progname) (*error_print_progname) (); else { fflush (stdout); fprintf (stderr, "%s:", program_name); } if (file_name != NULL) fprintf (stderr, "%s:%d: ", file_name, line_number); #ifdef VA_START VA_START (args, message); # if HAVE_VPRINTF vfprintf (stderr, message, args); # else _doprnt (message, args, stderr); # endif va_end (args); #else fprintf (stderr, message, a1, a2, a3, a4, a5, a6, a7, a8); #endif if (errnum) fprintf (stderr, ": %s", strerror (errnum)); putc ('\n', stderr); fflush (stderr); if (status) exit (status); } gettext-0.7/lib/getline.c100444 230 226 7004 5772415377 14261 0ustar pinardguest/* getline.c -- Replacement for GNU C library function getline Copyright (C) 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ /* Written by Jan Brittenson, bson@gnu.ai.mit.edu. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include #endif #include #include #if defined __GNU_LIBRARY__ && defined HAVE_GETDELIM int getline (lineptr, n, stream) char **lineptr; size_t *n; FILE *stream; { return getdelim (lineptr, n, '\n', stream); } #else /* ! have getdelim */ #define NDEBUG #include #if STDC_HEADERS #include #else char *malloc (), *realloc (); #endif /* Always add at least this many bytes when extending the buffer. */ #define MIN_CHUNK 64 /* Read up to (and including) a TERMINATOR from STREAM into *LINEPTR + OFFSET (and null-terminate it). *LINEPTR is a pointer returned from malloc (or NULL), pointing to *N characters of space. It is realloc'd as necessary. Return the number of characters read (not including the null terminator), or -1 on error or EOF. */ int getstr (lineptr, n, stream, terminator, offset) char **lineptr; size_t *n; FILE *stream; char terminator; size_t offset; { int nchars_avail; /* Allocated but unused chars in *LINEPTR. */ char *read_pos; /* Where we're reading into *LINEPTR. */ int ret; if (!lineptr || !n || !stream) return -1; if (!*lineptr) { *n = MIN_CHUNK; *lineptr = malloc (*n); if (!*lineptr) return -1; } nchars_avail = *n - offset; read_pos = *lineptr + offset; for (;;) { register int c = getc (stream); /* We always want at least one char left in the buffer, since we always (unless we get an error while reading the first char) NUL-terminate the line buffer. */ assert(*n - nchars_avail == read_pos - *lineptr); if (nchars_avail < 2) { if (*n > MIN_CHUNK) *n *= 2; else *n += MIN_CHUNK; nchars_avail = *n + *lineptr - read_pos; *lineptr = realloc (*lineptr, *n); if (!*lineptr) return -1; read_pos = *n - nchars_avail + *lineptr; assert(*n - nchars_avail == read_pos - *lineptr); } if (c == EOF || ferror (stream)) { /* Return partial line, if any. */ if (read_pos == *lineptr) return -1; else break; } *read_pos++ = c; nchars_avail--; if (c == terminator) /* Return the line. */ break; } /* Done - NUL terminate and return the number of chars read. */ *read_pos = '\0'; ret = read_pos - (*lineptr + offset); return ret; } int getline (lineptr, n, stream) char **lineptr; size_t *n; FILE *stream; { return getstr (lineptr, n, stream, '\n', 0); } int getdelim (lineptr, n, delimiter, stream) char **lineptr; size_t *n; int delimiter; FILE *stream; { return getstr (lineptr, n, stream, delimiter, 0); } #endif /* have getdelim */ gettext-0.7/lib/getopt.c100444 230 226 52713 5772415411 14150 0ustar pinardguest/* Getopt for GNU. NOTE: getopt is now part of the C library, so if you don't know what "Keep this file name-space clean" means, talk to roland@gnu.ai.mit.edu before changing it! Copyright (C) 1987, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ /* This tells Alpha OSF/1 not to define a getopt prototype in . Ditto for AIX 3.2 and . */ #ifndef _NO_PROTO #define _NO_PROTO #endif #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include #endif #ifndef __STDC__ /* This is a separate conditional since some stdc systems reject `defined (const)'. */ #ifndef const #define const #endif #endif #include #include #define _(str) gettext (str) /* Comment out all this code if we are using the GNU C Library, and are not actually compiling the library itself. This code is part of the GNU C Library, but also included in many other GNU distributions. Compiling and linking in this code is a waste when using the GNU C library (especially if it is a shared library). Rather than having every GNU program understand `configure --with-gnu-libc' and omit the object files, it is simpler to just do this in the source for each such file. */ #if defined (_LIBC) || !defined (__GNU_LIBRARY__) /* This needs to come after some library #include to get __GNU_LIBRARY__ defined. */ #if defined (__GNU_LIBRARY__) || defined (__sgi) /* Don't include stdlib.h for non-GNU C libraries because some of them contain conflicting prototypes for getopt. */ #include #endif /* GNU C library. */ /* This version of `getopt' appears to the caller like standard Unix `getopt' but it behaves differently for the user, since it allows the user to intersperse the options with the other arguments. As `getopt' works, it permutes the elements of ARGV so that, when it is done, all the options precede everything else. Thus all application programs are extended to handle flexible argument order. Setting the environment variable POSIXLY_CORRECT disables permutation. Then the behavior is completely standard. GNU application programs can use a third alternative mode in which they can distinguish the relative order of options and other arguments. */ #include "getopt.h" /* For communication from `getopt' to the caller. When `getopt' finds an option that takes an argument, the argument value is returned here. Also, when `ordering' is RETURN_IN_ORDER, each non-option ARGV-element is returned here. */ char *optarg = NULL; /* Index in ARGV of the next element to be scanned. This is used for communication to and from the caller and for communication between successive calls to `getopt'. On entry to `getopt', zero means this is the first call; initialize. When `getopt' returns EOF, this is the index of the first of the non-option elements that the caller should itself scan. Otherwise, `optind' communicates from one call to the next how much of ARGV has been scanned so far. */ /* XXX 1003.2 says this must be 1 before any call. */ int optind = 0; /* The next char to be scanned in the option-element in which the last option character we returned was found. This allows us to pick up the scan where we left off. If this is zero, or a null string, it means resume the scan by advancing to the next ARGV-element. */ static char *nextchar; /* Callers store zero here to inhibit the error message for unrecognized options. */ int opterr = 1; /* Set to an option character which was unrecognized. This must be initialized on some systems to avoid linking in the system's own getopt implementation. */ int optopt = '?'; /* Describe how to deal with options that follow non-option ARGV-elements. If the caller did not specify anything, the default is REQUIRE_ORDER if the environment variable POSIXLY_CORRECT is defined, PERMUTE otherwise. REQUIRE_ORDER means don't recognize them as options; stop option processing when the first non-option is seen. This is what Unix does. This mode of operation is selected by either setting the environment variable POSIXLY_CORRECT, or using `+' as the first character of the list of option characters. PERMUTE is the default. We permute the contents of ARGV as we scan, so that eventually all the non-options are at the end. This allows options to be given in any order, even with programs that were not written to expect this. RETURN_IN_ORDER is an option available to programs that were written to expect options and other ARGV-elements in any order and that care about the ordering of the two. We describe each non-option ARGV-element as if it were the argument of an option with character code 1. Using `-' as the first character of the list of option characters selects this mode of operation. The special argument `--' forces an end of option-scanning regardless of the value of `ordering'. In the case of RETURN_IN_ORDER, only `--' can cause `getopt' to return EOF with `optind' != ARGC. */ static enum { REQUIRE_ORDER, PERMUTE, RETURN_IN_ORDER } ordering; /* Value of POSIXLY_CORRECT environment variable. */ static char *posixly_correct; #if defined (__GNU_LIBRARY__) || defined (__sgi) /* We want to avoid inclusion of string.h with non-GNU libraries because there are many ways it can cause trouble. On some systems, it contains special magic macros that don't work in GCC. */ #include #define my_index strchr #else /* Avoid depending on library functions or files whose names are inconsistent. */ char *getenv (); static char * my_index (str, chr) const char *str; int chr; { while (*str) { if (*str == chr) return (char *) str; str++; } return 0; } /* If using GCC, we can safely declare strlen this way. If not using GCC, it is ok not to declare it. */ #ifdef __GNUC__ /* Note that Motorola Delta 68k R3V7 comes with GCC but not stddef.h. That was relevant to code that was here before. */ #ifndef __STDC__ /* gcc with -traditional declares the built-in strlen to return int, and has done so at least since version 2.4.5. -- rms. */ extern int strlen (const char *); #endif /* not __STDC__ */ #endif /* __GNUC__ */ #endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ /* Handle permutation of arguments. */ /* Describe the part of ARGV that contains non-options that have been skipped. `first_nonopt' is the index in ARGV of the first of them; `last_nonopt' is the index after the last of them. */ static int first_nonopt; static int last_nonopt; /* Exchange two adjacent subsequences of ARGV. One subsequence is elements [first_nonopt,last_nonopt) which contains all the non-options that have been skipped so far. The other is elements [last_nonopt,optind), which contains all the options processed since those non-options were skipped. `first_nonopt' and `last_nonopt' are relocated so that they describe the new indices of the non-options in ARGV after they are moved. */ static void exchange (argv) char **argv; { int bottom = first_nonopt; int middle = last_nonopt; int top = optind; char *tem; /* Exchange the shorter segment with the far end of the longer segment. That puts the shorter segment into the right place. It leaves the longer segment in the right place overall, but it consists of two parts that need to be swapped next. */ while (top > middle && middle > bottom) { if (top - middle > middle - bottom) { /* Bottom segment is the short one. */ int len = middle - bottom; register int i; /* Swap it with the top part of the top segment. */ for (i = 0; i < len; i++) { tem = argv[bottom + i]; argv[bottom + i] = argv[top - (middle - bottom) + i]; argv[top - (middle - bottom) + i] = tem; } /* Exclude the moved bottom segment from further swapping. */ top -= len; } else { /* Top segment is the short one. */ int len = top - middle; register int i; /* Swap it with the bottom part of the bottom segment. */ for (i = 0; i < len; i++) { tem = argv[bottom + i]; argv[bottom + i] = argv[middle + i]; argv[middle + i] = tem; } /* Exclude the moved top segment from further swapping. */ bottom += len; } } /* Update records for the slots the non-options now occupy. */ first_nonopt += (optind - last_nonopt); last_nonopt = optind; } /* Initialize the internal data when the first call is made. */ static const char * _getopt_initialize (optstring) const char *optstring; { /* Start processing options with ARGV-element 1 (since ARGV-element 0 is the program name); the sequence of previously skipped non-option ARGV-elements is empty. */ first_nonopt = last_nonopt = optind = 1; nextchar = NULL; posixly_correct = getenv ("POSIXLY_CORRECT"); /* Determine how to handle the ordering of options and nonoptions. */ if (optstring[0] == '-') { ordering = RETURN_IN_ORDER; ++optstring; } else if (optstring[0] == '+') { ordering = REQUIRE_ORDER; ++optstring; } else if (posixly_correct != NULL) ordering = REQUIRE_ORDER; else ordering = PERMUTE; return optstring; } /* Scan elements of ARGV (whose length is ARGC) for option characters given in OPTSTRING. If an element of ARGV starts with '-', and is not exactly "-" or "--", then it is an option element. The characters of this element (aside from the initial '-') are option characters. If `getopt' is called repeatedly, it returns successively each of the option characters from each of the option elements. If `getopt' finds another option character, it returns that character, updating `optind' and `nextchar' so that the next call to `getopt' can resume the scan with the following option character or ARGV-element. If there are no more option characters, `getopt' returns `EOF'. Then `optind' is the index in ARGV of the first ARGV-element that is not an option. (The ARGV-elements have been permuted so that those that are not options now come last.) OPTSTRING is a string containing the legitimate option characters. If an option character is seen that is not listed in OPTSTRING, return '?' after printing an error message. If you set `opterr' to zero, the error message is suppressed but we still return '?'. If a char in OPTSTRING is followed by a colon, that means it wants an arg, so the following text in the same ARGV-element, or the text of the following ARGV-element, is returned in `optarg'. Two colons mean an option that wants an optional arg; if there is text in the current ARGV-element, it is returned in `optarg', otherwise `optarg' is set to zero. If OPTSTRING starts with `-' or `+', it requests different methods of handling the non-option ARGV-elements. See the comments about RETURN_IN_ORDER and REQUIRE_ORDER, above. Long-named options begin with `--' instead of `-'. Their names may be abbreviated as long as the abbreviation is unique or is an exact match for some defined option. If they have an argument, it follows the option name in the same ARGV-element, separated from the option name by a `=', or else the in next ARGV-element. When `getopt' finds a long-named option, it returns 0 if that option's `flag' field is nonzero, the value of the option's `val' field if the `flag' field is zero. The elements of ARGV aren't really const, because we permute them. But we pretend they're const in the prototype to be compatible with other systems. LONGOPTS is a vector of `struct option' terminated by an element containing a name which is zero. LONGIND returns the index in LONGOPT of the long-named option found. It is only valid when a long-named option has been found by the most recent call. If LONG_ONLY is nonzero, '-' as well as '--' can introduce long-named options. */ int _getopt_internal (argc, argv, optstring, longopts, longind, long_only) int argc; char *const *argv; const char *optstring; const struct option *longopts; int *longind; int long_only; { optarg = NULL; if (optind == 0) optstring = _getopt_initialize (optstring); if (nextchar == NULL || *nextchar == '\0') { /* Advance to the next ARGV-element. */ if (ordering == PERMUTE) { /* If we have just processed some options following some non-options, exchange them so that the options come first. */ if (first_nonopt != last_nonopt && last_nonopt != optind) exchange ((char **) argv); else if (last_nonopt != optind) first_nonopt = optind; /* Skip any additional non-options and extend the range of non-options previously skipped. */ while (optind < argc && (argv[optind][0] != '-' || argv[optind][1] == '\0')) optind++; last_nonopt = optind; } /* The special ARGV-element `--' means premature end of options. Skip it like a null option, then exchange with previous non-options as if it were an option, then skip everything else like a non-option. */ if (optind != argc && !strcmp (argv[optind], "--")) { optind++; if (first_nonopt != last_nonopt && last_nonopt != optind) exchange ((char **) argv); else if (first_nonopt == last_nonopt) first_nonopt = optind; last_nonopt = argc; optind = argc; } /* If we have done all the ARGV-elements, stop the scan and back over any non-options that we skipped and permuted. */ if (optind == argc) { /* Set the next-arg-index to point at the non-options that we previously skipped, so the caller will digest them. */ if (first_nonopt != last_nonopt) optind = first_nonopt; return EOF; } /* If we have come to a non-option and did not permute it, either stop the scan or describe it to the caller and pass it by. */ if ((argv[optind][0] != '-' || argv[optind][1] == '\0')) { if (ordering == REQUIRE_ORDER) return EOF; optarg = argv[optind++]; return 1; } /* We have found another option-ARGV-element. Skip the initial punctuation. */ nextchar = (argv[optind] + 1 + (longopts != NULL && argv[optind][1] == '-')); } /* Decode the current option-ARGV-element. */ /* Check whether the ARGV-element is a long option. If long_only and the ARGV-element has the form "-f", where f is a valid short option, don't consider it an abbreviated form of a long option that starts with f. Otherwise there would be no way to give the -f short option. On the other hand, if there's a long option "fubar" and the ARGV-element is "-fu", do consider that an abbreviation of the long option, just like "--fu", and not "-f" with arg "u". This distinction seems to be the most useful approach. */ if (longopts != NULL && (argv[optind][1] == '-' || (long_only && (argv[optind][2] || !my_index (optstring, argv[optind][1]))))) { char *nameend; const struct option *p; const struct option *pfound = NULL; int exact = 0; int ambig = 0; int indfound; int option_index; for (nameend = nextchar; *nameend && *nameend != '='; nameend++) /* Do nothing. */ ; #ifdef lint /* Suppress `used before initialized' warning. */ indfound = 0; #endif /* Test all long options for either exact match or abbreviated matches. */ for (p = longopts, option_index = 0; p->name; p++, option_index++) if (!strncmp (p->name, nextchar, nameend - nextchar)) { if (nameend - nextchar == strlen (p->name)) { /* Exact match found. */ pfound = p; indfound = option_index; exact = 1; break; } else if (pfound == NULL) { /* First nonexact match found. */ pfound = p; indfound = option_index; } else /* Second or later nonexact match found. */ ambig = 1; } if (ambig && !exact) { if (opterr) fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option `%s' is ambiguous\n"), argv[0], argv[optind]); nextchar += strlen (nextchar); optind++; return '?'; } if (pfound != NULL) { option_index = indfound; optind++; if (*nameend) { /* Don't test has_arg with >, because some C compilers don't allow it to be used on enums. */ if (pfound->has_arg) optarg = nameend + 1; else { if (opterr) { if (argv[optind - 1][1] == '-') /* --option */ fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option `--%s' doesn't allow an argument\n"), argv[0], pfound->name); else /* +option or -option */ fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option `%c%s' doesn't allow an argument\n"), argv[0], argv[optind - 1][0], pfound->name); } nextchar += strlen (nextchar); return '?'; } } else if (pfound->has_arg == 1) { if (optind < argc) optarg = argv[optind++]; else { if (opterr) fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option `%s' requires an argument\n"), argv[0], argv[optind - 1]); nextchar += strlen (nextchar); return optstring[0] == ':' ? ':' : '?'; } } nextchar += strlen (nextchar); if (longind != NULL) *longind = option_index; if (pfound->flag) { *(pfound->flag) = pfound->val; return 0; } return pfound->val; } /* Can't find it as a long option. If this is not getopt_long_only, or the option starts with '--' or is not a valid short option, then it's an error. Otherwise interpret it as a short option. */ if (!long_only || argv[optind][1] == '-' || my_index (optstring, *nextchar) == NULL) { if (opterr) { if (argv[optind][1] == '-') /* --option */ fprintf (stderr, _("%s: unrecognized option `--%s'\n"), argv[0], nextchar); else /* +option or -option */ fprintf (stderr, _("%s: unrecognized option `%c%s'\n"), argv[0], argv[optind][0], nextchar); } nextchar = (char *) ""; optind++; return '?'; } } /* Look at and handle the next short option-character. */ { char c = *nextchar++; char *temp = my_index (optstring, c); /* Increment `optind' when we start to process its last character. */ if (*nextchar == '\0') ++optind; if (temp == NULL || c == ':') { if (opterr) { if (posixly_correct) /* 1003.2 specifies the format of this message. */ fprintf (stderr, _("%s: illegal option -- %c\n"), argv[0], c); else fprintf (stderr, _("%s: invalid option -- %c\n"), argv[0], c); } optopt = c; return '?'; } if (temp[1] == ':') { if (temp[2] == ':') { /* This is an option that accepts an argument optionally. */ if (*nextchar != '\0') { optarg = nextchar; optind++; } else optarg = NULL; nextchar = NULL; } else { /* This is an option that requires an argument. */ if (*nextchar != '\0') { optarg = nextchar; /* If we end this ARGV-element by taking the rest as an arg, we must advance to the next element now. */ optind++; } else if (optind == argc) { if (opterr) { /* 1003.2 specifies the format of this message. */ fprintf (stderr, _("%s: option requires an argument -- %c\n"), argv[0], c); } optopt = c; if (optstring[0] == ':') c = ':'; else c = '?'; } else /* We already incremented `optind' once; increment it again when taking next ARGV-elt as argument. */ optarg = argv[optind++]; nextchar = NULL; } } return c; } } int getopt (argc, argv, optstring) int argc; char *const *argv; const char *optstring; { return _getopt_internal (argc, argv, optstring, (const struct option *) 0, (int *) 0, 0); } #endif /* _LIBC or not __GNU_LIBRARY__. */ #ifdef TEST /* Compile with -DTEST to make an executable for use in testing the above definition of `getopt'. */ int main (argc, argv) int argc; char **argv; { int c; int digit_optind = 0; while (1) { int this_option_optind = optind ? optind : 1; c = getopt (argc, argv, "abc:d:0123456789"); if (c == EOF) break; switch (c) { case '0': case '1': case '2': case '3': case '4': case '5': case '6': case '7': case '8': case '9': if (digit_optind != 0 && digit_optind != this_option_optind) printf ("digits occur in two different argv-elements.\n"); digit_optind = this_option_optind; printf ("option %c\n", c); break; case 'a': printf ("option a\n"); break; case 'b': printf ("option b\n"); break; case 'c': printf ("option c with value `%s'\n", optarg); break; case '?': break; default: printf ("?? getopt returned character code 0%o ??\n", c); } } if (optind < argc) { printf ("non-option ARGV-elements: "); while (optind < argc) printf ("%s ", argv[optind++]); printf ("\n"); } exit (0); } #endif /* TEST */ gettext-0.7/lib/getopt1.c100444 230 226 10225 5772415422 14223 0ustar pinardguest/* getopt_long and getopt_long_only entry points for GNU getopt. Copyright (C) 1987, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include #endif #include "getopt.h" #ifndef __STDC__ /* This is a separate conditional since some stdc systems reject `defined (const)'. */ #ifndef const #define const #endif #endif #include /* Comment out all this code if we are using the GNU C Library, and are not actually compiling the library itself. This code is part of the GNU C Library, but also included in many other GNU distributions. Compiling and linking in this code is a waste when using the GNU C library (especially if it is a shared library). Rather than having every GNU program understand `configure --with-gnu-libc' and omit the object files, it is simpler to just do this in the source for each such file. */ #if defined (_LIBC) || !defined (__GNU_LIBRARY__) /* This needs to come after some library #include to get __GNU_LIBRARY__ defined. */ #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ #include #else char *getenv (); #endif #ifndef NULL #define NULL 0 #endif int getopt_long (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index) int argc; char *const *argv; const char *options; const struct option *long_options; int *opt_index; { return _getopt_internal (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index, 0); } /* Like getopt_long, but '-' as well as '--' can indicate a long option. If an option that starts with '-' (not '--') doesn't match a long option, but does match a short option, it is parsed as a short option instead. */ int getopt_long_only (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index) int argc; char *const *argv; const char *options; const struct option *long_options; int *opt_index; { return _getopt_internal (argc, argv, options, long_options, opt_index, 1); } #endif /* _LIBC or not __GNU_LIBRARY__. */ #ifdef TEST #include int main (argc, argv) int argc; char **argv; { int c; int digit_optind = 0; while (1) { int this_option_optind = optind ? optind : 1; int option_index = 0; static struct option long_options[] = { {"add", 1, 0, 0}, {"append", 0, 0, 0}, {"delete", 1, 0, 0}, {"verbose", 0, 0, 0}, {"create", 0, 0, 0}, {"file", 1, 0, 0}, {0, 0, 0, 0} }; c = getopt_long (argc, argv, "abc:d:0123456789", long_options, &option_index); if (c == EOF) break; switch (c) { case 0: printf ("option %s", long_options[option_index].name); if (optarg) printf (" with arg %s", optarg); printf ("\n"); break; case '0': case '1': case '2': case '3': case '4': case '5': case '6': case '7': case '8': case '9': if (digit_optind != 0 && digit_optind != this_option_optind) printf ("digits occur in two different argv-elements.\n"); digit_optind = this_option_optind; printf ("option %c\n", c); break; case 'a': printf ("option a\n"); break; case 'b': printf ("option b\n"); break; case 'c': printf ("option c with value `%s'\n", optarg); break; case 'd': printf ("option d with value `%s'\n", optarg); break; case '?': break; default: printf ("?? getopt returned character code 0%o ??\n", c); } } if (optind < argc) { printf ("non-option ARGV-elements: "); while (optind < argc) printf ("%s ", argv[optind++]); printf ("\n"); } exit (0); } #endif /* TEST */ gettext-0.7/lib/memset.c100444 230 226 1704 5772415452 14117 0ustar pinardguest/* memset.c -- set an area of memory to a given value Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ char * memset (str, c, len) char *str; int c; unsigned len; { register char *st = str; while (len-- > 0) *st++ = c; return str; } gettext-0.7/lib/obstack.c100444 230 226 35304 5772415457 14303 0ustar pinardguest/* obstack.c - subroutines used implicitly by object stack macros Copyright (C) 1988, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #include "obstack.h" /* This is just to get __GNU_LIBRARY__ defined. */ #include /* Comment out all this code if we are using the GNU C Library, and are not actually compiling the library itself. This code is part of the GNU C Library, but also included in many other GNU distributions. Compiling and linking in this code is a waste when using the GNU C library (especially if it is a shared library). Rather than having every GNU program understand `configure --with-gnu-libc' and omit the object files, it is simpler to just do this in the source for each such file. */ /* CYGNUS LOCAL. No, don't comment the code out. We will be using ../include/obstack.h, which was changed relatively recently in a way that is not binary compatible. Until we feel confident that nobody is using the old obstack.c code, force the use of this code. This issue will arise anytime a change is made which is not binary compatible. #if defined (_LIBC) || !defined (__GNU_LIBRARY__) */ #if 1 #ifdef __STDC__ #define POINTER void * #else #define POINTER char * #endif /* Determine default alignment. */ struct fooalign {char x; double d;}; #define DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT \ ((PTR_INT_TYPE) ((char *)&((struct fooalign *) 0)->d - (char *)0)) /* If malloc were really smart, it would round addresses to DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT. But in fact it might be less smart and round addresses to as much as DEFAULT_ROUNDING. So we prepare for it to do that. */ union fooround {long x; double d;}; #define DEFAULT_ROUNDING (sizeof (union fooround)) /* When we copy a long block of data, this is the unit to do it with. On some machines, copying successive ints does not work; in such a case, redefine COPYING_UNIT to `long' (if that works) or `char' as a last resort. */ #ifndef COPYING_UNIT #define COPYING_UNIT int #endif /* The non-GNU-C macros copy the obstack into this global variable to avoid multiple evaluation. */ struct obstack *_obstack; /* Define a macro that either calls functions with the traditional malloc/free calling interface, or calls functions with the mmalloc/mfree interface (that adds an extra first argument), based on the state of use_extra_arg. For free, do not use ?:, since some compilers, like the MIPS compilers, do not allow (expr) ? void : void. */ #define CALL_CHUNKFUN(h, size) \ (((h) -> use_extra_arg) \ ? (*(h)->chunkfun) ((h)->extra_arg, (size)) \ : (*(h)->chunkfun) ((size))) #define CALL_FREEFUN(h, old_chunk) \ do { \ if ((h) -> use_extra_arg) \ (*(h)->freefun) ((h)->extra_arg, (old_chunk)); \ else \ (*(h)->freefun) ((old_chunk)); \ } while (0) /* Initialize an obstack H for use. Specify chunk size SIZE (0 means default). Objects start on multiples of ALIGNMENT (0 means use default). CHUNKFUN is the function to use to allocate chunks, and FREEFUN the function to free them. Return nonzero if successful, zero if out of memory. To recover from an out of memory error, free up some memory, then call this again. */ int _obstack_begin (h, size, alignment, chunkfun, freefun) struct obstack *h; int size; int alignment; POINTER (*chunkfun) (); void (*freefun) (); { register struct _obstack_chunk* chunk; /* points to new chunk */ if (alignment == 0) alignment = DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT; if (size == 0) /* Default size is what GNU malloc can fit in a 4096-byte block. */ { /* 12 is sizeof (mhead) and 4 is EXTRA from GNU malloc. Use the values for range checking, because if range checking is off, the extra bytes won't be missed terribly, but if range checking is on and we used a larger request, a whole extra 4096 bytes would be allocated. These number are irrelevant to the new GNU malloc. I suspect it is less sensitive to the size of the request. */ int extra = ((((12 + DEFAULT_ROUNDING - 1) & ~(DEFAULT_ROUNDING - 1)) + 4 + DEFAULT_ROUNDING - 1) & ~(DEFAULT_ROUNDING - 1)); size = 4096 - extra; } h->chunkfun = (struct _obstack_chunk * (*)()) chunkfun; h->freefun = freefun; h->chunk_size = size; h->alignment_mask = alignment - 1; h->use_extra_arg = 0; chunk = h->chunk = CALL_CHUNKFUN (h, h -> chunk_size); if (!chunk) { h->alloc_failed = 1; return 0; } h->alloc_failed = 0; h->next_free = h->object_base = chunk->contents; h->chunk_limit = chunk->limit = (char *) chunk + h->chunk_size; chunk->prev = 0; /* The initial chunk now contains no empty object. */ h->maybe_empty_object = 0; return 1; } int _obstack_begin_1 (h, size, alignment, chunkfun, freefun, arg) struct obstack *h; int size; int alignment; POINTER (*chunkfun) (); void (*freefun) (); POINTER arg; { register struct _obstack_chunk* chunk; /* points to new chunk */ if (alignment == 0) alignment = DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT; if (size == 0) /* Default size is what GNU malloc can fit in a 4096-byte block. */ { /* 12 is sizeof (mhead) and 4 is EXTRA from GNU malloc. Use the values for range checking, because if range checking is off, the extra bytes won't be missed terribly, but if range checking is on and we used a larger request, a whole extra 4096 bytes would be allocated. These number are irrelevant to the new GNU malloc. I suspect it is less sensitive to the size of the request. */ int extra = ((((12 + DEFAULT_ROUNDING - 1) & ~(DEFAULT_ROUNDING - 1)) + 4 + DEFAULT_ROUNDING - 1) & ~(DEFAULT_ROUNDING - 1)); size = 4096 - extra; } h->chunkfun = (struct _obstack_chunk * (*)()) chunkfun; h->freefun = freefun; h->chunk_size = size; h->alignment_mask = alignment - 1; h->extra_arg = arg; h->use_extra_arg = 1; chunk = h->chunk = CALL_CHUNKFUN (h, h -> chunk_size); if (!chunk) { h->alloc_failed = 1; return 0; } h->alloc_failed = 0; h->next_free = h->object_base = chunk->contents; h->chunk_limit = chunk->limit = (char *) chunk + h->chunk_size; chunk->prev = 0; /* The initial chunk now contains no empty object. */ h->maybe_empty_object = 0; return 1; } /* Allocate a new current chunk for the obstack *H on the assumption that LENGTH bytes need to be added to the current object, or a new object of length LENGTH allocated. Copies any partial object from the end of the old chunk to the beginning of the new one. */ void _obstack_newchunk (h, length) struct obstack *h; int length; { register struct _obstack_chunk* old_chunk = h->chunk; register struct _obstack_chunk* new_chunk; register long new_size; register int obj_size = h->next_free - h->object_base; register int i; int already; /* Compute size for new chunk. */ new_size = (obj_size + length) + (obj_size >> 3) + 100; if (new_size < h->chunk_size) new_size = h->chunk_size; /* Allocate and initialize the new chunk. */ new_chunk = CALL_CHUNKFUN (h, new_size); if (!new_chunk) { h->alloc_failed = 1; return; } h->alloc_failed = 0; h->chunk = new_chunk; new_chunk->prev = old_chunk; new_chunk->limit = h->chunk_limit = (char *) new_chunk + new_size; /* Move the existing object to the new chunk. Word at a time is fast and is safe if the object is sufficiently aligned. */ if (h->alignment_mask + 1 >= DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT) { for (i = obj_size / sizeof (COPYING_UNIT) - 1; i >= 0; i--) ((COPYING_UNIT *)new_chunk->contents)[i] = ((COPYING_UNIT *)h->object_base)[i]; /* We used to copy the odd few remaining bytes as one extra COPYING_UNIT, but that can cross a page boundary on a machine which does not do strict alignment for COPYING_UNITS. */ already = obj_size / sizeof (COPYING_UNIT) * sizeof (COPYING_UNIT); } else already = 0; /* Copy remaining bytes one by one. */ for (i = already; i < obj_size; i++) new_chunk->contents[i] = h->object_base[i]; /* If the object just copied was the only data in OLD_CHUNK, free that chunk and remove it from the chain. But not if that chunk might contain an empty object. */ if (h->object_base == old_chunk->contents && ! h->maybe_empty_object) { new_chunk->prev = old_chunk->prev; CALL_FREEFUN (h, old_chunk); } h->object_base = new_chunk->contents; h->next_free = h->object_base + obj_size; /* The new chunk certainly contains no empty object yet. */ h->maybe_empty_object = 0; } /* Return nonzero if object OBJ has been allocated from obstack H. This is here for debugging. If you use it in a program, you are probably losing. */ #ifdef __STDC__ /* Suppress -Wmissing-prototypes warning. We don't want to declare this in obstack.h because it is just for debugging. */ int _obstack_allocated_p (struct obstack *h, POINTER obj); #endif int _obstack_allocated_p (h, obj) struct obstack *h; POINTER obj; { register struct _obstack_chunk* lp; /* below addr of any objects in this chunk */ register struct _obstack_chunk* plp; /* point to previous chunk if any */ lp = (h)->chunk; /* We use >= rather than > since the object cannot be exactly at the beginning of the chunk but might be an empty object exactly at the end of an adjacent chunk. */ while (lp != 0 && ((POINTER)lp >= obj || (POINTER)(lp)->limit < obj)) { plp = lp->prev; lp = plp; } return lp != 0; } /* Free objects in obstack H, including OBJ and everything allocate more recently than OBJ. If OBJ is zero, free everything in H. */ #undef obstack_free /* This function has two names with identical definitions. This is the first one, called from non-ANSI code. */ void _obstack_free (h, obj) struct obstack *h; POINTER obj; { register struct _obstack_chunk* lp; /* below addr of any objects in this chunk */ register struct _obstack_chunk* plp; /* point to previous chunk if any */ lp = h->chunk; /* We use >= because there cannot be an object at the beginning of a chunk. But there can be an empty object at that address at the end of another chunk. */ while (lp != 0 && ((POINTER)lp >= obj || (POINTER)(lp)->limit < obj)) { plp = lp->prev; CALL_FREEFUN (h, lp); lp = plp; /* If we switch chunks, we can't tell whether the new current chunk contains an empty object, so assume that it may. */ h->maybe_empty_object = 1; } if (lp) { h->object_base = h->next_free = (char *)(obj); h->chunk_limit = lp->limit; h->chunk = lp; } else if (obj != 0) /* obj is not in any of the chunks! */ abort (); } /* This function is used from ANSI code. */ void obstack_free (h, obj) struct obstack *h; POINTER obj; { register struct _obstack_chunk* lp; /* below addr of any objects in this chunk */ register struct _obstack_chunk* plp; /* point to previous chunk if any */ lp = h->chunk; /* We use >= because there cannot be an object at the beginning of a chunk. But there can be an empty object at that address at the end of another chunk. */ while (lp != 0 && ((POINTER)lp >= obj || (POINTER)(lp)->limit < obj)) { plp = lp->prev; CALL_FREEFUN (h, lp); lp = plp; /* If we switch chunks, we can't tell whether the new current chunk contains an empty object, so assume that it may. */ h->maybe_empty_object = 1; } if (lp) { h->object_base = h->next_free = (char *)(obj); h->chunk_limit = lp->limit; h->chunk = lp; } else if (obj != 0) /* obj is not in any of the chunks! */ abort (); } #if 0 /* These are now turned off because the applications do not use it and it uses bcopy via obstack_grow, which causes trouble on sysV. */ /* Now define the functional versions of the obstack macros. Define them to simply use the corresponding macros to do the job. */ #ifdef __STDC__ /* These function definitions do not work with non-ANSI preprocessors; they won't pass through the macro names in parentheses. */ /* The function names appear in parentheses in order to prevent the macro-definitions of the names from being expanded there. */ POINTER (obstack_base) (obstack) struct obstack *obstack; { return obstack_base (obstack); } POINTER (obstack_next_free) (obstack) struct obstack *obstack; { return obstack_next_free (obstack); } int (obstack_object_size) (obstack) struct obstack *obstack; { return obstack_object_size (obstack); } int (obstack_room) (obstack) struct obstack *obstack; { return obstack_room (obstack); } void (obstack_grow) (obstack, pointer, length) struct obstack *obstack; POINTER pointer; int length; { obstack_grow (obstack, pointer, length); } void (obstack_grow0) (obstack, pointer, length) struct obstack *obstack; POINTER pointer; int length; { obstack_grow0 (obstack, pointer, length); } void (obstack_1grow) (obstack, character) struct obstack *obstack; int character; { obstack_1grow (obstack, character); } void (obstack_blank) (obstack, length) struct obstack *obstack; int length; { obstack_blank (obstack, length); } void (obstack_1grow_fast) (obstack, character) struct obstack *obstack; int character; { obstack_1grow_fast (obstack, character); } void (obstack_blank_fast) (obstack, length) struct obstack *obstack; int length; { obstack_blank_fast (obstack, length); } POINTER (obstack_finish) (obstack) struct obstack *obstack; { return obstack_finish (obstack); } POINTER (obstack_alloc) (obstack, length) struct obstack *obstack; int length; { return obstack_alloc (obstack, length); } POINTER (obstack_copy) (obstack, pointer, length) struct obstack *obstack; POINTER pointer; int length; { return obstack_copy (obstack, pointer, length); } POINTER (obstack_copy0) (obstack, pointer, length) struct obstack *obstack; POINTER pointer; int length; { return obstack_copy0 (obstack, pointer, length); } #endif /* __STDC__ */ #endif /* 0 */ #endif /* _LIBC or not __GNU_LIBRARY__. */ gettext-0.7/lib/printf-prs.c100444 230 226 4417 5772415502 14731 0ustar pinardguest/* Copyright (C) 1991, 1992, 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This file is part of the GNU C Library. The GNU C Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. The GNU C Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with the GNU C Library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #include #include #include #include #include "printf-parse.h" size_t parse_printf_format (fmt, n, argtypes) const char *fmt; size_t n; int *argtypes; { size_t nargs; /* Number of arguments. */ size_t max_ref_arg; /* Highest index used in a positional arg. */ struct printf_spec spec; nargs = 0; max_ref_arg = 0; /* Search for format specifications. */ for (fmt = find_spec (fmt); *fmt != '\0'; fmt = spec.next_fmt) { /* Parse this spec. */ nargs += parse_one_spec (fmt, nargs, &spec, &max_ref_arg); /* If the width is determined by an argument this is an int. */ if (spec.width_arg != -1 && spec.width_arg < n) argtypes[spec.width_arg] = PA_INT; /* If the precision is determined by an argument this is an int. */ if (spec.prec_arg != -1 && spec.prec_arg < n) argtypes[spec.prec_arg] = PA_INT; if (spec.data_arg < n) switch (spec.ndata_args) { case 0: /* No arguments. */ break; case 1: /* One argument; we already have the type. */ argtypes[spec.data_arg] = spec.data_arg_type; break; default: /* We don't handle this here. Beside GNU libc no other libc provides printf function registration. But while having this feature it also provides this function, so that using *this* file is not needed. */ break; } } return MAX (nargs, max_ref_arg); } gettext-0.7/lib/stpcpy.c100444 230 226 2132 5772415517 14145 0ustar pinardguest/* stpcpy.c -- copy a string and return pointer to end of new string Copyright (C) 1989, 1990 Free Software Foundation. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include #endif /* Copy SRC to DEST, returning the address of the terminating '\0' in DEST. */ char * stpcpy (dest, src) char *dest; const char *src; { while ((*dest++ = *src++) != '\0') /* Do nothing. */ ; return dest - 1; } gettext-0.7/lib/vasprintf.c100444 230 226 7665 5772415525 14656 0ustar pinardguest/* Like vsprintf but provides a pointer to malloc'd storage, which must be freed by the caller. Copyright (C) 1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This file is part of the libiberty library. Libiberty is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. Libiberty is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with libiberty; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #include #include #ifdef __STDC__ #include #else #include #endif #ifdef TEST int global_total_width; #endif unsigned long strtoul (); char *malloc (); static int int_vasprintf (result, format, args) char **result; const char *format; va_list *args; { const char *p = format; /* Add one to make sure that it is never zero, which might cause malloc to return NULL. */ int total_width = strlen (format) + 1; va_list ap; memcpy (&ap, args, sizeof (va_list)); while (*p != '\0') { if (*p++ == '%') { while (strchr ("-+ #0", *p)) ++p; if (*p == '*') { ++p; total_width += abs (va_arg (ap, int)); } else total_width += strtoul (p, &p, 10); if (*p == '.') { ++p; if (*p == '*') { ++p; total_width += abs (va_arg (ap, int)); } else total_width += strtoul (p, &p, 10); } while (strchr ("hlL", *p)) ++p; /* Should be big enough for any format specifier except %s. */ total_width += 30; switch (*p) { case 'd': case 'i': case 'o': case 'u': case 'x': case 'X': case 'c': (void) va_arg (ap, int); break; case 'f': case 'e': case 'E': case 'g': case 'G': (void) va_arg (ap, double); break; case 's': total_width += strlen (va_arg (ap, char *)); break; case 'p': case 'n': (void) va_arg (ap, char *); break; } } } #ifdef TEST global_total_width = total_width; #endif *result = malloc (total_width); if (*result != NULL) return vsprintf (*result, format, *args); else return 0; } int vasprintf (result, format, args) char **result; const char *format; va_list args; { return int_vasprintf (result, format, &args); } int asprintf #ifdef __STDC__ (char **result, const char *format, ...) #else (result, va_alist) char **result; va_dcl #endif { va_list args; int done; #ifdef __STDC__ va_start (args, format); #else char *format; va_start (args); format = va_arg (args, char *); #endif done = vasprintf (result, format, args); va_end (args); return done; } #ifdef TEST void checkit #ifdef __STDC__ (const char* format, ...) #else (va_alist) va_dcl #endif { va_list args; char *result; #ifdef __STDC__ va_start (args, format); #else char *format; va_start (args); format = va_arg (args, char *); #endif vasprintf (&result, format, args); if (strlen (result) < global_total_width) printf ("PASS: "); else printf ("FAIL: "); printf ("%d %s\n", global_total_width, result); } int main () { checkit ("%d", 0x12345678); checkit ("%200d", 5); checkit ("%.300d", 6); checkit ("%100.150d", 7); checkit ("%s", "jjjjjjjjjiiiiiiiiiiiiiiioooooooooooooooooppppppppppppaa\n\ 777777777777777777333333333333366666666666622222222222777777777777733333"); checkit ("%f%s%d%s", 1.0, "foo", 77, "asdjffffffffffffffiiiiiiiiiiixxxxx"); } #endif /* TEST */ gettext-0.7/lib/xmalloc.c100444 230 226 4464 5775773554 14307 0ustar pinardguest/* xmalloc.c -- malloc with out of memory checking Copyright (C) 1990, 91, 92, 93, 94 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include #endif #if __STDC__ #define VOID void #else #define VOID char #endif #include #if STDC_HEADERS #include #else VOID *calloc (); VOID *malloc (); VOID *realloc (); void free (); #endif #include #define _(str) gettext (str) #ifndef EXIT_FAILURE #define EXIT_FAILURE 4 #endif /* Exit value when the requested amount of memory is not available. The caller may set it to some other value. */ int xmalloc_exit_failure = EXIT_FAILURE; #if __STDC__ && (HAVE_VPRINTF || HAVE_DOPRNT) void error (int, int, const char *, ...); #else void error (); #endif static VOID * fixup_null_alloc (n) size_t n; { VOID *p; p = 0; if (n == 0) p = malloc ((size_t) 1); if (p == 0) error (xmalloc_exit_failure, 0, _("memory exhausted")); return p; } /* Allocate N bytes of memory dynamically, with error checking. */ VOID * xmalloc (n) size_t n; { VOID *p; p = malloc (n); if (p == 0) p = fixup_null_alloc (n); return p; } /* Allocate memory for N elements of S bytes, with error checking. */ VOID * xcalloc (n, s) size_t n, s; { VOID *p; p = calloc (n, s); if (p == 0) p = fixup_null_alloc (n); return p; } /* Change the size of an allocated block of memory P to N bytes, with error checking. If P is NULL, run xmalloc. */ VOID * xrealloc (p, n) VOID *p; size_t n; { if (p == 0) return xmalloc (n); p = realloc (p, n); if (p == 0) p = fixup_null_alloc (n); return p; } gettext-0.7/lib/xstrdup.c100444 230 226 2163 5772415550 14335 0ustar pinardguest/* xstrdup.c -- copy a string with out of memory checking Copyright (C) 1990 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include #endif #if defined(STDC_HEADERS) || defined(HAVE_STRING_H) #include #else #include #endif char *xmalloc (); /* Return a newly allocated copy of STRING. */ char * xstrdup (string) char *string; { return strcpy (xmalloc (strlen (string) + 1), string); } gettext-0.7/lib/whoami.c100444 230 226 5675 5772415542 14124 0ustar pinardguest/* Find out who I am & where I am. Copyright (C) 1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include "config.h" #endif /* Size of buffers holding strings. */ #define STRING_BUFFER_SIZE 64 #include #include /* On Ultrix 2.x, uses SYS_NMLEN, which is only defined in . Sigh! */ #ifdef HAVE_UNAME # ifdef HAVE_LIMITS_H # include # endif # include # include #else # include #endif #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H # include #endif #ifndef _POSIX_VERSION struct passwd *getpwuid (); #endif /*----------------. | Get user name. | `----------------*/ static const char * get_username (void) { struct passwd *passwd; passwd = getpwuid (getuid ()); endpwent (); if (passwd == NULL) return "???"; return passwd->pw_name; } /*------------------------------------------------------. | Do uname, gethostname, or read file (/etc/systemid). | `------------------------------------------------------*/ static const char * get_hostname (void) { #if HAVE_ETC_SYSTEMID FILE *fpsid = fopen ("/etc/systemid", "r"); static char buffer[STRING_BUFFER_SIZE]; if (!fpsid) return "???"; fgets (buffer, sizeof (buffer), fpsid); fclose (fpsid); buffer[strlen (buffer) - 1] = 0; return buffer; #else /* not HAVE_ETC_SYSTEMID */ #if HAVE_UNAME static struct utsname hostname_buffer; uname (&hostname_buffer); return hostname_buffer.nodename; #else /* not HAVE_UNAME */ static char hostname_buffer[STRING_BUFFER_SIZE]; gethostname (hostname_buffer, sizeof (hostname_buffer)); return hostname_buffer; #endif /* not HAVE_UNAME */ #endif /* not HAVE_ETC_SYSTEMID */ } /*------------------------------------------------------------------. | Fill BUFFER with a string representing the username and hostname | | separated by an `@' sign, and return a pointer to the constructed | | string. If BUFFER is NULL, use an internal buffer instead. | `------------------------------------------------------------------*/ char * get_submitter (char *buffer) { static char static_buffer[STRING_BUFFER_SIZE]; if (!buffer) buffer = static_buffer; strcpy (buffer, get_username ()); strcat (buffer, "@"); return strcat (buffer, get_hostname ()); } gettext-0.7/intl/ 40755 230 226 0 5776107741 12567 5ustar pinardguestgettext-0.7/intl/ChangeLog100444 230 226 600 5775361751 14412 0ustar pinardguestSun Jul 2 02:06:50 1995 Ulrich Drepper * First official release. This directory contains all the code needed to internationalize own packages. It provides functions which allow to use the X/Open catgets function with an interface like the Uniforum gettext function. For system which does not have neither of those a complete implementation is provided. gettext-0.7/intl/Makefile.in100444 230 226 7142 5776101631 14723 0ustar pinardguest# Makefile for directory with message catalog handling in GNU NLS Utilities. # Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ VERSION = @VERSION@ SHELL = /bin/sh srcdir = @srcdir@ top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ VPATH = @srcdir@ prefix = @prefix@ exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ transform = @program_transform_name@ datadir = $(prefix)/@DATADIRNAME@ localedir = $(datadir)/locale subdir = intl AR = ar CC = @CC@ RANLIB = @RANLIB@ DEFS = -DLOCALEDIR=\"$(localedir)\" @DEFS@ CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ COMPILE = $(CC) -c $(DEFS) $(INCLUDES) $(CPPFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) $(XCFLAGS) HEADERS = gettext.h gettextP.h hash-string.h libgettext.h SOURCES = bindtextdom.c dcgettext.c dgettext.c gettext.c \ finddomain.c loadmsgcat.c textdomain.c cat-compat.c cat-id-tbl.c OBJECTS = @INTLOBJS@ CATOBJS = cat-compat.o cat-id-tbl.o GETTOBJS= bindtextdom.o dcgettext.o dgettext.o gettext.o \ finddomain.o loadmsgcat.o textdomain.o DISTFILES = ChangeLog Makefile.in combine-sh libgettext.perl linux-msg.sed \ makelinks po-to-tbl.sed tupdate.perl.in xopen-msg.sed po-mode.el \ $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) .SUFFIXES: .SUFFIXES: .c .o .c.o: $(COMPILE) $< INCLUDES = -I.. -I. -I$(top_srcdir)/intl -I$(top_srcdir)/lib all: libintl.a libintl.a: $(OBJECTS) rm -f libintl.a $(AR) cru libintl.a $(OBJECTS) $(RANLIB) libintl.a cat-id-tbl.c: stamp-cat-id stamp-cat-id: po-to-tbl.sed ../po/$(PACKAGE).pot rm -f cat-id-tbl.tmp.c cat ../po/$(PACKAGE).pot \ | sed -f $(srcdir)/po-to-tbl.sed \ | sed -e "s/@PACKAGE NAME@/$(PACKAGE)/" > cat-id-tbl.tmp.c if cmp -s cat-id-tbl.tmp.c cat-id-tbl.c; then \ rm cat-id-tbl.tmp.c; \ else \ echo cat-id-tbl.c changed; mv -f cat-id-tbl.tmp.c cat-id-tbl.c; \ fi rm -f stamp-cat-id && echo timestamp > stamp-cat-id ../po/$(PACKAGE).pot: cd ../po && make $(PACKAGE).pot install install-exec install-data: all uninstall: $(OBJECTS): ../config.h libgettext.h bindtextdom.o finddomain.o loadmsgcat.o: gettextP.h gettext.h cat-id-tbl.o: libgettext.h dcgettext.o: gettextP.h gettext.h hash-string.h tags: TAGS TAGS: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) cd $(top_srcdir)/intl \ && etags $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(LIBHDRS) $(LIBSRCS) id: ID ID: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) here=`pwd`; cd $(srcdir) && mkid -f$$here/ID $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) mostlyclean: rm -f *.a *.o core core.* clean: mostlyclean distclean: clean rm -f Makefile TAGS po-to-msg.sed libintl.h maintainer-clean: distclean @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use;" @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." distdir = ../$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)/$(subdir) dist: Makefile $(DISTFILES) for file in $(DISTFILES); do \ ln $$file $(distdir) \ || { echo copying $$file instead; cp -p $$file $(distdir);}; \ done Makefile: Makefile.in ../config.status cd .. && CONFIG_FILES=$(subdir)/$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= ./config.status # Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make not to export all variables. # Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. .NOEXPORT: gettext-0.7/intl/combine-sh100555 230 226 6420 5772417327 14636 0ustar pinardguest#!/bin/sh TMPDIR=/tmp TMPNAME=/tmp/combine1.$$.sed trap 'rm -fr $TMPNAME combine; exit 1' 1 2 15 rm -f $TMPNAME cat > $TMPNAME < combine/libintl.c < #endif #define USE_COMBINED_HEADER 1 #include "libintlP.h" #if HAVE_CATGETS #include #ifdef HAVE_LOCALE_H # include #endif #ifdef HAVE_NL_TYPES_H # include #endif EOF CATCFILES=cat-compat.c GETCFILES="bindtextdom.c dcgettext.c dgettext.c finddomain.c gettext.c \ loadmsgcat.c textdomain.c" for file in $CATCFILES; do sed -f $TMPNAME < $file \ | sed -e '1s/.*/#line & "'$file'"/' >> combine/libintl.c done cat >> combine/libintl.c < #include #include #include #include #include #ifdef HAVE_LOCALE_H # include #endif #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H # include #endif #ifdef HAVE_MMAP # include #endif EOF for file in $GETCFILES; do sed -f $TMPNAME < $file \ | sed -e '1s/.*/#line & "'$file'"/' >> combine/libintl.c done cat >> combine/libintl.c < combine/libintlP.h <> combine/libintlP.h done cat >> combine/libintlP.h <> combine/libintlP.h done cat >> combine/libintlP.h <, 1995. textdomain ("tar"); print &_("Try \`%s --help\' for more information.\n"); exit 0; ## --------------------------------------------------------------- ## ## The `&textdomain (DOMAIN_NAME)' routine reads the given domain ## ## into an associative array %_, able to later translate strings. ## ## --------------------------------------------------------------- ## sub textdomain { local ($language, $catalog, $domain, $buffer); local ($reverse); local ($magic, $revision, $nstrings, $orig_tab_offset, $trans_tab_offset); local ($orig_length, $orig_pointer, $trans_length, $trans_pointer); %_ = (); $language = $ENV{"LANG"}; return if ! $language; $domain = $_[0]; $catalog = "/usr/local/share/locale/$language/LC_MESSAGES/$domain.mo"; open (CATALOG, $catalog) || return; sysread (CATALOG, $buffer, (stat CATALOG)[7]); close CATALOG; $magic = unpack ("I", $buffer); if (sprintf ("%x", $magic) eq "de120495") { $reverse = 1; } elsif (sprintf ("%x", $magic) ne "950412de") { die "Not a catalog file\n"; } $revision = &mo_format_value (4); $nstrings = &mo_format_value (8); $orig_tab_offset = &mo_format_value (12); $trans_tab_offset = &mo_format_value (16); while ($nstrings-- > 0) { $orig_length = &mo_format_value ($orig_tab_offset); $orig_pointer = &mo_format_value ($orig_tab_offset + 4); $orig_tab_offset += 8; $trans_length = &mo_format_value ($trans_tab_offset); $trans_pointer = &mo_format_value ($trans_tab_offset + 4); $trans_tab_offset += 8; $_{substr ($buffer, $orig_pointer, $orig_length)} = substr ($buffer, $trans_pointer, $trans_length); } } ## ----------------------------------------------------------------- ## ## The `&mo_format_value (ADDRESS)' routine returns the value at a ## ## given address in the .mo format catalog, once read into $buffer ## ## by `&textdomain'. This is a service routine of `&textdomain', ## ## which uses $buffer and $reverse variables local in that routine. ## ## ----------------------------------------------------------------- ## sub mo_format_value { unpack ("i", $reverse ? pack ("c4", reverse unpack ("c4", substr ($buffer, $_[0], 4))) : substr ($buffer, $_[0], 4)); } ## ------------------------------------------------------------ ## ## The `&_(STRING)' routine translates STRING if there is some ## ## translation offered for it in the `%_' associative array, or ## ## return STRING itself, otherwize. ## ## ------------------------------------------------------------ ## sub _ { defined $_{$_[0]} ? $_{$_[0]} : $_[0]; } gettext-0.7/intl/linux-msg.sed100555 230 226 5140 5775734314 15306 0ustar pinardguest# po-to-msg.sed - Convert Uniforum style .po file to Linux style .msg file # Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # Ulrich Drepper , 1995. # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. # # # The first directive in the .msg should be the definition of the # message set number. We use always set number 1. # 1 { i\ $set 1 # Automatically created by po-to-msg h s/.*/0/ x } # # Mitch's old catalog format does not allow comments. # # We copy the original message as a comment into the .msg file. # /^msgid/ { s/msgid[ ]*"// # # This does not work now with the new format. # /"$/! { # s/\\$// # s/$/ ... (more lines following)"/ # } x # The following nice solution is by # Bruno td # Increment a decimal number in pattern space. # First hide trailing `9' digits. :d s/9\(_*\)$/_\1/ td # Assure at least one digit is available. s/^\(_*\)$/0\1/ # Increment the last digit. s/8\(_*\)$/9\1/ s/7\(_*\)$/8\1/ s/6\(_*\)$/7\1/ s/5\(_*\)$/6\1/ s/4\(_*\)$/5\1/ s/3\(_*\)$/4\1/ s/2\(_*\)$/3\1/ s/1\(_*\)$/2\1/ s/0\(_*\)$/1\1/ # Convert the hidden `9' digits to `0's. s/_/0/g x G s/\(.*\)"\n0*\(.*\)/$ #\2 Original Message:(\1)/p } # # The .msg file contains, other then the .po file, only the translations # but each given a unique ID. Starting from 1 and incrementing by 1 for # each message we assign them to the messages. # It is important that the .po file used to generate the cat-id-tbl.c file # (with po-to-tbl) is the same as the one used here. (At least the order # of declarations must not be changed.) # /^msgstr/ { s/msgstr[ ]*"\(.*\)"/# \1/ # Append the next line :b N # Look whether second part is continuation line s/\(.*\n\)"\(.*\)"/\1\2/ # yes, then branch ta P D # Note that D includes a jump to the start!! # We found a continuation line. But before printing insert '\' :a s/\(.*\)\(\n.*\)/\1\\\2/ P # We cannot use D here s/.*\n\(.*\)/\1/ bb } dgettext-0.7/intl/makelinks100555 230 226 3207 5776047426 14573 0ustar pinardguest#!/bin/sh # # Copyright (C) 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. # # This file is meant for author or maintainers which want to internationalize # their package with the help of GNU gettext. For further information # how to use it consult the GNU gettext manual. # if test $# -ne 1; then echo "Usage: $0 " exit 1 fi if test ! -d $1/intl -o ! -d $1/po; then echo $1 seems not to be the GNU gettext directory exit 1 fi gettext_dir=$1 mkdir intl po intl_files="Makefile.in combine-sh libgettext.perl linux-msg.sed \ makelinks po-to-tbl.sed tupdate.perl.in xopen-msg.sed po-mode.el \ gettext.h gettextP.h hash-string.h libgettext.h \ bindtextdom.c dcgettext.c dgettext.c gettext.c finddomain.c loadmsgcat.c \ textdomain.c cat-compat.c" po_files=Makefile.in.in (cd intl && for file in $intl_files; do echo linking intl/$file ln -s $gettext_dir/intl/$file . done) (cd po && for file in $po_files; do echo linking po/$file ln -s $gettext_dir/po/$file . done) gettext-0.7/intl/po-to-tbl.sed100555 230 226 4341 5775737066 15211 0ustar pinardguest# po-to-tbl.sed - Convert Uniforum style .po file to lookup table for catgets # Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # Ulrich Drepper , 1995. # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. # # 1 { i\ /* Automatically generated by po-to-tbl from @PACKAGE NAME@.pot. */\ \ #if HAVE_CONFIG_H\ # include \ #endif\ \ #include "libgettext.h"\ \ const struct _msg_ent _msg_tbl[] = { h s/.*/0/ x } # # Write msgid entries in C array form. # /^msgid/ { s/msgid[ ]*\(".*"\)/ {\1/ # Append the next line :b N # Look whether second part is continuation line s/\(.*\)"\(\n\)"\(.*"\)/\1\2\3/ # yes, then branch ta # Because we assume that the input file correctly formed the line # just read cannot be again be a msgid line. So it's safe to ignore # it. s/\(.*\)\n.*/\1/ bc # We found a continuation line. But before printing insert '\' :a s/\(.*\)\(\n.*\)/\1\\\2/ P # We cannot use D here s/.*\n\(.*\)/\1/ bb :c x # The following nice solution is by # Bruno td # Increment a decimal number in pattern space. # First hide trailing `9' digits. :d s/9\(_*\)$/_\1/ td # Assure at least one digit is available. s/^\(_*\)$/0\1/ # Increment the last digit. s/8\(_*\)$/9\1/ s/7\(_*\)$/8\1/ s/6\(_*\)$/7\1/ s/5\(_*\)$/6\1/ s/4\(_*\)$/5\1/ s/3\(_*\)$/4\1/ s/2\(_*\)$/3\1/ s/1\(_*\)$/2\1/ s/0\(_*\)$/1\1/ # Convert the hidden `9' digits to `0's. s/_/0/g x G s/\(.*\)\n0*\(.*\)/\1, \2},/ s/\(.*\)"$/\1/ p } # # Last line # $ { i\ };\ g s/0*\(.*\)/int _msg_tbl_length = \1;/p } d gettext-0.7/intl/tupdate.perl.in100555 230 226 10771 5776107117 15647 0ustar pinardguest#! @PERL@ -- # -*-Perl-*- eval "exec /usr/local/bin/perl -S $0 $*" if $running_under_some_shell; # Combine a new .po file and an old translated .po file to a new translation. # Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # Ulrich Drepper , May 1995. # # To be compatible with Perl4 we don't use localtime here. ;# ctime.pl is a simple Perl emulation for the well known ctime(3C) function. ;# ;# Waldemar Kebsch, Federal Republic of Germany, November 1988 ;# kebsch.pad@nixpbe.UUCP ;# Modified March 1990, Feb 1991 to properly handle timezones ;# $Id: tupdate.perl.in,v 1.10 1995/07/04 00:41:51 drepper Exp $ ;# Marion Hakanson (hakanson@cse.ogi.edu) ;# Oregon Graduate Institute of Science and Technology ;# ;# usage: ;# ;# #include # see the -P and -I option in perl.man ;# $Date = &ctime(time); CONFIG: { package ctime; @DoW = ('Sun','Mon','Tue','Wed','Thu','Fri','Sat'); @MoY = ('Jan','Feb','Mar','Apr','May','Jun', 'Jul','Aug','Sep','Oct','Nov','Dec'); } sub ctime { package ctime; local($time) = @_; local($sec, $min, $hour, $mday, $mon, $year, $wday, $yday, $isdst); # Determine what time zone is in effect. # Use GMT if TZ is defined as null, local time if TZ undefined. # There's no portable way to find the system default timezone. $TZ = defined($ENV{'TZ'}) ? ( $ENV{'TZ'} ? $ENV{'TZ'} : 'GMT' ) : ''; ($sec, $min, $hour, $mday, $mon, $year, $wday, $yday, $isdst) = ($TZ eq 'GMT') ? gmtime($time) : localtime($time); # Hack to deal with 'PST8PDT' format of TZ # Note that this can't deal with all the esoteric forms, but it # does recognize the most common: [:]STDoff[DST[off][,rule]] if($TZ=~/^([^:\d+\-,]{3,})([+-]?\d{1,2}(:\d{1,2}){0,2})([^\d+\-,]{3,})?/){ $TZ = $isdst ? $4 : $1; } $TZ .= ' ' unless $TZ eq ''; $year += ($year < 70) ? 2000 : 1900; sprintf("%s %s %2d %2d:%02d:%02d %s%4d\n", $DoW[$wday], $MoY[$mon], $mday, $hour, $min, $sec, $TZ, $year); } 1; # We take exactly two arguments. # if ($#ARGV != 1) { die "Usage: tupdate.perl NEW-PO OLD-TRANS\n"; } unless (open(OLD, "$ARGV[1]")) { die "Cannot open old translated .po file '$ARGV[1]'\n"; } $last_was_special = 0; $have_special = 0; while () { if (/^msgid[ \t]*/) { $_ =~ s/^msgid[ \t]*//; $msgid = $_; $_ = ; $last_was_special = 1 unless ($msgid ne "\"\"\n" || /^"/); while (/^"/) { $msgid = "$msgid$_"; $_ = ; } } if (/^msgstr/) { $_ =~ s/^msgstr[ \t]*//; $msgstr = $_; $_ = ; while (/^"/) { $msgstr = "$msgstr$_"; $_ = ; } if ($last_was_special == 0) { $translate{$msgid} = $msgstr; } else { $special_entry = $msgstr; $have_special = 1; $last_was_special = 0; } } } close (OLD); unless (open (NEW, "$ARGV[0]")) { die "Cannot open new .po file '$ARGV[0]'\n"; } # to be sure $last_was_special = 0; $first_msgstr_output = 1; while () { if (/^msgid[ \t]*/) { print; $_ =~ s/^msgid[ \t]*//; $msgid = $_; $_ = ; $last_was_special = 1 unless ($msgid ne "\"\"\n" || /^"/); while (/^"/) { print; $msgid = "$msgid$_"; $_ = ; } } if (/^msgstr/) { $_ =~ s/^msgstr[ \t]*//; $msgstr = $_; $_ = ; while (/^"/) { $msgstr = "$msgstr$_"; $_ = ; } if ($last_was_special != 0) { # The new translated .po file should contain the special # information entry of the old translated file. But if # later does not contain one we generate it by copying # from the new .po file. $special_entry = $msgstr if ($have_special == 0); $today = &ctime (time); chop $today; $special_entry =~ s/Updated: .*/Updated: $today\\n"/; printf "msgstr $special_entry"; $last_was_special = 0; } elsif (defined $translate{$msgid}) { print "msgstr $translate{$msgid}"; delete $translate{$msgid} } else { print "msgstr $msgstr"; } } print; } if (%translate) { print "#\n#\n# Formerly defined translations not used anymore:\n#\n"; foreach $key (keys %translate) { $escaped = $key; chop $escape; $escaped =~ s/\n/\n# /g; print "# msgid $escaped"; $escaped = $translate{$key}; $escaped =~ s/\n/\n# /g; print "msgstr \"$escaped\n"; } } exit 0; gettext-0.7/intl/xopen-msg.sed100555 230 226 5163 5775734330 15303 0ustar pinardguest# po-to-msg.sed - Convert Uniforum style .po file to X/Open style .msg file # Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # Ulrich Drepper , 1995. # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. # # # The first directive in the .msg should be the definition of the # message set number. We use always set number 1. # 1 { i\ $set 1 # Automatically created by po-to-msg h s/.*/0/ x } # # We copy all comments into the .msg file. Perhaps they can help. # /^#/ s/^#[ ]*/$ /p # # We copy the original message as a comment into the .msg file. # /^msgid/ { # Does not work now # /"$/! { # s/\\$// # s/$/ ... (more lines following)"/ # } s/^msgid[ ]*"\(.*\)"$/$ Original Message: \1/p } # # The .msg file contains, other then the .po file, only the translations # but each given a unique ID. Starting from 1 and incrementing by 1 for # each message we assign them to the messages. # It is important that the .po file used to generate the cat-id-tbl.c file # (with po-to-tbl) is the same as the one used here. (At least the order # of declarations must not be changed.) # /^msgstr/ { s/msgstr[ ]*"\(.*\)"/\1/ x # The following nice solution is by # Bruno td # Increment a decimal number in pattern space. # First hide trailing `9' digits. :d s/9\(_*\)$/_\1/ td # Assure at least one digit is available. s/^\(_*\)$/0\1/ # Increment the last digit. s/8\(_*\)$/9\1/ s/7\(_*\)$/8\1/ s/6\(_*\)$/7\1/ s/5\(_*\)$/6\1/ s/4\(_*\)$/5\1/ s/3\(_*\)$/4\1/ s/2\(_*\)$/3\1/ s/1\(_*\)$/2\1/ s/0\(_*\)$/1\1/ # Convert the hidden `9' digits to `0's. s/_/0/g x G s/\(.*\)\n0*\(.*\)/\2 \1/ # Append the next line :b N # Look whether second part is continuation line s/\(.*\n\)"\(.*\)"/\1\2/ # yes, then branch ta P D # Note that D includes a jump to the start!! # We found a continuation line. But before printing insert '\' :a s/\(.*\)\(\n.*\)/\1\\\2/ P # We cannot use D here s/.*\n\(.*\)/\1/ bb } d gettext-0.7/intl/po-mode.el100444 230 226 100360 5776015171 14577 0ustar pinardguest;;; po-mode.el -- for helping GNU gettext lovers to edit `.po' files. ;;; Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. ;;; François Pinard , 1995. ;;; Help from Greg McGary . ;; This file is part of GNU gettext. ;; GNU gettext is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify ;; it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by ;; the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) ;; any later version. ;; GNU gettext is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, ;; but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of ;; MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the ;; GNU General Public License for more details. ;; You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License ;; along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the ;; Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, ;; MA 02111-1307, USA. ;;; This package provides the tools meant to help editing .po files, ;;; as documented in the GNU gettext user's manual. See this manual ;;; for user documentation, which is not repeated here. ;;; To install, merely put this file somewhere GNU Emacs will find it, ;;; then add the following lines to your .emacs file: ;;; ;;; (setq auto-mode-alist (cons (cons "\\.po\\'" 'po-mode) auto-mode-alist)) ;;; (autoload 'po-mode "po-mode") (defvar po-help-display-string " Summary of PO mode Commands (* means yet to come) Any Type of Entry Obsolete Entries Untranslated Entries n, SPC Find next M-n, M-SPC Find next e Find next p, DEL Find previous M-p, M-DEL Find previous M-e Find previous . Redisplay TAB Init from msgid < First q quit u undo > Last o other window = position *s To compendium z Fade out h, ? help v validate *M-s Select, save Position Stack Translations Translator Comments m Push current RET Call editor M-RET, # Call editor l Pop and return k Kill to ring M-k Kill to ring x Exchange top w Copy to ring M-w Copy to ring y Yank from ring M-y Yank from ring gettext Keyword Marking Program Sources Auxiliary Files *, Find next string c Cycle reference *a Cycle file *M-, Mark translatable M-c Select reference *M-a Select file *M-. Change mark, mark d Add to path *f Add file M-d Delete from path *M-f Delete file ") (defvar po-any-msgid-regexp "^\\(#[ \t]*\\)?msgid.*\n\\(\\(#[ \t]*\\)?\".*\n\\)*" "Regexp matching a whole msgid field, whether obsolete or not.") (defvar po-any-msgstr-regexp "^\\(#[ \t]*\\)?msgstr.*\n\\(\\(#[ \t]*\\)?\".*\n\\)*" "Regexp matching a whole msgstr field, whether obsolete or not.") ;;; Mode activation. (defvar po-mode-map nil "Keymap for PO mode.") (if po-mode-map () (setq po-mode-map (make-sparse-keymap)) (suppress-keymap po-mode-map) (define-key po-mode-map "\C-i" 'po-msgid-to-msgstr) (define-key po-mode-map "\C-m" 'po-edit-msgstr) (define-key po-mode-map " " 'po-next-entry) (define-key po-mode-map "?" 'po-help) (define-key po-mode-map "#" 'po-edit-comment) ;;;; (define-key po-mode-map "," 'po-tags-search) (define-key po-mode-map "." 'po-current-entry) (define-key po-mode-map "<" 'po-first-entry) (define-key po-mode-map "=" 'po-statistics) (define-key po-mode-map ">" 'po-last-entry) ;;;; (define-key po-mode-map "a" 'po-cycle-auxiliary) (define-key po-mode-map "c" 'po-cycle-reference) (define-key po-mode-map "d" 'po-add-path) (define-key po-mode-map "e" 'po-next-untranslated-entry) ;;;; (define-key po-mode-map "f" 'po-add-auxiliary) (define-key po-mode-map "h" 'po-help) (define-key po-mode-map "k" 'po-kill-msgstr) (define-key po-mode-map "l" 'po-pop-location) (define-key po-mode-map "m" 'po-push-location) (define-key po-mode-map "n" 'po-next-entry) (define-key po-mode-map "p" 'po-previous-entry) (define-key po-mode-map "o" 'po-other-window) (define-key po-mode-map "q" 'po-quit) ;;;; (define-key po-mode-map "s" 'po-save-entry) (define-key po-mode-map "u" 'po-undo) (define-key po-mode-map "v" 'po-validate) (define-key po-mode-map "w" 'po-kill-ring-save-msgstr) (define-key po-mode-map "y" 'po-yank-msgstr) (define-key po-mode-map "x" 'po-exchange-location) (define-key po-mode-map "z" 'po-fade-out-entry) (define-key po-mode-map "\177" 'po-previous-entry) (define-key po-mode-map "\M-\C-m" 'po-edit-comment) (define-key po-mode-map "\M- " 'po-next-obsolete-entry) ;;;; (define-key po-mode-map "\M-," 'po-mark-translatable) ;;;; (define-key po-mode-map "\M-." 'po-select-mark-and-mark) ;;;; (define-key po-mode-map "\M-a" 'po-select-auxiliary) (define-key po-mode-map "\M-c" 'po-select-reference) (define-key po-mode-map "\M-d" 'po-delete-path) (define-key po-mode-map "\M-e" 'po-previous-untranslated-entry) ;;;; (define-key po-mode-map "\M-f" 'po-delete-auxiliary) (define-key po-mode-map "\M-k" 'po-kill-comment) (define-key po-mode-map "\M-n" 'po-next-obsolete-entry) (define-key po-mode-map "\M-p" 'po-previous-obsolete-entry) ;;;; (define-key po-mode-map "\M-s" 'po-select-and-save-entry) (define-key po-mode-map "\M-w" 'po-kill-ring-save-comment) (define-key po-mode-map "\M-y" 'po-yank-comment) (define-key po-mode-map "\M-\177" 'po-previous-obsolete-entry)) (defvar po-edit-mode-map nil "Keymap while editing a PO mode entry.") (if po-edit-mode-map () (setq po-edit-mode-map (make-sparse-keymap)) (define-key po-edit-mode-map "\C-c\C-c" 'exit-recursive-edit)) (defun po-mode () "Major mode for translators when they edit `.po' files. Special commands:\\{po-mode-map} Turning on PO mode calls the value of the variable `po-mode-hooks', if that value is non-nil." (interactive) (kill-all-local-variables) (setq major-mode 'po-mode) (setq mode-name "PO") (use-local-map po-mode-map) (setq buffer-read-only t) ;; The current entry extends from START-OF-ENTRY to END-OF-ENTRY, ;; and the line containing the msgstr keyword line starts at ;; MIDDLE-OF-ENTRY. OBSOLETE-FLAG is t for all commented entries. (make-local-variable 'po-start-of-entry) (make-local-variable 'po-middle-of-entry) (make-local-variable 'po-end-of-entry) (make-local-variable 'po-obsolete-flag) ;; A WORK-BUFFER is associated with this `.po' file, for edition ;; and other various tasks. WORK-BUFFER-LOCK indicates that ;; the work buffer is already in use, most probably editing some ;; string through Emacs recursive edit. In this case, one cannot ;; modify the buffer. (make-local-variable 'po-work-buffer) (make-local-variable 'po-work-buffer-lock) (setq po-work-buffer (generate-new-buffer (concat "*Edit " (buffer-name nil) "*"))) (setq po-work-buffer-lock nil) ;; We maintain a set of movable pointers for returning to entries. (make-local-variable 'po-marker-stack) (setq po-marker-stack nil) ;; SEARCH path contains a list of directories where files may be ;; found, in a format suitable for read completion. Each directory ;; includes its trailing slash. PO mode starts with "./" only. (make-local-variable 'po-search-path) (setq po-search-path '(("./"))) ;; The following variables are meaningful only when REFERENCE-CHECK ;; is identical to START-OF-ENTRY, else they should be recomputed. ;; REFERENCE-ALIST contains all known references for the current entry, ;; each list element is (PROMPT FILE LINE), where PROMPT may be ;; used for completing read, FILE is a string and LINE is a number. ;; REFERENCE-CURSOR is a cycling cursor into REFERENCE-ALIST. (make-local-variable 'po-reference-alist) (make-local-variable 'po-reference-cursor) (make-local-variable 'po-reference-check) (setq po-reference-alist nil) (setq po-reference-cursor nil) (setq po-reference-check 0) (run-hooks 'po-mode-hooks)) ;;; Window management. (defun po-redisplay () "Redisplay the current entry." (goto-char po-middle-of-entry)) (defun po-other-window () "Get the cursor into another window, out of PO mode." (interactive) (if (one-window-p t) (progn (split-window) (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer))) (other-window 1))) (defun po-check-lock () "Ensure that GNU Emacs is not currently in recursive edit for PO mode." (if po-work-buffer-lock (progn (pop-to-buffer po-work-buffer) (if (y-or-n-p "Here is your current edit. Do you wish to abort it? ") (abort-recursive-edit) (error "Type `C-c C-c' once done"))))) ;;; Identifying the span of an entry. (defun po-find-span-of-entry () "Find the extent of the .po file entry where the cursor is. Set variables PO-START-OF-ENTRY, PO-MIDDLE-OF-ENTRY, PO-END-OF-ENTRY and PO-OBSOLETE-FLAG to meaningful values." (let ((here (point))) (if (re-search-backward po-any-msgstr-regexp nil t) (progn ;; After a backward match, under Emacs 19.22 at least, ;; (match-end 0) will not extend beyond point, in case ;; point was *inside* the regexp. We need a dependable ;; (match-end 0), so we redo the match in the forward ;; direction and use (point) instead. (re-search-forward po-any-msgstr-regexp) (if (<= (point) here) ;; The cursor was before msgstr of its own entry, ;; so we just found the msgstr of the previous entry. (progn (setq po-start-of-entry (point)) (if (re-search-forward po-any-msgstr-regexp nil t) (progn (setq po-middle-of-entry (match-beginning 0)) (setq po-end-of-entry (match-end 0))) ;; There is no msgstr to this entry, so we ought to ;; be in the crumb after the last entry in the file. (error "After last entry"))) ;; The cursor was inside msgstr of the current entry. (setq po-middle-of-entry (match-beginning 0)) (setq po-end-of-entry (match-end 0)) (goto-char (match-beginning 0)) (if (re-search-backward po-any-msgstr-regexp nil t) ;; This is not the first entry in the file. (progn (goto-char (match-end 0)) (setq po-start-of-entry (point))) ;; This is the first entry in the file. (setq po-start-of-entry (point-min))))) ;; The cursor was before msgstr in the first entry in the file. (goto-char (point-min)) (setq po-start-of-entry (point)) (if (re-search-forward po-any-msgstr-regexp nil t) (progn (setq po-middle-of-entry (match-beginning 0)) (setq po-end-of-entry (match-end 0))) ;; In fact, there is absolutely no entry in the file. (goto-char here) (error "No entries"))) (goto-char here)) (setq po-obsolete-flag (eq (char-after po-middle-of-entry) ?#))) ;;; Entry positionning. (defun po-push-location () "Stack the location of the current entry, for later return." (interactive) (po-find-span-of-entry) (save-excursion (goto-char po-middle-of-entry) (setq po-marker-stack (cons (point-marker) po-marker-stack))) (message "Location stack size: %d" (length po-marker-stack))) (defun po-pop-location () "Unstack a saved location, and return to the corresponding entry." (interactive) (if po-marker-stack (progn (goto-char (car po-marker-stack)) (setq po-marker-stack (cdr po-marker-stack)) (po-current-entry) (message "Location stack size: %d" (length po-marker-stack))) (error "The entry location stack is empty"))) (defun po-exchange-location () "Exchange the location of the current entry with the top of stack." (interactive) (if po-marker-stack (progn (po-find-span-of-entry) (goto-char po-middle-of-entry) (let ((location (point-marker))) (goto-char (car po-marker-stack)) (setq po-marker-stack (cons location (cdr po-marker-stack)))) (po-current-entry) (message "Location stack size: %d" (length po-marker-stack))) (error "The entry location stack is empty"))) (defun po-current-entry () "Display the current entry." (interactive) (po-find-span-of-entry) (po-redisplay)) (defun po-first-entry-with-regexp (regexp) "Display the first entry in the file which msgstr matches REGEXP." (let ((here (point))) (goto-char (point-min)) (if (re-search-forward regexp nil t) (progn (goto-char (match-beginning 0)) (po-current-entry)) (goto-char here) (error "There is no such entry")))) (defun po-last-entry-with-regexp (regexp) "Display the last entry in the file which msgstr matches REGEXP." (let ((here (point))) (goto-char (point-max)) (if (re-search-backward regexp nil t) (po-current-entry) (goto-char here) (error "There is no such entry")))) (defun po-next-entry-with-regexp (regexp wrap) "Display the entry following the current entry which msgstr matches REGEXP. If WRAP is not nil, the search may wrap around the buffer." (po-find-span-of-entry) (let ((here (point))) (goto-char po-end-of-entry) (if (re-search-forward regexp nil t) (progn (goto-char (match-beginning 0)) (po-current-entry)) (if (and wrap (progn (goto-char (point-min)) (re-search-forward regexp po-start-of-entry t))) (progn (goto-char (match-beginning 0)) (po-current-entry) (message "Wrapping around the buffer")) (goto-char here) (error "There is no such entry"))))) (defun po-previous-entry-with-regexp (regexp wrap) "Redisplay the entry preceding the current entry which msgstr matches REGEXP. If WRAP is not nil, the search may wrap around the buffer." (po-find-span-of-entry) (let ((here (point))) (goto-char po-start-of-entry) (if (re-search-backward regexp nil t) (po-current-entry) (if (and wrap (progn (goto-char (point-max)) (re-search-backward regexp po-end-of-entry t))) (progn (po-current-entry) (message "Wrapping around the buffer")) (goto-char here) (error "There is no such entry"))))) ;; Any entries. (defun po-first-entry () "Display the first entry." (interactive) (po-first-entry-with-regexp po-any-msgstr-regexp)) (defun po-last-entry () "Display the last entry." (interactive) (po-last-entry-with-regexp po-any-msgstr-regexp)) (defun po-next-entry () "Display the entry following the current entry." (interactive) (po-next-entry-with-regexp po-any-msgstr-regexp nil)) (defun po-previous-entry () "Display the entry preceding the current entry." (interactive) (po-previous-entry-with-regexp po-any-msgstr-regexp nil)) ;; Untranslated entries. (defvar po-after-entry-regexp "\\(\\'\\|\\(#[ \t]*\\)?[^\"]\\)" "Regexp which should be true after a full msgstr string matched.") (defvar po-empty-msgstr-regexp (concat "^msgstr[ \t]*\"\"\n" po-after-entry-regexp) "Regexp matching a whole msgstr field, but only if active and empty.") (defun po-next-untranslated-entry () "Find the next untranslated entry, wrapping around if necessary." (interactive) (po-next-entry-with-regexp po-empty-msgstr-regexp t)) (defun po-previous-untranslated-entry () "Find the previous untranslated entry, wrapping around if necessary." (interactive) (po-previous-entry-with-regexp po-empty-msgstr-regexp t)) ;; Obsolete entries. (defvar po-obsolete-msgstr-regexp "^#[ \t]*msgstr.*\n\\(#[ \t]*\".*\n\\)*" "Regexp matching a whole msgstr field of an obsolete entry.") (defun po-next-obsolete-entry () "Find the next obsolete entry, wrapping around if necessary." (interactive) (po-next-entry-with-regexp po-obsolete-msgstr-regexp t)) (defun po-previous-obsolete-entry () "Find the previous obsolete entry, wrapping around if necessary." (interactive) (po-previous-entry-with-regexp po-obsolete-msgstr-regexp t)) ;;; Killing and yanking fields. (defun po-get-field (msgid kill-flag) "Extract and return the unquoted the msgstr string, unless MSGID. If MSGID, return the unquoted msgid string instead. If KILL-FLAG, then add the unquoted string to the kill ring." (let ((buffer (current-buffer)) (middle po-middle-of-entry) (end po-end-of-entry) (obsolete po-obsolete-flag)) (save-excursion (goto-char po-start-of-entry) (if msgid (progn (re-search-forward po-any-msgid-regexp po-end-of-entry t) (set-buffer po-work-buffer) (erase-buffer) (insert-buffer-substring buffer (match-beginning 0) (match-end 0))) (set-buffer po-work-buffer) (erase-buffer) (insert-buffer-substring buffer middle end)) (goto-char (point-min)) (search-forward "\"") (delete-region (point-min) (point)) (goto-char (point-max)) (search-backward "\"") (delete-region (point) (point-max)) (goto-char (point-min)) (while (re-search-forward "\"[ \t]*\\\\?\n#?[ \t]*\"" nil t) (replace-match "" t t)) (goto-char (point-min)) (while (re-search-forward "\\\\[\\\"abfnt\\\\]" nil t) (cond ((eq (preceding-char) ?\") (replace-match "\"" t t)) ((eq (preceding-char) ?a) (replace-match "\a" t t)) ((eq (preceding-char) ?b) (replace-match "\b" t t)) ((eq (preceding-char) ?f) (replace-match "\f" t t)) ((eq (preceding-char) ?n) (replace-match "\n" t t)) ((eq (preceding-char) ?t) (replace-match "\t" t t)) ((eq (preceding-char) ?\\) (replace-match "\\" t t)))) (and kill-flag (copy-region-as-kill (point-min) (point-max))) (buffer-string)))) (defun po-set-field (msgid form) "Replace the current msgstr, unless MSGID, using FORM to get a string. If MSGID is true, replace the current msgid instead. In either case, evaluating FORM should insert the wanted string in the current buffer. If FORM is itself a string, then this string is used for insertion. The string is properly requoted before the replacement occurs." (po-check-lock) (let ((buffer (current-buffer)) (obsolete po-obsolete-flag) string) (save-excursion (set-buffer po-work-buffer) (erase-buffer) (if (stringp form) (insert form) (push-mark) (eval form)) (goto-char (point-min)) (let ((single-line (not (re-search-forward "[^\n]\n+[^\n]" nil t)))) (goto-char (point-min)) (while (re-search-forward "[\\\"\a\b\f\n\t\\\\]" nil t) (cond ((eq (preceding-char) ?\") (replace-match "\\\"" t t)) ((eq (preceding-char) ?\a) (replace-match "\\a" t t)) ((eq (preceding-char) ?\b) (replace-match "\\b" t t)) ((eq (preceding-char) ?\f) (replace-match "\\f" t t)) ((eq (preceding-char) ?\n) (replace-match (if (or single-line (eobp)) "\\n" "\\n\"\n\"") t t)) ((eq (preceding-char) ?\t) (replace-match "\\t" t t)) ((eq (preceding-char) ?\\) (replace-match "\\\\" t t)))) (goto-char (point-min)) (insert (if msgid "msgid" "msgstr")) (insert (if single-line " \"" " \"\"\n\"")) (goto-char (point-max)) (insert "\"\n") (if obsolete (progn (goto-char (point-min)) (while (not (eobp)) (insert "# ") (search-forward "\n")))) (setq string (buffer-string)))) (goto-char po-start-of-entry) (re-search-forward (if msgid po-any-msgid-regexp po-any-msgstr-regexp) po-end-of-entry) (if (not (string-equal (buffer-substring (match-beginning 0) (match-end 0)) string)) (let ((buffer-read-only nil)) (replace-match string t t))) (if msgid (progn (re-search-forward po-any-msgstr-regexp) (setq po-middle-of-entry (match-beginning 0)) (setq po-end-of-entry (match-end 0))) (setq po-end-of-entry (point)))) (po-redisplay)) (defun po-kill-ring-save-msgstr () "Push the msgstr string from current entry on the kill ring." (interactive) (po-find-span-of-entry) (po-get-field nil t)) (defun po-kill-msgstr () "Empty the msgstr string from current entry, pushing it on the kill ring." (interactive) (po-kill-ring-save-msgstr) (po-set-field nil "") (po-redisplay)) (defun po-yank-msgstr () "Replace the current msgstr string by the top of the kill ring." (interactive) (po-find-span-of-entry) (po-set-field nil (if (eq last-command 'yank) '(yank-pop 1) '(yank))) (setq this-command 'yank) (po-redisplay)) (defun po-msgid-to-msgstr () "Replace the current msgstr with a copy of the msgid string." (interactive) (po-find-span-of-entry) (po-set-field nil (po-get-field t nil)) (po-redisplay)) (defun po-fade-out-entry () "Obsolete an active entry, or completely delete an obsolete entry. When an entry is completely deleted, its msgstr is put on the kill ring." (interactive) (po-check-lock) (po-find-span-of-entry) (if po-obsolete-flag (progn (po-get-field nil t) (let ((buffer-read-only nil)) (delete-region po-start-of-entry po-end-of-entry)) (goto-char po-start-of-entry) (if (re-search-forward po-any-msgstr-regexp nil t) (goto-char (match-beginning 0)) (re-search-backward po-any-msgstr-regexp nil t)) (po-current-entry)) (save-excursion (save-restriction (narrow-to-region po-start-of-entry po-end-of-entry) (let ((buffer-read-only nil)) (goto-char (point-min)) (while (not (eobp)) (or (eq (following-char) ?\n) (insert "# ")) (search-forward "\n"))))) (setq po-obsolete-flag t))) ;;; Killing and yanking comments. (defvar po-active-comment-regexp "^\\(#\n\\|# .*\n\\)+" "Regexp matching the whole editable comment part of an active entry.") (defvar po-obsolete-comment-regexp "^\\(# #\n\\|# # .*\n\\)+" "Regexp matching the whole editable comment part of an obsolete entry.") (defun po-get-comment (kill-flag) "Extract and return the editable comment string, uncommented. If KILL-FLAG, then add the unquoted comment to the kill ring." (let ((buffer (current-buffer)) (obsolete po-obsolete-flag)) (save-excursion (goto-char po-start-of-entry) (if (re-search-forward (if obsolete po-obsolete-comment-regexp po-active-comment-regexp) po-end-of-entry t) (progn (set-buffer po-work-buffer) (erase-buffer) (insert-buffer-substring buffer (match-beginning 0) (match-end 0)) (goto-char (point-min)) (while (not (eobp)) (if (looking-at (if obsolete "# # ?" "# ?")) (replace-match "" t t)) (forward-line 1)) (and kill-flag (copy-region-as-kill (point-min) (point-max))) (buffer-string)) "")))) (defun po-set-comment (form) "Using FORM to get a string, replace the current editable comment. Evaluating FORM should insert the wanted string in the current buffer. If FORM is itself a string, then this string is used for insertion. The string is properly recommented before the replacement occurs." (po-check-lock) (let ((buffer (current-buffer)) (obsolete po-obsolete-flag) string) (save-excursion (set-buffer po-work-buffer) (erase-buffer) (if (stringp form) (insert form) (push-mark) (eval form)) (if (not (or (bobp) (= (preceding-char) ?\n))) (insert "\n")) (goto-char (point-min)) (while (not (eobp)) (insert (if (= (following-char) ?\n) (if obsolete "# #" "#") (if obsolete "# # " "# "))) (search-forward "\n")) (setq string (buffer-string))) (goto-char po-start-of-entry) (if (and (re-search-forward (if obsolete po-obsolete-comment-regexp po-active-comment-regexp) po-end-of-entry t) (not (string-equal (buffer-substring (match-beginning 0) (match-end 0)) string))) (let ((buffer-read-only nil)) (replace-match string t t)) (skip-chars-forward " \t\n") (let ((buffer-read-only nil)) (insert string)))) (re-search-forward po-any-msgstr-regexp) (setq po-middle-of-entry (match-beginning 0)) (setq po-end-of-entry (match-end 0)) (po-redisplay)) (defun po-kill-ring-save-comment () "Push the msgstr string from current entry on the kill ring." (interactive) (po-find-span-of-entry) (po-get-comment t)) (defun po-kill-comment () "Empty the msgstr string from current entry, pushing it on the kill ring." (interactive) (po-kill-ring-save-comment) (po-set-comment "") (po-redisplay)) (defun po-yank-comment () "Replace the current comment string by the top of the kill ring." (interactive) (po-find-span-of-entry) (po-set-comment (if (eq last-command 'yank) '(yank-pop 1) '(yank))) (setq this-command 'yank) (po-redisplay)) ;;; Editing translations. (defun po-edit-string (string) "Edit STRING recursively in a pop-up buffer, return the edited string. If recursive edit is aborted, return nil instead." (po-check-lock) (let ((po-work-buffer-lock t) (start po-start-of-entry) (middle po-middle-of-entry) (end po-end-of-entry) (obsolete po-obsolete-flag)) (prog1 (save-window-excursion (pop-to-buffer po-work-buffer) (erase-buffer) (insert string "<") (goto-char (point-min)) (condition-case nil (progn (use-local-map po-edit-mode-map) (message "Type `C-c C-c' once done") (recursive-edit) (goto-char (point-max)) (skip-chars-backward " \t\n") (if (eq (preceding-char) '?<) (delete-region (1- (point)) (point-max))) (buffer-string)) (quit nil))) (bury-buffer po-work-buffer) (setq po-start-of-entry start) (setq po-middle-of-entry middle) (setq po-end-of-entry end) (setq po-obsolete-flag obsolete)))) (defun po-edit-comment () "Use another window to edit the current msgstr." (interactive) (po-find-span-of-entry) ; ;; Try showing all of msgid in the upper window while editing. ; (goto-char po-start-of-entry) ; (re-search-forward po-any-msgid-regexp) ; (backward-char 1) ; (recenter -1) (let ((string (po-edit-string (po-get-comment nil)))) (and string (po-set-comment string)) (po-redisplay))) (defun po-edit-msgstr () "Use another window to edit the current msgstr." (interactive) (po-find-span-of-entry) ; ;; Try showing all of msgid in the upper window while editing. ; (goto-char po-start-of-entry) ; (re-search-forward po-any-msgid-regexp) ; (backward-char 1) ; (recenter -1) (let ((string (po-edit-string (po-get-field nil nil)))) (and string (po-set-field nil string)) (po-redisplay))) ;;; Original C sources as context. (defun po-show-path () "Echo the current source search path in the message area." (let ((path po-search-path) (string "Path is:")) (while path (setq string (concat string " " (car (car path)))) (setq path (cdr path))) (message string))) (defun po-add-path (directory) "Add a given DIRECTORY, requested interactively, to the source search path." (interactive "DDirectory for search path: ") (setq po-search-path (cons (list directory) po-search-path)) (setq po-reference-check 0) (po-show-path)) (defun po-delete-path () "Delete a directory, selected with completion, from the source search path." (interactive) (setq po-search-path (delete (list (completing-read "Directory to remove? " po-search-path nil t)) po-search-path)) (setq po-reference-check 0) (po-show-path)) (defun po-ensure-references () "Extract all references into a list, with paths resolved, if necessary." (po-find-span-of-entry) (if (= po-start-of-entry po-reference-check) () (setq po-reference-alist nil) (save-excursion (goto-char po-start-of-entry) (if (re-search-forward "^#:" po-end-of-entry t) (while (re-search-forward " *\\([^: ]+\\):\\([0-9]+\\)" po-end-of-entry t) (let* ((name (buffer-substring (match-beginning 1) (match-end 1))) (line (buffer-substring (match-beginning 2) (match-end 2))) (path po-search-path) file) (while (and (progn (setq file (concat (car (car path)) name)) (not (file-exists-p file))) path) (setq path (cdr path))) (if path (setq po-reference-alist (cons (list (concat file ":" line) file (string-to-int line)) po-reference-alist))))))) (setq po-reference-alist (nreverse po-reference-alist)) (setq po-reference-cursor po-reference-alist) (setq po-reference-check po-start-of-entry))) (defun po-show-source-context (triplet) "Show the source context given a TRIPLET which is (PROMPT FILE LINE)." (find-file-other-window (car (cdr triplet))) (goto-line (car (cdr (cdr triplet)))) (other-window 1) ;; FIXME: Say position in cycle. But see po-select-reference first. (message "Displaying %s" (car triplet))) (defun po-cycle-reference () "Display some source context for the current entry. If the command is repeated many times in a row, cycle through contexts." (interactive) (po-ensure-references) (if po-reference-cursor (progn (if (eq last-command 'po-cycle-reference) (progn (setq po-reference-cursor (cdr po-reference-cursor)) (or po-reference-cursor (setq po-reference-cursor po-reference-alist)))) (po-show-source-context (car po-reference-cursor))) (error "No resolved source references"))) (defun po-select-reference () "Select one of the available source contexts for the current entry." (interactive) (po-ensure-references) (if po-reference-alist ;; FIXME: Instead, reset reference cursor, then use po-cycle-reference. (po-show-source-context (assoc (completing-read "Which source context? " po-reference-alist nil t) po-reference-alist)) (error "No resolved source references"))) ;;; String normalization [and later searching]. (defun po-normalize-old-style (explain) "Normalize old gettext style fields using K&R C multiline string syntax." (let ((here (point-marker)) (counter 0) (buffer-read-only nil)) (goto-char (point-min)) (message "Normalizing %d, %s" counter explain) (while (re-search-forward "\\(^#?[ \t]*msg\\(id\\|str\\)[ \t]*\"\\|[^\" \t][ \t]*\\)\\\\\n" nil t) (if (= (% counter 10) 0) (message "Normalizing %d, %s" counter explain)) (replace-match "\\1\"\n\"" t nil) (setq counter (1+ counter))) (goto-char here) (message "Normalizing %d...done" counter))) (defun po-normalize-field (msgid explain) "Normalize all msgstr's, or msgid's if MSGID." (let ((here (point-marker)) (counter 0)) (goto-char (point-min)) (while (re-search-forward po-any-msgstr-regexp nil t) (if (= (% counter 10) 0) (message "Normalizing %d, %s" counter explain)) (goto-char (match-beginning 0)) (po-find-span-of-entry) (po-set-field msgid (po-get-field msgid nil)) (goto-char po-end-of-entry) (setq counter (1+ counter))) (goto-char here) (message "Normalizing %d...done" counter))) (defun po-normalize () "Normalize all entries in the `.po' file." (interactive) (po-normalize-old-style "pass 1/3") (po-normalize-field t "pass 2/3") (po-normalize-field nil "pass 3/3") ;; The last `.po' file entry has just been processed. (if (not (= po-end-of-entry (point-max))) (let ((buffer-read-only nil)) (kill-region po-end-of-entry (point-max))))) ;;; Miscellaneous features. ;;;; (defvar po-any-c-string-regexp ;;;; "\"\\(\\\\.\\|[^\"\\\\]+\\)*\"" ;;;; "Regexp matching a C string, whether multiline or not.") (defun po-help () "Provide an help window for PO mode." (interactive) (save-window-excursion (switch-to-buffer po-work-buffer) (erase-buffer) (insert po-help-display-string) (delete-other-windows) (goto-char (point-min)) (message "Type any character to continue") (read-char)) (bury-buffer po-work-buffer)) (defun po-quit () "Save the `.po' file. Ask confirmation if untranslated strings remain." (interactive) (if (save-excursion (goto-char (point-min)) (or (not (re-search-forward po-empty-msgstr-regexp nil t)) (y-or-n-p "Untranslated entries... Quit anyway? "))) (progn (save-buffer) (kill-buffer po-work-buffer) (kill-buffer (current-buffer))) (message ""))) (defun po-undo () "Undo the last change to the `.po' file." (interactive) (let ((buffer-read-only nil)) (undo))) (defun po-statistics () "Say how many entries in each category, and the current position." (interactive) (po-find-span-of-entry) (let ((current 0) (total 0) (untranslated 0) (obsolete 0) here) (save-excursion (goto-char (point-min)) (while (re-search-forward po-any-msgstr-regexp nil t) (if (= (% total 20) 0) (message "Position %d/%d" current total)) (setq here (point)) (goto-char (match-beginning 0)) (setq total (1+ total)) (if (eq (point) po-middle-of-entry) (setq current total)) (if (eq (following-char) '?#) (setq obsolete (1+ obsolete)) (if (looking-at po-empty-msgstr-regexp) (setq untranslated (1+ untranslated)))) (goto-char here))) (message "Position %d/%d, with %d untranslated, %d obsolete" current total untranslated obsolete))) (defun po-validate () "Use `msgfmt' for validating the current `.po' file contents." (interactive) (compile (concat "msgfmt -o /dev/null -v " buffer-file-name))) ;;; po-mode.el ends here gettext-0.7/intl/gettext.h100444 230 226 6171 5774611032 14513 0ustar pinardguest/* gettext.h - internal header for GNU gettext internationalization functions Copyright (C) 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with the GNU C Library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifndef _GETTEXT_H #define _GETTEXT_H 1 #include #if HAVE_LIMITS_H || _LIBC # include #endif /* @@ end of prolog @@ */ /* The magic number of the GNU message catalog format. */ #define _MAGIC 0x950412de #define _MAGIC_SWAPPED 0xde120495 /* Revision number of the currently used .mo (binary) file format. */ #define MO_REVISION_NUMBER 0 /* The following contortions are an attempt to use the C preprocessor to determine an unsigned integral type that is 32 bits wide. An alternative approach is to use autoconf's AC_CHECK_SIZEOF macro, but doing that would require that the configure script compile and *run* the resulting executable. Locally running cross-compiled executables is usually not possible. */ #if defined __STDC__ && __STDC__ # define UINT_MAX_32_BITS 4294967295U #else # define UINT_MAX_32_BITS 0xFFFFFFFF #endif /* If UINT_MAX isn't defined, assume it's a 32-bit type. This should be valid for all systems GNU cares about because that doesn't include 16-bit systems, and only modern systems (that certainly have ) have 64+-bit integral types. */ #ifndef UINT_MAX # define UINT_MAX UINT_MAX_32_BITS #endif #if UINT_MAX == UINT_MAX_32_BITS typedef unsigned int nls_uint32; #else # if USHRT_MAX == UINT_MAX_32_BITS typedef unsigned short nls_uint32; # else # if ULONG_MAX == UINT_MAX_32_BITS typedef unsigned long nls_uint32; # else /* The following line is intended to throw an error. Using #error is not portable enough. */ "Cannot determine unsigned 32-bit data type." # endif # endif #endif /* Header for binary .mo file format. */ struct mo_file_header { /* The magic number. */ nls_uint32 magic; /* The revision number of the file format. */ nls_uint32 revision; /* The number of strings pairs. */ nls_uint32 nstrings; /* Offset of table with start offsets of original strings. */ nls_uint32 orig_tab_offset; /* Offset of table with start offsets of translation strings. */ nls_uint32 trans_tab_offset; /* Size of hashing table. */ nls_uint32 hash_tab_size; /* Offset of first hashing entry. */ nls_uint32 hash_tab_offset; }; struct string_desc { /* Length of addressed string. */ nls_uint32 length; /* Offset of string in file. */ nls_uint32 offset; }; /* @@ begin of epilog @@ */ #endif /* gettext.h */ gettext-0.7/intl/gettextP.h100444 230 226 3255 5772417307 14642 0ustar pinardguest/* gettextP.h -- header describing internals of gettext library Copyright (C) 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifndef _GETTEXTP_H #define _GETTEXTP_H /* @@ end of prolog @@ */ #ifndef __P # ifdef __STDC__ # define __P(args) args # else # define __P(args) () # endif #endif #ifndef W # define W(flag, data) ((flag) ? SWAP (data) : (data)) #endif static inline nls_uint32 SWAP (i) nls_uint32 i; { return (i << 24) | ((i & 0xff00) << 8) | ((i >> 8) & 0xff00) | (i >> 24); } struct loaded_domain { struct loaded_domain *next; const char *data; const char *filename; int must_swap; nls_uint32 nstrings; struct string_desc *orig_tab; struct string_desc *trans_tab; nls_uint32 hash_size; nls_uint32 *hash_tab; }; struct binding { struct binding *next; char *domainname; char *dirname; }; struct loaded_domain *_nl_find_domain __P ((const char *domainname, int category)); struct loaded_domain *_nl_load_msg_cat __P ((const char *filename)); /* @@ begin of epilog @@ */ #endif /* gettextP.h */ gettext-0.7/intl/hash-string.h100444 230 226 3110 5772417312 15247 0ustar pinardguest/* hash-string - Implements a string hashing function. Copyright (C) 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_VALUES_H # include #endif /* @@ end of prolog @@ */ #ifndef BITSPERBYTE # define BITSPERBYTE 8 #endif #ifndef LONGBITS # define LONGBITS (sizeof (long) * BITSPERBYTE) #endif /* LONGBITS */ /* Defines the so called `hashpjw' function by P.J. Weinberger [see Aho/Sethi/Ullman, COMPILERS: Principles, Techniques and Tools, 1986, 1987 Bell Telephone Laboratories, Inc.] */ static inline unsigned long hash_string (str_param) const char *str_param; { unsigned long hval, g; unsigned char *str = (unsigned char *) str_param; /* Compute the hash value for the given string. */ hval = 0; while (*str != '\0') { hval <<= 4; hval += *str++; g = hval & (0xful << (LONGBITS - 4)); if (g != 0) { hval ^= g >> (LONGBITS - 8); hval ^= g; } } return hval; } gettext-0.7/intl/libgettext.h100444 230 226 7700 5772417315 15207 0ustar pinardguest/* libgettext.h -- Message catalogs for internationalization. Copyright (C) 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifndef _LIBINTL_H #define _LIBINTL_H 1 #include /* @@ end of prolog @@ */ #ifndef __P # ifdef __STDC__ # define __P(args) args # else # define __P(args) () # endif #endif #ifndef HAVE_LC_MESSAGES /* This value determines the behaviour of the gettext() and dgettext() function. But some system does not have this defined. Define it to a default value. */ # define LC_MESSAGES (-1) #endif /* Declarations for gettext-using-catgets interface. Derived from Jim Meyering's libintl.h. */ struct _msg_ent { const char *_msg; int _msg_number; }; /* These two variables are defined in the automatically by po-to-tbl.sed generated file `cat-id-tbl.c'. */ extern const struct _msg_ent _msg_tbl[]; extern int _msg_tbl_length; /* Look up MSGID in the current default message catalog for the current LC_MESSAGES locale. If not found, returns MSGID itself (the default text). */ extern char *gettext __P ((const char *__msgid)); /* Look up MSGID in the DOMAINNAME message catalog for the current LC_MESSAGES locale. */ extern char *dgettext __P ((const char *__domainname, const char *__msgid)); /* Look up MSGID in the DOMAINNAME message catalog for the current CATEGORY locale. */ extern char *dcgettext __P ((const char *__domainname, const char *__msgid, int __category)); /* Set the current default message catalog to DOMAINNAME. If DOMAINNAME is null, return the current default. If DOMAINNAME is "", reset to the default of "messages". */ extern char *textdomain __P ((const char *__domainname)); /* Specify that the DOMAINNAME message catalog will be found in DIRNAME rather than in the system locale data base. */ extern char *bindtextdomain __P ((const char *__domainname, const char *__dirname)); #if defined ENABLE_NLS # if !defined HAVE_CATGETS # define gettext(msgid) dgettext (NULL, msgid) # define dgettext(domainname, msgid) \ dcgettext (domainname, msgid, LC_MESSAGES) # if defined __GNUC__ && __GNUC__ == 2 && __GNUC_MINOR__ >= 7 # define dcgettext(domainname, msgid, category) \ (__extension__ \ ({ \ char *result; \ if (__builtin_constant_p (msgid)) \ { \ extern int _nl_msg_cat_cntr; \ static char *__translation__; \ static int __catalog_counter__; \ if (! __translation__ || __catalog_counter__ != _nl_msg_cat_cntr) \ { \ __translation__ = \ (dcgettext) ((domainname), (msgid), (category)); \ __catalog_counter__ = _nl_msg_cat_cntr; \ } \ result = __translation__; \ } \ else \ result = (dcgettext) ((domainname), (msgid), (category)); \ result; \ })) # endif # endif #else # define gettext(msgid) (msgid) # define dgettext(domainname, msgid) (msgid) # define dcgettext(domainname, msgid, category) (msgid) # define textdomain(domainname) while (0) /* nothing */ # define bindtextdomain(domainname, dirname) while (0) /* nothing */ #endif /* @@ begin of epilog @@ */ #endif /* libgettext.h */ gettext-0.7/intl/bindtextdom.c100444 230 226 6567 5776102731 15357 0ustar pinardguest/* bindtextdom.c -- implementation of the bindtextdomain(3) function Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H # include #endif #ifdef STDC_HEADERS # include #else # ifdef HAVE_MALLOC_H # include # else void free (); # endif #endif #ifdef HAVE_STRING_H # include #else # include #endif #include "libgettext.h" #include "gettext.h" #include "gettextP.h" /* @@ end of prolog @@ */ /* Contains the default location of the message catalogs. */ extern const char _nl_default_dirname[]; /* List with bindings of specific domains. */ extern struct binding *_nl_domain_bindings; /* Prototypes for library functions. */ void *xmalloc (); char *xstrdup (); /* Specify that the DOMAINNAME message catalog will be found in DIRNAME rather than in the system locale data base. */ char * bindtextdomain (domainname, dirname) const char *domainname; const char *dirname; { struct binding *binding; /* Some sanity checks. */ if (domainname == NULL || domainname[0] == '\0') return NULL; for (binding = _nl_domain_bindings; binding != NULL; binding = binding->next) { int compare = strcmp (domainname, binding->domainname); if (compare == 0) /* We found it! */ break; if (compare < 0) { /* It is not in the list. */ binding = NULL; break; } } if (dirname == NULL) /* The current binding has be to returned. */ return binding == NULL ? (char *) _nl_default_dirname : binding->dirname; if (binding != NULL) { /* The domain is already bound. Replace the old binding. */ char *new_dirname = strcmp (dirname, _nl_default_dirname) == 0 ? (char *) _nl_default_dirname : xstrdup (dirname); if (strcmp (binding->dirname, _nl_default_dirname) != 0) free (binding->dirname); binding->dirname = new_dirname; } else { /* We have to create a new binding. */ struct binding *new_binding = (struct binding *) xmalloc (sizeof (*new_binding)); new_binding->domainname = xstrdup (domainname); new_binding->dirname = strcmp (dirname, _nl_default_dirname) == 0 ? (char *) _nl_default_dirname : xstrdup (dirname); /* Now enqueue it. */ if (_nl_domain_bindings == NULL || strcmp (domainname, _nl_domain_bindings->domainname) < 0) { new_binding->next = _nl_domain_bindings; _nl_domain_bindings = new_binding; } else { binding = _nl_domain_bindings; while (binding->next != NULL && strcmp (domainname, binding->next->domainname) > 0) binding = binding->next; new_binding->next = binding->next; binding->next = new_binding; } binding = new_binding; } return binding->dirname; } gettext-0.7/intl/dcgettext.c100444 230 226 10337 5775775177 15062 0ustar pinardguest/* dcgettext.c -- implemenatation of the dcgettext(3) function Copyright (C) 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H # include #endif #include #ifdef HAVE_STRING_H # include #else # include #endif #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H # include #endif #include "gettext.h" #include "gettextP.h" #include "libgettext.h" #include "hash-string.h" /* @@ end of prolog @@ */ /* Name of the default domain used for gettext(3) prior any call to textdomain(3). The default value for this is "messages". */ const char _nl_default_default_domain[] = "messages"; /* Value used as the default domain for gettext(3). */ const char *_nl_current_default_domain = _nl_default_default_domain; #undef dcgettext /* Look up MSGID in the DOMAINNAME message catalog for the current CATEGORY locale. */ char * dcgettext (domainname, msgid, category) const char *domainname; const char *msgid; int category; { struct loaded_domain *domain; size_t top, act, bottom; int cmp_val; /* If no real MSGID is given return NULL. */ if (msgid == NULL) return NULL; /* If DOMAINNAME is NULL, we are interested in the default domain. If CATEGORY is not LC_MESSAGES this might not make much sense but the defintion left this undefined. */ if (domainname == NULL) domainname = _nl_current_default_domain; /* Find structure describing the message catalog matching the DOMAINNAME and CATEGORY. */ domain = _nl_find_domain (domainname, category); if (domain == NULL || domain->data == NULL) /* No message catalog found. */ return (char *) msgid; /* Locate the MSGID and its translation. */ if (domain->hash_size > 0 && domain->hash_tab != NULL) { /* Use the hashing table. */ nls_uint32 len = strlen (msgid); nls_uint32 hash_val = hash_string (msgid); nls_uint32 idx = hash_val % domain->hash_size; nls_uint32 incr = 1 + (hash_val % (domain->hash_size - 2)); nls_uint32 nstr = W (domain->must_swap, domain->hash_tab[idx]); if (nstr == 0) /* Hash table entry is empty. */ return (char *) msgid; if (W (domain->must_swap, domain->orig_tab[nstr - 1].length) == len && strcmp (msgid, domain->data + W (domain->must_swap, domain->orig_tab[nstr - 1].offset)) == 0) return (char *) domain->data + W (domain->must_swap, domain->trans_tab[nstr - 1].offset); while (1) { if (idx >= W (domain->must_swap, domain->hash_size) - incr) idx -= W (domain->must_swap, domain->hash_size) - incr; else idx += incr; nstr = W (domain->must_swap, domain->hash_tab[idx]); if (nstr == 0) /* Hash table entry is empty. */ return (char *) msgid; if (W (domain->must_swap, domain->orig_tab[nstr - 1].length) == len && strcmp (msgid, domain->data + W (domain->must_swap, domain->orig_tab[nstr - 1].offset)) == 0) return (char *) domain->data + W (domain->must_swap, domain->trans_tab[nstr - 1].offset); } /* NOTREACHED */ } /* Now we try the default method: binary search in the sorted array of messages. */ bottom = 0; top = domain->nstrings; while (bottom < top) { act = (bottom + top) / 2; cmp_val = strcmp (msgid, domain->data + W (domain->must_swap, domain->orig_tab[act].offset)); if (cmp_val < 0) top = act; else if (cmp_val > 0) bottom = act + 1; else break; } return bottom >= top ? (char *) msgid : (char *) domain->data + W (domain->must_swap, domain->trans_tab[act].offset); } gettext-0.7/intl/dgettext.c100444 230 226 2261 5772417270 14654 0ustar pinardguest/* dgettext.c -- implementation of the dgettext(3) function Copyright (C) 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H # include #endif #ifdef HAVE_LOCALE_H # include #endif #include "libgettext.h" /* @@ end of prolog @@ */ #undef dgettext #undef dcgettext /* Look up MSGID in the DOMAINNAME message catalog of the current LC_MESSAGES locale. */ char * dgettext (domainname, msgid) const char *domainname; const char *msgid; { return dcgettext (domainname, msgid, LC_MESSAGES); } gettext-0.7/intl/gettext.c100444 230 226 2424 5775775233 14522 0ustar pinardguest/* gettext.c -- implementation of gettext(3) function Copyright (C) 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H # include #endif #ifdef STDC_HEADERS # include /* Just for NULL. */ #else # ifdef HAVE_STRING_H # include # else # define NULL 0 # endif #endif #include "libgettext.h" /* @@ end of prolog @@ */ #undef gettext #undef dgettext /* Look up MSGID in the current default message catalog for the current LC_MESSAGES locale. If not found, returns MSGID itself (the default text). */ char * gettext (msgid) const char *msgid; { return dgettext (NULL, msgid); } gettext-0.7/intl/finddomain.c100444 230 226 20150 5776102415 15145 0ustar pinardguest/* finddomain.c -- handle list of needed message catalogs Copyright (C) 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H # include #endif #include #include #ifdef __GNUC__ # define alloca __builtin_alloca #else # if HAVE_ALLOCA_H # include # else # ifdef _AIX #pragma alloca # else # ifndef alloca char *alloca (); # endif # endif # endif #endif #ifdef STDC_HEADERS # include #else char *getenv (); # ifdef HAVE_MALLOC_H # include # else void free (); # endif #endif #if HAVE_STRING_H # include #else # include #endif #include "gettext.h" #include "gettextP.h" #include "libgettext.h" #ifndef errno extern int errno; #endif /* @@ end of prolog @@ */ #ifndef HAVE_GETCWD char *getwd (); # define getcwd(buf, max) getwd (buf) #else char *getcwd (); #endif /* Amount to increase buffer size by in each try. */ #define PATH_INCR 32 /* The following is from pathmax.h. */ /* Non-POSIX BSD systems might have gcc's limits.h, which doesn't define PATH_MAX but might cause redefinition warnings when sys/param.h is later included (as on MORE/BSD 4.3). */ #if defined(_POSIX_VERSION) || (defined(HAVE_LIMITS_H) && !defined(__GNUC__)) # include #endif #ifndef _POSIX_PATH_MAX # define _POSIX_PATH_MAX 255 #endif #if !defined(PATH_MAX) && defined(_PC_PATH_MAX) # define PATH_MAX (pathconf ("/", _PC_PATH_MAX) < 1 ? 1024 : pathconf ("/", _PC_PATH_MAX)) #endif /* Don't include sys/param.h if it already has been. */ #if defined(HAVE_SYS_PARAM_H) && !defined(PATH_MAX) && !defined(MAXPATHLEN) # include #endif #if !defined(PATH_MAX) && defined(MAXPATHLEN) # define PATH_MAX MAXPATHLEN #endif #ifndef PATH_MAX # define PATH_MAX _POSIX_PATH_MAX #endif /* Contains the default location of the message catalogs. */ const char _nl_default_dirname[] = LOCALEDIR; /* List with bindings of specific domains created by bindtextdomain() calls. */ struct binding *_nl_domain_bindings; /* List of already loaded domains. */ extern struct loaded_domain *_nl_loaded_domains; /* Prototypes for library functions. */ void error __P ((int, int, const char *, ...)); void *xmalloc __P ((size_t __n)); /* Prototypes for local functions. */ static const char *category_to_name __P((int category)); #if !defined HAVE_SETLOCALE || !defined HAVE_LC_MESSAGES || !defined HAVE_LOCALE_NULL static const char *guess_category_value __P((int category, const char *categoryname)); #endif /* Return a data structure describing the message catalog described by the DOMAINNAME and CATEGORY parameters with respect to the currently established bindings. */ struct loaded_domain * _nl_find_domain (domainname, category) const char *domainname; int category; { const char *categoryname; const char *categoryvalue; struct binding *binding; char *dirname; char *filename; size_t filename_len; struct loaded_domain *retval; /* Now determine the symbolic name of CATEGORY and its value. */ categoryname = category_to_name (category); #if defined HAVE_SETLOCALE && defined HAVE_LOCALE_NULL # ifndef HAVE_LC_MESSAGES if (category == LC_MESSAGES) categoryvalue = guess_category_value (category, categoryname); else # endif categoryvalue = setlocale (category, NULL); #else categoryvalue = guess_category_value (category, categoryname); #endif /* If the current locale value is C (or POSIX) we don't load a domain. The causes the calling function to return the MSGID. */ if (strcmp (categoryvalue, "C") == 0 || strcmp (categoryvalue, "POSIX") == 0) return NULL; /* First find matching binding. */ for (binding = _nl_domain_bindings; binding != NULL; binding = binding->next) { int compare = strcmp (domainname, binding->domainname); if (compare == 0) /* We found it! */ break; if (compare < 0) { /* It is not in the list. */ binding = NULL; break; } } if (binding == NULL) dirname = (char *) _nl_default_dirname; else if (binding->dirname[0] == '/') dirname = binding->dirname; else { /* We have a relative path. Make it absolute now. */ size_t dirname_len = strlen (binding->dirname); size_t path_max; char *ret; path_max = (unsigned) PATH_MAX; path_max += 2; /* The getcwd docs say to do this. */ dirname = (char *) alloca (path_max + dirname_len); errno = 0; while ((ret = getcwd (dirname, path_max)) == NULL && errno == ERANGE) { path_max += PATH_INCR; dirname = (char *) alloca (path_max + dirname_len); errno = 0; } if (ret == NULL) error (1, errno, "while getting current directory"); strcat (dirname, binding->dirname); } /* Now we have all components which describe the message catalog to be used. Create an absolute file name. */ filename_len = strlen (dirname) + 1 + strlen (categoryvalue) + 1 + strlen (categoryname) + 1 + strlen (domainname) + 4; filename = (char *) xmalloc (filename_len); sprintf (filename, "%s/%s/%s/%s.mo", dirname, categoryvalue, categoryname, domainname); /* Look in list of already loaded file whether it is already available. */ for (retval = _nl_loaded_domains; retval != NULL; retval = retval->next) { int compare = strcmp (retval->filename, filename); if (compare == 0) /* We found it! */ break; if (compare < 0) { /* It's not in the list. */ retval = NULL; break; } } /* If it is not in list try to load it. Free the allocated FILENAME if it is not used. */ if (retval != NULL || (retval = _nl_load_msg_cat (filename)) == NULL) free (filename); return retval; } /* Return string representation of locale CATEGORY. */ static const char *category_to_name (category) int category; { const char *retval; switch (category) { #ifdef LC_COLLATE case LC_COLLATE: retval = "LC_COLLATE"; break; #endif #ifdef LC_CTYPE case LC_CTYPE: retval = "LC_CTYPE"; break; #endif #ifdef LC_MONETARY case LC_MONETARY: retval = "LC_MONETARY"; break; #endif #ifdef LC_NUMERIC case LC_NUMERIC: retval = "LC_NUMERIC"; break; #endif #ifdef LC_TIME case LC_TIME: retval = "LC_TIME"; break; #endif #ifdef LC_MESSAGES case LC_MESSAGES: retval = "LC_MESSAGES"; break; #endif #ifdef LC_RESPONSE case LC_RESPONSE: retval = "LC_RESPONSE"; break; #endif #ifdef LC_ALL case LC_ALL: /* This might not make sense but is perhaps better than any other value. */ retval = "LC_ALL"; break; #endif default: /* If you have a better idea for a default value let me know. */ retval = "LC_XXX"; } return retval; } #if !defined HAVE_SETLOCALE || !defined HAVE_LC_MESSAGES || !defined HAVE_LOCALE_NULL /* Guess value of current locale from value of the environment variables. */ static const char *guess_category_value (category, categoryname) int category; const char *categoryname; { const char *retval; /* Setting of LC_ALL overwrites all other. */ retval = getenv ("LC_ALL"); if (retval != NULL && retval[0] != '\0') return retval; /* Next comes the name of the desired category. */ retval = getenv (categoryname); if (retval != NULL && retval[0] != '\0') return retval; /* Last possibility is the LANG environment variable. */ retval = getenv ("LANG"); if (retval != NULL && retval[0] != '\0') return retval; /* We use C as the default domain. POSIX says this is implementation defined. */ return "C"; } #endif gettext-0.7/intl/loadmsgcat.c100444 230 226 12227 5772417321 15162 0ustar pinardguest/* loadmsgcat.c -- load needed message catalogs Copyright (C) 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H # include #endif #include #include #include #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H # include #endif #ifdef HAVE_MMAP # include #endif #include "gettext.h" #include "gettextP.h" /* @@ end of prolog @@ */ /* List of already loaded domains. */ struct loaded_domain *_nl_loaded_domains; /* We need a sign, whether a new catalog was loaded, which can be associated with all translations. This is important if the translations are cached by one of GCC's features. */ int _nl_msg_cat_cntr; /* Prototypes for library functions. */ void *xmalloc (); /* Load the message catalogs specified by FILENAME. If it is no valid message catalog return null. */ struct loaded_domain * _nl_load_msg_cat (filename) const char *filename; { int fd; struct stat st; struct loaded_domain *retval; struct mo_file_header *data = (struct mo_file_header *) -1; #ifdef HAVE_MMAP int use_mmap = 0; #endif /* We will create an entry for each file. Those representing a non-existing or illegal file have the DATA member set to null. This helps subsequent calls to detect this situation without trying to load. */ retval = (struct loaded_domain *) xmalloc (sizeof (*retval)); /* Note: FILENAME is allocated in finddomain and can be used here. */ retval->filename = filename; retval->data = NULL; /* Show that one domain is changed. This might make some cached translation invalid. */ ++_nl_msg_cat_cntr; /* Enqueue the new entry. */ if (_nl_loaded_domains == NULL || strcmp (filename, _nl_loaded_domains->filename) < 0) { retval->next = _nl_loaded_domains; _nl_loaded_domains = retval; } else { struct loaded_domain *rp = _nl_loaded_domains; while (rp->next != NULL && strcmp (filename, rp->next->filename) > 0) rp = rp->next; retval->next = rp->next; rp->next = retval; } /* Try to open the addressed file. */ fd = open (filename, O_RDONLY); if (fd == -1) return retval; /* We must know about the size of the file. */ if (fstat (fd, &st) != 0 && st.st_size < (off_t) sizeof (struct mo_file_header)) { /* Something went wrong. */ close (fd); return retval; } #ifdef HAVE_MMAP /* Now we are ready to load the file. If mmap() is available we try this first. If not available or it failed we try to load it. */ data = (struct mo_file_header *) mmap (NULL, st.st_size, PROT_READ, MAP_PRIVATE, fd, 0); if (data != (struct mo_file_header *) -1) { /* mmap() call was successful. */ close (fd); use_mmap = 1; } #endif /* If the data is not yet available (i.e. mmap'ed) we try to load it manually. */ if (data == (struct mo_file_header *) -1) { off_t to_read; char *read_ptr; data = (struct mo_file_header *) xmalloc (st.st_size); to_read = st.st_size; read_ptr = (char *) data; do { long int nb = (long int) read (fd, read_ptr, to_read); if (nb == -1) { close (fd); return retval; } read_ptr += nb; to_read -= nb; } while (to_read > 0); close (fd); } /* Using the magic number we can test whether it really is a message catalog file. */ if (data->magic != _MAGIC && data->magic != _MAGIC_SWAPPED) { /* The magic number is wrong: not a message catalog file. */ #ifdef HAVE_MMAP if (use_mmap) munmap ((caddr_t) data, st.st_size); else #endif free (data); return retval; } retval->data = (char *) data; retval->must_swap = data->magic != _MAGIC; /* Fill in the information about the available tables. */ switch (W (retval->must_swap, data->revision)) { case 0: retval->nstrings = W (retval->must_swap, data->nstrings); retval->orig_tab = (struct string_desc *) ((char *) data + W (retval->must_swap, data->orig_tab_offset)); retval->trans_tab = (struct string_desc *) ((char *) data + W (retval->must_swap, data->trans_tab_offset)); retval->hash_size = W (retval->must_swap, data->hash_tab_size); retval->hash_tab = (nls_uint32 *) ((char *) data + W (retval->must_swap, data->hash_tab_offset)); break; default: /* This is an illegal revision. */ #ifdef HAVE_MMAP if (use_mmap) munmap ((caddr_t) data, st.st_size); else #endif free (data); retval->data = NULL; } return retval; } gettext-0.7/intl/textdomain.c100444 230 226 4010 5772417324 15172 0ustar pinardguest/* textdomain.c -- implementation of the textdomain(3) function Copyright (C) 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H # include #endif #include #include #include "libgettext.h" /* @@ end of prolog @@ */ /* Prototypes for functions of libnlsut. */ extern char *xstrdup __P((const char *__str)); /* Name of the default text domain. */ extern const char _nl_default_default_domain[]; /* Default text domain in which entries for gettext(3) are to be found. */ extern const char *_nl_current_default_domain; /* Set the current default message catalog to DOMAINNAME. If DOMAINNAME is null, return the current default. If DOMAINNAME is "", reset to the default of "messages". */ char * textdomain (domainname) const char *domainname; { char *old; /* A NULL pointer requests the current setting. */ if (domainname == NULL) return (char *) _nl_current_default_domain; old = (char *) _nl_current_default_domain; /* If domain name is the null string set to default domain "messages". */ if (domainname[0] == '\0' || strcmp (domainname, _nl_default_default_domain) == 0) _nl_current_default_domain = _nl_default_default_domain; else _nl_current_default_domain = xstrdup (domainname); if (old != _nl_default_default_domain) free (old); return (char *) _nl_current_default_domain; } gettext-0.7/intl/cat-compat.c100444 230 226 13313 5776105471 15075 0ustar pinardguest/* Compatibility code for gettext-using-catgets interface. Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. The GNU C Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. The GNU C Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with the GNU C Library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H # include #endif #include #ifdef STDC_HEADERS # include #else char *getenv (); #endif #ifdef HAVE_NL_TYPES_H # include #endif #include "libgettext.h" /* @@ end of prolog @@ */ extern char *xmalloc __P ((size_t __n)); extern char *xstrdup __P ((const char *)); extern char *stpcpy __P ((char *__dest, const char *__src)); /* The catalog descriptor. */ static nl_catd catalog = (nl_catd) -1; /* Name of the default catalog. */ static char default_catalog_name[] = "messages"; /* Name of currently used catalog. */ static char *catalog_name = default_catalog_name; /* Get ID for given string. If not found return -1. */ static int msg_to_cat_id (const char *msg); /* Set currently used domain/catalog. */ char * textdomain (domainname) const char *domainname; { nl_catd new_catalog; char *new_name; size_t new_name_len; char *lang; #if defined HAVE_SETLOCALE && defined HAVE_LC_MESSAGES && defined HAVE_SETLOCALE_NULL lang = setlocale (LC_MESSAGES, NULL); #else lang = getenv ("LC_ALL"); if (lang == NULL || lang[0] == '\0') { lang = getenv ("LC_MESSAGES"); if (lang == NULL || lang[0] == '\0') lang = getenv ("LANG"); } #endif if (lang == NULL || lang[0] == '\0') lang = "C"; /* See whether name of currently used domain is asked. */ if (domainname == NULL) return catalog_name; if (domainname[0] == '\0') domainname = default_catalog_name; /* Compute length of added path element. */ new_name_len = sizeof (LOCALEDIR) - 1 + 1 + strlen (lang) + sizeof ("/LC_MESSAGES/") - 1 + sizeof (PACKAGE) - 1 + sizeof (".cat"); new_name = (char *) xmalloc (new_name_len); sprintf (new_name, "%s/%s/LC_MESSAGES/%s.cat", LOCALEDIR, lang, PACKAGE); new_catalog = catopen (new_name, 0); if (new_catalog == (nl_catd) -1) { /* The system seems not to understand an absolute file name as argument to catopen. Try now with the established NLSPATH. */ stpcpy (new_name, PACKAGE); new_catalog = catopen (new_name, 0); if (new_catalog == (nl_catd) -1) { free (new_name); return catalog_name; } } /* Close old catalog. */ if (catalog != (nl_catd) -1) catclose (catalog); if (catalog_name != default_catalog_name) free (catalog_name); catalog = new_catalog; catalog_name = new_name; return catalog_name; } char * bindtextdomain (domainname, dirname) const char *domainname; const char *dirname; { #if defined HAVE_SETENV || defined HAVE_PUTENV char *old_val = getenv ("NLSPATH"); char *new_val; size_t new_val_len; /* This does not make much sense here but to be compatible do it. */ if (domainname == NULL) return NULL; /* Compute length of added path element. If we use setenv we don't need the first byts for NLSPATH=, but whycomplicate the code for this peanuts. */ new_val_len = sizeof ("NLSPATH=") - 1 + sizeof (LOCALEDIR) - 1 + sizeof ("/%L/LC_MESSAGES/") - 1 + sizeof (PACKAGE) - 1 + sizeof (".cat"); if (old_val != NULL && old_val[0] != '\0') new_val_len += strlen (old_val); new_val = (char *) xmalloc (new_val_len); # ifdef HAVE_SETENV # if __STDC__ stpcpy (stpcpy (stpcpy (new_val, LOCALEDIR "/%L/LC_MESSAGES/" PACKAGE ".cat"), # else stpcpy (stpcpy (stpcpy (stpcpy (stpcpy (stpcpy (new_val, LOCALEDIR), "/%L/LC_MESSAGES/"), PACKAGE), ".cat"), # endif old_val != NULL && old_val[0] != '\0' ? ":" : ""), old_val != NULL && old_val[0] != '\0' ? old_val : ""); setenv ("NLSPATH", new_val, 1); # else # if __STDC__ stpcpy (stpcpy (stpcpy (new_val, "NLSPATH=" LOCALEDIR "/%L/LC_MESSAGES/" PACKAGE ".cat"), # else stpcpy (stpcpy (stpcpy (stpcpy (stpcpy (stpcpy (stpcpy (new_val, "NLSPATH="), LOCALEDIR), "/%L/LC_MESSAGES/"), PACKAGE), ".cat"), # endif old_val != NULL && old_val[0] != '\0' ? ":" : ""), old_val != NULL && old_val[0] != '\0' ? old_val : ""); putenv (new_val); # endif #endif return (char *) domainname; } #undef gettext char * gettext (msg) const char *msg; { int msgid; if (msg == NULL || catalog == (nl_catd) -1) return (char *) msg; /* Get the message from the catalog. We always use set number 1. The message ID is computed by the function `msg_to_cat_id' which works on the table generated by `po-to-tbl'. */ msgid = msg_to_cat_id (msg); if (msgid == -1) return (char *) msg; return catgets (catalog, 1, msgid, (char *) msg); } /* Look through the table `_msg_tbl' which has `_msg_tbl_length' entries for the one equal to msg. If it is found return the ID. In case when the string is not found return -1. */ static int msg_to_cat_id (const char *msg) { int cnt; for (cnt = 0; cnt < _msg_tbl_length; ++cnt) if (strcmp (msg, _msg_tbl[cnt]._msg) == 0) return _msg_tbl[cnt]._msg_number; return -1; } gettext-0.7/intl/cat-id-tbl.c100644 230 226 12222 5775763037 14774 0ustar pinardguest/* Automatically generated by po-to-tbl from gettext.pot. */ #if HAVE_CONFIG_H # include #endif #include "libgettext.h" const struct _msg_ent _msg_tbl[] = { {"", 1}, {"Unknown system error", 2}, {"%s: option `%s' is ambiguous\n", 3}, {"%s: option `--%s' doesn't allow an argument\n", 4}, {"%s: option `%c%s' doesn't allow an argument\n", 5}, {"%s: option `%s' requires an argument\n", 6}, {"%s: unrecognized option `--%s'\n", 7}, {"%s: unrecognized option `%c%s'\n", 8}, {"%s: illegal option -- %c\n", 9}, {"%s: invalid option -- %c\n", 10}, {"%s: option requires an argument -- %c\n", 11}, {"memory exhausted", 12}, {"missing arguments", 13}, {"too many arguments", 14}, {"Try `%s --help' for more information\n", 15}, {"\ Usage: %s [-h | -v | [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID]\n\ -h, --help display this help and exit\n\ -v, --version display version information and exit\n\ [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID retrieve translated message corresponding\n\ to MSGID from TEXTDOMAIN\n\ \n\ If the TEXTDOMAIN parameter is not given, the domain is determined from the\n\ environment variable TEXTDOMAIN. If the message catalog is not found in the\n\ regular directory, another location can be specified with the environment\n\ variable TEXTDOMAINDIR.\n\ Standard search directory: %s\n", 16}, {"no input file given", 17}, {"error while opening \"%s\" for reading", 18}, {"error while opening \"%s\" for writing", 19}, {"\ Usage: %s [OPTION] filename.po ...\n\ Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.\n\ -a, --alignment=NUMBER align strings to NUMBER bytes (default: %d)\n\ -h, --help display this help and exit\n\ -I, --input-path=LIST list of directories searched for input files\n\ --no-hash binary file will not include the hash table\n\ -o, --output-file=FILE specify output file name as FILE\n\ -v, --verbose list input file anormalies\n\ -V, --version output version information and exit\n\ \n\ Search path is: %s\n\ \n\ If input file is -, standard input is read. If output file is -,\n\ output is written to standard output.\n", 20}, {"while creating hash table", 21}, {"error while reading \"%s\"", 22}, {"incomplete `%s' directive at end of file", 23}, {"syntax error: value is no quoted string", 24}, {"end of file \"%s\" while reading string", 25}, {"illegal control sequence", 26}, {"end of file occured inside directive value", 27}, {"unterminated string constant", 28}, {"trailing garbage in line", 29}, {"previous `msgid' directive not matched by `msgstr'", 30}, {"domain name \"%s\" not suitable as file name: will use prefix", 31}, {"`msgid' directive expected", 32}, {"empty msgstr entry ignored", 33}, {"duplicate message ID", 34}, {"this is the location of the first definition", 35}, {"`msgstr' directive expected", 36}, {"syntax error: unknown directive", 37}, {"`msgid' and `msgstr' entry does not both begin with '\\n'", 38}, {"`msgid' and `msgstr' entry does not both end with '\\n'", 39}, {"number of format specifications in `msgid' and `msgstr' does not match", 40}, {"format specifications for argument %u are not the same", 41}, {"while preparing output", 42}, {"\ Usage: %s [OPTION] INPUTFILE ...\n\ Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.\n\ -a, --extract-all extract all strings\n\ -c, --add-comments[=TAG] place comment block with TAG (or those\n\ preceding keyword lines) in output file\n\ -C, --c++ recognize C++ style comments\n\ -d, --default-domain=NAME use NAME.po for output (instead of messages.po)\n\ -h, --help display this help and exit\n\ -I, --input-path=LIST list of directories searched for input files\n\ -j, --join-existing join messages with existing file\n\ -k, --keyword[=WORD] additonal keyword to be looked for (without\n\ WORD means not to use default keywords)\n\ -m, --msgstr-prefix[=STRING] use STRING or \"\" as prefix for msgstr entries\n\ -M, --msgstr-suffix[=STRING] use STRING or \"\" as suffix for msgstr entries\n\ --no-location do not write '#: filename:line' lines\n\ -n, --add-location generate '#: filename:line' lines (default)\n\ --omit-header don't write header with `msgid \"\"' entry\n\ -p, --output-dir=DIR output files will be placed in directory DIR\n\ -s, --sort-output generate sorted output and remove duplicates\n\ --strict write out strict Uniforum conforming .po file\n\ -v, --version output version information and exit\n\ -x, --exclude-file=FILE entries from FILE are not extracted\n\ \n\ Search path for supplementary .po files is:\n\ %s\n\ \n\ If INPUTFILE is -, standard input is read.\n", 43}, {"trailing garbage after string in call of keyword", 44}, {"syntax error: no value", 45}, {"cannot create output file \"%s\"", 46}, {"error while writing .po file", 47}, }; int _msg_tbl_length = 47; gettext-0.7/src/ 40755 230 226 0 5776107744 12413 5ustar pinardguestgettext-0.7/src/ChangeLog100444 230 226 317 5775362473 14242 0ustar pinardguestSun Jul 2 02:12:41 1995 Ulrich Drepper * First official release. This directory contains the source code for the programs specified in the Uniforum proposal for internationalization.gettext-0.7/src/Makefile.in100444 230 226 7334 5776073174 14561 0ustar pinardguest# Makefile for program source directory in GNU NLS utilities package. # Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foudation, Inc. # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ VERSION = @VERSION@ PROGRAMS = msgfmt xgettext @GETTEXTPRG@ SHELL = /bin/sh srcdir = @srcdir@ top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ VPATH = @srcdir@ prefix = @prefix@ exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ transform = @program_transform_name@ bindir = $(exec_prefix)/bin datadir = $(prefix)/@DATADIRNAME@ localedir = $(datadir)/locale subdir = src AR = ar CC = @CC@ INSTALL = @INSTALL@ INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ -m 755 RANLIB = @RANLIB@ DEFS = -DLOCALEDIR=\"$(localedir)\" @DEFS@ LIBS = ../lib/libnlsut.a @INTLLIBS@ ../lib/libnlsut.a @LIBS@ CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ COMPILE = $(CC) -c $(DEFS) $(INCLUDES) $(CPPFLAGS) $(CFLAGS) $(XCFLAGS) LINK = $(CC) $(LDFLAGS) -o $@ HEADERS = hash.h domain.h SOURCES = msgfmt.c xgettext.c gettextp.c OBJECTS = msgfmt.o xgettext.o gettextp.o COMSRCS = hash.c open-po.c COMOBJS = hash.o open-po.o DISTFILES = ChangeLog Makefile.in $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(COMSRCS) .SUFFIXES: .SUFFIXES: .c .o .c.o: $(COMPILE) $< INCLUDES = -I$(srcdir) -I.. -I$(top_srcdir)/lib -I../intl -I$(top_srcdir)/intl all: $(PROGRAMS) msgfmt: msgfmt.o $(LINK) msgfmt.o $(COMOBJS) $(LIBS) xgettext: xgettext.o $(LINK) xgettext.o $(COMOBJS) $(LIBS) gettext: gettextp.o $(LINK) gettextp.o $(LIBS) $(PROGRAMS) : ../lib/libnlsut.a @INTLDEPS@ msgfmt xgettext: $(COMOBJS) msgfmt.o xgettext.o gettextp.o: ../config.h ../lib/error.h ../lib/system.h \ ../intl/gettext.h ../intl/libgettext.h hash.o msgfmt.o xgettext.o: ../lib/system.h msgfmt.o xgettext.o: domain.h ../lib/getline.h hash.h msgfmt.o: ../intl/hash-string.h hash.o: hash.h ../lib/obstack.h open-po.o: ../lib/error.h ../lib/system.h ../intl/libgettext.h install: install-exec install-data install-exec: all $(top_srcdir)/mkinstalldirs $(bindir) for name in $(PROGRAMS); do \ $(INSTALL_PROGRAM) $$name \ $(bindir)/`echo $$name | sed '$(transform)'`; \ done install-data: uninstall: for name in $(PROGRAMS); do \ rm -f $(bindir)/`echo $$name | sed '$(transform)'`; \ done tags: TAGS TAGS: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(COMSRCS) cd $(top_srcdir)/src && etags $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(COMSRCS) id: ID ID: $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(COMSRCS) here=`pwd`; cd $(srcdir) && mkid -f$$here/ID $(HEADERS) \ $(SOURCES) $(CMSRCS) mostlyclean: rm -f *.o core core.* clean: mostlyclean rm -f msgfmt xgettext gettext distclean: clean rm -f Makefile TAGS maintainer-clean: distclean @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use;" @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." distdir = ../$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)/$(subdir) dist: Makefile $(DISTFILES) for file in $(DISTFILES); do \ ln $$file $(distdir) \ || { echo copying $$file instead; cp -p $$file $(distdir);}; \ done Makefile: Makefile.in ../config.status cd .. && CONFIG_FILES=$(subdir)/$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= ./config.status # Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make not to export all variables. # Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. .NOEXPORT: gettext-0.7/src/hash.h100444 230 226 2701 5774403160 13567 0ustar pinardguest/* Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. The GNU C Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. The GNU C Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with the GNU C Library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifndef _HASH_H #define _HASH_H #include typedef struct hash_table { unsigned long size; unsigned long filled; void *first; void *table; struct obstack mem_pool; } hash_table; int init_hash __P ((hash_table *htab, unsigned long init_size)); int delete_hash __P ((hash_table *htab)); int insert_entry __P ((hash_table *htab, const char *key, size_t keylen, void *data)); int find_entry __P ((hash_table *htab, const char *key, size_t keylen, void **result)); int iterate_table __P ((hash_table *htab, void **ptr, void **key, void **data)); unsigned long next_prime __P ((unsigned long seed)); #endif /* hash.h */ gettext-0.7/src/domain.h100444 230 226 2175 5774644075 14134 0ustar pinardguest /* Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. The GNU C Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. The GNU C Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with the GNU C Library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifndef _DOMAIN_H #define _DOMAIN_H 1 #include #include "hash.h" struct msg_domain { /* Table for mapping message IDs to message strings. */ hash_table symbol_tab; /* Name domain these ID/String pairs are part of. */ char *domain_name; /* Link to the next domain. */ struct msg_domain *next; }; #endif /* domain.h */ gettext-0.7/src/msgfmt.c100444 230 226 62471 5776073270 14175 0ustar pinardguest/* msgfmt - converts Uniforum style .mo file to binary .po file Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Written by Ulrich Drepper , April 1995. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H # include #endif #include #include #include #include #include #include #include #include #ifdef HAVE_LOCALE_H # include #endif #include "hash.h" #include "error.h" #include "getline.h" #ifndef HAVE_PARSE_PRINTF_FORMAT # include "printf.h" #endif #include #include "gettext.h" #include "domain.h" #include "hash-string.h" #include #define _(str) gettext (str) /* Uncomment next line for production version. */ /* #define NDEBUG */ #include #ifndef errno extern int errno; #endif /* Define the data structure which we need to represent the data to be written out. */ struct id_str_pair { char *id; char *str; }; /* Contains information about the definition of one translation. */ struct msgstr_def { char *msgstr; const char *file_name; size_t line_no; }; /* Alignment of strings in resulting .mo file. */ static size_t alignment; /* Search path list for input files. */ char *input_path_list; /* Nonzero if no hash table in .mo is wanted. */ static int no_hash_table; /* Nonzero if an output file is opened. */ static int output_file_open; /* Specifies name of the output file. */ static const char *output_file_name; /* String containing name the program is called with. */ const char *program_name; /* We may have more than one input file. Domains with same names in different files have to merged. So we need a list of tables for each output file. */ static struct msg_domain *domain; static struct msg_domain *current_domain; /* If not zero list duplicate message identifiers. */ static int verbose; /* Long options. */ static const struct option long_options[] = { { "alignment", required_argument, NULL, 'a' }, { "help", no_argument, NULL, 'h' }, { "input-path", required_argument, NULL, 'I' }, { "no-hash", no_argument, &no_hash_table, 1 }, { "output-file", required_argument, NULL, 'o' }, { "verbose", no_argument, &verbose, 1 }, { "version", no_argument, NULL, 'V' }, { NULL, 0, NULL, 0 } }; #ifndef roundup # if defined __GNUC__ && __GNUC__ >= 2 # define roundup(x, y) ({typeof(x) _x = (x); typeof(y) _y = (y); \ ((_x + _y - 1) / _y) * _y; }) # else # define roundup(x, y) ((((x)+((y)-1))/(y))*(y)) # endif /* GNU CC2 */ #endif /* roundup */ /* Prototypes for local functions. */ static void usage (int status) #if defined __GNUC__ && ((__GNUC__ == 2 && __GNUC_MINOR__ >= 5) || __GNUC__ > 2) __attribute__ ((noreturn)) #endif ; static void error_print (); static struct msg_domain *new_domain (const char *name); static void process_po_file (FILE *input_file, const char *input_file_name); static int compare_id (const void *pval1, const void *pval2); static void write_table (FILE *output_file, hash_table *tab); static void check_pair (const char *file_name, const char *msgid, size_t msgid_line, const char *msgstr, size_t msgstr_line); int main(argc, argv) int argc; char *argv[]; { int optchar; int do_help = 0; int do_version = 0; /* Set default value for global variables. */ alignment = DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT; /* Set program name for messages. */ program_name = argv[0]; error_print_progname = error_print; #ifdef HAVE_SETLOCALE /* Set locale via LC_ALL. */ setlocale (LC_ALL, ""); #endif /* Set the text message domain. */ bindtextdomain (PACKAGE, LOCALEDIR); textdomain (PACKAGE); while ((optchar = getopt_long (argc, argv, "a:hI:o:vV", long_options, NULL)) != EOF) switch (optchar) { case '\0': break; case 'a': { char *endp; #ifdef HAVE_STRTOUL size_t new_align = strtoul (optarg, &endp, 0); #else size_t new_align = (size_t) strtol (optarg, &endp, 0); #endif if (endp != optarg) alignment = new_align; } break; case 'h': do_help = 1; break; case 'I': if (input_path_list == NULL) input_path_list = xstrdup (optarg); else { size_t len = strlen (input_path_list); input_path_list = (char *) xrealloc (input_path_list, len + strlen (optarg) + 2); stpcpy (stpcpy (&input_path_list[len], ":"), optarg); } break; case 'o': output_file_name = optarg; break; case 'v': verbose = 1; break; case 'V': do_version = 1; break; default: usage (EXIT_FAILURE); break; } /* Complete the input file path list with the system default list. */ if (input_path_list == NULL) input_path_list = STD_INC_PATH; else { size_t len = strlen (input_path_list); input_path_list = (char *) xrealloc (input_path_list, len + sizeof (STD_INC_PATH) + 2); #if __STDC__ strcpy (&input_path_list[len], ":" STD_INC_PATH); #else stpcpy (stpcpy (&input_path_list[len], ":"), STD_INC_PATH); #endif /* not standard C compiler. */ } /* Version information is requested. */ if (do_version) { fprintf (stderr, "%s - GNU %s %s\n", program_name, PACKAGE, VERSION); exit (EXIT_SUCCESS); } /* Help is requested. */ if (do_help) usage (EXIT_SUCCESS); /* Test whether we have an .po file name as argument. */ if (optind >= argc) { error (EXIT_SUCCESS, 0, _("no input file given")); usage (EXIT_FAILURE); } /* The -o option determines the name of the domain and therefor the output file. */ if (output_file_name != NULL) current_domain = new_domain (output_file_name); /* Process all given .po files. */ while (argc > optind) { char *input_file_name; FILE *input_file; /* If no output file is given the output of the messages upto the first `domain' keyword is placed for each .po file in `messages.mo'. */ if (output_file_name == NULL) output_file_open = 0; /* Open the input file. Handle `-' as name for stdin. Please note that me don't free the input_file_name because it is referenced in the constructed tables. */ input_file = open_po_file (argv[optind], &input_file_name, 1); if (input_file == NULL) error (EXIT_FAILURE, errno, _("error while opening \"%s\" for reading"), input_file_name); /* Remember that we currently have not specified any domain. This is of course not true when we saw the -o option. */ if (output_file_name == NULL) current_domain = NULL; /* And process the input file. */ process_po_file (input_file, input_file_name); /* Prepare for next round. */ if (input_file != stdin) fclose (input_file); ++optind; } /* Now write out all domains. */ while (domain != NULL) { FILE *output_file; /* If no entry for this domain don't even create the file. */ if (domain->symbol_tab.filled != 0) { if (strcmp (domain->domain_name, "-") == 0) output_file = stdout; else { output_file = fopen (domain->domain_name, "w"); if (output_file == NULL) error (EXIT_FAILURE, errno, _("error while opening \"%s\" for writing"), domain->domain_name); } write_table (output_file, &domain->symbol_tab); if (output_file != stdout) fclose (output_file); } domain = domain->next; } exit (EXIT_SUCCESS); } /* Display usage information and exit. */ static void usage (status) int status; { if (status != EXIT_SUCCESS) fprintf (stderr, _("Try `%s --help' for more information\n"), program_name); else printf (_("\ Usage: %s [OPTION] filename.po ...\n\ Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.\n\ -a, --alignment=NUMBER align strings to NUMBER bytes (default: %d)\n\ -h, --help display this help and exit\n\ -I, --input-path=LIST list of directories searched for input files\n\ --no-hash binary file will not include the hash table\n\ -o, --output-file=FILE specify output file name as FILE\n\ -v, --verbose list input file anormalies\n\ -V, --version output version information and exit\n\ \n\ Search path is: %s\n\ \n\ If input file is -, standard input is read. If output file is -,\n\ output is written to standard output.\n"), program_name, DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT, input_path_list); exit (status); } static struct msg_domain * new_domain (name) const char *name; { struct msg_domain **p_dom = &domain; while (*p_dom != NULL && strcmp (name, (*p_dom)->domain_name) != 0) p_dom = &(*p_dom)->next; if (*p_dom == NULL) { *p_dom = (struct msg_domain *) xmalloc (sizeof (**p_dom)); if (init_hash (&(*p_dom)->symbol_tab, 100) != 0) error (EXIT_FAILURE, errno, _("while creating hash table")); (*p_dom)->domain_name = xstrdup (name); (*p_dom)->next = NULL; } return *p_dom; } /* The address of this function will be assigned to the hook in the error functions. */ static void error_print () { /* We don't want the program name to be printed in messages. */ } /* Read and process the content of a single .po file. */ static void process_po_file (input_file, input_file_name) FILE *input_file; const char *input_file_name; { static char *buffer = NULL; static size_t buffer_size = 0; static char *strbuf = NULL; static size_t strbuf_size = 0; char *msgid_string = NULL; size_t msgid_line = 0; size_t strbuf_ptr; size_t line_no = 1; int line_len = getline (&buffer, &buffer_size, input_file); char *cp = buffer; if (line_len < 0) /* End of file is now reached. */ return; if (buffer == NULL) error (EXIT_FAILURE, errno, _("error while reading \"%s\""), input_file_name); /* And mark end of line. */ buffer[line_len] = '\0'; while (line_len > 0) { char *startp, *directive; /* Skip leading white spaces. */ while (isspace (*cp)) ++cp; /* Check for comment line. */ if (*cp == '#') { /* A comment line might span across many lines when terminated by "\\\n". */ do { line_len = getline (&buffer, &buffer_size, input_file); if (line_len < 0) break; ++line_no; } while (buffer[line_len - 2] == '\\' && buffer[line_len - 1] == '\n'); continue; } if (*cp == '\0') /* The line was empty. */ continue; /* Now it's clear: the line has to be a directive. These are seperated by a white space from the rest of the line. */ startp = cp; while (*cp != '\0' && !isspace (*cp)) ++cp; directive = (char *) xmalloc (cp - startp + 1); memcpy (directive, startp, cp - startp); directive[cp - startp] = '\0'; while (1) { /* Skip separating white spaces. */ while (isspace (*cp)) ++cp; if ((*cp != '\\' || *(cp + 1) != '\n') && *cp != '\0') break; line_len = getline (&buffer, &buffer_size, input_file); if (line_len < 0) { error (0, 0, _("incomplete `%s' directive at end of file"), directive); return; } ++line_no; buffer[line_len] = '\0'; cp = buffer; } /* Get the argument string. The argument may extend on more than one line, following the same syntax as strings in C. */ if (*cp != '"') { error_with_loc (0, 0, input_file_name, line_no, _("syntax error: value is no quoted string")); continue; } strbuf_ptr = 0; do { /* Skip " character. */ ++cp; while (*cp != '\0' && *cp != '"') { if (strbuf_ptr >= strbuf_size) { strbuf_size = 2 * (strbuf_size + 100); strbuf = xrealloc (strbuf, strbuf_size); } if (*cp == '\\') switch (*++cp) { case '\n': /* The value continues on the next line. */ line_len = getline (&buffer, &buffer_size, input_file); if (line_len < 0) { error (0, 0, _("end of file \"%s\" while reading string"), input_file_name); line_len = 0; } else ++line_no; buffer[line_len] = '\0'; cp = buffer; break; case 'n': strbuf[strbuf_ptr++] = '\n'; ++cp; break; case 't': strbuf[strbuf_ptr++] = '\t'; ++cp; break; case 'v': strbuf[strbuf_ptr++] = '\v'; ++cp; break; case 'b': strbuf[strbuf_ptr++] = '\b'; ++cp; break; case 'r': strbuf[strbuf_ptr++] = '\r'; ++cp; break; case 'f': strbuf[strbuf_ptr++] = '\f'; ++cp; break; case '\\': strbuf[strbuf_ptr++] = '\\'; ++cp; break; case '"': strbuf[strbuf_ptr++] = '"'; ++cp; break; #if defined __GNUC__ && __GNUC__ case '0' ... '7': #else case '0': case '1': case '2': case '3': case '4': case '5': case '6': case '7': #endif /* GNU CC */ { int val = *cp++ - '0'; if ('0' <= *cp && *cp <= '7') { val *= 8; val += *cp++ - '0'; if ('0' <= *cp && *cp <= '7') { val *= 8; val += *cp++ - '0'; } } strbuf[strbuf_ptr++] = val; } break; case 'x': case 'X': if (isxdigit (*++cp)) { int val = isdigit (*cp) ? *cp - '0' : tolower (*cp) - 'a' + 10; if (isxdigit (*++cp)) { val *= 16; val += isdigit (*cp) ? *cp - '0' : tolower (*cp) - 'a' + 10; ++cp; } strbuf[strbuf_ptr++] = val; } else error_with_loc (0, 0, input_file_name, line_no, _("illegal control sequence")); break; case '\0': error (EXIT_FAILURE, 0, _("\ end of file occured inside directive value")); /* NOTREACHED */ default: error_with_loc (0, 0, input_file_name, line_no, _("illegal control sequence")); } else strbuf[strbuf_ptr++] = *cp++; } if (*cp == '\0') error_with_loc (0, 0, input_file_name, line_no, _("unterminated string constant")); else { ++cp; while (isspace (*cp)) ++cp; if (*cp != '\0' && *cp != '"') { error_with_loc (0, 0, input_file_name, line_no, _("trailing garbage in line")); *cp = '\0'; } while (line_len > 0 && *cp == '\0') { line_len = getline (&buffer, &buffer_size, input_file); if (line_len < 0) line_len = 0; else ++line_no; buffer[line_len] = '\0'; cp = buffer; while (isspace (*cp)) ++cp; } } } while (*cp == '"'); if (strbuf_ptr >= strbuf_size) { strbuf_size = 2 * (strbuf_size + 100); strbuf = xrealloc (strbuf, strbuf_size); } strbuf[strbuf_ptr] = '\0'; /* Test for the known directives and process them or give an error. */ if (strcmp (directive, "domain") == 0) { /* If no output file was given we change it with each domain directive. */ if (msgid_string != NULL) { error_with_loc (0, 0, input_file_name, line_no, _("\ previous `msgid' directive not matched by `msgstr'")); msgid_string = NULL; } if (output_file_name == NULL) { /* Do some tests on the file name (white space etc). */ size_t correct = strcspn (strbuf, INVALID_PATH_CHAR); if (strbuf[correct] != '\0') { error (0, 0, _("\ domain name \"%s\" not suitable as file name: will use prefix"), strbuf); strbuf[correct] = '\0'; } /* Set new domain. */ current_domain = new_domain (strbuf); } } else if (strcmp (directive, "msgstr") == 0) { if (msgid_string == NULL) error_with_loc (0, 0, input_file_name, line_no, _("`msgid' directive expected")); else if (strbuf[0] == '\0') { if (verbose) error_with_loc (0, 0, input_file_name, line_no, _("empty msgstr entry ignored")); free (msgid_string); msgid_string = NULL; } else { /* We found a valid pair of msgid/msgstr. Construct struct to decribe msgstr definition. */ struct msgstr_def *entry = (struct msgstr_def *) xmalloc (sizeof (*entry)); entry->msgstr = xstrdup (strbuf); entry->file_name = input_file_name; entry->line_no = line_no; /* If --verbose is selected we do some more checks on the both strings. */ if (verbose) check_pair (input_file_name, msgid_string, msgid_line, strbuf, line_no); /* Check whether already a domain is specified. If not use default domain. */ if (current_domain == NULL) current_domain = new_domain ("messages"); /* We can insert the ID/string pair into the hashing table. But we have to take care for duplicates. */ if (insert_entry (¤t_domain->symbol_tab, msgid_string, strlen (msgid_string), entry) != 0 && verbose) { /* We don't need the just constructed entry. */ free (entry); /* Get the old definition. */ find_entry (¤t_domain->symbol_tab, msgid_string, strlen (msgid_string), (void **) &entry); error_with_loc (0, 0, input_file_name, line_no, _("duplicate message ID")); error_with_loc (0, 0, entry->file_name, entry->line_no, _("\ this is the location of the first definition")); } free (msgid_string); msgid_string = NULL; } } else if (strcmp (directive, "msgid") == 0) { if (msgid_string != NULL) error_with_loc (0, 0, input_file_name, line_no, _("`msgstr' directive expected")); msgid_string = xstrdup (strbuf); msgid_line = line_no; } else error_with_loc (0, 0, input_file_name, line_no, _("syntax error: unknown directive")); /* Now we don't need the directive name anymore. */ free (directive); } } static int compare_id (pval1, pval2) const void *pval1; const void *pval2; { return strcmp (((struct id_str_pair *)pval1)->id, ((struct id_str_pair *)pval2)->id); } static void write_table (output_file, tab) FILE *output_file; hash_table *tab; { static char null = '\0'; /* This should be explained: Each string has an associate hashing value V, computed by a fixed function. To locate the string we use open addressing with double hashing. The first index will be V % M, where M is the size of the hashing table. If no entry is found, iterating with a second, independent hashing function takes place. This second value will be 1 + V % (M - 2). The approximate number of probes will be for unsuccessful search: (1 - N / M) ^ -1 for successful search: - (N / M) ^ -1 * ln (1 - N / M) where N is the number of keys. If we now choose M to be the next prime bigger than 4 / 3 * N, we get the values 4 and 1.85 resp. Because unsuccesful searches are unlikely this is a good value. Formulas: [Knuth, The Art of Computer Programming, Volume 3, Sorting and Searching, 1973, Addison Wesley] */ nls_uint32 hash_tab_size = no_hash_table ? 0 : next_prime ((tab->filled * 4) / 3); nls_uint32 *hash_tab; /* Header of the .mo file to be written. */ struct mo_file_header header; struct id_str_pair *msg_arr; void *ptr; size_t cnt; char *id; struct msgstr_def *entry; struct string_desc sd; /* Fill the structure describing the header. */ header.magic = _MAGIC; /* Magic number. */ header.revision = MO_REVISION_NUMBER; /* Revision number of file format. */ header.nstrings = tab->filled; /* Number of strings. */ header.orig_tab_offset = sizeof (header); /* Offset of table for original string offsets. */ header.trans_tab_offset = sizeof (header) + tab->filled * sizeof (struct string_desc); /* Offset of table for translation string offsets. */ header.hash_tab_size = hash_tab_size; /* Size of used hashing table. */ header.hash_tab_offset = no_hash_table ? 0 : sizeof (header) + 2 * (tab->filled * sizeof (struct string_desc)); /* Offset of hashing table. */ /* Write the header out. */ fwrite (&header, sizeof (header), 1, output_file); /* Allocate table for the all elements of the hashing table. */ msg_arr = (struct id_str_pair *) alloca (tab->filled * sizeof (msg_arr[0])); /* Read values from hashing table into array. */ for (cnt = 0, ptr = NULL; iterate_table (tab, &ptr, (void **) &id, (void **) &entry) != 0; ++cnt) { msg_arr[cnt].id = id; msg_arr[cnt].str = entry->msgstr; } assert (cnt == tab->filled); /* Sort the table according to original string. */ qsort (msg_arr, tab->filled, sizeof (msg_arr[0]), compare_id); /* Set offset to first byte after all the tables. */ sd.offset = roundup (sizeof (header) + tab->filled * sizeof (sd) + tab->filled * sizeof (sd) + hash_tab_size * sizeof (nls_uint32), alignment); /* Write out length and starting offset for all original strings. */ for (cnt = 0; cnt < tab->filled; ++cnt) { sd.length = strlen (msg_arr[cnt].id); fwrite (&sd, sizeof (sd), 1, output_file); sd.offset += roundup (sd.length + 1, alignment); } /* Write out length and starting offset for all translation strings. */ for (cnt = 0; cnt < tab->filled; ++cnt) { sd.length = strlen (msg_arr[cnt].str); fwrite (&sd, sizeof (sd), 1, output_file); sd.offset += roundup (sd.length + 1, alignment); } /* Skip this part when no hash table is needed. */ if (!no_hash_table) { /* Allocate room for the hashing table to be written out. */ hash_tab = (nls_uint32 *) alloca (hash_tab_size * sizeof (nls_uint32)); memset (hash_tab, '\0', hash_tab_size * sizeof (nls_uint32)); /* Insert all value in the hash table, following the algorithm described above. */ for (cnt = 0; cnt < tab->filled; ++cnt) { nls_uint32 hash_val = hash_string (msg_arr[cnt].id); nls_uint32 idx = hash_val % hash_tab_size; if (hash_tab[idx] != 0) { /* We need the second hashing function. */ nls_uint32 c = 1 + (hash_val % (hash_tab_size - 2)); do if (idx >= hash_tab_size - c) idx -= hash_tab_size - c; else idx += c; while (hash_tab[idx] != 0); } hash_tab[idx] = cnt + 1; } /* Write the hash table out. */ fwrite (hash_tab, sizeof (nls_uint32), hash_tab_size, output_file); } /* Write bytes to make first string to be aligned. */ cnt = sizeof (header) + 2 * tab->filled * sizeof (sd) + hash_tab_size * sizeof (nls_uint32); fwrite (&null, 1, roundup (cnt, alignment) - cnt, output_file); /* Now write the original strings. */ for (cnt = 0; cnt < tab->filled; ++cnt) { size_t len = strlen (msg_arr[cnt].id); fwrite (msg_arr[cnt].id, len + 1, 1, output_file); fwrite (&null, 1, roundup (len + 1, alignment) - (len + 1), output_file); } /* Now write the translation strings. */ for (cnt = 0; cnt < tab->filled; ++cnt) { size_t len = strlen (msg_arr[cnt].str); fwrite (msg_arr[cnt].str, len + 1, 1, output_file); fwrite (&null, 1, roundup (len + 1, alignment) - (len + 1), output_file); free (msg_arr[cnt].str); } /* Hashing table is not used anmore. */ delete_hash (tab); } static void check_pair (file_name, msgid, msgid_line, msgstr, msgstr_line) const char *file_name; const char *msgid; size_t msgid_line; const char *msgstr; size_t msgstr_line; { size_t msgid_len = strlen (msgid); size_t msgstr_len = strlen (msgstr); size_t nidfmts, nstrfmts; /* If the msgid string is empty we have the special entry reserved for information about the translation. */ if (msgid_len == 0) return; /* Test 1: check whether both or none of the strings begin with a '\n'. */ if ((msgid[0] == '\n') ^ (msgstr[0] == '\n') != 0) error_with_loc (0, 0, file_name, msgid_line, _("\ `msgid' and `msgstr' entry does not both begin with '\\n'")); /* Test 2: check whether both or none of the strings end with a '\n'. */ if ((msgid[msgid_len - 1] == '\n') ^ (msgstr[msgstr_len - 1] == '\n') != 0) error_with_loc (0, 0, file_name, msgid_line, _("\ `msgid' and `msgstr' entry does not both end with '\\n'")); /* Test 3: check whether both formats strings contain the same number of format specifications. */ nidfmts = parse_printf_format (msgid, 0, NULL); nstrfmts = parse_printf_format (msgstr, 0, NULL); if (nidfmts != nstrfmts) error_with_loc (0, 0, file_name, msgid_line, _("\ number of format specifications in `msgid' and `msgstr' does not match")); else { int *id_args = (int *) alloca (nidfmts * sizeof (int)); int *str_args = (int *) alloca (nstrfmts * sizeof (int)); size_t cnt; (void) parse_printf_format (msgid, nidfmts, id_args); (void) parse_printf_format (msgstr, nstrfmts, str_args); for (cnt = 0; cnt < nidfmts; ++cnt) if (id_args[cnt] != str_args[cnt]) error_with_loc (0, 0, file_name, msgid_line, _("\ format specifications for argument %u are not the same"), cnt); } } gettext-0.7/src/xgettext.c100444 230 226 123265 5776106707 14575 0ustar pinardguest/* xgettext - extracts strings from C source file to Uniforum style .po file Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Written by Ulrich Drepper , April 1995. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H # include #endif #include #include #include #include #include #include #include #include #ifdef HAVE_LOCALE_H # include #endif #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H # include #endif /* Uncomment next line for production version. */ /* #define NDEBUG */ #include #ifndef errno extern int errno; #endif #include "error.h" #include "hash.h" #include "getline.h" #include "system.h" #include "gettext.h" #include "domain.h" #include /* A convenience macro. I don't like writing gettext() every time. */ #define _(str) gettext (str) /* If nonzero add all comments immediately preceding one of the keywords. */ static int add_all_comments; /* If nonzero add comments for file name and line number for each msgid. */ static int line_comment; /* Tag used in comment of prevailing domain. */ static char *comment_tag; /* If nonzero also parse C++ comments. */ static int cplusplus_comments; /* Name of default domain file. If not set defaults to messages.po. */ static char *default_domain; /* Content of .po files with symbols to be excluded. */ static struct msg_domain *exclude_symbols; /* If nonzero extract all strings. */ static int extract_all; /* String containing names of all input files. */ static char *input_file_names; /* Search path list for input files. */ char *input_path_list; /* If nonzero join existing .po file. */ static int join_existing; /* List of keywords to be looked for. If none given the 3 default keywords gettext, dgettext, and dcgettext are used. */ static size_t nkeywords; static size_t max_keywords; struct keyword { size_t len; const char *str; }; static struct keyword *keywords; /* If nonzero don't use default keywords. */ static int no_default_keywords; /* String used as prefix for msgstr. */ static char *msgstr_prefix; /* String used as suffix for msgstr. */ static char *msgstr_suffix; /* Directory in which output files are created. */ static char *output_dir; /* The symbol tables which contain the produced msgid/msgstr pairs. */ static struct msg_domain *new_symbols; static struct msg_domain *current; /* If nonzero omit header with information about this run. */ static int omit_header; /* String containing name the program is called with. */ const char *program_name; /* If nonzero sort output by msgids. Duplicates are removed. */ static int sort_output; /* If nonzero generate strict Uniforum style .po file. */ static strict_uniforum; /* String with option xgettext is invoked with. */ static char *xgettext_options; /* Long options. */ static const struct option long_options[] = { { "add-location", no_argument, &line_comment, 1 }, { "add-comments", optional_argument, NULL, 'c' }, { "c++", no_argument, &cplusplus_comments, 1 }, { "default-domain", required_argument, NULL, 'd' }, { "exclude-file", required_argument, NULL, 'x' }, { "extract-all", no_argument, &extract_all, 1 }, { "help", no_argument, NULL, 'h' }, { "input-path", required_argument, NULL, 'I' }, { "no-location", no_argument, &line_comment, 0 }, { "join-existing", no_argument, &join_existing, 1 }, { "keyword", optional_argument, NULL, 'k' }, { "msgstr-prefix", optional_argument, NULL, 'm' }, { "msgstr-suffix", optional_argument, NULL, 'M' }, { "omit-header", no_argument, &omit_header, 1 }, { "output-dir", required_argument, NULL, 'p' }, { "sort-output", no_argument, &sort_output, 1 }, { "strict", no_argument, &strict_uniforum, 1 }, { "version", no_argument, NULL, 'V' }, { NULL, 0, NULL, 0 } }; /* Hold file name and number of the line where the string occurs. */ struct file_name_line { const char *file_name; size_t line_no; char *comment; struct file_name_line *next; }; /* Structure used while sorting messages. */ struct id_str { char *msgid; char *msgstr; struct file_name_line occurence; }; /* Description of a dynamically extended buffer. */ struct line_buffer { /* Address of buffer. */ char *buf; /* Current size of buffer. */ size_t max_size; /* Currently used size. */ size_t act_size; /* Line number. */ size_t number; /* Name of the file. */ const char *file_name; }; /* These variables provide two buffers which are allocated and extended by getline(). */ static struct line_buffer line = { NULL, 0 }; static struct line_buffer string = { NULL, 0 }; static struct line_buffer comment = { NULL, 0 }; /* Prototypes for local functions. */ static void usage __P ((int status)) #if defined __GNUC__ && ((__GNUC__ == 2 && __GNUC_MINOR__ >= 5) || __GNUC__ > 2) __attribute__ ((noreturn)) #endif ; static void error_print (); static void process_c_source __P ((FILE *c_file, const char *file_name)); static void skip_c_char __P ((char **cp)); static void process_c_string __P ((FILE *c_file, char **cp)); static void process_comment __P ((FILE *c_file, char **cp)); static void process_gettext __P ((FILE *c_file, char **cp, int arg_no)); static struct msg_domain *read_po_file __P ((const char *file_name, struct msg_domain *msgs, const char *force_domain, int use_path)); static struct msg_domain * new_domain __P ((struct msg_domain **po_content, const char *domain_name)); static void add_id_str __P ((struct msg_domain *dom, const char *msgid, const char *c_file_name, size_t line_no)); static void write_out_domain __P ((struct msg_domain *dom, int do_sort)); static int compare_msgid __P ((const void *arg1, const void *arg2)); static long difftm __P ((struct tm *__a, struct tm *__b)); static void write_header __P ((FILE *output_file)); int main (argc, argv) int argc; char *argv[]; { size_t act_len, max_len, line_len; int cnt; int optchar; int do_help = 0; int do_version = 0; /* Set program name for messages. */ program_name = argv[0]; error_print_progname = error_print; #ifdef HAVE_SETLOCALE /* Set locale via LC_ALL. */ setlocale (LC_ALL, ""); #endif /* Set the text message domain. */ bindtextdomain (PACKAGE, LOCALEDIR); textdomain (PACKAGE); /* Set initial value of variables. */ line_comment = 1; input_path_list = xstrdup (STD_INC_PATH); default_domain = "messages"; exclude_symbols = new_domain (&exclude_symbols, "exclude"); while ((optchar = getopt_long (argc, argv, "ac::Cd:hI:jk::m::M::np:sVx:", long_options, NULL)) != EOF) switch (optchar) { case '\0': break; case 'a': extract_all = 1; break; case 'c': if (optarg == NULL) { add_all_comments = 1; comment_tag = NULL; } else { add_all_comments = 0; comment_tag = optarg; /* We ignore leading white space. */ while (isspace (*comment_tag)) ++comment_tag; } break; case 'C': cplusplus_comments = 1; break; case 'd': default_domain = optarg; break; case 'h': do_help = 1; break; case 'I': /* You may wonder why I did it this complicated way. The reason is that we may read .po files during processing the command line options and so this path list must already be intact. Especially the default system path should be available. */ { size_t len = strlen (input_path_list); size_t alen = strlen (optarg); input_path_list = xrealloc (input_path_list, len + alen + 2); memmove (&input_path_list[len - sizeof (STD_INC_PATH) + alen + 2], &input_path_list[len - sizeof (STD_INC_PATH) + 1], len + 1); strcpy (&input_path_list[len - sizeof (STD_INC_PATH) + 1], optarg); input_path_list[len - sizeof (STD_INC_PATH) + 1 + alen] = ':'; } break; case 'j': join_existing = 1; break; case 'k': if (optarg == NULL) no_default_keywords = 1; else if (optarg[0] != '\0') { if (nkeywords >= max_keywords) { max_keywords += 10; keywords = (struct keyword *) xrealloc (keywords, max_keywords * sizeof (*keywords)); } keywords[nkeywords].len = strlen (optarg); keywords[nkeywords].str = optarg; ++nkeywords; } break; case 'm': /* -m takes an optional argument. If none is given "" is assumed. */ msgstr_prefix = optarg == NULL ? "" : optarg; break; case 'M': /* -M takes an optional argument. If none is given "" is assumed. */ msgstr_suffix = optarg == NULL ? "" : optarg; break; case 'n': line_comment = 1; break; case 'p': { size_t len = strlen (optarg); if (output_dir != NULL) free (output_dir); if (optarg[len - 1] == '/') output_dir = xstrdup (optarg); else { asprintf (&output_dir, "%s/", optarg); if (output_dir == NULL) /* We are about to construct the absolute path to the directory for the output files but asprintf failed. */ error (EXIT_FAILURE, errno, _("while preparing output")); } } break; case 's': sort_output = 1; break; case 'V': do_version = 1; break; case 'x': exclude_symbols = read_po_file (optarg, exclude_symbols, "exclude", 1); break; default: usage (EXIT_FAILURE); /* NOTREACHED */ } /* Version information requested. */ if (do_version) { fprintf (stderr, "%s - GNU %s %s\n", program_name, PACKAGE, VERSION); exit (EXIT_SUCCESS); } /* Help is requested. */ if (do_help) usage (EXIT_SUCCESS); /* Test whether we have some input files given. */ if (optind >= argc) { error (EXIT_SUCCESS, 0, _("no input file given")); usage (EXIT_FAILURE); } /* Canonize msgstr prefix/suffix. */ if (msgstr_prefix != NULL && msgstr_suffix == NULL) msgstr_suffix = ""; else if (msgstr_prefix == NULL && msgstr_suffix != NULL) msgstr_prefix = NULL; /* Default output directory is the current directory. */ if (output_dir == NULL) output_dir = "./"; /* We now create the default domain. This will always be the first in the linked list. */ current = new_domain (&new_symbols, default_domain); /* Compose a string with all command line options. */ max_len = act_len = 0; for (cnt = 1; cnt < optind; ++cnt) { size_t len = strlen (argv[cnt]); if (act_len + len + 1 >= max_len) { max_len += MAX (100u, 2 * len); xgettext_options = xrealloc (xgettext_options, max_len); } xgettext_options[act_len++] = ' '; strcpy (&xgettext_options[act_len], argv[cnt]); act_len += len; } /* We need a string with the names of all .c files. */ max_len = act_len = line_len = 0; for (cnt = optind; cnt < argc; ++cnt) { size_t len; char *cp = argv[cnt]; /* Remove leading "./". */ while (cp[0] == '.' && cp[1] == '/') cp += 2; /* Now we can get the string length. */ len = strlen (cp); if (act_len + len + 5 >= max_len) { max_len += MAX (100u, 2 * len); input_file_names = xrealloc (input_file_names, max_len); } if (line_len > 0 && line_len + len > 65) { input_file_names[act_len++] = '\n'; line_len = 0; } input_file_names[act_len++] = ' '; strcpy (&input_file_names[act_len], cp); act_len += len; line_len += len; } /* Process all input files. */ do { /* Locate input file and open it. */ if (strcmp (argv[optind], "-") == 0) process_c_source (stdin, ""); else { FILE *input_file = fopen (argv[optind], "r"); if (input_file == NULL) error (EXIT_FAILURE, errno, _("error while opening \"%s\" for reading"), argv[optind]); process_c_source (input_file, argv[optind]); fclose (input_file); } ++optind; } while (optind < argc); /* If sorting was requested sort and write out. In any case close the file afterwards. */ for (current = new_symbols; current != NULL; current = current->next) /* Write out the table after possibly sorting it. */ write_out_domain (current, sort_output); exit (EXIT_SUCCESS); } /* Display usage information and exit. */ static void usage (status) int status; { if (status != EXIT_SUCCESS) fprintf (stderr, _("Try `%s --help' for more information\n"), program_name); else printf (_("\ Usage: %s [OPTION] INPUTFILE ...\n\ Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.\n\ -a, --extract-all extract all strings\n\ -c, --add-comments[=TAG] place comment block with TAG (or those\n\ preceding keyword lines) in output file\n\ -C, --c++ recognize C++ style comments\n\ -d, --default-domain=NAME use NAME.po for output (instead of messages.po)\n\ -h, --help display this help and exit\n\ -I, --input-path=LIST list of directories searched for input files\n\ -j, --join-existing join messages with existing file\n\ -k, --keyword[=WORD] additonal keyword to be looked for (without\n\ WORD means not to use default keywords)\n\ -m, --msgstr-prefix[=STRING] use STRING or \"\" as prefix for msgstr entries\n\ -M, --msgstr-suffix[=STRING] use STRING or \"\" as suffix for msgstr entries\n\ --no-location do not write '#: filename:line' lines\n\ -n, --add-location generate '#: filename:line' lines (default)\n\ --omit-header don't write header with `msgid \"\"' entry\n\ -p, --output-dir=DIR output files will be placed in directory DIR\n\ -s, --sort-output generate sorted output and remove duplicates\n\ --strict write out strict Uniforum conforming .po file\n\ -v, --version output version information and exit\n\ -x, --exclude-file=FILE entries from FILE are not extracted\n\ \n\ Search path for supplementary .po files is:\n\ %s\n\ \n\ If INPUTFILE is -, standard input is read.\n"), program_name, input_path_list); exit (status); } /* The address of this function will be assigned to the hook in the error functions. */ static void error_print () { /* We don't want the program name to be printed in messages. */ } /* Read the INPUT_FILE as a C source and extract strings. */ static void process_c_source (c_file, c_file_name) FILE *c_file; const char *c_file_name; { comment.act_size = 0; line.number = 0; /* Set current file name. Remove leading "./". */ line.file_name = c_file_name; while (line.file_name[0] == '.' && line.file_name[1] == '/') line.file_name += 2; while (!feof (c_file)) { /* We are only interested in a) comments b) strings and character constants c) {,d,dc}gettext function calls */ char *cp; int len; /* If we are expected to copy all comments in the same line or the one before we have to check if the last gathered one may be expired. */ if (add_all_comments && comment.act_size != 0 && comment.number < line.number) comment.act_size = 0; len = getline (&line.buf, &line.max_size, c_file); if (len < 0) return; ++line.number; line.buf[len] = '\0'; line.act_size = (size_t) len; cp = line.buf; while (isspace (*cp)) ++cp; if (*cp == '#') { /* The line contains a preprocessor directive. */ while (isspace (*++cp)); /* As a special case we have to deal with the #line directive. */ if (!isalnum (cp[4]) && cp[4] != '_' && strncmp (cp, "line", 4) == 0) { /* We have a problem here: because we are not running a preprocessor we cannot expand the form #line pp-tokens new-line We simply ignore it here as we do for all other illegal forms. */ size_t new_line_num; char *endp; cp += 4; while (isspace (cp[0])) ++cp; /* Here should come a digit-sequence. */ #ifdef HAVE_STRTOUL new_line_num = strtoul (cp, &endp, 0); #else new_line_num = strtol (cp, &endp, 0); #endif if (cp == endp) /* No number found: ignore the whole line. */ continue; line.number = new_line_num - 1; /* Read upto next argument or end of line. */ cp = endp; while (isspace (cp[0])) ++cp; /* If a string follows, this is the name of the current file. */ if (cp[0] == '"') { endp = ++cp; while (endp[0] != '\0' && endp[0] != '"') ++endp; if (cp < endp) { /* We really found a file name. */ char *new_name = (char *) xmalloc (endp - cp + 1); memcpy (new_name, cp, endp - cp); new_name[endp - cp] = '\0'; line.file_name = new_name; } } /* ... and read the next line. */ continue; } if (isalnum (cp[6]) || cp[6] == '_' || strncmp (cp, "define", 6) != 0) /* Ignore line. */ continue; cp += 6; while (isspace (*cp)) ++cp; } while (*cp != '\0') { if (*cp == '"') { process_c_string (c_file, &cp); if (extract_all != 0 && string.buf != NULL && string.buf[0] != '\0') add_id_str (NULL, string.buf, string.file_name, string.number); } else if (*cp == '\'') skip_c_char (&cp); else if (*cp == '/' && (cp[1] == '*' || (cplusplus_comments & cp[1] == '/'))) process_comment (c_file, &cp); else if (extract_all == 0 && (isalpha (*cp) || *cp == '_')) { /* We have to look for the standard keywords, if not disabled. */ if (no_default_keywords == 0 && !isalnum (cp[7]) && cp[7] != '_' && strncmp (cp, "gettext", 7) == 0) process_gettext (c_file, &cp, 0); else if (no_default_keywords == 0 && !isalnum (cp[8]) && cp[8] != '_' && strncmp (cp, "dgettext", 8) == 0) process_gettext (c_file, &cp, 1); else if (no_default_keywords == 0 && !isalnum (cp[9]) && cp[9] != '_' && strncmp (cp, "dcgettext", 9) == 0) process_gettext (c_file, &cp, 1); else { /* Look for the user-given keywords. */ size_t cnt; for (cnt = 0; cnt < nkeywords; ++cnt) if (!isalnum (cp[keywords[cnt].len]) && cp[keywords[cnt].len] != '_' && strncmp (cp, keywords[cnt].str, keywords[cnt].len) == 0) break; if (cnt < nkeywords) /* We restrict user given keywords to have the string in the first argument. */ process_gettext (c_file, &cp, 0); else /* Just a normal identifier: skip it. */ do ++cp; while (*cp == '_' || isalnum (*cp)); } } else ++cp; } } } static void skip_c_char (cp) char **cp; { ++(*cp); while (**cp != '\0' && **cp != '\n' && **cp != '\'') if (*(*cp)++ == '\\') if (*cp != '\0' && **cp != '\n') ++(*cp); if (**cp == '\'') ++(*cp); } static void process_c_string (c_file, cp) FILE *c_file; char **cp; { string.act_size = 0; #define NEW_STR_CHAR(ch) \ do { \ if (string.act_size >= string.max_size) \ string.buf = xrealloc (string.buf, \ (string.max_size = \ 2 * (string.max_size + 100))); \ string.buf[string.act_size++] = (ch); \ } while (0) /* Get line number of first character in the string. */ string.number = line.number; string.file_name = line.file_name; while (**cp == '"') { /* Skip the " character. */ ++(*cp); while (**cp != '\0' && **cp != '"') if (**cp == '\\') switch (*++(*cp)) { case '\n': { /* The string will continue at the beginning of the next line. */ int len = getline (&line.buf, &line.max_size, c_file); if (len < 0) { line.buf[0] = '\0'; *cp = line.buf; goto return_string; } ++line.number; line.buf[len] = '\0'; line.act_size = (size_t) len; *cp = line.buf; } break; case '\0': /* The file ends while scanning a string. */ goto return_string; default: NEW_STR_CHAR ('\\'); NEW_STR_CHAR (**cp); if (**cp == 'n') { NEW_STR_CHAR ('"'); NEW_STR_CHAR ('\n'); NEW_STR_CHAR ('"'); } ++(*cp); break; } else if (**cp == '\n') /* This is a non-ANSI kind of multi-line strings. */ { int len; NEW_STR_CHAR ('"'); NEW_STR_CHAR ('\n'); NEW_STR_CHAR ('"'); len = getline (&line.buf, &line.max_size, c_file); if (len < 0) { line.buf[0] = '\0'; *cp = line.buf; goto return_string; } ++line.number; line.buf[len] = '\0'; line.act_size = (size_t) len; *cp = line.buf; } else NEW_STR_CHAR (*(*cp)++); /* Skip terminating " character. */ if (**cp == '"') ++(*cp); /* ANSI C permits string to be concated by writing them next to another. */ while (1) { while (isspace (**cp)) ++(*cp); if (**cp == '\0') { int len = getline (&line.buf, &line.max_size, c_file); if (len < 0) goto return_string; ++line.number; line.buf[len] = '\0'; line.act_size = (size_t) len; *cp = line.buf; } else break; } } return_string: /* Often the last character in a message is a '\n'. We don't want this to break the line as all other appearences do. */ if (string.act_size >= 3 && string.buf[string.act_size - 1] == '"' && string.buf[string.act_size - 2] == '\n' && string.buf[string.act_size - 3] == '"') string.act_size -= 3; NEW_STR_CHAR('\0'); } static void process_comment (c_file, cp) FILE *c_file; char **cp; { /* Read a complete C (and perhaps C++) string. We have to take care whether the beginning of the comment matches the argument to the -c command line option. */ int found_tag; char is_cplusplus = *++(*cp) == '/'; /* Skip leading white space. */ while (isspace (*++(*cp))); /* Test whether equal to required tag. */ if (comment_tag != NULL && strncmp (comment_tag, *cp, strlen (comment_tag)) == 0) { found_tag = 1; *cp += strlen (comment_tag); } else found_tag = 0; /* If we don't look for tagged comments only the last comment found is of interest. Discard the others. */ if (add_all_comments) comment.act_size = 0; if (is_cplusplus) { int len; /* C++ style comment. */ if (found_tag || add_all_comments) /* It is possible that we are expected to write out all comments preceding keywords. */ { size_t len = strlen (*cp); if (comment.max_size <= comment.act_size + len + 7) { comment.max_size = 2 * MAX (comment.act_size + len + 7, comment.max_size); comment.buf = (char *) xrealloc (comment.buf, comment.max_size); } stpcpy (stpcpy (stpcpy (&comment.buf[comment.act_size], "#. "), *cp), "#.\n"); comment.act_size += len + (strict_uniforum ? 6 : 4); comment.number = line.number; } len = getline (&line.buf, &line.max_size, c_file); if (len < 0) len = 0; ++line.number; line.buf[len] = '\0'; line.act_size = (size_t) len; *cp = line.buf; } else { /* C style comment. */ char *comment_end; /* Take care that there is enough room for the leading line. */ if (comment.max_size < comment.act_size + 4) { comment.max_size = 2 * MAX (comment.max_size, 100); comment.buf = (char *) xrealloc (comment.buf, comment.max_size); } /* Find possible string termination. */ comment_end = strchr (*cp, '*'); while (comment_end == NULL || comment_end[1] != '/') { if (found_tag || add_all_comments) /* We have to take over the already found comment to the .po file. The both possibilities in which these can happen are mutally exclusive. */ { size_t len = comment_end ? comment_end - *cp + 1 : strlen (*cp); if (comment.max_size <= comment.act_size + len + 2) { comment.max_size = MAX (2 * (comment.act_size + len + 2), 2 * comment.max_size); comment.buf = (char *) xrealloc (comment.buf, comment.max_size); } stpcpy (stpcpy (&comment.buf[comment.act_size], "#. "), *cp); comment.act_size += len + 3; } if (comment_end != NULL) *cp = comment_end + 1; if (comment_end == NULL || **cp == '\0') { int len = getline (&line.buf, &line.max_size, c_file); if (len < 0) len = 0; ++line.number; line.buf[len] = '\0'; line.act_size = (size_t) len; *cp = line.buf; } /* Make the possible output look prettier by removing leading white spaces. */ while (isspace (**cp)) ++(*cp); comment_end = strchr (*cp, '*'); } if (found_tag || add_all_comments) { size_t len = comment_end - *cp; if (comment.max_size <= comment.act_size + len + 4) { comment.max_size = MAX (2 * (comment.act_size + len + 4), 2 * comment.max_size); comment.buf = (char *) xrealloc (comment.buf, comment.max_size); } memcpy (&comment.buf[comment.act_size], "#. ", 3); memcpy (&comment.buf[comment.act_size + 3], *cp, len); strcpy (&comment.buf[comment.act_size + len + 3], "\n#.\n"); comment.act_size += len + 7; /* Remember line number of the string. */ comment.number = line.number; } *cp = comment_end + 2; } } static void process_gettext (c_file, cp, arg_no) FILE *c_file; char **cp; int arg_no; { /* On entry *CP points at the beginning of the function name. */ char *domain = NULL; while (isalnum (**cp) || **cp == '_') ++(*cp); #define SKIP_WS \ do \ { \ while (isspace (**cp)) \ ++(*cp); \ \ if (**cp == '\0') \ { \ int len = getline (&line.buf, &line.max_size, c_file); \ if (len < 0) \ len = 0; \ ++line.number; \ line.buf[len] = '\0'; \ line.act_size = (size_t) len; \ *cp = line.buf; \ } \ else \ break; \ } \ while (1) SKIP_WS; if (**cp != '(') return; /* Skip the ( character. */ ++(*cp); /* Skip ARG_NO parameters until the desired parameter is reached. */ while (arg_no-- > 0) { SKIP_WS; if (**cp != '"') /* Needless to try more. We don't have a string as the domain. */ return; /* Extract the argument. Result will be in STRING.BUF. */ process_c_string (c_file, cp); if (string.buf != NULL && string.buf[0] != '\0') domain = xstrdup (string.buf); else domain = NULL; SKIP_WS; if (**cp != ',') /* Needless to try more. We don't have only a string as the domain. */ return; } SKIP_WS; if (**cp != '"') /* This can also happen: the argument is no real string so we don't have anything to extract. */ return; process_c_string (c_file, cp); /* And add to the appropriate file/table. */ if (string.buf != NULL && string.buf[0] != '\0') add_id_str (domain != NULL ? new_domain (&new_symbols, domain) : NULL, string.buf, string.file_name, string.number); SKIP_WS; if (**cp != ')' && **cp != ',') error_with_loc (0, 0, line.file_name, line.number, _("trailing garbage after string in call of keyword")); } /* Read the content of the specified .po file into the given structure. */ static struct msg_domain * read_po_file (file_name, msgs, force_domain, use_path) const char *file_name; struct msg_domain *msgs; const char *force_domain; int use_path; { char *po_file_name; FILE *po_file = open_po_file (file_name, &po_file_name, use_path); char *msgid_string = NULL; struct msg_domain *current = NULL; line.number = 0; if (po_file == NULL) { error (0, errno, _("error while opening \"%s\" for reading"), file_name); return msgs; } if (force_domain != NULL) current = new_domain (&msgs, force_domain); while (!feof (po_file)) { char *cp; char *startp, *directive; int len = getline (&line.buf, &line.max_size, po_file); if (len < 0) /* End of file is now reached. */ break; if (line.buf == NULL) error (EXIT_FAILURE, errno, _("error while reading \"%s\""), po_file_name); /* Increase line number counter. */ ++line.number; /* And mark end of line. */ line.buf[len] = '\0'; line.act_size = (size_t) len; cp = line.buf; /* Skip leading white spaces. */ while (isspace (*cp)) ++cp; /* Check for comment line. */ if (*cp == '#') { /* A comment line might span across many lines when terminated by "\\\n". */ while (line.buf[line.act_size - 2] == '\\' && line.buf[line.act_size - 1] == '\n') { int len = getline (&line.buf, &line.max_size, po_file); if (len < 0) break; ++line.number; } continue; } /* Now it's clear: the line has to be a directive. These are seperated by a white space from the rest of the line. */ startp = cp; while (*cp != '\0' && !isspace (*cp)) ++cp; directive = (char *) xmalloc (cp - startp + 1); memcpy (directive, startp, cp - startp); directive[cp - startp] = '\0'; while (1) { int len; /* Skip seperating white spaces. */ while (isspace (*cp)) ++cp; if (*cp != '\\' && *(cp + 1) != '\n') break; len = getline (&line.buf, &line.max_size, po_file); if (len < 0) { error (0, 0, _("incomplete `%s' directive at end of file"), directive); return msgs; } line.buf[len] = '\0'; line.act_size = (size_t) len; cp = line.buf; } /* If nothing else follows it's an error. */ if (*cp == '\0') { error_with_loc (0, 0, po_file_name, line.number, _("syntax error: no value")); continue; } /* Get the argument string. The argument may extend on more than one line, following the same syntax as strings in C. */ if (*cp != '"') { error_with_loc (0, 0, po_file_name, line.number, _("syntax error: value is no quoted string")); continue; } string.act_size = 0; do { /* Skip " character. */ ++cp; while (*cp != '\0' && *cp != '"') { if (string.act_size + 10 >= string.max_size) /* + 10 is safety margin */ { string.max_size = 2 * (string.max_size + 100); string.buf = xrealloc (string.buf, string.max_size); } string.buf[string.act_size++] = *cp; if (*cp++ == '\\') switch (*cp) { case '\n': { int len; string.buf[string.act_size++] = '\n'; len = getline (&line.buf, &line.max_size, po_file); if (len < 0) len = 0; ++line.number; line.buf[line.act_size] = '\0'; line.act_size = (size_t) len; cp = line.buf; } break; case '\0': /* Sweet nothing. */ break; default: string.buf[string.act_size++] = *cp++; break; } } if (*cp == '\0') error_with_loc (0, 0, po_file_name, line.number, _("unterminated string constant")); else { /* Skip " character. */ ++cp; while (1) { int len; while (isspace (*cp)) ++cp; if (*cp != '\\' || *(cp + 1) != '\n') break; len = getline (&line.buf, &line.max_size, po_file); if (len < 0) len = 0; else ++line.number; line.buf[len] = '\0'; line.act_size = (size_t) len; cp = line.buf; } if (*cp != '\0' && *cp != '"') { error_with_loc (0, 0, po_file_name, line.number, _("trailing garbage in line")); *cp = '\0'; } } } while (*cp != '\0'); string.buf[string.act_size] = '\0'; if (strcmp (directive, "domain") == 0) { if (msgid_string != NULL) { error_with_loc (0, 0, po_file_name, line.number, _("\ previous `msgid' directive not matched by `msgstr'")); msgid_string = NULL; } if (force_domain == NULL) { /* Do some test on the file name (white space etc). */ size_t correct = strcspn (string.buf, INVALID_PATH_CHAR); if (string.buf[correct] != '\0') { error (0, 0, _("\ domain name \"%s\" not suitable as file name: will use prefix"), string.buf); string.buf[correct] = '\0'; } /* Set new domain. */ current = new_domain (&msgs, string.buf); } } else if (strcmp (directive, "msgstr") == 0) { if (msgid_string == NULL) error_with_loc (0, 0, po_file_name, line.number, _("`msgid' directive expected")); else { /* We found a valid pair of msgid/msgstr. First check whether already a domain is specified. If not use default domain. */ if (current == NULL) current = new_domain (&msgs, "messages"); /* We can insert the ID/string pair into the hashing table. */ insert_entry (¤t->symbol_tab, msgid_string, strlen (msgid_string), xstrdup (string.buf)); free (msgid_string); msgid_string = NULL; } } else if (strcmp (directive, "msgid") == 0) { if (msgid_string != NULL) { error_with_loc (0, 0, po_file_name, line.number, _("`msgstr' directive expected")); free (msgid_string); } msgid_string = xstrdup (string.buf); } else error_with_loc (0, 0, po_file_name, line.number, _("syntax error: unknown directive")); /* Now we don't need the directive name anymore. */ free (directive); } /* Signal no error. */ return msgs; } static struct msg_domain * new_domain (po_content, domain_name) struct msg_domain **po_content; const char *domain_name; { while (*po_content != NULL && strcmp (domain_name, (*po_content)->domain_name) != 0) po_content = &(*po_content)->next; if (*po_content == NULL) { /* We must create a new domain. */ *po_content = (struct msg_domain *) xmalloc (sizeof (**po_content)); if (init_hash (&(*po_content)->symbol_tab, 100) != 0) error (EXIT_FAILURE, errno, _("while creating hash table")); (*po_content)->domain_name = xstrdup (domain_name); (*po_content)->next = NULL; } return *po_content; } static void add_id_str (dom, msgid, c_file_name, line_no) struct msg_domain *dom; const char *msgid; const char *c_file_name; size_t line_no; { struct id_str *data; size_t id_len = strlen (msgid); char *msgstr; void *dummy; if (dom == NULL || extract_all) /* Use default domain. */ dom = new_symbols; /* Test whether the MSGID is among those from the exclude file. */ if (find_entry (&exclude_symbols->symbol_tab, msgid, strlen (msgid), &dummy)) /* Simply ignore this MSGID. */ return; if (join_existing) { char *fname; asprintf (&fname, "%s%s.po", output_dir, dom->domain_name); if (fname == NULL) error (EXIT_FAILURE, errno, _("while preparing output")); /* Read existing symbols from file. */ read_po_file (fname, dom, dom->domain_name, 0); free (fname); } /* We must only initialize the msgstr entries when -m or -M were given. In main these variables were canonized so that both are NULL or none. */ if (msgstr_prefix != NULL) { /* FIXME: use alloca? :*/ asprintf (&msgstr, "%s%s%s", msgstr_prefix, msgid, msgstr_suffix); if (msgstr == NULL) error (EXIT_FAILURE, errno, _("while preparing output")); } else msgstr = NULL; /* Store all information in the hashing table. */ data = (struct id_str *) xmalloc (sizeof (*data)); data->msgstr = msgstr; data->occurence.file_name = c_file_name; data->occurence.line_no = line_no; data->occurence.comment = comment.act_size > 0 ? xstrdup (comment.buf) : NULL; data->occurence.next = NULL; if (insert_entry (&dom->symbol_tab, msgid, id_len, data)) { /* Duplicate message ID. No need to store this data set but the line number is interesting. */ struct id_str *entry; struct file_name_line *new_line; (void) find_entry (&dom->symbol_tab, msgid, id_len, (void **) &entry); /* Get end of occurence list. */ new_line = &entry->occurence; while (new_line->next != NULL) new_line = new_line->next; /* Append new occurence. */ new_line->next = (struct file_name_line *) xmalloc (sizeof (*new_line)); new_line->next->file_name = c_file_name; new_line->next->line_no = line_no; new_line->next->comment = data->occurence.comment; new_line->next->next = NULL; free (msgstr); free (data); } /* Mark the comment as used. */ comment.act_size = 0; } static void write_out_domain (dom, do_sort) struct msg_domain *dom; int do_sort; { struct id_str **msg_arr = (struct id_str **) alloca (dom->symbol_tab.filled * sizeof (msg_arr[0])); void *ptr = NULL; char *msgid; size_t cnt = 0; char *file_name; FILE *fp; while (iterate_table (&dom->symbol_tab, &ptr, (void **) &msgid, (void **) &msg_arr[cnt])) { msg_arr[cnt]->msgid = msgid; ++cnt; } assert (cnt == dom->symbol_tab.filled); if (do_sort) /* Sort the table according to the msgid. */ qsort (msg_arr, dom->symbol_tab.filled, sizeof (msg_arr[0]), compare_msgid); /* FIXME: use alloca? */ asprintf (&file_name, "%s%s.po", output_dir, dom->domain_name); if (file_name == NULL) error (EXIT_FAILURE, errno, _("while preparing output")); fp = fopen (file_name, "w"); if (fp == NULL) { error (0, errno, _("cannot create output file \"%s\""), file_name); free (file_name); return; } /* If we are just about to write to the default domain prepend a header. */ if (omit_header == 0 && strcmp (dom->domain_name, default_domain) == 0) write_header (fp); for (cnt = 0; cnt < dom->symbol_tab.filled; ++cnt) { /* Write out all gather comments. */ struct file_name_line *act_line = &msg_arr[cnt]->occurence; /* Begin with an empty line. */ fputs (strict_uniforum ? "#:\n" : "\n", fp); /* Process all comments collected for this message. */ do { if (act_line->comment != NULL) { fputs (act_line->comment, fp); free (act_line->comment); } act_line = act_line->next; } while (act_line != NULL); /* Write out comment with file names and lines if required. */ if (line_comment) { act_line = &msg_arr[cnt]->occurence; fputs ("#:", fp); do { const char *cp = act_line->file_name; while (cp[0] == '.' && cp[1] == '/') cp += 2; fprintf (fp, " %s:%d", cp, act_line->line_no); act_line = act_line->next; } while (act_line != NULL); fputs ("\n", fp); } else if (!strict_uniforum) fputs ("\n", fp); fprintf (fp, "msgid %s\"%s\"\nmsgstr %s\"%s\"\n", strchr (msg_arr[cnt]->msgid, '\n') != NULL ? "\"\"\n" : "", msg_arr[cnt]->msgid, msg_arr[cnt]->msgstr != NULL && strchr (msg_arr[cnt]->msgstr, '\n') != NULL ? "\"\"\n" : "", msg_arr[cnt]->msgstr == NULL ? "" : msg_arr[cnt]->msgstr); } /* Test for an error. */ if (ferror (fp)) error (EXIT_FAILURE, 0, _("error while writing .po file")); /* Close output file. */ fclose (fp); } static int compare_msgid (arg1, arg2) const void *arg1; const void *arg2; { return strcmp ((*(struct id_str **)arg1)->msgid, (*(struct id_str **)arg2)->msgid); } #define TM_YEAR_ORIGIN 1900 /* Yield A - B, measured in seconds. */ static long difftm (a, b) struct tm *a; struct tm *b; { int ay = a->tm_year + (TM_YEAR_ORIGIN - 1); int by = b->tm_year + (TM_YEAR_ORIGIN - 1); /* Some compilers cannot handle this as a single return statement. */ long days = ( /* difference in day of year */ a->tm_yday - b->tm_yday /* + intervening leap days */ + ((ay >> 2) - (by >> 2)) - (ay / 100 - by / 100) + ((ay / 100 >> 2) - (by / 100 >> 2)) /* + diffference in years * 365 */ + (long) (ay - by) * 365l); return 60l * (60l * (24l * days + (a->tm_hour - b->tm_hour)) + (a->tm_min - b->tm_min)) + (a->tm_sec - b->tm_sec); } static void write_header (output_file) FILE *output_file; { int first = 1; time_t now; struct tm local_time; struct passwd *pwd; const char *full_user_name; const char *cp, *endp; char tz_sign; long tz_min; time (&now); local_time = *localtime (&now); tz_sign = '+'; tz_min = difftm (&local_time, gmtime (&now)) / 60; if (tz_min < 0) { tz_min = -tz_min; tz_sign = '-'; } pwd = getpwuid (getuid ()); if (pwd == NULL || pwd->pw_gecos == NULL) full_user_name = "???"; else full_user_name = pwd->pw_gecos; fprintf (output_file, "\ msgid \"\"\n\ msgstr \"\"\n\ \"Date: %d-%02d-%02d %02d:%02d:%02d%c%02ld%02ld\\n\"\n\ \"From: %s <%s>\\n\"\n\ \"Xgettext-Options:%s\\n\"\n", local_time.tm_year + TM_YEAR_ORIGIN, local_time.tm_mon + 1, local_time.tm_mday, local_time.tm_hour, local_time.tm_min, local_time.tm_sec, tz_sign, tz_min / 60l, tz_min % 60l, full_user_name, get_submitter (NULL), xgettext_options); for (cp = input_file_names; (endp = strchr (cp, '\n')) != NULL; cp = endp + 1) { fprintf (output_file, "\"%s%.*s\\n\"\n", first ? "Files:" : "\t", endp - cp, cp); first = 0; } fprintf (output_file, "\"%s%s\\n\"\n", first ? "Files:" : "\t", cp); } gettext-0.7/src/gettextp.c100444 230 226 10034 5776001107 14516 0ustar pinardguest/* gettext - retrieve text string from message catalog and print it. Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Written by Ulrich Drepper , May 1995. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H # include #endif #include #include #ifdef STDC_HEADERS # include #else char *getenv (); #endif #ifdef HAVE_LOCALE_H # include #endif #include "error.h" #include "system.h" #include #define _(str) gettext (str) /* Name the program is called with. */ char *program_name; /* Long options. */ static const struct option long_options[] = { { "help", no_argument, NULL, 'h' }, { "version", no_argument, NULL, 'V' }, { NULL, 0, NULL, 0 } }; /* Prototypes for local functions. */ static void usage (int status) #if defined __GNUC__ && ((__GNUC__ == 2 && __GNUC_MINOR__ >= 5) || __GNUC__ > 2) __attribute__ ((noreturn)) #endif ; int main (int argc, char *argv[]) { int optchar; int do_help = 0; int do_version = 0; char *msgid; char *domain = getenv ("TEXTDOMAIN"); char *domaindir = getenv ("TEXTDOMAINDIR"); /* Set program name for message texts. */ program_name = argv[0]; #ifdef HAVE_SETLOCALE /* Set locale via LC_ALL. */ setlocale (LC_ALL, ""); #endif /* Set the text message domain. */ bindtextdomain (PACKAGE, LOCALEDIR); textdomain (PACKAGE); while ((optchar = getopt_long (argc, argv, "hV", long_options, NULL)) != EOF) switch (optchar) { case '\0': break; case 'h': do_help = 1; break; case 'V': do_version = 1; break; default: usage (EXIT_FAILURE); } /* Version information is requested. */ if (do_version) { fprintf (stderr, "%s - GNU %s %s\n", program_name, PACKAGE, VERSION); exit (EXIT_SUCCESS); } /* Help is requested. */ if (do_help) usage (EXIT_SUCCESS); if (optind >= argc) error (EXIT_FAILURE, 0, _("missing arguments")); /* Get arguments. */ msgid = argv[optind++]; if (optind < argc) { domain = msgid; msgid = argv[optind++]; if (optind < argc) error (EXIT_FAILURE, 0, _("too many arguments")); } /* If no domain name is given we print the original string. */ if (domain == NULL || domain[0] == '\0') { fputs (msgid, stdout); exit (EXIT_SUCCESS); } /* Bind domain to appropriate directory. */ if (domaindir != NULL && domaindir[0] != '\0') bindtextdomain (domaindir, domain); /* Write out the result. */ fputs (dgettext (domain, msgid), stdout); exit (EXIT_SUCCESS); } /* Display usage information and exit. */ static void usage (int status) { if (status != EXIT_SUCCESS) fprintf (stderr, _("Try `%s --help' for more information\n"), program_name); else printf (_("\ Usage: %s [-h | -v | [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID]\n\ -h, --help display this help and exit\n\ -v, --version display version information and exit\n\ [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID retrieve translated message corresponding\n\ to MSGID from TEXTDOMAIN\n\ \n\ If the TEXTDOMAIN parameter is not given, the domain is determined from the\n\ environment variable TEXTDOMAIN. If the message catalog is not found in the\n\ regular directory, another location can be specified with the environment\n\ variable TEXTDOMAINDIR.\n\ Standard search directory: %s\n"), program_name, LOCALEDIR); exit (status); } gettext-0.7/src/hash.c100444 230 226 14717 5775777025 13633 0ustar pinardguest/* hash - implement simple hashing table with string based keys. Copyright (C) 1994, 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. Written by Ulrich Drepper , October 1994. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H # include #endif #include #include #if HAVE_OBSTACK # include #else # include "obstack.h" #endif #ifdef HAVE_MALLOC_H # include #endif #ifdef HAVE_STRING_H # include #else # include #endif #ifdef HAVE_VALUES_H # include #endif #include "hash.h" #include "system.h" #define obstack_chunk_alloc xmalloc #define obstack_chunk_free free #ifndef BITSPERBYTE # define BITSPERBYTE 8 #endif #ifndef LONGBITS # define LONGBITS (sizeof (long) * BITSPERBYTE) #endif /* LONGBITS */ #ifndef bcopy # define bcopy(s, d, n) memcpy ((d), (s), (n)) #endif void *xmalloc (size_t __n); typedef struct hash_entry { unsigned int used; char *key; void *data; struct hash_entry *next; } hash_entry; /* Prototypes for local functions. */ static size_t lookup __P ((hash_table *htab, const char *key, size_t keylen, unsigned long hval)); static unsigned long compute_hashval __P ((const char *key, size_t keylen)); static int is_prime __P ((unsigned long candidate)); int init_hash(htab, init_size) hash_table *htab; unsigned long init_size; { /* We need the size to be a prime. */ init_size = next_prime (init_size); /* Initialize the data structure. */ htab->size = init_size; htab->filled = 0; htab->first = NULL; htab->table = calloc (init_size + 1, sizeof (hash_entry)); obstack_init (&htab->mem_pool); return htab->table == NULL; } int delete_hash(htab) hash_table *htab; { free (htab->table); obstack_free (&htab->mem_pool, NULL); return 0; } int insert_entry (htab, key, keylen, data) hash_table *htab; const char *key; size_t keylen; void *data; { unsigned long hval = compute_hashval (key, keylen); hash_entry *table = (hash_entry *) htab->table; size_t idx = lookup (htab, key, keylen, hval); if (table[idx].used) /* We don't want to overwrite the old value. */ return 1; else { /* An empty bucket has been found. */ table[idx].used = hval; table[idx].key = obstack_copy0 (&htab->mem_pool, key, keylen); table[idx].data = data; /* List the new value in the list. */ if ((hash_entry *) htab->first == NULL) { table[idx].next = &table[idx]; (hash_entry *) htab->first = &table[idx]; } else { table[idx].next = ((hash_entry *) htab->first)->next; ((hash_entry *) htab->first)->next = &table[idx]; (hash_entry *) htab->first = &table[idx]; } ++htab->filled; if (100 * htab->filled > 90 * htab->size) { /* Resize the table. */ unsigned long old_size = htab->size; htab->size = next_prime (htab->size * 2); htab->filled = 0; htab->first = NULL; htab->table = calloc (htab->size, sizeof (hash_entry)); for (idx = 1; idx <= old_size; ++idx) if (table[idx].used) insert_entry (htab, table[idx].key, strlen(table[idx].key), table[idx].data); free (table); } return 0; } /* NOTREACHED */ } int find_entry (htab, key, keylen, result) hash_table *htab; const char *key; size_t keylen; void **result; { hash_entry *table = (hash_entry *) htab->table; size_t idx = lookup (htab, key, keylen, compute_hashval (key, keylen)); int retval; retval = table[idx].used; *result = retval ? table[idx].data : NULL; return retval; } int iterate_table (htab, ptr, key, data) hash_table *htab; void **ptr; void **key; void **data; { if (*ptr == NULL) { if (htab->first == NULL) return 0; *ptr = (void *) ((hash_entry *) htab->first)->next; } else { if (*ptr == htab->first) return 0; *ptr = (void *) (((hash_entry *) *ptr)->next); } *key = ((hash_entry *) *ptr)->key; *data = ((hash_entry *) *ptr)->data; return 1; } static size_t lookup (htab, key, keylen, hval) hash_table *htab; const char *key; size_t keylen; unsigned long hval; { unsigned long hash; size_t idx; hash_entry *table = (hash_entry *) htab->table; /* First hash function: simply take the modul but prevent zero. */ hash = 1 + hval % htab->size; idx = hash; if (table[idx].used) { if (table[idx].used == hval && table[idx].key[keylen] == '\0' && strncmp (key, table[idx].key, keylen) == 0) return idx; /* Second hash function as suggested in [Knuth]. */ hash = 1 + hval % (htab->size - 2); do { if (idx <= hash) idx = htab->size + idx - hash; else idx -= hash; /* If entry is found use it. */ if (table[idx].used == hval && table[idx].key[keylen] == '\0' && strncmp (key, table[idx].key, keylen) == 0) return idx; } while (table[idx].used); } return idx; } static unsigned long compute_hashval (key, keylen) const char *key; size_t keylen; { size_t cnt; unsigned long hval, g; /* Compute the hash value for the given string. */ cnt = 0; hval = keylen; while (cnt < keylen) { hval <<= 4; hval += key[cnt++]; g = hval & (0xf << (LONGBITS - 4)); if (g != 0) { hval ^= g >> (LONGBITS - 8); hval ^= g; } } return hval != 0 ? hval : ~0ul; } unsigned long next_prime (seed) unsigned long seed; { /* Make it definitely odd. */ seed |= 1; while (!is_prime (seed)) seed += 2; return seed; } static int is_prime (candidate) unsigned long candidate; { /* No even number and none less than 10 will be passed here. */ unsigned long div = 3; unsigned long sq = div * div; while (sq < candidate && candidate % div != 0) { ++div; sq += 4 * div; ++div; } return candidate % div != 0; } gettext-0.7/src/open-po.c100444 230 226 7570 5775777732 14251 0ustar pinardguest/* open-po - search for .po file along search path list and open for reading Copyright (C) 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. Written by Ulrich Drepper , April 1995. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H # include #endif #include #include #include #include #include #include "error.h" #include "system.h" #include #define _(str) gettext (str) #ifndef errno extern int errno; #endif /* List with directories to be searched for .po files. */ extern char *input_path_list; /* Prototypes for helper functions. */ extern char *xstrdup (const char *string); /* Open the input file with the name INPUT_NAME. The ending .po is added if necessary. If INPUT_NAME is not an absolute file name and the file is not found, the list of directories in INPUT_PATH_LIST is searched. */ FILE * open_po_file (input_name, file_name, use_path) const char *input_name; char **file_name; int use_path; { FILE *ret_val; size_t len; char *search_path; char *path_dir; if (strcmp (input_name, "-") == 0) { *file_name = xstrdup (_("")); return stdin; } /* We have a real name for the input file. First look for in the current directory. If not found and the name does not is a absolute file name look through the input path. */ ret_val = fopen (input_name, "r"); if (ret_val != NULL) { *file_name = xstrdup (input_name); return ret_val; } len = strlen (input_name); if (len <= 3 || strcmp (input_name + len - 3, ".po") != 0) { asprintf (file_name, "%s.po", input_name); if (*file_name == NULL) error (EXIT_FAILURE, errno, _("error while constructing file name")); ret_val = fopen (*file_name, "r"); if (ret_val != NULL) return ret_val; free (*file_name); } /* If absolute path is given or no search path, signal error. */ if (input_name[0] == '/' || input_path_list == NULL || use_path == 0) { *file_name = xstrdup (input_name); errno = ENOENT; return NULL; } /* Create copy of search path for strtok. */ search_path = xstrdup (input_path_list); /* Now search in all directories given in `search_path' which are seperated by `:'. */ path_dir = strtok (search_path, ":"); while (path_dir != NULL) { if (path_dir[0] == '\0') { path_dir = strtok (NULL, ":"); continue; } asprintf (file_name, "%s/%s", path_dir, input_name); if (*file_name == NULL) error (EXIT_FAILURE, errno, _("error while constructing file name")); ret_val = fopen (*file_name, "r"); if (ret_val != NULL) break; free (*file_name); if (len <= 3 || strcmp (input_name + len - 3, ".po") != 0) { asprintf (file_name, "%s/%s.po", path_dir, input_name); if (*file_name == NULL) error (EXIT_FAILURE, errno, _("error while constructing file name")); ret_val = fopen (*file_name, "r"); if (ret_val != NULL) break; free (*file_name); } /* Get next directory from path list. */ path_dir = strtok (NULL, ":"); } free (search_path); if (ret_val == NULL) { *file_name = xstrdup (input_name); errno = ENOENT; } return ret_val; } gettext-0.7/po/ 40755 230 226 0 5776107763 12243 5ustar pinardguestgettext-0.7/po/ChangeLog100444 230 226 535 5775363234 14067 0ustar pinardguestSun Jul 2 02:19:20 1995 Ulrich Drepper * First official release. This directory contains the sources of the message catalog. These are given in the .po file format specified in the Uniforum proposal. With the help of the system's tools or the ones provided by this package every other format needed can be constructed. gettext-0.7/po/Makefile.in.in100444 230 226 7566 5776106223 15014 0ustar pinardguest# Makefile for program source directory in GNU NLS utilities package. # Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ VERSION = @VERSION@ SHELL = /bin/sh @SET_MAKE@ srcdir = @srcdir@ top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ VPATH = @srcdir@ prefix = @prefix@ exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ datadir = $(prefix)/@DATADIRNAME@ localedir = $(datadir)/locale subdir = po INSTALL = @INSTALL@ INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ GENCAT = @GENCAT@ GMSGFMT = @GMSGFMT@ MSGFMT = @MSGFMT@ XGETTEXT = @XGETTEXT@ TUPDATE = @PERL@ $(top_srcdir)/intl/tupdate.perl POFILES = @POFILES@ GMOFILES = @GMOFILES@ DISTFILES = ChangeLog Makefile.in.in POTFILES.in $(PACKAGE).pot \ $(POFILES) $(GMOFILES) POTFILES = \ CATALOGS = @CATALOGS@ CATOBJEXT = @CATOBJEXT@ INSTOBJEXT = @INSTOBJEXT@ .SUFFIXES: .SUFFIXES: .po .pox .gmo .mo .msg .cat .po.pox: $(MAKE) $(PACKAGE).pot $(TUPDATE) $(PACKAGE).pot $*.po > $*.pox .po.mo: $(MSGFMT) -o $@ $(srcdir)/$*.po .po.gmo: $(GMSGFMT) -o $@ $(srcdir)/$*.po .po.msg: sed -f ../intl/po-to-msg.sed < $(srcdir)/$*.po > $@ .msg.cat: rm -f $@ $(GENCAT) $@ $*.msg all: $(CATALOGS) $(PACKAGE).pot: $(POTFILES) rm -f $(PACKAGE).po $(XGETTEXT) --default-domain=$(PACKAGE) --output-dir=. \ --add-comments --keyword=_ $(POTFILES) if cmp -s $(PACKAGE).po $(PACKAGE).pot; then \ rm -f $(PACKAGE).po; \ else \ mv -f $(PACKAGE).po $(PACKAGE).pot; \ fi install: install-exec install-data install-exec: install-data: all $(top_srcdir)/mkinstalldirs $(datadir) if test -n "$(CATALOGS)"; then \ for cat in $(CATALOGS); do \ dir=$(localedir)/`expr $$cat : '\(.*\)$(CATOBJEXT)'`/LC_MESSAGES; \ $(top_srcdir)/mkinstalldirs $$dir; \ if test -r $$cat; then \ $(INSTALL_DATA) $$cat $$dir/$(PACKAGE)$(INSTOBJEXT); \ else \ $(INSTALL_DATA) $(srcdir)/$$cat $$dir/$(PACKAGE)$(INSTOBJEXT); \ fi \ done \ fi uninstall: if test -n "$(CATALOGS)"; then \ for cat in $(CATALOGS); do \ dir=$(localedir)/`expr $$cat : '\(.*\)$(CATOBJEXT)'`/LC_MESSAGES; \ rm -f $$dir/$(PACKAGE)$(INSTOBJEXT); \ done \ fi TAGS ID: mostlyclean: rm -f core core.* *.pox $(PACKAGE).po *.old.po clean: mostlyclean distclean: clean rm -f Makefile Makefile.in POTFILES *.mo *.msg *.cat maintainer-clean: distclean @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use;" @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." distdir = ../$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)/$(subdir) dist: Makefile $(DISTFILES) $(MAKE) $(PACKAGE).pot for cat in $(CATALOGS); do \ lang=`expr $$cat : '\(.*\)$(CATOBJEXT)'`; \ mv $$lang.po $$lang.old.po; \ $(TUPDATE) $(PACKAGE).pot $$lang.old.po > $$lang.po; \ rm -f $$lang.old.po; \ done touch $(GMOFILES) for file in $(DISTFILES); do \ ln $$file $(distdir) \ || { echo copying $$file instead; cp -p $$file $(distdir);}; \ done POTFILES: POTFILES.in sed -e "/^#/d" -e "/^[ ]*$$/d" -e "s/.*/ & \\\\/" \ -e "\$$s/\(.*\) \\\\/\1/" < $(srcdir)/POTFILES.in > POTFILES Makefile: Makefile.in.in ../config.status POTFILES cd .. && CONFIG_FILES=$(subdir)/$@.in CONFIG_HEADERS= ./config.status # Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make not to export all variables. # Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. .NOEXPORT: gettext-0.7/po/POTFILES.in100444 230 226 324 5774106346 14064 0ustar pinardguest# POTFILES - files which contains strings to be translated # Files from the libiberty ../lib/error.c ../lib/getopt.c ../lib/xmalloc.c # Package source files ../src/gettextp.c ../src/msgfmt.c ../src/xgettext.c gettext-0.7/po/gettext.pot100644 230 226 16646 5776107747 14607 0ustar pinardguestmsgid "" msgstr "" "Version: \n" "Date: 1995-07-04 02:48:39+0200\n" "From: Ulrich Drepper \n" "Xgettext-Options: --default-domain=gettext --output-dir=. --add-comments --keyword=_\n" "Files: ../lib/error.c ../lib/getopt.c ../lib/xmalloc.c ../src/gettextp.c\n" " ../src/msgfmt.c ../src/xgettext.c\n" #: ../lib/error.c:72 msgid "Unknown system error" msgstr "" #: ../lib/getopt.c:516 msgid "%s: option `%s' is ambiguous\n" msgstr "" #: ../lib/getopt.c:540 msgid "%s: option `--%s' doesn't allow an argument\n" msgstr "" #: ../lib/getopt.c:545 msgid "%s: option `%c%s' doesn't allow an argument\n" msgstr "" #: ../lib/getopt.c:559 msgid "%s: option `%s' requires an argument\n" msgstr "" #. --option #. #: ../lib/getopt.c:587 msgid "%s: unrecognized option `--%s'\n" msgstr "" #. +option or -option #. #: ../lib/getopt.c:591 msgid "%s: unrecognized option `%c%s'\n" msgstr "" #. 1003.2 specifies the format of this message. #. #: ../lib/getopt.c:616 msgid "%s: illegal option -- %c\n" msgstr "" #: ../lib/getopt.c:618 msgid "%s: invalid option -- %c\n" msgstr "" #. 1003.2 specifies the format of this message. #. #: ../lib/getopt.c:652 msgid "%s: option requires an argument -- %c\n" msgstr "" #: ../lib/xmalloc.c:67 msgid "memory exhausted" msgstr "" #: ../src/gettextp.c:110 msgid "missing arguments" msgstr "" #: ../src/gettextp.c:120 msgid "too many arguments" msgstr "" #: ../src/gettextp.c:146 ../src/msgfmt.c:323 ../src/xgettext.c:480 msgid "Try `%s --help' for more information\n" msgstr "" #: ../src/gettextp.c:149 msgid "" "Usage: %s [-h | -v | [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID]\n" " -h, --help display this help and exit\n" " -v, --version display version information and exit\n" " [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID retrieve translated message corresponding\n" " to MSGID from TEXTDOMAIN\n" "\n" "If the TEXTDOMAIN parameter is not given, the domain is determined from the\n" "environment variable TEXTDOMAIN. If the message catalog is not found in the\n" "regular directory, another location can be specified with the environment\n" "variable TEXTDOMAINDIR.\n" "Standard search directory: %s\n" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:244 ../src/xgettext.c:381 msgid "no input file given" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:270 ../src/xgettext.c:454 ../src/xgettext.c:1071 msgid "error while opening \"%s\" for reading" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:301 msgid "error while opening \"%s\" for writing" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:326 msgid "" "Usage: %s [OPTION] filename.po ...\n" "Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.\n" " -a, --alignment=NUMBER align strings to NUMBER bytes (default: %d)\n" " -h, --help display this help and exit\n" " -I, --input-path=LIST list of directories searched for input files\n" " --no-hash binary file will not include the hash table\n" " -o, --output-file=FILE specify output file name as FILE\n" " -v, --verbose list input file anormalies\n" " -V, --version output version information and exit\n" "\n" "Search path is: %s\n" "\n" "If input file is -, standard input is read. If output file is -,\n" "output is written to standard output.\n" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:361 ../src/xgettext.c:1333 msgid "while creating hash table" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:401 ../src/xgettext.c:1090 msgid "error while reading \"%s\"" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:456 ../src/xgettext.c:1143 msgid "incomplete `%s' directive at end of file" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:470 ../src/xgettext.c:1165 msgid "syntax error: value is no quoted string" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:496 msgid "end of file \"%s\" while reading string" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:574 ../src/msgfmt.c:582 msgid "illegal control sequence" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:577 msgid "end of file occured inside directive value" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:590 ../src/xgettext.c:1212 msgid "unterminated string constant" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:600 ../src/xgettext.c:1241 msgid "trailing garbage in line" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:634 ../src/xgettext.c:1254 msgid "previous `msgid' directive not matched by `msgstr'" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:646 ../src/xgettext.c:1266 msgid "domain name \"%s\" not suitable as file name: will use prefix" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:660 ../src/xgettext.c:1280 msgid "`msgid' directive expected" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:665 msgid "empty msgstr entry ignored" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:706 msgid "duplicate message ID" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:707 msgid "this is the location of the first definition" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:719 ../src/xgettext.c:1300 msgid "`msgstr' directive expected" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:726 ../src/xgettext.c:1307 msgid "syntax error: unknown directive" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:922 msgid "`msgid' and `msgstr' entry does not both begin with '\\n'" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:927 msgid "`msgid' and `msgstr' entry does not both end with '\\n'" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:935 msgid "number of format specifications in `msgid' and `msgstr' does not match" msgstr "" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:948 msgid "format specifications for argument %u are not the same" msgstr "" #. We are about to construct the absolute path to the #. directory for the output files but asprintf failed. #. #: ../src/xgettext.c:348 ../src/xgettext.c:1369 ../src/xgettext.c:1384 ../src/xgettext.c:1455 msgid "while preparing output" msgstr "" #: ../src/xgettext.c:483 msgid "" "Usage: %s [OPTION] INPUTFILE ...\n" "Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.\n" " -a, --extract-all extract all strings\n" " -c, --add-comments[=TAG] place comment block with TAG (or those\n" " preceding keyword lines) in output file\n" " -C, --c++ recognize C++ style comments\n" " -d, --default-domain=NAME use NAME.po for output (instead of messages.po)\n" " -h, --help display this help and exit\n" " -I, --input-path=LIST list of directories searched for input files\n" " -j, --join-existing join messages with existing file\n" " -k, --keyword[=WORD] additonal keyword to be looked for (without\n" " WORD means not to use default keywords)\n" " -m, --msgstr-prefix[=STRING] use STRING or \"\" as prefix for msgstr entries\n" " -M, --msgstr-suffix[=STRING] use STRING or \"\" as suffix for msgstr entries\n" " --no-location do not write '#: filename:line' lines\n" " -n, --add-location generate '#: filename:line' lines (default)\n" " --omit-header don't write header with `msgid \"\"' entry\n" " -p, --output-dir=DIR output files will be placed in directory DIR\n" " -s, --sort-output generate sorted output and remove duplicates\n" " --strict write out strict Uniforum conforming .po file\n" " -v, --version output version information and exit\n" " -x, --exclude-file=FILE entries from FILE are not extracted\n" "\n" "Search path for supplementary .po files is:\n" "%s\n" "\n" "If INPUTFILE is -, standard input is read.\n" msgstr "" #: ../src/xgettext.c:1051 msgid "trailing garbage after string in call of keyword" msgstr "" #: ../src/xgettext.c:1156 msgid "syntax error: no value" msgstr "" #: ../src/xgettext.c:1460 msgid "cannot create output file \"%s\"" msgstr "" #: ../src/xgettext.c:1521 msgid "error while writing .po file" msgstr "" gettext-0.7/po/de.po100644 230 226 30207 5776107755 13313 0ustar pinardguestmsgid "" msgstr "" "Date: 1995-06-28 16:58:45+0200\n" "From: Ulrich Drepper \n" "Xgettext-Options: --default-domain=gettext --output-dir=. --add-comments --keyword --keyword=_\n" "Files: ../lib/error.c ../lib/getopt.c ../lib/xmalloc.c ../src/gettextp.c\n" " ../src/msgfmt.c ../src/xgettext.c\n" "Updated: Tue Jul 4 2:48:45 MET 1995\n" #: ../lib/error.c:72 msgid "Unknown system error" msgstr "unbekannter Systemfehler" #: ../lib/getopt.c:516 msgid "%s: option `%s' is ambiguous\n" msgstr "%s: Option `%s' ist mehrdeutig\n" #: ../lib/getopt.c:540 msgid "%s: option `--%s' doesn't allow an argument\n" msgstr "%s: Option `--%s' erwartet kein Argument\n" #: ../lib/getopt.c:545 msgid "%s: option `%c%s' doesn't allow an argument\n" msgstr "%s: Option `%c%s' erwartet kein Argument\n" #: ../lib/getopt.c:559 msgid "%s: option `%s' requires an argument\n" msgstr "%s: Option `%s' erwartet ein Argument\n" #. --option #. #: ../lib/getopt.c:587 msgid "%s: unrecognized option `--%s'\n" msgstr "%s: unbekannte Option `--%s'\n" #. +option or -option #. #: ../lib/getopt.c:591 msgid "%s: unrecognized option `%c%s'\n" msgstr "%s: unbekannte Option `%c%s'\n" #. 1003.2 specifies the format of this message. #. #: ../lib/getopt.c:616 msgid "%s: illegal option -- %c\n" msgstr "%s: unzulässige Option -- %c\n" #: ../lib/getopt.c:618 msgid "%s: invalid option -- %c\n" msgstr "%s: ungültige Option -- %c\n" #. 1003.2 specifies the format of this message. #. #: ../lib/getopt.c:652 msgid "%s: option requires an argument -- %c\n" msgstr "%s: Option erwartet ein Argument -- %c\n" #: ../lib/xmalloc.c:67 msgid "memory exhausted" msgstr "virtueller Speicher erschöpft" #: ../src/gettextp.c:110 msgid "missing arguments" msgstr "Argumente fehlen" #: ../src/gettextp.c:120 msgid "too many arguments" msgstr "zu viele Argumente" #: ../src/gettextp.c:146 ../src/msgfmt.c:323 ../src/xgettext.c:480 msgid "Try `%s --help' for more information\n" msgstr "`%s --help' gibt weitere Informationen\n" #: ../src/gettextp.c:149 msgid "" "Usage: %s [-h | -v | [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID]\n" " -h, --help display this help and exit\n" " -v, --version display version information and exit\n" " [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID retrieve translated message corresponding\n" " to MSGID from TEXTDOMAIN\n" "\n" "If the TEXTDOMAIN parameter is not given, the domain is determined from the\n" "environment variable TEXTDOMAIN. If the message catalog is not found in the\n" "regular directory, another location can be specified with the environment\n" "variable TEXTDOMAINDIR.\n" "Standard search directory: %s\n" msgstr "" "Benutzung: %s [-h | -v | [BEREICH] SCHLÜSSEL]\n" " -h, --help zeige diese Hilfe und beende\n" " -v, --version zeige Versionsnummer und beende\n" " [BEREICH] SCHLÜSSEL hole die Übersetzung zu SCHLÜSSEL aus\n" " dem Namensbereich BEREICH\n" "\n" "Wenn der BEREICH Parameter nicht gegeben wurde, wird der Bereich durch die\n" "Umgebungsvariable TEXTDOMAIN bestimmt. Wenn der Katalog dieses Bereiches\n" "sich nicht im Standardverzeichnis des Systems befindet, kann durch die\n" "Umgebungsvariable TEXTDOMAINDIR ein anderes Verzeichnis angegeben werden.\n" "Standardverzeichnis: %s\n" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:244 ../src/xgettext.c:381 msgid "no input file given" msgstr "Eingabedatei fehlt" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:270 ../src/xgettext.c:454 ../src/xgettext.c:1071 msgid "error while opening \"%s\" for reading" msgstr "Öffnen der Datei \"%s\" zum Lesen fehlgeschlagen" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:301 msgid "error while opening \"%s\" for writing" msgstr "Öffnen der Datei \"%s\" zum Schreiben fehlgeschlagen" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:326 msgid "" "Usage: %s [OPTION] filename.po ...\n" "Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.\n" " -a, --alignment=NUMBER align strings to NUMBER bytes (default: %d)\n" " -h, --help display this help and exit\n" " -I, --input-path=LIST list of directories searched for input files\n" " --no-hash binary file will not include the hash table\n" " -o, --output-file=FILE specify output file name as FILE\n" " -v, --verbose list input file anormalies\n" " -V, --version output version information and exit\n" "\n" "Search path is: %s\n" "\n" "If input file is -, standard input is read. If output file is -,\n" "output is written to standard output.\n" msgstr "" "Benutzung: %s [OPTION] Dateiname.po ...\n" "Notwendige Argumente für Optionen in Langform sind auch für die\n" "Kurzform notwendig.\n" " -a, --alignment=ZAHL Ausgaben an ZAHL (Std: %d) Bytegrenze ausrichten\n" " -h, --help zeige diese Hilfe und beende\n" " -I, --input-path=PFAD erweitere Suchpfad für Eingabedateien um PFAD\n" " --no-hash Binärdatei wird keine Hash-Tabelle enthalten\n" " -o, --output-file=DATEI lege DATEI als Ausgabedatei fest\n" " -v, --verbose zeige Unregelmäßigkeiten in Eingabe auf\n" " -V, --version zeige Versionsnummer und beende\n" "\n" "Suchpfad ist: %s\n" "\n" "Wenn die Eingabedatei - ist, wird die Eingabe von Standard Eingabe gelesen.\n" "Ist die Ausgabedatei -, wird nach Standard Ausgabe geschrieben.\n" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:361 ../src/xgettext.c:1333 msgid "while creating hash table" msgstr "beim Anlegen der Hash-Tabelle" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:401 ../src/xgettext.c:1090 msgid "error while reading \"%s\"" msgstr "Fehler beim Lesen von \"%s\"" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:456 ../src/xgettext.c:1143 msgid "incomplete `%s' directive at end of file" msgstr "unvollständige `%s' Anweisung am Dateiende" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:470 ../src/xgettext.c:1165 msgid "syntax error: value is no quoted string" msgstr "Syntaxfehler: Wert für Anweisung ist keine Zeichenkette" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:496 msgid "end of file \"%s\" while reading string" msgstr "Dateiende von \"%s\" beim Lesen einer Zeichenkette erreicht" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:574 ../src/msgfmt.c:582 msgid "illegal control sequence" msgstr "ungültiges Kontrollzeichen" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:577 msgid "end of file occured inside directive value" msgstr "Dateiende ist innerhalb des Anweisungswertes aufgetreten" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:590 ../src/xgettext.c:1212 msgid "unterminated string constant" msgstr "nicht abgeschlossene Zeichenkette" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:600 ../src/xgettext.c:1241 msgid "trailing garbage in line" msgstr "unzulässige Zeichen am Zeilenende" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:634 ../src/xgettext.c:1254 msgid "previous `msgid' directive not matched by `msgstr'" msgstr "vorangehende `msgid' Anweisung hat keine zugehörige `msgstr' Anweisung" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:646 ../src/xgettext.c:1266 msgid "domain name \"%s\" not suitable as file name: will use prefix" msgstr "Bereichsname \"%s\" nicht als Dateiname geeignet: werde Präfix verwenden" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:660 ../src/xgettext.c:1280 msgid "`msgid' directive expected" msgstr "`msgstr' Anweisung erwartet" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:665 msgid "empty msgstr entry ignored" msgstr "leerer `msgstr' Eintrag wird ignoriert" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:706 msgid "duplicate message ID" msgstr "Schlüssel mehrfach definiert" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:707 msgid "this is the location of the first definition" msgstr "dies ist die Stelle der ersten Definition" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:719 ../src/xgettext.c:1300 msgid "`msgstr' directive expected" msgstr "`msgstr' Anweisung erwartet" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:726 ../src/xgettext.c:1307 msgid "syntax error: unknown directive" msgstr "Syntaxfehler: unbekannte Anweisung" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:922 msgid "`msgid' and `msgstr' entry does not both begin with '\\n'" msgstr "`msgid' und `msgstr' Eintrag beginnen nicht beide mit '\\n'" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:927 msgid "`msgid' and `msgstr' entry does not both end with '\\n'" msgstr "`msgid' und `msgstr' Eintrag enden nicht beide mit '\\n'" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:935 msgid "number of format specifications in `msgid' and `msgstr' does not match" msgstr "Anzahl der Formatelemente in `msgid' and `msgstr' stimmen nicht überein" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:948 msgid "format specifications for argument %u are not the same" msgstr "Formatelemente für Argument %u stimmen nicht überein" #. We are about to construct the absolute path to the #. directory for the output files but asprintf failed. #. #: ../src/xgettext.c:348 ../src/xgettext.c:1369 ../src/xgettext.c:1384 ../src/xgettext.c:1455 msgid "while preparing output" msgstr "beim Vorbereiten der Ausgabe" #: ../src/xgettext.c:483 msgid "" "Usage: %s [OPTION] INPUTFILE ...\n" "Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.\n" " -a, --extract-all extract all strings\n" " -c, --add-comments[=TAG] place comment block with TAG (or those\n" " preceding keyword lines) in output file\n" " -C, --c++ recognize C++ style comments\n" " -d, --default-domain=NAME use NAME.po for output (instead of messages.po)\n" " -h, --help display this help and exit\n" " -I, --input-path=LIST list of directories searched for input files\n" " -j, --join-existing join messages with existing file\n" " -k, --keyword[=WORD] additonal keyword to be looked for (without\n" " WORD means not to use default keywords)\n" " -m, --msgstr-prefix[=STRING] use STRING or \"\" as prefix for msgstr entries\n" " -M, --msgstr-suffix[=STRING] use STRING or \"\" as suffix for msgstr entries\n" " --no-location do not write '#: filename:line' lines\n" " -n, --add-location generate '#: filename:line' lines (default)\n" " --omit-header don't write header with `msgid \"\"' entry\n" " -p, --output-dir=DIR output files will be placed in directory DIR\n" " -s, --sort-output generate sorted output and remove duplicates\n" " --strict write out strict Uniforum conforming .po file\n" " -v, --version output version information and exit\n" " -x, --exclude-file=FILE entries from FILE are not extracted\n" "\n" "Search path for supplementary .po files is:\n" "%s\n" "\n" "If INPUTFILE is -, standard input is read.\n" msgstr "" "Benutzung: %s [OPTION] EINGABEDATEI ...\n" "Notwendige Argumente für Optionen in Langform sind auch für die\n" "Kurzform notwendig.\n" " -a, --extract-all schreibe alle Zeichenketten heraus\n" " -c, --add-comments[=KENNUNG] Kommentare mit Kennung (oder die aus Zeilen\n" " vor einem Schlüsselwort) herausschreiben\n" " -C, --c++ behandle auch C++ Kommentare\n" " -d, --default-domain=NAME Ausgabe in NAME.po (anstatt in messages.po)\n" " -h, --help zeige diese Hilfe und beende\n" " -I, --input-path=PFAD erweitere Suchpfad für Eingabedateien um PFAD\n" " -j, --join-existing hänge Ausgaben an existierende Datei an\n" " -k, --keyword[=WORT] zusätzliches Wort nach dem gesucht wird (ohne\n" " WORT schaltet Suche nach Standardworten ab)\n" " -m, --msgstr-prefix[=KETTE] nehme KETTE oder \"\" als Präfix für msgstr\n" " -M, --msgstr-suffix[=KETTE] nehme KETTE oder \"\" als Suffix für msgstr\n" " --no-location keine '#: Dateiname:Zeilennummer' Zeilen\n" " -n, --add-location erzeuge '#: Dateiname:Zeilennummer' (default)\n" " -p, --output-dir=VERZEICHNIS Ausgabedateien kommen nach VERZEICHNIS\n" " -s, --sort-output sortiere Ausgabe und entferne Dubletten\n" " -v, --version zeige Versionsnummer und beende\n" " -x, --exclude-file=DATEI Einträge aus DATEI werden nicht bearbeitet\n" "\n" "Suchpfad für zusätzliche .po Dateien ist:\n" "%s\n" "\n" "Wenn EINGABEDATEI - ist, wird von Standard Eingabe gelesen.\n" #: ../src/xgettext.c:1051 msgid "trailing garbage after string in call of keyword" msgstr "unzulässige Zeichen nach Zeichenkette beim Aufruf der gesuchten Funktion" #: ../src/xgettext.c:1156 msgid "syntax error: no value" msgstr "kein Wert für Anweisung" #: ../src/xgettext.c:1460 msgid "cannot create output file \"%s\"" msgstr "Ausgabedatei \"%s\" kann nicht erzeugt werden" #: ../src/xgettext.c:1521 msgid "error while writing .po file" msgstr "Fehler beim Schreiben der .po Datei" gettext-0.7/po/fr.po100644 230 226 30622 5776107761 13330 0ustar pinardguestmsgid "" msgstr "" "Date: 1995-05-01 00:33 EDT\n" "From: François Pinard \n" "Directory: /home/pinard/IN/nlsutils-0.4\n" "Files: ../lib/error.c ../lib/getopt.c ../lib/xmalloc.c ../src/gettextp.c\n" " ../src/msgfmt.c ../src/xgettext.c\n" "Xgettext-Options: -d nlsutils -n -k -k_\n" "Updated: Tue Jul 4 2:48:48 MET 1995\n" #: ../lib/error.c:72 msgid "Unknown system error" msgstr "Erreur système inconnue" #: ../lib/getopt.c:516 msgid "%s: option `%s' is ambiguous\n" msgstr "%s: l'option Ğ%sğ est ambiguë\n" #: ../lib/getopt.c:540 msgid "%s: option `--%s' doesn't allow an argument\n" msgstr "%s: l'option Ğ--%sğ ne tolère pas d'argument\n" #: ../lib/getopt.c:545 msgid "%s: option `%c%s' doesn't allow an argument\n" msgstr "%s: l'option Ğ%c%sğ ne tolère pas d'argument\n" #: ../lib/getopt.c:559 msgid "%s: option `%s' requires an argument\n" msgstr "%s: l'option Ğ%sğ exige un argument\n" #. --option #. #: ../lib/getopt.c:587 msgid "%s: unrecognized option `--%s'\n" msgstr "%s: l'option Ğ--%sğ n'est pas reconnue\n" #. +option or -option #. #: ../lib/getopt.c:591 msgid "%s: unrecognized option `%c%s'\n" msgstr "%s: l'option Ğ%c%sğ n'est pas reconnue\n" #. 1003.2 specifies the format of this message. #. #: ../lib/getopt.c:616 msgid "%s: illegal option -- %c\n" msgstr "%s: l'option Ğ%cğ n'est pas permise\n" #: ../lib/getopt.c:618 msgid "%s: invalid option -- %c\n" msgstr "%s: l'option Ğ%cğ n'est pas valide\n" #. 1003.2 specifies the format of this message. #. #: ../lib/getopt.c:652 msgid "%s: option requires an argument -- %c\n" msgstr "%s: l'option Ğ%cğ exige un argument\n" #: ../lib/xmalloc.c:67 msgid "memory exhausted" msgstr "mémoire entièrement consommée" #: ../src/gettextp.c:110 msgid "missing arguments" msgstr "arguments manquants" #: ../src/gettextp.c:120 msgid "too many arguments" msgstr "trop d'arguments" #: ../src/gettextp.c:146 ../src/msgfmt.c:323 ../src/xgettext.c:480 msgid "Try `%s --help' for more information\n" msgstr "Pour plus d'information, essayer Ğ%s --helpğ.\n" #: ../src/gettextp.c:149 msgid "" "Usage: %s [-h | -v | [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID]\n" " -h, --help display this help and exit\n" " -v, --version display version information and exit\n" " [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID retrieve translated message corresponding\n" " to MSGID from TEXTDOMAIN\n" "\n" "If the TEXTDOMAIN parameter is not given, the domain is determined from the\n" "environment variable TEXTDOMAIN. If the message catalog is not found in the\n" "regular directory, another location can be specified with the environment\n" "variable TEXTDOMAINDIR.\n" "Standard search directory: %s\n" msgstr "" "Usage: %s [-h | -v | [DOMAINE] MSGID]\n" " -h, --help fournir ce message d'aide, puis terminer\n" " -v, --version identifier le programme, puis terminer\n" " [DOMAINE] MSGID trouver la traduction de MSGID, dans le DOMAINE donné\n" "\n" "Si DOMAINE n'est pas founi, le domaine est obtenu de la variable TEXTDOMAIN\n" "dans l'environnement. En l'absence du catalogue de messages à l'endroit\n" "habituel, la variable d'environnement TEXTDOMAINDIR peut indiquer un autre\n" "répertoire.\n" "Ensemble des répertoires fouillés: %s\n" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:244 ../src/xgettext.c:381 msgid "no input file given" msgstr "aucun fichier d'entrée fourni" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:270 ../src/xgettext.c:454 ../src/xgettext.c:1071 msgid "error while opening \"%s\" for reading" msgstr "erreur lors de l'ouverture de Ğ%sğ en lecture" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:301 msgid "error while opening \"%s\" for writing" msgstr "erreur lors de l'ouverture de Ğ%sğ en écriture" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:326 msgid "" "Usage: %s [OPTION] filename.po ...\n" "Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.\n" " -a, --alignment=NUMBER align strings to NUMBER bytes (default: %d)\n" " -h, --help display this help and exit\n" " -I, --input-path=LIST list of directories searched for input files\n" " --no-hash binary file will not include the hash table\n" " -o, --output-file=FILE specify output file name as FILE\n" " -v, --verbose list input file anormalies\n" " -V, --version output version information and exit\n" "\n" "Search path is: %s\n" "\n" "If input file is -, standard input is read. If output file is -,\n" "output is written to standard output.\n" msgstr "" "Usage: %s [OPTION] FICHIER ...\n" "Les arguments obligatoires pour la forme longue des options sont aussi\n" "obligatoires pour les formes courtes qui leur correspondent.\n" "\n" " -a, --alignment=OCTETS aligner chaînes sur tant d'OCTETS (%d présumé)\n" " -h, --help fournir ce message d'aide, puis terminer\n" " -I, --input-path=LISTE liste de répertoires fouillés pour chaque FICHIER\n" " --no-hash exclure la table de dispersion du binaire produit\n" " -o, --output-file=SORTIE choisir le fichier de sortie\n" " -v, --verbose diagnostiquer toute anomalie dans chaque FICHIER\n" " -V, --version identifier le programme, puis terminer\n" "\n" "Les répertoires fouillés sont: %s\n" "\n" "FICHIER a normalement l'extension Ğ.poğ. Si FICHIER vaut Ğ-ğ, lit l'entrée\n" "standard. Si SORTIE vaut Ğ-ğ, écrit sur la sortie standard.\n" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:361 ../src/xgettext.c:1333 msgid "while creating hash table" msgstr "pendant la création de la table de dispersion" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:401 ../src/xgettext.c:1090 msgid "error while reading \"%s\"" msgstr "erreur lors de la lecture de Ğ%sğ" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:456 ../src/xgettext.c:1143 msgid "incomplete `%s' directive at end of file" msgstr "directive Ğ%sğ incomplète en fin de fichier" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:470 ../src/xgettext.c:1165 msgid "syntax error: value is no quoted string" msgstr "erreur de syntaxe: chaîne entre guillemets attendue" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:496 msgid "end of file \"%s\" while reading string" msgstr "lecture d'une chaîne de Ğ%sğ interrompue par une fin de fichier" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:574 ../src/msgfmt.c:582 msgid "illegal control sequence" msgstr "séquence d'échappement illégale" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:577 msgid "end of file occured inside directive value" msgstr "fin de fichier rencontrée dans la valeur d'une directive" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:590 ../src/xgettext.c:1212 msgid "unterminated string constant" msgstr "constante chaîne non-terminée" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:600 ../src/xgettext.c:1241 msgid "trailing garbage in line" msgstr "caractères intempestifs en fin de ligne" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:634 ../src/xgettext.c:1254 msgid "previous `msgid' directive not matched by `msgstr'" msgstr "aucune directive Ğmsgstrğ ne suit Ğmsgidğ" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:646 ../src/xgettext.c:1266 msgid "domain name \"%s\" not suitable as file name: will use prefix" msgstr "domaine Ğ%sğ inadéquat comme nom de fichier: utilisera un préfixe" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:660 ../src/xgettext.c:1280 msgid "`msgid' directive expected" msgstr "directive Ğmsgidğ attendue" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:665 msgid "empty msgstr entry ignored" msgstr "chaîne Ğmsgstrğ vide, entrée ignorée" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:706 msgid "duplicate message ID" msgstr "identification de chaîne déjà vue" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:707 msgid "this is the location of the first definition" msgstr "voici l'endroit de la première définition" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:719 ../src/xgettext.c:1300 msgid "`msgstr' directive expected" msgstr "erreur de syntaxe: directive inconnue" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:726 ../src/xgettext.c:1307 msgid "syntax error: unknown directive" msgstr "erreur de syntaxe: directive inconnue" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:922 msgid "`msgid' and `msgstr' entry does not both begin with '\\n'" msgstr "les chaînes Ğmsgidğ et Ğmsgstrğ ne débutent pas toutes deux par Ğ\\nğ" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:927 msgid "`msgid' and `msgstr' entry does not both end with '\\n'" msgstr "les chaînes Ğmsgidğ et Ğmsgstrğ ne terminent pas toutes deux par Ğ\\nğ" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:935 msgid "number of format specifications in `msgid' and `msgstr' does not match" msgstr "nombre différent de spécifications de format entre Ğmsgidğ et Ğmsgstrğ" #: ../src/msgfmt.c:948 msgid "format specifications for argument %u are not the same" msgstr "les spécifications de format pour l'argument %u ne sont pas identiques" #. We are about to construct the absolute path to the #. directory for the output files but asprintf failed. #. #: ../src/xgettext.c:348 ../src/xgettext.c:1369 ../src/xgettext.c:1384 ../src/xgettext.c:1455 msgid "while preparing output" msgstr "lors de la préparation de la sortie" #: ../src/xgettext.c:483 msgid "" "Usage: %s [OPTION] INPUTFILE ...\n" "Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.\n" " -a, --extract-all extract all strings\n" " -c, --add-comments[=TAG] place comment block with TAG (or those\n" " preceding keyword lines) in output file\n" " -C, --c++ recognize C++ style comments\n" " -d, --default-domain=NAME use NAME.po for output (instead of messages.po)\n" " -h, --help display this help and exit\n" " -I, --input-path=LIST list of directories searched for input files\n" " -j, --join-existing join messages with existing file\n" " -k, --keyword[=WORD] additonal keyword to be looked for (without\n" " WORD means not to use default keywords)\n" " -m, --msgstr-prefix[=STRING] use STRING or \"\" as prefix for msgstr entries\n" " -M, --msgstr-suffix[=STRING] use STRING or \"\" as suffix for msgstr entries\n" " --no-location do not write '#: filename:line' lines\n" " -n, --add-location generate '#: filename:line' lines (default)\n" " --omit-header don't write header with `msgid \"\"' entry\n" " -p, --output-dir=DIR output files will be placed in directory DIR\n" " -s, --sort-output generate sorted output and remove duplicates\n" " --strict write out strict Uniforum conforming .po file\n" " -v, --version output version information and exit\n" " -x, --exclude-file=FILE entries from FILE are not extracted\n" "\n" "Search path for supplementary .po files is:\n" "%s\n" "\n" "If INPUTFILE is -, standard input is read.\n" msgstr "" "Usage: %s [OPTION] FICHIER ...\n" "Les arguments obligatoires pour la forme longue des options sont aussi\n" "obligatoires pour les formes courtes qui leur correspondent.\n" "\n" " -a, --extract-all extraire toutes les chaînes\n" " -c, --add-comments[=CLÉ] sauver le commentaire précédent possédant CLÉ,\n" " ou celui qui précède immédiatement le mot-clef\n" " -C, --c++ traiter les commentaires à la C++\n" " -d, --default-domain=DOMAINE sortir sur DOMAINE.po (non pas messages.po)\n" " -h, --help fournir ce message d'aide, puis terminer\n" " -I, --input-path=LISTE répertoires à fouiller pour trouver FICHIER\n" " -j, --join-existing ajouter les messages au fichier existant\n" " -k, --keyword[=MOT] mot-clef supplémentaire, défauts si MOT absent\n" " -m, --msgstr-prefix[=CHAÎNE] préfixer les msgstr's par CHAÎNE, sinon \"\"\n" " -M, --msgstr-suffix[=CHAÎNE] suffixer les msgstr's par CHAÎNE, sinon \"\"\n" " --no-location ne pas produire les Ğ#: FICHIER:LIGNEğ\n" " -n, --add-location produire les Ğ#: filename:lineğ (défaut)\n" " --omit-header omettre les en-têtes pour Ğmsgid \"\"ğ\n" " -p, --output-dir=RÉPERTOIRE\t sortir le fichier produit dans tel RÉPERTOIRE\n" " -s, --sort-output trier la sortie et éliminer les duplicats\n" " --strict produire un fichier .po strictement Uniforum\n" " -v, --version identifier le programme, puis terminer\n" " -x, --exclude-file=FICHIER ne pas extraire d'entrées de FICHIER\n" "\n" "Liste des répertoires à fouiller pour fichier .po supplémentaires:\n" "%s\n" "\n" "Si le FICHIER est Ğ-ğ, lit l'entrée standard\n" #: ../src/xgettext.c:1051 msgid "trailing garbage after string in call of keyword" msgstr "caractères intempestifs après la chaîne qui suit le mot-clef" #: ../src/xgettext.c:1156 msgid "syntax error: no value" msgstr "erreur de syntaxe: valeur absente" #: ../src/xgettext.c:1460 msgid "cannot create output file \"%s\"" msgstr "incapable de fabriquer le fichier Ğ%sğ" #: ../src/xgettext.c:1521 msgid "error while writing .po file" msgstr "erreur pendant l'écriture du fichier .po" gettext-0.7/po/de.gmo100644 230 226 24137 5776107761 13461 0ustar pinardguestŜ•/”C 3,Mz%˜,&ë2%Rx"n°Ĥ8Ĉ6˙6Qm;ŒÈŬ%ĝ*$I$n“Ĵ6É(BSeFy2Àó '*,R0’Üù6*a)›Ċ&ċ) '6^|'šÂJÛ &ñ3 :%#7`#˜#´#+#Fü#C$&`$9‡$8Á$.ú$2)%\%#w%4›%%*ë%&4&E&GX&F &ç&"˙&7"')Z'„'H—'!à'!($(B(,) '- ". ( +*&!%  $/#%s: illegal option -- %c %s: invalid option -- %c %s: option `%c%s' doesn't allow an argument %s: option `%s' is ambiguous %s: option `%s' requires an argument %s: option `--%s' doesn't allow an argument %s: option requires an argument -- %c %s: unrecognized option `%c%s' %s: unrecognized option `--%s' Try `%s --help' for more information Unknown system errorUsage: %s [-h | -v | [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID] -h, --help display this help and exit -v, --version display version information and exit [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID retrieve translated message corresponding to MSGID from TEXTDOMAIN If the TEXTDOMAIN parameter is not given, the domain is determined from the environment variable TEXTDOMAIN. If the message catalog is not found in the regular directory, another location can be specified with the environment variable TEXTDOMAINDIR. Standard search directory: %s Usage: %s [OPTION] INPUTFILE ... Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too. -a, --extract-all extract all strings -c, --add-comments[=TAG] place comment block with TAG (or those preceding keyword lines) in output file -C, --c++ recognize C++ style comments -d, --default-domain=NAME use NAME.po for output (instead of messages.po) -h, --help display this help and exit -I, --input-path=LIST list of directories searched for input files -j, --join-existing join messages with existing file -k, --keyword[=WORD] additonal keyword to be looked for (without WORD means not to use default keywords) -m, --msgstr-prefix[=STRING] use STRING or "" as prefix for msgstr entries -M, --msgstr-suffix[=STRING] use STRING or "" as suffix for msgstr entries --no-location do not write '#: filename:line' lines -n, --add-location generate '#: filename:line' lines (default) --omit-header don't write header with `msgid ""' entry -p, --output-dir=DIR output files will be placed in directory DIR -s, --sort-output generate sorted output and remove duplicates --strict write out strict Uniforum conforming .po file -v, --version output version information and exit -x, --exclude-file=FILE entries from FILE are not extracted Search path for supplementary .po files is: %s If INPUTFILE is -, standard input is read. Usage: %s [OPTION] filename.po ... Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too. -a, --alignment=NUMBER align strings to NUMBER bytes (default: %d) -h, --help display this help and exit -I, --input-path=LIST list of directories searched for input files --no-hash binary file will not include the hash table -o, --output-file=FILE specify output file name as FILE -v, --verbose list input file anormalies -V, --version output version information and exit Search path is: %s If input file is -, standard input is read. If output file is -, output is written to standard output. `msgid' and `msgstr' entry does not both begin with '\n'`msgid' and `msgstr' entry does not both end with '\n'`msgid' directive expected`msgstr' directive expectedcannot create output file "%s"domain name "%s" not suitable as file name: will use prefixduplicate message IDempty msgstr entry ignoredend of file "%s" while reading stringend of file occured inside directive valueerror while opening "%s" for readingerror while opening "%s" for writingerror while reading "%s"error while writing .po fileformat specifications for argument %u are not the sameillegal control sequenceincomplete `%s' directive at end of filememory exhaustedmissing argumentsno input file givennumber of format specifications in `msgid' and `msgstr' does not matchprevious `msgid' directive not matched by `msgstr'syntax error: no valuesyntax error: unknown directivesyntax error: value is no quoted stringthis is the location of the first definitiontoo many argumentstrailing garbage after string in call of keywordtrailing garbage in lineunterminated string constantwhile creating hash tablewhile preparing outputDate: 1995-06-28 16:58:45+0200 From: Ulrich Drepper Xgettext-Options: --default-domain=gettext --output-dir=. --add-comments --keyword --keyword=_ Files: ../lib/error.c ../lib/getopt.c ../lib/xmalloc.c ../src/gettextp.c ../src/msgfmt.c ../src/xgettext.c Updated: Tue Jul 4 2:11:20 MET 1995 %s: unzulässige Option -- %c %s: ungültige Option -- %c %s: Option `%c%s' erwartet kein Argument %s: Option `%s' ist mehrdeutig %s: Option `%s' erwartet ein Argument %s: Option `--%s' erwartet kein Argument %s: Option erwartet ein Argument -- %c %s: unbekannte Option `%c%s' %s: unbekannte Option `--%s' `%s --help' gibt weitere Informationen unbekannter SystemfehlerBenutzung: %s [-h | -v | [BEREICH] SCHLÜSSEL] -h, --help zeige diese Hilfe und beende -v, --version zeige Versionsnummer und beende [BEREICH] SCHLÜSSEL hole die Übersetzung zu SCHLÜSSEL aus dem Namensbereich BEREICH Wenn der BEREICH Parameter nicht gegeben wurde, wird der Bereich durch die Umgebungsvariable TEXTDOMAIN bestimmt. Wenn der Katalog dieses Bereiches sich nicht im Standardverzeichnis des Systems befindet, kann durch die Umgebungsvariable TEXTDOMAINDIR ein anderes Verzeichnis angegeben werden. Standardverzeichnis: %s Benutzung: %s [OPTION] EINGABEDATEI ... Notwendige Argumente für Optionen in Langform sind auch für die Kurzform notwendig. -a, --extract-all schreibe alle Zeichenketten heraus -c, --add-comments[=KENNUNG] Kommentare mit Kennung (oder die aus Zeilen vor einem Schlüsselwort) herausschreiben -C, --c++ behandle auch C++ Kommentare -d, --default-domain=NAME Ausgabe in NAME.po (anstatt in messages.po) -h, --help zeige diese Hilfe und beende -I, --input-path=PFAD erweitere Suchpfad für Eingabedateien um PFAD -j, --join-existing hänge Ausgaben an existierende Datei an -k, --keyword[=WORT] zusätzliches Wort nach dem gesucht wird (ohne WORT schaltet Suche nach Standardworten ab) -m, --msgstr-prefix[=KETTE] nehme KETTE oder "" als Präfix für msgstr -M, --msgstr-suffix[=KETTE] nehme KETTE oder "" als Suffix für msgstr --no-location keine '#: Dateiname:Zeilennummer' Zeilen -n, --add-location erzeuge '#: Dateiname:Zeilennummer' (default) -p, --output-dir=VERZEICHNIS Ausgabedateien kommen nach VERZEICHNIS -s, --sort-output sortiere Ausgabe und entferne Dubletten -v, --version zeige Versionsnummer und beende -x, --exclude-file=DATEI Einträge aus DATEI werden nicht bearbeitet Suchpfad für zusätzliche .po Dateien ist: %s Wenn EINGABEDATEI - ist, wird von Standard Eingabe gelesen. Benutzung: %s [OPTION] Dateiname.po ... Notwendige Argumente für Optionen in Langform sind auch für die Kurzform notwendig. -a, --alignment=ZAHL Ausgaben an ZAHL (Std: %d) Bytegrenze ausrichten -h, --help zeige diese Hilfe und beende -I, --input-path=PFAD erweitere Suchpfad für Eingabedateien um PFAD --no-hash Binärdatei wird keine Hash-Tabelle enthalten -o, --output-file=DATEI lege DATEI als Ausgabedatei fest -v, --verbose zeige Unregelmäßigkeiten in Eingabe auf -V, --version zeige Versionsnummer und beende Suchpfad ist: %s Wenn die Eingabedatei - ist, wird die Eingabe von Standard Eingabe gelesen. Ist die Ausgabedatei -, wird nach Standard Ausgabe geschrieben. `msgid' und `msgstr' Eintrag beginnen nicht beide mit '\n'`msgid' und `msgstr' Eintrag enden nicht beide mit '\n'`msgstr' Anweisung erwartet`msgstr' Anweisung erwartetAusgabedatei "%s" kann nicht erzeugt werdenBereichsname "%s" nicht als Dateiname geeignet: werde Präfix verwendenSchlüssel mehrfach definiertleerer `msgstr' Eintrag wird ignoriertDateiende von "%s" beim Lesen einer Zeichenkette erreichtDateiende ist innerhalb des Anweisungswertes aufgetretenÖffnen der Datei "%s" zum Lesen fehlgeschlagenÖffnen der Datei "%s" zum Schreiben fehlgeschlagenFehler beim Lesen von "%s"Fehler beim Schreiben der .po DateiFormatelemente für Argument %u stimmen nicht übereinungültiges Kontrollzeichenunvollständige `%s' Anweisung am Dateiendevirtueller Speicher erschöpftArgumente fehlenEingabedatei fehltAnzahl der Formatelemente in `msgid' and `msgstr' stimmen nicht übereinvorangehende `msgid' Anweisung hat keine zugehörige `msgstr' Anweisungkein Wert für AnweisungSyntaxfehler: unbekannte AnweisungSyntaxfehler: Wert für Anweisung ist keine Zeichenkettedies ist die Stelle der ersten Definitionzu viele Argumenteunzulässige Zeichen nach Zeichenkette beim Aufruf der gesuchten Funktionunzulässige Zeichen am Zeilenendenicht abgeschlossene Zeichenkettebeim Anlegen der Hash-Tabellebeim Vorbereiten der Ausgabegettext-0.7/po/fr.gmo100644 230 226 24547 5776107761 13505 0ustar pinardguestŜ•/”C 3,Mz%˜,&ë2%Rx"n°Ĥ8Ĉ6˙6Qm;ŒÈŬ%ĝ*$I$n“Ĵ6É(BSeFy2Àó '*,R0’Üù-*$X#}-ĦÏ$î-$A'f'Ž.ĥċûŭ›ùT• Dê#E/$u$%$&ĥ$AŬ$!%$A%?f%8Ĥ%-ß%. &!<&(^&F‡&Î&+î&'8'L'Fj')ħ'!Û'%ŭ'3#()W((<’('Ï(÷(-)#C),) '- ". ( +*&!%  $/#%s: illegal option -- %c %s: invalid option -- %c %s: option `%c%s' doesn't allow an argument %s: option `%s' is ambiguous %s: option `%s' requires an argument %s: option `--%s' doesn't allow an argument %s: option requires an argument -- %c %s: unrecognized option `%c%s' %s: unrecognized option `--%s' Try `%s --help' for more information Unknown system errorUsage: %s [-h | -v | [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID] -h, --help display this help and exit -v, --version display version information and exit [TEXTDOMAIN] MSGID retrieve translated message corresponding to MSGID from TEXTDOMAIN If the TEXTDOMAIN parameter is not given, the domain is determined from the environment variable TEXTDOMAIN. If the message catalog is not found in the regular directory, another location can be specified with the environment variable TEXTDOMAINDIR. Standard search directory: %s Usage: %s [OPTION] INPUTFILE ... Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too. -a, --extract-all extract all strings -c, --add-comments[=TAG] place comment block with TAG (or those preceding keyword lines) in output file -C, --c++ recognize C++ style comments -d, --default-domain=NAME use NAME.po for output (instead of messages.po) -h, --help display this help and exit -I, --input-path=LIST list of directories searched for input files -j, --join-existing join messages with existing file -k, --keyword[=WORD] additonal keyword to be looked for (without WORD means not to use default keywords) -m, --msgstr-prefix[=STRING] use STRING or "" as prefix for msgstr entries -M, --msgstr-suffix[=STRING] use STRING or "" as suffix for msgstr entries --no-location do not write '#: filename:line' lines -n, --add-location generate '#: filename:line' lines (default) --omit-header don't write header with `msgid ""' entry -p, --output-dir=DIR output files will be placed in directory DIR -s, --sort-output generate sorted output and remove duplicates --strict write out strict Uniforum conforming .po file -v, --version output version information and exit -x, --exclude-file=FILE entries from FILE are not extracted Search path for supplementary .po files is: %s If INPUTFILE is -, standard input is read. Usage: %s [OPTION] filename.po ... Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too. -a, --alignment=NUMBER align strings to NUMBER bytes (default: %d) -h, --help display this help and exit -I, --input-path=LIST list of directories searched for input files --no-hash binary file will not include the hash table -o, --output-file=FILE specify output file name as FILE -v, --verbose list input file anormalies -V, --version output version information and exit Search path is: %s If input file is -, standard input is read. If output file is -, output is written to standard output. `msgid' and `msgstr' entry does not both begin with '\n'`msgid' and `msgstr' entry does not both end with '\n'`msgid' directive expected`msgstr' directive expectedcannot create output file "%s"domain name "%s" not suitable as file name: will use prefixduplicate message IDempty msgstr entry ignoredend of file "%s" while reading stringend of file occured inside directive valueerror while opening "%s" for readingerror while opening "%s" for writingerror while reading "%s"error while writing .po fileformat specifications for argument %u are not the sameillegal control sequenceincomplete `%s' directive at end of filememory exhaustedmissing argumentsno input file givennumber of format specifications in `msgid' and `msgstr' does not matchprevious `msgid' directive not matched by `msgstr'syntax error: no valuesyntax error: unknown directivesyntax error: value is no quoted stringthis is the location of the first definitiontoo many argumentstrailing garbage after string in call of keywordtrailing garbage in lineunterminated string constantwhile creating hash tablewhile preparing outputDate: 1995-05-01 00:33 EDT From: François Pinard Directory: /home/pinard/IN/nlsutils-0.4 Files: ../lib/error.c ../lib/getopt.c ../lib/xmalloc.c ../src/gettextp.c ../src/msgfmt.c ../src/xgettext.c Xgettext-Options: -d nlsutils -n -k -k_ Updated: Tue Jul 4 2:11:22 MET 1995 %s: l'option Ğ%cğ n'est pas permise %s: l'option Ğ%cğ n'est pas valide %s: l'option Ğ%c%sğ ne tolère pas d'argument %s: l'option Ğ%sğ est ambiguë %s: l'option Ğ%sğ exige un argument %s: l'option Ğ--%sğ ne tolère pas d'argument %s: l'option Ğ%cğ exige un argument %s: l'option Ğ%c%sğ n'est pas reconnue %s: l'option Ğ--%sğ n'est pas reconnue Pour plus d'information, essayer Ğ%s --helpğ. Erreur système inconnueUsage: %s [-h | -v | [DOMAINE] MSGID] -h, --help fournir ce message d'aide, puis terminer -v, --version identifier le programme, puis terminer [DOMAINE] MSGID trouver la traduction de MSGID, dans le DOMAINE donné Si DOMAINE n'est pas founi, le domaine est obtenu de la variable TEXTDOMAIN dans l'environnement. En l'absence du catalogue de messages à l'endroit habituel, la variable d'environnement TEXTDOMAINDIR peut indiquer un autre répertoire. Ensemble des répertoires fouillés: %s Usage: %s [OPTION] FICHIER ... Les arguments obligatoires pour la forme longue des options sont aussi obligatoires pour les formes courtes qui leur correspondent. -a, --extract-all extraire toutes les chaînes -c, --add-comments[=CLÉ] sauver le commentaire précédent possédant CLÉ, ou celui qui précède immédiatement le mot-clef -C, --c++ traiter les commentaires à la C++ -d, --default-domain=DOMAINE sortir sur DOMAINE.po (non pas messages.po) -h, --help fournir ce message d'aide, puis terminer -I, --input-path=LISTE répertoires à fouiller pour trouver FICHIER -j, --join-existing ajouter les messages au fichier existant -k, --keyword[=MOT] mot-clef supplémentaire, défauts si MOT absent -m, --msgstr-prefix[=CHAÎNE] préfixer les msgstr's par CHAÎNE, sinon "" -M, --msgstr-suffix[=CHAÎNE] suffixer les msgstr's par CHAÎNE, sinon "" --no-location ne pas produire les Ğ#: FICHIER:LIGNEğ -n, --add-location produire les Ğ#: filename:lineğ (défaut) --omit-header omettre les en-têtes pour Ğmsgid ""ğ -p, --output-dir=RÉPERTOIRE sortir le fichier produit dans tel RÉPERTOIRE -s, --sort-output trier la sortie et éliminer les duplicats --strict produire un fichier .po strictement Uniforum -v, --version identifier le programme, puis terminer -x, --exclude-file=FICHIER ne pas extraire d'entrées de FICHIER Liste des répertoires à fouiller pour fichier .po supplémentaires: %s Si le FICHIER est Ğ-ğ, lit l'entrée standard Usage: %s [OPTION] FICHIER ... Les arguments obligatoires pour la forme longue des options sont aussi obligatoires pour les formes courtes qui leur correspondent. -a, --alignment=OCTETS aligner chaînes sur tant d'OCTETS (%d présumé) -h, --help fournir ce message d'aide, puis terminer -I, --input-path=LISTE liste de répertoires fouillés pour chaque FICHIER --no-hash exclure la table de dispersion du binaire produit -o, --output-file=SORTIE choisir le fichier de sortie -v, --verbose diagnostiquer toute anomalie dans chaque FICHIER -V, --version identifier le programme, puis terminer Les répertoires fouillés sont: %s FICHIER a normalement l'extension Ğ.poğ. Si FICHIER vaut Ğ-ğ, lit l'entrée standard. Si SORTIE vaut Ğ-ğ, écrit sur la sortie standard. les chaînes Ğmsgidğ et Ğmsgstrğ ne débutent pas toutes deux par Ğ\nğles chaînes Ğmsgidğ et Ğmsgstrğ ne terminent pas toutes deux par Ğ\nğdirective Ğmsgidğ attendueerreur de syntaxe: directive inconnueincapable de fabriquer le fichier Ğ%sğdomaine Ğ%sğ inadéquat comme nom de fichier: utilisera un préfixeidentification de chaîne déjà vuechaîne Ğmsgstrğ vide, entrée ignoréelecture d'une chaîne de Ğ%sğ interrompue par une fin de fichierfin de fichier rencontrée dans la valeur d'une directiveerreur lors de l'ouverture de Ğ%sğ en lectureerreur lors de l'ouverture de Ğ%sğ en écritureerreur lors de la lecture de Ğ%sğerreur pendant l'écriture du fichier .poles spécifications de format pour l'argument %u ne sont pas identiquesséquence d'échappement illégaledirective Ğ%sğ incomplète en fin de fichiermémoire entièrement consomméearguments manquantsaucun fichier d'entrée fourninombre différent de spécifications de format entre Ğmsgidğ et Ğmsgstrğaucune directive Ğmsgstrğ ne suit Ğmsgidğerreur de syntaxe: valeur absenteerreur de syntaxe: directive inconnueerreur de syntaxe: chaîne entre guillemets attenduevoici l'endroit de la première définitiontrop d'argumentscaractères intempestifs après la chaîne qui suit le mot-clefcaractères intempestifs en fin de ligneconstante chaîne non-terminéependant la création de la table de dispersionlors de la préparation de la sortiegettext-0.7/doc/ 40755 230 226 0 5776107770 12370 5ustar pinardguestgettext-0.7/doc/ChangeLog100444 230 226 363 5776071617 14217 0ustar pinardguestSun Jul 2 01:47:02 1995 Ulrich Drepper * First official release. This directory now contains a very preliminary version of the gettext manual with a quite complete chapter for todays Emacs po-mode by François Pinard. gettext-0.7/doc/Makefile.in100444 230 226 5606 5776077330 14535 0ustar pinardguest# Makefile for GNU gettext documentation. # Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ VERSION = @VERSION@ SHELL = /bin/sh srcdir = @srcdir@ top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ VPATH = @srcdir@ INSTALL = @INSTALL@ INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ MAKEINFO = makeinfo TEXI2DVI = texi2dvi TOUCH = echo timestamp > DISTFILES = ChangeLog Makefile.in mdate-sh gettext.info gettext.info-1 \ gettext.info-2 gettext.texi stamp-vti texinfo.tex version.texi prefix = @prefix@ infodir = $(prefix)/info subdir = doc .SUFFIXES: default: all all info: gettext.info gettext.info: gettext.texi version.texi cd $(srcdir) && $(MAKEINFO) gettext.texi dvi: gettext.dvi gettext.dvi: gettext.texi texinfo.tex version.texi $(TEXI2DVI) $(srcdir)/gettext.texi version.texi: stamp-vti stamp-vti: gettext.texi echo "@set EDITION $(VERSION)" > version.tmp echo "@set UPDATED `/bin/sh mdate-sh $(srcdir)/gettext.texi`" \ >> version.tmp echo "@set VERSION $(VERSION)" >> version.tmp if cmp -s version.tmp version.texi; then \ rm -f version.tmp; \ else \ mv -f version.tmp version.texi; \ fi $(TOUCH) $(srcdir)/stamp-vti install install-exec install-data: all install: install-exec install-data install-exec: install-data: $(top_srcdir)/mkinstalldirs $(infodir) for file in $(srcdir)/gettext.info*; do \ $(INSTALL_DATA) $$file $(infodir)/`expr $$file : '.*/\(.*\)'`; \ done uninstall: rm -f $(infodir)/gettext.info* TAGS ID: mostlyclean: rm -f *.aux *.cp *.cps *.dvi *.fn *.fns *.ky *.log *.pg *.toc *.tp *.vr rm -f *.tmp clean: mostlyclean distclean: clean rm -f Makefile maintainer-clean: distclean @echo "This command is intended only for maintainers to use;" @echo "rebuilding the deleted files may require special tools." rm -f stamp-vti version.texi gettext.info* distdir = ../$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)/$(subdir) dist: Makefile $(DISTFILES) for file in $(DISTFILES); do \ ln $$file $(distdir) \ || { echo copying $$file instead; cp -p $$file $(distdir);}; \ done Makefile: Makefile.in ../config.status cd .. && CONFIG_FILES=$(subdir)/$@ CONFIG_HEADERS= ./config.status # Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make not to export all variables. # Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. .NOEXPORT: gettext-0.7/doc/mdate-sh100555 230 226 4773 5773642071 14121 0ustar pinardguest#!/bin/sh # mdate-sh - get modifaction time of a file and pretty-print it # Copyright (C) 1995 Software Foundation, Inc. # written by Ulrich Drepper , June 1995 # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) # any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. # Prevent date giving response in another language LANG=C export LANG LC_ALL=C export LC_ALL LC_TIME=C export LC_TIME # Get the extended ls output of the file if ls -L /dev/null 1>/dev/null 2>&1; then set - `ls -L -l $1` else set - `ls -l $1` fi # The month is at least the fourth argument # (3 shifts here, the next inside the loop) shift shift shift # Find the month. Next argument is day, followed by the year or time month= until test $month do shift case $1 in Jan) month=January; nummonth=1;; Feb) month=February; nummonth=2;; Mar) month=March; nummonth=3;; Apr) month=April; nummonth=4;; May) month=May; nummonth=5;; Jun) month=June; nummonth=6;; Jul) month=July; nummonth=7;; Aug) month=August; nummonth=8;; Sep) month=September; nummonth=9;; Oct) month=October; nummonth=10;; Nov) month=November; nummonth=11;; Dec) month=December; nummonth=12;; esac done day=$2 # Here we have to deal with the problem that the ls output gives either # the time of day or the year. case $3 in *:*) set `date`; year=$7 case $2 in Jan) nummonthtod=1;; Feb) nummonthtod=2;; Mar) nummonthtod=3;; Apr) nummonthtod=4;; May) nummonthtod=5;; Jun) nummonthtod=6;; Jul) nummonthtod=7;; Aug) nummonthtod=8;; Sep) nummonthtod=9;; Oct) nummonthtod=10;; Nov) nummonthtod=11;; Dec) nummonthtod=12;; esac # For the first six month of the year the time notation can also # be used for file modified in the last year. if (expr $nummonth \> $nummonthtod) > /dev/null; then year=`expr year - 1` fi ;; *) year=$3;; esac # The result. echo $day $month $year gettext-0.7/doc/gettext.info100644 230 226 4334 5776100054 15016 0ustar pinardguestThis is Info file gettext.info, produced by Makeinfo-1.63 from the input file gettext.texi. This file provides documentation for GNU `gettext' utilities. Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on all copies. Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one. Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved by the Foundation.  Indirect: gettext.info-1: 873 gettext.info-2: 49796  Tag Table: (Indirect) Node: Top873 Node: Translation Intro3713 Node: INSTALL matters4280 Node: Translating teams6263 Node: Available packages8487 Node: NLS10849 Node: Localization11343 Node: Internationalization12293 Node: Purpose12901 Node: What to13442 Node: Codesets14415 Node: Currency15112 Node: Dates15411 Node: Numbers15729 Node: Messages16061 Node: Prospects16367 Node: System operation16999 Node: catgets18053 Node: Interface to catgets19452 Node: Problems with catgets21450 Node: gettext22315 Node: Interface to gettext23430 Node: Ambiguities25766 Node: Locating catalogs27835 Node: Comparison29112 Node: Tools29251 Node: Internal aspects30613 Node: Fileformat30763 Node: Just do it35487 Node: Overview to changes36575 Node: Dealing with flat directory structures37782 Node: Dealing with non-flat directory structures38349 Node: Adopting the configuration process39174 Node: Changing your sources42347 Node: The building process43464 Node: PO mode43637 Node: Introduction44369 Node: Installation46155 Node: About PO file format47074 Node: Main PO commands49796 Node: Entry Positioning55037 Node: Untranslated Entries59583 Node: Obsolete entries61406 Node: Modifying Translations64528 Node: Modifying Comments74223 Node: C sources context78722 Node: Incoming PO83609  End Tag Table gettext-0.7/doc/gettext.info-1100644 230 226 141204 5776100053 15211 0ustar pinardguestThis is Info file gettext.info, produced by Makeinfo-1.63 from the input file gettext.texi. This file provides documentation for GNU `gettext' utilities. Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on all copies. Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one. Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved by the Foundation.  File: gettext.info, Node: Top, Next: Translation Intro, Prev: (dir), Up: (dir) GNU `gettext' utilities *********************** * Menu: * Translation Intro:: Notes on the GNU Translation Project * NLS:: Introduction to Native Language Support * System operation:: How does GNU `gettext' fit into the systems locale handling? * Tools:: Using provided tools for generating catalogs * Internal aspects:: Internal aspects * Just do it:: Internationalizing your program * PO mode:: An Emacs mode for updating `.po' files -- The Detailed Node Listing -- Notes on the GNU Translation Project * INSTALL matters:: * Translating teams:: * Available packages:: Introduction to Native Language Support * Localization:: Localization ("l10n") * Internationalization:: Internationalization * Purpose:: Purpose of GNU `gettext' utilities * What to:: What to internationalize * Prospects:: Prospects of localization in the GNU project What to internationalize * Codesets:: Characters and Codesets * Currency:: Currency * Dates:: Dates * Numbers:: Numbers * Messages:: Messages How does GNU `gettext' fit into the systems locale handling? * catgets:: About `catgets' * gettext:: About `gettext' * Comparison:: Comparing the two interfaces About `catgets' * Interface to catgets:: The interface * Problems with catgets:: Problems with the `catgets' interface?! About `gettext' * Interface to gettext:: The interface * Ambiguities:: Solving ambiguities * Locating catalogs:: Locating message catalog files Internal aspects * Fileformat:: Internationalizing your program * Overview to changes:: * Dealing with flat directory structures:: * Dealing with non-flat directory structures:: Dealing with non-flat directory structures * Adopting the configuration process:: * Changing your sources:: * The building process:: An Emacs mode for updating `.po' files * Introduction:: Introduction * Installation:: Installation * About PO file format:: PO mode and `.po' File Format * Main PO commands:: Main commands for PO mode * Entry Positioning:: Entry Positioning * Untranslated Entries:: Untranslated Entries * Obsolete entries:: Obsolete entries * Modifying Translations:: Modifying Translations * Modifying Comments:: Modifying Comments * C sources context:: C sources context * Incoming PO:: Incoming PO mode features  File: gettext.info, Node: Translation Intro, Next: NLS, Prev: Top, Up: Top Notes on the GNU Translation Project ************************************ A few GNU packages provide native language translation for their messages. This chapter gives the installer some useful hints. It explains how users should proceed for getting the programs to use the available translations. It tells how people wanting to contribute and work at translations should contact the appropriate team. * Menu: * INSTALL matters:: * Translating teams:: * Available packages::  File: gettext.info, Node: INSTALL matters, Next: Translating teams, Prev: Translation Intro, Up: Translation Intro INSTALL matters =============== Some GNU packages are "localizable" when properly installed; the programs they contain can be made to speak your own native language. Most such packages use GNU `gettext'. Some other packages have their own ways to internationalization, predating GNU `gettext'. If you found this `NLS' file inside a GNU distribution, you may assume that this distribution does use GNU `gettext', itself available at your nearest GNU archive site. By default, this package will be installed to allow translation of messages. It will automatically detect whether the system provides usable `catgets' or `gettext' functions. If neither is present, the GNU `gettext' library will be used. Installers may use special options at configuration time for changing this behaviour. The commands: ./configure --with-gnu-gettext ./configure --disable-nls will respectively bypass system `catgets' or `gettext' to use GNU `gettext', or else, totally disable translation of messages. Internationalized packages have usually many `XX.po' files, where XX gives an ISO 639 two-letter code identifying the language. Unless translations are disabled, all those available are installed together with the package. However, the environment variable `LINGUAS' may be set, prior to configuration, to limit the installed set. `LINGUAS' should then contain a space separated list of two-letter codes, stating which languages are allowed. As a user, if your language has been installed for this package, you only have to set the `LANG' environment variable to the appropriate `XX' prior to using the programs in the package. For example, let's suppose that you speak German. At the shell prompt, merely execute `setenv LANG de' (in `csh') or `export LANG; LANG=de' (in `sh'). This can be done from your `.login' or `.profile' file.  File: gettext.info, Node: Translating teams, Next: Available packages, Prev: INSTALL matters, Up: Translation Intro Translating teams ================= GNU is going international! The GNU Translation Project is a way to get maintainers, translators and users all together, so GNU will gradually become able to speak many native languages. The GNU `gettext' tool set contains *everything* maintainers need for internationalizing their packages for messages. It also contains quite useful tools for helping translators at localizing messages to their native language, once a package has already been internationalized. To achieve the GNU Translation Project, we need many interested people who like their own language and write it well, and who are also able to synergize with other translators speaking the same language. If you'd like to volunteer to *work* at translating messages, please send mail to your translating team. Each team has its own mailing list, courtesy of Linux International. You may reach your translating team at the address `XX@li.org', replacing XX by the two-letter ISO 639 code for your language. Language codes are *not* the same as country codes given in ISO 3166. The following translating teams exist, as of June 1995: Chinese (zh), Czech (cs), Danish (da), Dutch (nl), Esperanto (eo), Finnish (fi), French (fr), Irish (ga), German (de), Greek (el), Italian (it), Japanese (ja), Indonesian (in), Norwegian (no), Polish (pl), Portuguese (pt), Russian (ru), Spanish (es), Swedish (sv) and Turkish (tr). For example, you may reach the Chinese translating team by writing to `zh@li.org'. When you become a member of the translating team for your own language, you may subscribe to its list. For example, Swedish people can send a message to `sv-request@li.org', having this message body: subscribe Keep in mind that team members should be interested in *working* at translations, or at solving translational difficulties, rather than merely lurking around. If your team does not exist yet and you want to start one, please write to `gnu-translation@prep.ai.mit.edu'; you will then reach the GNU coordinator for all translator teams.  File: gettext.info, Node: Available packages, Prev: Translating teams, Up: Translation Intro Available packages ================== Languages are not equally supported in all GNU packages. The following matrix shows the current state of GNU internationalization, as of June 1995. Listed are: internationalized packages, and languages for which work is in progress, or about to start. See note cs de es fi fr it ja nl pt sv \ .-------------------------------. chess (4) | * * | clisp (3) | * * | diffutils (2) | . - | fileutils | - | flex (1) | . - | m4 (2) | + + + - + | gettext | * * | ptx (2) | + + + | recode (2) | + . + + + | sharutils (2) | + + + + + | shellutils | - | tar | * . * . * * | wdiff (2) | + + + + | `-------------------------------' cs de es fi fr it ja nl pt sv The interpretation legend is: `.' interest shown, or invitation made `-' being undertaken, or work in progress `+' submitted, and now ready for pretest `*' distributed through an official release Notes: (1) This package has its translatable strings marked, but does not use GNU `gettext'. A convenience patch may be available separately. (2) This package is planned to switch to GNU `gettext'. For the time being, it uses temporary means for internationalization. (3) This package is translated to specific languages by methods predating GNU `gettext'. Translations are kept in the sources and memory, rather than installed in external message catalogs. (4) This package is translated to specific languages by methods predating GNU `gettext'. Translations are all kept on disk files, and sources contain numbers where one normally expects strings. If June 1995 seems to be old, you may fetch a more recent copy of this `NLS' file on most GNU archive sites.  File: gettext.info, Node: NLS, Next: System operation, Prev: Translation Intro, Up: Top Introduction to Native Language Support *************************************** * Menu: * Localization:: Localization ("l10n") * Internationalization:: Internationalization * Purpose:: Purpose of GNU `gettext' utilities * What to:: What to internationalize * Prospects:: Prospects of localization in the GNU project  File: gettext.info, Node: Localization, Next: Internationalization, Prev: NLS, Up: NLS Localization ("l10n") ===================== The GNU `gettext' utilities are a set of tools that provides a framework to help other GNU packages produce multilingual messages. Other internationalization aspects are not handled here but perhaps will also be handled in future versions. GNU `gettext' is currently undergoing beta testing. By "localization", one means the operation by which, in a set of programs sufficiently aware of those things, one gives the program the needed informations so that it can handle its input and output in a fashion which is correct in the selected locale. The programming environment puts several functions to the programmers disposal which allow this runtime configuration. Users achieve localization of programs by setting proper values to special environment variables, prior to executing those programs.  File: gettext.info, Node: Internationalization, Next: Purpose, Prev: Localization, Up: NLS Internationalization ==================== By "internationalization", one refers to the operation by which a program, or a set of programs, is made aware and able of further localizations, for many countries. The word *internationalization* is a long word. People sometimes use "i18n" instead, because there are 18 intervening letters between the initial `i' and the final `n'. Program developers may use various techniques to internationalize their programs, some of them have been standardized.  File: gettext.info, Node: Purpose, Next: What to, Prev: Internationalization, Up: NLS Purpose of GNU `gettext' utilities ================================== GNU `gettext' is a set of tools meant to facilitate one aspect of internationalization of other programs, that is, to make easy for users to later *localize* those programs. By the provided means programmers can easily make their program use the native language of the user for its messages, if the messages of the program are translated and the user selects to use them.  File: gettext.info, Node: What to, Next: Prospects, Prev: Purpose, Up: NLS What to internationalize ======================== Native Language Support for messages are only the first step of internationalization. Today GNU `gettext' does not provide more help. But there are many attributes that are needed to define a country's cultural conventions. These attributes include beside the country's native language, the formatting of the date and time, the representation of numbers, the symbols for currency, etc. These local "rules" are termed the country's locale. The locale represents the knowledge needed to support the country's native attributes. There are 5 major areas which may vary between countries and hence locales. * Menu: * Codesets:: Characters and Codesets * Currency:: Currency * Dates:: Dates * Numbers:: Numbers * Messages:: Messages  File: gettext.info, Node: Codesets, Next: Currency, Prev: What to, Up: What to Characters and Codesets ----------------------- The codeset most commonly used through out the USA and most English speaking parts of the world is the ASCII codeset. However, there are many characters needed by various locales that are not found within this codeset. The 8-bit ISO 8859-1 code set has most of the special characters needed to handle the major European languages. However, in many cases, the ISO 8859-1 font is not adequate. Hence each locale will need to specify which codeset they need to use and will need to have the appropriate character handling routines to cope with the codeset.  File: gettext.info, Node: Currency, Next: Dates, Prev: Codesets, Up: What to Currency -------- The symbols used vary from country to country as does the position used by the symbol. Software needs to be able to transparently display currency figures in the native mode for each locale.  File: gettext.info, Node: Dates, Next: Numbers, Prev: Currency, Up: What to Dates ----- The format of date varies between locales. eg, Christmas day in 1994, is written as 12/25/94 in the USA and as 25/12/94 in Australia. Some locales require time to be specified in 24-hour mode rather than as AM or PM.  File: gettext.info, Node: Numbers, Next: Messages, Prev: Dates, Up: What to Numbers ------- Numbers can be represented differently in different locales. eg, the following numbers are all written correctly for their respective locales: 12,345.67 English 12.345,67 French 1,2345.67 Asia  File: gettext.info, Node: Messages, Prev: Numbers, Up: What to Messages -------- The most obvious area is the language support within a locale. This is where GNU `gettext' provide an easy for developers and users to easily change the language that the software uses to communicate to the user.  File: gettext.info, Node: Prospects, Prev: What to, Up: NLS Prospects of localization in the GNU project ============================================ In the near future we see no chance that beside message handling more components of locale will be made available for use in other GNU packages. The reason fot his is that most modern system provide a more or less reasonable support for at least some of the missing components. Another point is that the GNU libc and Linux will get a new and complete implementation of the whole locale functionality which could be adopted by system lacking a reasonable locale support.  File: gettext.info, Node: System operation, Next: Tools, Prev: NLS, Up: Top How does GNU `gettext' fit into the systems locale handling? ************************************************************ One aim of the current message catalog implementation provided by GNU `gettext' was to use the systems message catalog handling, if the installer wishes to do so. So we perhaps should first take a look at the solutions we know about. The people in the POSIX committee does not manage to agree on one of the semi-official standards which we'll describe below. In fact they couldn't agree on anything, so nothing decide only to include an example of an interface. The major Unix vendors are split in the usage of the two most important specifications: X/Opens catgets vs. Uniforums gettext interface. We'll describe them both and later explain our solution of this dilemma. * Menu: * catgets:: About `catgets' * gettext:: About `gettext' * Comparison:: Comparing the two interfaces  File: gettext.info, Node: catgets, Next: gettext, Prev: System operation, Up: System operation About `catgets' =============== The `catgets' implementation is defined in the X/Open Protability Guide, Volume 3, XSI Supplementary Definitions, Chapter 5. But the process of creating this standard seemed to be to slow for some of the Unix vendors so they created their implementations on preliminary versions of the standard. Of course this leads again to problems while writing platform independend programs: even the usage of `catgets' does nor guarantee a unique interface. Another, personal comment on this that only a bunch of committee members could have made this interface. They never really tried to program using this interface. It is a fast, memory-saving implementation, an user can happily live with it. But programmers hate it (at least me and some others do...) But we must not forget one point: after all the trouble with transfering the rights on Unix(tm) they at last came to X/Open, the very same who published this specifications. This leads me to making the prediction that this interface will be in future Unix standards and therefore part of all Unix implementation (implementations, which are *allowed* to wear this name). * Menu: * Interface to catgets:: The interface * Problems with catgets:: Problems with the `catgets' interface?!  File: gettext.info, Node: Interface to catgets, Next: Problems with catgets, Prev: catgets, Up: catgets The interface ------------- The interface to the `catgets' implementation consists of three functions which correspond to those used in file access: `catopen' to open the catalog for using, `catgets' for accessing the message tables, and `catclose' for closing after work is done. Prototypes for the functions and the needed definitions are in the `' header file. `catopen' is used like in this: nl_catd catd = catopen ("catalog_name", 0); The function takes as the argument the name of the catalog. This usual refers to the name of the program or the package. The second parameter is not further specified in the standard. I don't even know whether it is implemented consistently among various systems. So the common advice is to use `0' as the value. The return value is a handle to the message catalog, equivalent to handles to file returned by `open'. This handle is of course used in the `catgets' function which can be used like this: char *translation = catgets (catd, set_no, msg_id, "original string"); The first parameter is this catalog descriptor. The second parameter specifies the set of messages in this catalog, in which the message described by `msg_id' is obtained. `catgets' therefore uses a three-stage adressing: catalog name -> set number -> message ID -> translation The fourth argument is not used to address the translation. It is given as a default value in case when one of the addressing stages fail. One important thing to remember is that although the return type of catgets is `char *' the resulting string *must not* be changed. It should better `const char *', but the standard is published in 1988, one year before ANSI C. The last of these function functions is used and behaves as expected: catclose (catd); After this no `catgets' call using the descriptor is legal anymore.  File: gettext.info, Node: Problems with catgets, Prev: Interface to catgets, Up: catgets Problems with the `catgets' interface?! --------------------------------------- Now that this descriptions seemed to be really easy where are the problem we speak of. In fact the interface could be used in a reasonable way, but constructing the message catalogs is a pain. The reason for this lies in the third argument of `catgets': the unique message ID. This has to be a numeric value. Perhaps you could imagine the problems keeping such list while changing the source code. Add a new message here, remove one there. Of course there have been developed a lot of tools helping to organize this chaos but one as the other fails in one aspect or the other. We don't want to say that the other approach has no problems but they are far more easily to manage.  File: gettext.info, Node: gettext, Next: Comparison, Prev: catgets, Up: System operation About `gettext' =============== The definition of the `gettext' interface comes from a Uniforum specification and it is followed by at least one major Unix vendor (Sun) in its last developments. The main points about this solution is that it does not follow the method of normal file handling (open-use-close) and that it does not burden the programmer so many task, esp the unique key handling. Of course here is also a unique key needed, but this key is the message itself (how long or short it is). *Note Comparison:: for a more detailed comparison of the two methods. The following section contains a rather detailed description of the interface. We make it that detailed because this is the interface we chose for the GNU `gettext' Library. Programmers interested in using this library will be interested in this description. * Menu: * Interface to gettext:: The interface * Ambiguities:: Solving ambiguities * Locating catalogs:: Locating message catalog files  File: gettext.info, Node: Interface to gettext, Next: Ambiguities, Prev: gettext, Up: gettext The interface ------------- The minimal functionality an interface must have is a) to select a domain the strings are coming from (a single domain is not reasonable because its construction and maintenance is difficult, perhaps impossible) and b) to access a string in a selected domain. This is principally the description of the `gettext' interface. It has an global domain which unqualified usages reference. Of course this domain is selectable by the user. char *textdomain (const char *domain_name); This provides the possibility to change or query the current status of the current global domain of the `LC_MESSAGE' category. The argument os a null-terminated string, whose characters must be legal in the use in filenames. If the DOMAIN_NAME argument is `NULL', the function return the current value. If this no value has been set before, the name of the default domain is returned: *messages*. Please note that although the return value of `textdomain' is of type `char *' no changin is allowed. It is also important to know that no checks of the availability are made. If the name is not available you will see this by the fact that no translations are provided. To use a domain set by `textdomain' the function char *gettext (const char *msgid); is to be used. This is the simplest reasonable form one can imagine. The translation of the string MSGID is returned if it is available in the current domain. If not available the argument itself is returned. If the argument is `NULL' the result is undefined. One things which should come into mind is that no explicit dependency to the used domain is given. The current value of the domain for the `LC_MESSAGES' locale is used. If this changes between two executions of the same `gettext' call in the program, both calls reference a different message catalog. For the easiest case, which is normally used in internationalized GNU packages, once at the beginning of execution a call to `textdomain' is issued, setting the domain to a unique name, normally the package name. In the following code all strings which have to be translated are filtered through the gettext function. That's all, the package speaks your language.  File: gettext.info, Node: Ambiguities, Next: Locating catalogs, Prev: Interface to gettext, Up: gettext Solving ambiguities ------------------- While this single name domain work good for most applications there might be the need to get translations from more than one domain. Of course one could switch between different domains with calls to `textdomain', but this is really not convenient nor is it fast. A possible situation could be one case we are currently discussing: all error messages of functions in the set of common used functions should go into a seperate domain `error'. By this mean we would only need to translate them once. For this reasons there are two more functions to retrieve strings: char *dgettext (const char *domain_name, const char *msgid); char *dcgettext (const char *domain_name, const char *msgid, int category); Both take an additional argument at the first place, which corresponds to the argument of `textdomain'. The third argument of `dcgettext' allows to use another locale but `LC_MESSAGES'. But I really don't know where this can be useful. If the DOMAIN_NAME is `NULL' or CATEGORY has an value beside the known ones, the result is undefined. A second ambiguity can arise by the fact, that perhaps more than one domain has the same name. This can be solved by specifying where the needed message catalog files can be found. char *bindtextdomain (const char *domain_name, const char *dir_name); Calling this function binds the given domain to a file in the specified directory (how this file is determined follows below). Esp a file in the systems default place is not favoured against the spefied file anymore (as it would be by using `textdomain'). A `NULL' pointer for the DIR_NAME parameter returns the binding associated with DOMAIN_NAME. If DOMAIN_NAME itself is `NULL' nothing happens and a `NULL' pointer is returned. Here again as for all the other functions is true that none of the return value must be changed!  File: gettext.info, Node: Locating catalogs, Prev: Ambiguities, Up: gettext Locating message catalog files ------------------------------ Because many different languages for many different packages have to be stored we need some way to add these information to file message catalog files. The way usually used in Unix environments is have this encoding in the file name. This is also done here. The directory name given in `dcgettext's second argument (or the default directory), followed by the value and name of the locale and the domain name are concatenated: dir_name/locale/LC_XXX/domain_name.mo The default value for DIR_NAME is system specific. For the GNU library it's: /usr/local/share/locale LOCALE is the value of the locale whose name is this LC_XXX. For `gettext' and `dgettext' this locale is always LC_MESSAGES. `dcgettext' specifies the locale. The value of the locale is determined by calling `setlocale(LC_XXX, NULL)'. (1) (2) ---------- Footnotes ---------- (1) Some system, eg Ultrix, don't have LC_MESSAGES. Here we use an more or less arbitrary value for it. (2) When the system does not support `setlocale' its behaviour in setting the locale values is simulated by looking at the environment variables.  File: gettext.info, Node: Comparison, Prev: gettext, Up: System operation Comparing the two interfaces ============================  File: gettext.info, Node: Tools, Next: Internal aspects, Prev: System operation, Up: Top Using provided tools for generating catalogs ******************************************** original C source ---. +---> Emacs po-mode ---. message data base ---' | | .-------------------------------------------' | `-> C source ---> xgettext ---> PACKAGE.po ---. +---> tupdate ---. LANG.po ------' | ^ | .--------------------------------------------------------------' | ` - - - - - - - - . `-> temp LANG.po -----. . +---> Emacs po-mode ---> new LANG.po ---. translation DB ---' | | .-------------------------- msgfmt <--------------------------' | `-> LANG.mo ---> install ---> /usr/.../PACKAGE.mo ---. +---> "Hello world!" running package ---------'  File: gettext.info, Node: Internal aspects, Next: Just do it, Prev: Tools, Up: Top Internal aspects **************** * Menu: * Fileformat::  File: gettext.info, Node: Fileformat, Prev: Internal aspects, Up: Internal aspects Fileformat ========== The format of the generated .mo files is best described by a picture. The first two words serve the identification. The magic number will always signal GNU .mo files. But note that the number is stored in the byte order of the generating machine. I.e. the magic number really is two numbers: `0x950412de' and `0xde120495'. The second word describes the current revision of the file format. For now the revision is 0. This might changed in future version but it assures that the readers can distinguish new .mo files from old ones so that both can be handled correctly. Following a number of pointers to the table in the file two arrays with offsets of the strings can be found. The first contains the offsets original strings and it is sorted. This enables the use of simple binary search. To find the corresponding trnslation one has to access the array slot in the second array with the same index. The size of the hash table `S' can be zero. In this case hash table itself is not contained in the file. Some people might prefer this because hashing does not yield to a *that* big speed win. The hash table contains indeces to the sorted array of strings in the file. Conflict resolution is done by double hashing. The `msgfmt' program has an option which determines the alignment of the strings in the .mo file. I.e. the NUL terminated strings at the end of the file are all seperately aligned to this boundary. For RISC machine a correct alignment will speed things up. byte +------------------------------------------+ 0 | magic number = 0x950412de | | | 4 | file format revision = 0 | | | 8 | number of strings | == N | | 12 | offset of table with original strings | == O | | 16 | offset of table with translation strings | == T | | 20 | size of hashing table | == S | | 24 | offset of hashing table | == H | | . . . (possibly more entries later) . . . | | O | length&offset 0th string -----------------+ O + 8 | length&offset 1st string -------------------+ ... ... | | O + ((N-1)*8)| length&offset (N-1)th string | | | | | | | T | length&offset 0th translation ----------------+ T + 8 | length&offset 1st translation ------------------+ ... ... | | | | T + ((N-1)*8)| length&offset (N-1)th translation | | | | | | | | | | | H | start hash table | | | | | ... ... | | | | H + S * 4 | end hash table | | | | | | | | | | | | NUL terminated 0th string <---------------+ | | | | | | | | | NUL terminated 1st string <-----------------+ | | | | | | ... ... | | | | | | | NUL terminated 0th translation <--------------+ | | | | | NUL terminated 1st translation <----------------+ | | ... ... | | +------------------------------------------+  File: gettext.info, Node: Just do it, Next: PO mode, Prev: Internal aspects, Up: Top Internationalizing your program ******************************* The following description is a result of experiences we gained while internationalizing other GNU packages. But we are sure it will be possible to use this information even in non-GNU package which might have a different structure. We will describe the process for two different scenarios: for a flat directory structure and for a non-flat. Because GNU `gettext' is also structure non-flat it is easier to deal with this situation. Some maintainers use this as an opportunity to change their projects structure. For *now* we can only decsribe the non-flat situation. The rest will follow when we have more experiences with this. Please take all this information with a grain of salt. It might change some more experiences because GNU `gettext' is still in beta test. * Menu: * Overview to changes:: * Dealing with flat directory structures:: * Dealing with non-flat directory structures::  File: gettext.info, Node: Overview to changes, Next: Dealing with flat directory structures, Prev: Just do it, Up: Just do it Overview to changes =================== There are quite a lot things which have to be addressed but it is astonishing how wasy it is to do. Generally there are *** points: * get the new sources and control files in your repository * change the Makefiles for the new project files and directories * change the Autoconf configuration and rule base * get the translations in your project The fourth point will not be handled here because all the rest of this manual is about this. For the rest we want to follow one rule: Do not duplicate any file if it is not necessary. This means we should use all the files the GNU `gettext' package provides as long as they are usable. Therefore the your first action should be to unpack and install GNU `gettext' on your system. Leave the source untared somewhere on your disk. The trick is to solely use symbolic links to get the files you need in the tree of your program. By this mean you can easily upgrade the GNU `gettext' package while all your other projects will also benefit from it.  File: gettext.info, Node: Dealing with flat directory structures, Next: Dealing with non-flat directory structures, Prev: Overview to changes, Up: Just do it Dealing with flat directory structures ====================================== The only thing we can tell here now is that for fitting in a flat directory structure the `intl' directory contains a shell script named `combine-sh'. This will be used to combine all the C files into a single C file and the same for the header files. In the end you will have to add these two files to your project.  File: gettext.info, Node: Dealing with non-flat directory structures, Prev: Dealing with flat directory structures, Up: Just do it Dealing with non-flat directory structures ========================================== Your first step should be to run the shell script makelinks from the `intl' directory in the GNU `gettext' distribution. Your position should be the bottom directory of the project and the argument the script gets is the directory where it can find the GNU `gettext' *sources*. After this you will have two new directories: `intl' and `po'. `intl' contains the C source code needed and also a ready `Makefile.in'. The `po' directory only contains a file Makefile.in.in (yes, two times .in). * Menu: * Adopting the configuration process:: * Changing your sources:: * The building process::  File: gettext.info, Node: Adopting the configuration process, Next: Changing your sources, Prev: Dealing with non-flat directory structures, Up: Dealing with non-flat directory structures Adopting the configuration process ---------------------------------- We assume here that the project uses Cygnus' `configure' program. If you don't use it you should nevertheless get the needed information from the following description. For any information provided in the following description you can refer to the source code of the GNU `gettext' package. This package is intended to be a good example and master implementation for using its functionality. If your configuration process follows the rules of the GNU coding standard the new Makefiles should be correctly handle if we make them known in the configure.in script. Simply add them to the AC_OUTPUT line: AC_OUTPUT([... intl/Makefile po/Makefile.in], ...) A second change of the configure.in file is necessary because it does not contain yet the checks for the internationalization support functions and informations. Because this piece of autoconf code will be the same for all projects using GNU `gettext' it is intended to be put in the standard autoconf distribution. But until this is done you have to apppend the content of the file `aclocal.m4' to your own one (or create such a file). The content of this file may vary as we get more experience with strange systems out there. To use the functionality this new autoconf functions provide you simply have to add a line like ud_GNU_GETTEXT to your configure.in file. Another change to configure.in makes the available catalogs known to the script. Do this using the lines ALL_LINGUAS="AVAILABLE LANGUAGES" where ALL LANGUAGES should be something like DE FR, which means that german and french catalogs are available. The test instruction makes sure that you can specify the set of really installed message catalogs at the runtime of `autoconf'. Two further changes to `configure.in' build two needed files. For one this is the header `libintl.h'. The reason for using this was is that systems using the Uniforum message handling functions already have a file of this name. The second file which needs to be generated is `po/Makefile'. as we have seen above only the file `po/Makefile.in' is created by the `AC_OUTPUT' instruction. We have to use this two step way because some information we have to put in the `Makefile' are specific in each project and it can have any length so that it is not possible to put it in with `autoconf' using `sed'. This leads to a format of the `configure.in' file like this ... ALL_LINGUAS="AVAILABLE LANGUAGES" dnl Checks for programs. ... AC_PATH_PROG(PERL, perl, /usr/local/bin/perl) ... ud_GNU_GETTEXT ... AC_LINK_FILES($nls_cv_header_libgt, $nls_cv_header_intl) AC_OUTPUT([EXISTING CONFIGURATION FILES intl/Makefile \ intl/tupdate.perl po/Makefile.in], [sed -e "/TRANSCSRCS =/r po/POTFILES" po/Makefile.in > po/Makefile; EXISTING ADDITIONAL ACTIONS])  File: gettext.info, Node: Changing your sources, Next: The building process, Prev: Adopting the configuration process, Up: Dealing with non-flat directory structures Changing your sources --------------------- The changes to the source code fall into three categories. First you have to make the internationalization functions known. This is easy and you only have to use the following line in every source file which needs message translation: #include The next category is to initialize the locale data. This should be done with more or less the same code in every program: int main (argc, argv) int argc; char argv; { ... setlocale (LC_ALL, ""); bindtextdomain (PACKAGE, LOCALEDIR); textdomain (PACKAGE); ... } PACKAGE and LOCALEDIR should be provided either by `config.h' or by the Makefile. For now consult the `gettext' sources for more information. The last things is to find all messages in all source file which have to be translated. For this process you could use the Emacs po-mode.  File: gettext.info, Node: The building process, Prev: Changing your sources, Up: Dealing with non-flat directory structures The building process --------------------  File: gettext.info, Node: PO mode, Prev: Just do it, Up: Top An Emacs mode for updating `.po' files ************************************** * Menu: * Introduction:: Introduction * Installation:: Installation * About PO file format:: PO mode and `.po' File Format * Main PO commands:: Main commands for PO mode * Entry Positioning:: Entry Positioning * Untranslated Entries:: Untranslated Entries * Obsolete entries:: Obsolete entries * Modifying Translations:: Modifying Translations * Modifying Comments:: Modifying Comments * C sources context:: C sources context * Incoming PO:: Incoming PO mode features  File: gettext.info, Node: Introduction, Next: Installation, Prev: PO mode, Up: PO mode Introduction ============ The letters PO in `.po' files means Portable Object, to distinguish it from `.mo' files, where MO stands for Machine Object. `.po' files are best created by the `xgettext' program, and later updated or refreshed through the `tupdate' program. `xgettext' extracts all marked messages from a set of C files and initializes a `.po' file with empty translations. `tupdate' takes care of adjusting `.po' files between releases of the corresponding sources, commenting obsolete entries, initializing new ones, and updating all source line references. PO mode is an Emacs LISP mode specifically created for helping those who translate messages from GNU programs into their native language, by providing a cosy environment for editing or modifying Uniforum/Solaris `.po' files. PO mode is mainly geared towards editing a `.po' file, while browsing auxiliary `.po' files, and the set of C program sources from which the main `.po' file has been derived. It can also validate such `.po' files, and recreate them while interactively marking program strings as translatable. Here, we use *he* when speaking of the programmer, *she* when speaking of the translator, and *they* when speaking of the end users of the translated program. This is only a convenience for clarifying the documentation. It is absolutely not meant to imply that some roles are more appropriate to males or females. PO mode has been written to help *her* far more than to help *him*, and we just like to think about it this way! PO mode has been written in 1995 by Franc,ois Pinard, with the collaboration of Greg McGary, as a contribution to Ulrich Drepper's GNU `gettext' package.  File: gettext.info, Node: Installation, Next: About PO file format, Prev: Introduction, Up: PO mode Installation ============ For installing PO mode, you first need to move the `po-mode.el' somewhere GNU Emacs will find it. The `po-mode.el' may be found within the GNU `gettext' distribution, which is itself available on a GNU archive site near you. Then, you might want modify your file `.emacs', once and for all, so it contains a few lines looking like: (setq auto-mode-alist (cons '("\\.pox?\\'" . po-mode) auto-mode-alist)) (autoload 'po-mode "po-mode") Later, whenever you edit some `.po' or `.pox' file, Emacs will load `po-mode.el' as needed, and automatically activate PO mode commands for the associated buffer. The string *PO* appears in the mode line for any buffer for which PO mode is active. Many `.po' files may be active at once in a single Emacs session.  File: gettext.info, Node: About PO file format, Next: Main PO commands, Prev: Installation, Up: PO mode PO mode and `.po' File Format ============================= The precise details of `.po' mode format are described elsewhere in this document. For the purpose of PO mode, very little has to be known about the format details, as PO mode takes care of them for you. The general structure of a `.po' file should be well understood, however. A `.po' file is made up of many entries, each entry holding the relation between an original untranslated string and its corresponding translation. All entries in a given `.po' file usually pertain to a single project, and all translations are expressed in a single target language. On the screen, one `.po' file "entry", looks like this: WHITE-SPACE # TRANSLATOR-COMMENTS #. AUTOMATIC-COMMENTS #: LINEREF-LIST msgid UNTRANSLATED-STRING msgstr TRANSLATED-STRING Entries begin with some optional white space. Usually, when generated through GNU `gettext' tools, there is exactly one blank line between entries. Then comments follow, on lines all starting with the character `#'. There are two kinds of comments: those which have some white space immediately following the `#', which comments are created and maintained exclusively by the translator, and those which have some non-white character just after the `#', which comments are created and maintained automatically by GNU `gettext' tools. All comments, of any kind, are optional. After white space and comments, entries show two strings, giving first the untranslated string as it appears in the original program sources, and then, the translation of this string. The original string is introduced by the keyword `msgid', and the translation, by `msgstr'. The two strings, untranslated and translated, are quoted in various ways in the `.po' file, using `"' delimiters and `\' escapes, but the translator does not really have to pay attention to the precise quoting format, as PO mode fully intend to take care of quoting for her. The `msgid' strings, as well as automatic comments, are produced and managed by other GNU `gettext' tools, and PO mode does not provide means for the translator to alter these. The most she can do is merely deleting them, and only by deleting the whole entry. On the other hand, the `msgstr' string, as well as translator comments, are really meant for the translator, and PO mode gives her the full control she needs. It happens that some lines, usually whitespace or comments, follow the very last entry of a `.po' file. Such lines are not part of any entry, and PO mode is unable to take action on those lines. gettext-0.7/doc/gettext.info-2100644 230 226 112241 5776100053 15211 0ustar pinardguestThis is Info file gettext.info, produced by Makeinfo-1.63 from the input file gettext.texi. This file provides documentation for GNU `gettext' utilities. Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on all copies. Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one. Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved by the Foundation.  File: gettext.info, Node: Main PO commands, Next: Entry Positioning, Prev: About PO file format, Up: PO mode Main commands for PO mode ========================= When Emacs finds a `.po' file in a window, PO mode is activated for that window. This puts the window read-only and establishes a po-mode-map, which is a genuine Emacs mode, in that way that it is not derived from text mode in any way. The main PO commands are those who do not fit in the other categories in subsequent sections, they allow for quitting PO mode or managing windows in special ways. `u' Undo last modification to the `.po' file. `q' Quit processing and save the `.po' file. `o' Temporary leave the `.po' file window. `h' Show help about PO mode. `=' Give some `.po' file statistics. `v' Batch validate the format of the whole `.po' file. The command `u' (`po-undo') interfaces to the GNU Emacs *undo* facility. *Note Undoing Changes: (emacs)Undo. Each time `u' is typed, modifications the translator did to the `.po' file are undone a little more. For the purpose of undoing, each PO mode command is atomic. This is especially true for the `RET' command: the whole edition made by using one such command is undone at once, even if the edition itself implied several actions. The command `q' (`po-quit') is used when the translator is done with the `.po' file. If the file has been modified, it is saved on disk first. However, prior to all this, the commands check if some untranslated message remains in the `.po' file and, if yes, the translator is asked if she really wants to leave working with this `.po' file. This is the preferred way of getting rid of an Emacs `.po' file buffer. Merely killing it through the usual command `C-x k' (`kill-buffer'), say, has the unnice effect of leaving a PO internal work buffer behind. The command `o' (`po-other-window') is another, softer way, to leave PO mode, temporarily. It just moves the cursor in some other Emacs window, and pops one if necessary. For example, if the translator just got PO mode to show some source context in some other, she might discover some apparent bug in the program source that needs correction. This command allows the translator to change sex, become a programmer, and have the cursor right into the window containing the program she (or rather *he*) wants to modify. By later getting the cursor back in the `.po' file window, or by asking Emacs to edit this file once again, PO mode is then recovered. The command `h' (`po-help') displays a summary of all available PO mode commands. The translator should then type any character to resume normal PO mode operations. The command `?' has the same effect as `h'. The command `=' (`po-statistics') computes the total number of entries in the `.po' file, the ordinal of the current entry (counted from 1), the number of untranslated entries, the number of obsolete entries, and displays all these numbers. The command `v' (`po-validate') launches `msgfmt' in verbose mode over the current `.po' file. This command first offers to save the current `.po' file on disk. The `msgfmt' tool, from GNU `gettext', has the purpose is creating an `.mo' file out of a `.po' file, and PO mode uses the features of this program for checking the overall format of a `.po' file, as well as all individual entries. The program `msgfmt' runs asynchronously with Emacs, so the translator regains control immediately while her `.po' file is being studied. Error output is collected in the GNU Emacs `*compilation*' buffer, displayed in another window. The regular GNU Emacs command `C-x`' (`next-error'), as well as other usual compile commands, allow the translator to reposition quickly to the offending parts of the `.po' file. Once the cursor on the line in error, the translator may decide for any PO mode action which would help correcting the error. The special command `M-x po-normalize', which has no associate keys, revises all entries, ensuring that strings of both original and translated entries use uniform internal quoting in the `.po' file. It also removes any crumb after the last entry. This command may be useful for `.po' files freshly imported from elsewhere, or if we ever improve on the canonical quoting format we use. This canonical format is not only meant for getting cleaner `.po' files, but also for greatly speeding up `msgid' string lookup for some incoming PO mode commands. `M-x po-normalize' presently makes three passes over the entries. The first implements heuristics for converting `.po' files for GNU `gettext' 0.6 and earlier, in which `msgid' and `msgstr' fields were using K&R style C string syntax for multi-line strings. These heuristics may fail for comments not related to obsolete entries and ending with a backslash; they also depend on subsequent passes for finalizing the proper commenting of continued lines for obsolete entries. This first pass might disappear once all oldish `.po' files would have been adjusted. The second and third pass normalize all `msgid' and `msgstr' strings respectively. They also clean out trailing backslashes which XView's `msgfmt' is using for continued lines.  File: gettext.info, Node: Entry Positioning, Next: Untranslated Entries, Prev: Main PO commands, Up: PO mode Entry Positioning ================= The cursor in a `.po' file window is almost always part of an entry. The only exceptions are the special case when the cursor is after the last entry in the file, or when the `.po' file is empty. The entry where the cursor is found to be is said to be the current entry. Many PO mode commands operate on the current entry, so moving the cursor does more than allowing the translator to browse the `.po' file, this also selects on which entry commands operate. Some PO mode commands alter the position of the cursor in a specialized way. A few of those special purpose positioning are described here, the others are described in following sections. `.' Redisplay the current entry. `n' `SPC' Select the entry after the current one. `p' `DEL' Select the entry before the current one. `<' Select the first entry in the `.po' file. `>' Select the last entry in the `.po' file. `m' Record the location of the current entry for later use. `l' Return to a previously saved entry location. `x' Exchange the current entry location with the previously saved one. Any GNU Emacs command able to reposition the cursor may be used to select the current entry in PO mode, including commands which move by characters, lines, paragraphs, screens or pages, and search commands. However, there is a kind of standard way to display the current entry in PO mode, which usual GNU Emacs commands moving the cursor do not especially try to enforce. The command `.' (`po-current-entry') has the sole purpose of redisplaying the current entry properly, after the current entry has been changed by means external to PO mode, or the Emacs screen otherwise altered. The commands `n' (`po-next-entry') and `p' (`po-previous-entry') move the cursor the entry following, or preceding, the current one. If `n' is given while the cursor is on the last entry of the `.po' file, or if `p' is given while the cursor is on the first entry, no move is done. `SPC' and `DEL' are alternate keys for `n' and `p', respectively. The commands `<' (`po-first-entry') and `>' (`po-last-entry') move the cursor to the first entry, or last entry, of the `.po' file. When the cursor is located past the last entry in a `.po' file, most PO mode commands will return an error saying `After last entry'. However, the commands `<' and `>' have the special property of being able to work even when the cursor is not into some PO file entry, and you may use them for nicely correcting this situation. But even these commands will fail on a truly empty `.po' file. There are development plans for PO mode for it to interactively fill an empty `.po' file from sources. *Note Incoming PO::. The translator may decide, before working at the translation of a particular entry, that she needs browsing the remainder of the `.po' file, maybe for finding the terminology or phraseology used in related entries. She can of course use the standard Emacs idioms for saving the current cursor location in some register, and use that register for getting back, or else, to use the location ring. PO mode offers another approach, by which cursor locations may be saved unto a special stack. The command `m' (`po-push-location') merely adds the location of current entry to the stack, pushing the already saved locations under the new one. The command `l' (`po-pop-location') consumes the top stack element and reposition the cursor to the entry associated with that top element. This position is then lost, for the next `l' will move the cursor to the previously saved location, and so on until locations remain on the stack. If the translator wants the position to be kept on the location stack, maybe for taking a mere look at the entry associated with the top element, then go elsewhere with the intent of getting back later, she ought to use `m' immediately after `l'. The command `x' (`po-exchange-location') simultaneously reposition the cursor to the entry associated with the top element of the stack of saved locations, and replace that top element with the location of the current entry before the move. Consequently, repeating the `x' command toggles alternatively between two entries. For achieving this, the translator will position the cursor on the first entry, use `m', then position to the second entry, and merely use `x' for making the switch.  File: gettext.info, Node: Untranslated Entries, Next: Obsolete entries, Prev: Entry Positioning, Up: PO mode Untranslated Entries ==================== When `xgettext' originally creates a `.po' file, unless told otherwise, it initializes the `msgid' field with the untranslated string, and leaves the `msgstr' string to be empty. Such entries, having an empty translation, are said to be "untranslated" entries. Later, when the programmer slightly modifies some string right in the program, this change is later reflected in the `.po' file by the appearance of a new untranslated entry for the modified string. The usual commands moving from entry to entry consider untranslated entries on the same level as active entries. Untranslated entries are easily recognizable by the fact they end with `msgstr ""'. The work of the translator might be (quite naively) seen as the process of seeking after an untranslated entry, editing a translation for it, and repeating these actions until no untranslated entries remain. Some commands are more specifically related to untranslated entry processing. `e' Find the next untranslated entry. `M-e' Find the previous untranslated entry. `k' Turn the current entry into an untranslated one. The commands e (`po-next-empty-entry') and M-e (`po-previous-empty') move forwards or backwards, chasing for an obsolete entry. If none is found, the search is extended and wraps around in the `.po' file buffer. An entry can be turned back into an untranslated entry by merely emptying its translation, using the command k (`po-kill-msgstr'). *Note Modifying Translations::. Also, when time comes to quit working on a `.po' file buffer with the q command, the translator is asked for confirmation, if some untranslated string still exists.  File: gettext.info, Node: Obsolete entries, Next: Modifying Translations, Prev: Untranslated Entries, Up: PO mode Obsolete entries ================ By "obsolete" `.po' entries, we mean those entries which are commented out, usually by `tupdate' when it founds that the translation is not needed anymore by the package being localized. The usual commands moving from entry to entry consider obsolete entries on the same level as active entries. Obsolete entries are easily recognizable by the fact that all their lines start with `#', even those lines containing `msgid' or `msgstr'. Commands exist for emptying the translation or reinitializing it to the original untranslated string. Commands interfacing with the kill ring may force some previously saved text into the translation. The user may interactively edit the translation. All these commands may apply to obsolete entries, carefully leaving the entry obsolete after the fact. Moreover, some commands are more specifically related to obsolete entry processing. `M-n' `M-SPC' Find the next obsolete entry. `M-p' `M-DEL' Find the previous obsolete entry. `z' Make an active entry obsolete, or zap out an obsolete entry. The commands M-n (`po-next-obsolete-entry') and M-p (`po-previous-obsolete-entry') move forwards or backwards, chasing for an obsolete entry. If none is found, the search is extended and wraps around in the `.po' file buffer. The commands M-SPC and M-DEL are synonymous to M-n and M-p, respectively. PO mode does not provide ways for un-commenting an obsolete entry and making it active, because this would reintroduce an original untranslated string which does not correspond to any marked string in the program sources. This goes with the philosophy of never introducing useless `msgid' values. However, it is possible to comment out an active entry, so making it obsolete. GNU `gettext' utilities will later react to the disappearance of a translation by using the untranslated string. The command `z' (`po-fade-out-entry') pushes the current entry a little further towards annihilation. If the entry is active, then the entry is merely commented out. If the entry is already obsolete, then it is completely deleted from the `.po' file. It is easy to recycle the translation so deleted into some other `.po' file entry, usually one which is untranslated. *Note Modifying Translations::. Here is a quite interesting problem to solve for later development of PO mode, for those nights you are not sleepy. The idea would be that PO mode might become bright enough, one of these days, to make good guesses at retrieving the most probable candidate, among all obsolete entries, for initializing the translation of a newly appeared string. I think it might be a quite hard problem to do this algorithmically, as we have to develop good and efficient measures of string similarity. Right now, PO mode completely lets the decision to the translator, when the time comes to find the adequate obsolete translation, it merely tries to provide handy tools for helping her to do so.  File: gettext.info, Node: Modifying Translations, Next: Modifying Comments, Prev: Obsolete entries, Up: PO mode Modifying Translations ====================== PO mode prevents direct edition of the `.po' file, by the usual means Emacs give for altering a buffer's contents. By doing so, it pretends helping the translator to avoid little clerical errors about the overall file format, or the proper quoting of strings, as those errors would be easily made. Other kinds of errors are still possible, but some may be catched and diagnosed by the batch validation process, which the translator may always trigger by the `v' command. For all other errors, the translator has to rely on her own judgment, and also on the linguistic reports submitted to her by the users of the translated package, having the same mother tongue. When the time comes to create a translation, correct a error diagnosed mechanically or reported by a user, the translator have to resort to using the following commands for modifying the translations. `RET' Interactively edit the translation. `TAB' Reinitialize the translation with the original, untranslated string. `k' Save the translation on the kill ring, and delete it. `w' Save the translation on the kill ring, without deleting it. `y' Replace the translation, taking the new from the kill ring. The command `RET' (`po-edit-msgstr') opens a new Emacs window containing a copy of the translation taken from the current `.po' file entry, all ready for edition, fully modifiable and with the complete extent of GNU Emacs modifying commands. The string is presented to the translator expunged of all quoting marks, and she will modify the *unquoted* string in this window to heart's content. Once done, the regular Emacs command `M-C-c' (`exit-recursive-edit') may be used to return the edited translation into the `.po' file, replacing the original translation. The keys `C-c C-c' are bound so they have the same effect as `M-C-c'. If the translator becomes unsatisfied with her translation to the extent she prefers keeping the translation which was existent prior to the `RET' command, she may use the regular Emacs command `C-]' (`abort-recursive-edit') to merely get rid of edition, while preserving the original translation. Another way would be for her to exit normally with `C-c C-c', then type `u' once for undoing the whole effect of last edition. While editing her translation, the translator should pay attention at not inserting unwanted `RET' (carriage returns) characters at the end of the translated string if those are not meant to be there, or removing such characters when they are required. Since these characters are not visible in the editing buffer, they are easily to introduce my mistake. To help her, `RET' automatically puts the character `<' at the end of the string being edited, but this `<' is not really part of the string. On exiting the editing window with `C-c C-c', PO mode automatically removes such `<' and all whitespace added after it. If the translator adds characters after the terminating `<', it looses its delimiting property and integrally becomes part of the string. If she removes the delimiting `<', then the edited string is taken *as is*, with all trailing newlines, even if invisible. Also, if the translated string ought to end itself with a genuine `<', then the delimiting `<' may not be removed; so the string should appear, in the editing window, as ending with two `<' in a row. When a translation (or a comment) is being edited, the translator may move the cursor back into the `.po' file buffer and freely move to other entries, and browsing at will. The edited entry will be recovered as soon as the edit ceases, because this is this entry only which is being modified. If, with an edition still opened, the translator wanders in the `.po' file buffer, she cannot modify any other entry. If she tries to, PO mode will react by suggesting that she aborts the current edit, or else, by inviting her to finish the current edit prior to any other modification. The command `TAB' (`po-msgid-to-msgstr') initializes, or reinitializes the translation with the original string. This command is normally used when the translator wants to redo a fresh translation of the original string, disregarding any previous work. In fact, whether it is best to start a translation with an empty string, or rather with a copy of the original string, is a matter of taste or habit. Sometimes, the source mother tongue language and the target language are so different that is simply best to start writing on an empty page. At other times, the source and target languages are so close that it would be a waste to retype a number of words already being written in the original string. A translator may also like having the original string right under her eyes, as she will progressively overwrite the original text with the translation, even if this requires some extra editing work to get rid of the original. The command `k' (`po-kill-msgstr') merely empties the translation string, so turning the entry into an untranslated one. But while doing so, its previous contents is put apart in a special place, known as the kill ring. The command `w' (`po-kill-ring-save-msgstr') has also the effect of taking a copy of the translation unto the kill ring, but it otherwise leaves the entry alone, and does *not* remove the translation from the entry. Both commands use exactly the Emacs kill ring, which is shared between buffers, and which is well known already to GNU Emacs lovers. The translator may use `k' or `w' many times in the course of her work, as the kill ring may hold several saved translations. From the kill ring, strings may later be reinserted in various Emacs buffers. In particular, the kill ring may be used for moving translation strings between different entries of a single `.po' file buffer, or if the translator is handling many such buffers at once, even between `.po' files. To facilitate exchanges with buffers which are not in PO mode, the translation string put on the kill ring by the `k' command is fully unquoted before being saved: external quotes are removed, multi-lines strings are concatenated, and backslashed escaped sequences are turned into their corresponding characters. In the special case of obsolete entries, the translation is also uncommented prior to saving. The command `y' (`po-yank-msgstr') completely replaces the translation of the current entry by a string taken from the kill ring. Following GNU Emacs terminology, we then say that the replacement string is "yanked" into the `.po' file buffer. *Note Yanking: (emacs)Yanking. The first time `y' is used, the translation receives the value of the most recent addition to the kill ring. If `y' is typed once again, immediately, without intervening keystrokes, the translation just inserted is taken away and replaced by the second most recent addition to the kill ring. By repeating `y' many times in a row, the translator may travel along the the kill ring for saved strings, until she finds the string she really wanted. When a string is yanked into a `.po' file entry, it is fully and automatically requoted for complying with the format `.po' files should have. Further, if the entry is obsolete, PO mode then appropriately push the inserted string inside comments. Once again, translators should not burden themselves with quoting considerations besides, of course, the necessity of the translated string itself respective to the program using it. Note that `k' or `w' are not the only commands pushing strings on the kill ring, as almost any PO mode command replacing translation strings (or the translator comments) automatically save the old string on the kill ring. The main exceptions to this general rule are the yanking commands themselves. To better illustrate the operation of killing and yanking, let's use an actual example, taken from a common situation. When the programmer slightly modifies some string right in the program, his change is later reflected in the `.po' file by the appearance of a new untranslated entry for the modified string, and the fact that the entry translating the original or unmodified string becomes obsolete. In many cases, the translator might spare herself some work by retrieving the unmodified translation from the obsolete entry, then initializing the untranslated entry `msgstr' field with this retrieved translation. Once this done, the obsolete entry is not wanted anymore, and may be safely deleted. When the translator finds an untranslated entry and suspects that a slight variant of the translation exists, she immediately uses `m' to mark the current entry location, then starts chasing obsolete entries with `M-SPC', hoping to find some translation corresponding to the unmodified string. Once found, she uses the `z' command for delete the obsolete entry, knowing that `z' also *kills* the translation, that is, pushes the translation on the kill ring. Then, `l' returns to the initial untranslated entry, `y' then *yanks* the saved translation right into the `msgstr' field. The translator is then free to use `RET' for fine tuning the translation contents, and maybe to later use `e', then `m' again, for going on with the next untranslated string. When some sequence of keys has to be typed over and over again, the translator may find comfortable to become more acquainted with the GNU Emacs capability of learning these sequences and playing them back under request. *Note Keyboard Macros: (emacs)Keyboard Macros.  File: gettext.info, Node: Modifying Comments, Next: C sources context, Prev: Modifying Translations, Up: PO mode Modifying Comments ================== Any translation work done seriously will raise many linguistic difficulties, for which decisions have to be made, and the choices further documented. These documents may be saved within the `.po' file in form of translator comments, which the translator is free to create, delete, or modify at will. These comments may be useful to herself when she return PO mode prevents direct edition of the `.po' file, by the usual means Emacs give for altering a buffer's contents. By doing so, it pretends helping the translator to avoid little clerical errors about the overall file format, or the proper quoting of strings, as those errors would be easily made. Other kinds of errors are still possible, but some may be catched and diagnosed by the batch validation process, which the translator may always trigger by the `v' command. For all other errors, the translator has to rely on her own judgment, and also on the linguistic reports submitted to her by the users of the translated package, having the same mother tongue. When the time comes to create a translation, correct a error diagnosed mechanically or reported by a user, the translator have to resort to using the following commands for modifying the translations. `M-RET' Interactively edit the translator comments. `M-k' Save the translator comments on the kill ring, and delete it. `M-w' Save the translator comments on the kill ring, without deleting it. `M-y' Replace the translator comments, taking the new from the kill ring. Those commands parallel PO mode commands for modifying the translation strings, and behave much the same way as them, except that they handle this part of `.po' file comments meant for translator usage, rather than the translation strings. So, the descriptions given below are slightly succint, because the full details have already been given. *Note Modifying Translations::. The command `M-RET' (`po-edit-comment') opens a new Emacs window containing a copy of the translator comments the current `.po' file entry. If there is no such comments, PO mode understands that the translator wants to add a comment to the entry, and she is presented an empty screen. Comment marks (`#') and the space following them are automatically removed before edition, and reinstated after. For translator comments pertaining to obsolete entries, the uncommenting and recommenting operations are done twice. The command `#' also has the same effect as `M-RET', and might be easier to type. Once in the editing window, the keys `C-c C-c' allow the translator to tell she is finished with editing the comment. The command `M-k' (`po-kill-comment') get rid of all translator comments, while saving those comments on the kill ring. The command `M-w' (`po-kill-ring-save-comment') takes a copy of the translator comments on the kill ring, but leaves them undisturbed in the current entry. The command `M-y' (`po-yank-comment') completely replaces the translator comments by a string taken at the front of the kill ring. When this command is immediately repeated, the comments just inserted are withdrawn, and replaced by other strings taken along the kill ring. On the kill ring, all strings have the same nature. There is no *translation* strings and *comments* string. So, for example, let's presume the translator has just finished editing a translation, and wants to create a new translator comments for documenting why the previous translation was not good, just to remember what was the problem. Foreseeing that, in her documentation, she will quote the previous translation, she may initialize the translator comments with the previous translation, still at the head of the kill ring. Because editing already pushed the previous translation on the kill ring, she just has to type `M-w' prior to `#', and the previous translation will be right there, all ready for being introduced by some explanatory text. On the other hand, presume there are some translator comments already and that the translator wants to add to those comments, instead of wholly replacing them. Then, she should edit the comment right away with `#'. Once inside the editing window, she can use the regular GNU Emacs commands `C-y' (`yank') and `M-y' (`yank-pop') for getting the previous translation where she likes.  File: gettext.info, Node: C sources context, Next: Incoming PO, Prev: Modifying Comments, Up: PO mode C sources context ================= PO mode is particularily powerful when used with `.po' files created through GNU `gettext' utilities, as those utilities insert special comments in the `.po' files they generate. Some of these special comments relate the `.po' file entry to exactly where the untranslated string appears in the program sources. When the translator gets to an untranslated entry, she is fairly often faced with an original string which is not as informative as it normally should, being succint, cryptic, or otherwise ambiguous. Before chosing how to translate the string, she needs to understand better what the string really means and how tight the translation has to be. Most of times, when problems arise, the only way left to make her judgment is looking at the true program sources from where this string originated, searching for surrounding comments the programmer might have put in there, and looking around for helping clues of *any* kind. Surely, when looking at program sources, the translator will receive more help if she is a fluent programmer. However, even if she is not versed in programming and feels a little lost in C code, the translator should not be shy at taking a look, once in a while. It is most probable that she will still be able to find some of the hints she needs. She will learn quickly to not feel uncomfortable in program code, paying more attention to programmer's comments, variable and function names (if he dared chosing them well), and overall organization, than to programmation itself. The following commands are meant to help the translator at getting program source context for a `.po' file entry. `c' Resume the display of a program source context, or cycle through them. `M-c' Display of a program source context selected by menu. `d' Add a directory to the search path for source files. `M-d' Delete a directory from the search path for source files. The commands `c' (`po-cycle-reference') and `M-c' (`po-select-reference') both open another window displaying some source program file, and already positioned in such a way that it shows an actual use of the current string to translate. By doing so, the command gives source program context for the string. But if the entry has no source context references, or if all references are unresolved along the search path for program sources, then the command diagnoses this as an error. Even if `c' (or `M-c') opens a new window, the cursor stays in the `.po' file window. If the translator really wants to get into the program source window, she ought to do it explicitely, maybe by using command `o'. When `c' is typed for the first time, or for a `.po' file entry which is different of the last one used for getting source context, then the command reacts by giving the first context available for this entry, if any. If some context has already been recently displayed for the current `.po' entry, and the translator wandered to do other things, typing `c' again will merely resume, in another window, the context last displayed. In particular, if the translator moved the cursor away from the context in the source file, the command will bring the cursor back to the context. By using `c' many times in a row, with no interning other commands, PO mode will cycle to the next available contexts for this particular entry, getting back to the first context once the last has been shown. The command `M-c' behaves differently. Instead of cycling through references, it lets the translator choose of particular reference among many, and displays that reference. It is best used with completion, if the translator types `TAB' immediately after `M-c', in response to the question, she will be offerred a menu of all possible values, as a reminder of which are the acceptable answers. This command is useful only where there are really many contexts available for a single string to translate. Program source files are usually found relative to where the `.po' file stands, as the `.po' file is usually generated by the programmer in such a way to guarantee that this works. However, it might happen that the `.po' file has been moved, or is edited in a different place than its normal location. When this happens, the translator should tell PO mode in which directory sits the genuine `.po' file. Many such directories may be specified, and all together, they constitute what is called the "search path" for program sources. The command `d' (`po-add-path') is used to interactively enter a new directory at the front of the search path, and the command `M-d' (`po-delete-path') is used to select, with completion, one of the directories she does not want anymore on the search path.  File: gettext.info, Node: Incoming PO, Prev: C sources context, Up: PO mode Incoming PO mode features ========================= Some features have been voluntarily delayed so PO mode may be born faster. They all rely on the ability for PO mode to scan an already existing `.po' file for a particular string encoded into the `msgid' field of some entry. There are many different ways for encoding a particular string into a `.po' file entry, because there are so many different ways to split and quote multi-line strings, and even, to represent special characters by backslahsed escaped sequences. PO mode has internally all the built-in machinery for implementing this recognition easily, but not for implementing it efficiently. We have a solution for this problem, which should be implemented in the next release of PO mode containing new features. One set of incoming features is meant more for the programmer than for the translator, and will allow him to interactively mark which strings, in a set of program sources, are translatable, and which are not. Even if it is a fairly easy job for a programmer to find and mark such strings by other means, PO mode should offer means by which this work is made more comfortable. Further, this might give translators who feel a little like programmers, or programmers who feel a little like translators, a tool letting them work at marking translatable strings in the program sources, while simultaneously producing a set of translation in some language, for the package being internationalized. Another feature will let the translator maintain a compendium of already achieved translations. A "compendium" is a special `.po' file containing a set of translations recurring in many different packages. The translator will be given commands for adding entries to her compendium, and later initializing untranslated entries, or updating already translated entries, from translations kept in the compendium. A final feature should help the knowledgeable translator to take advantage of translations already achieved in other languages she just happens to know, by providing these other language translation as additional context for her own work. Each `.po' file existing for the same package the translator is working on, but targetted to a different mother tongue language, is called an "auxiliary" `.po' file. Commands will exist for declaring and handling auxiliary `.po' files, and also for showing contexts for the entry under work. It is yet to decide if PO mode would help the translator, or otherwise irritate her, by forcing a more fixed window disposition while she is doing her work. We originally had quite precise ideas about how windows should behave, but on the other hand, anyone used to GNU Emacs is often happy to keep full control. Maybe a fixed window disposition might be offerred as a PO mode option that the translator might activate or deactivate at will, so it could be offerred on an experimental basis. If nobody feels a real need for using it, or a compulsion for writing it, we might as well drop this whole idea. The incentive for doing it should come from translators rather than programmers, as opinions from an experienced translator are surely more worth to me than opinions from programmers *thinking* about how others should do translation. gettext-0.7/doc/gettext.texi100444 230 226 255013 5776074643 15112 0ustar pinardguest\input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*- @c %**start of header @setfilename gettext.info @settitle GNU @code{gettext} utilities @finalout @c %**end of header @include version.texi @ifinfo @set Francois Franc,ois @end ifinfo @tex @set Francois Fran\noexpand\ptexc cois @end tex @ifinfo This file provides documentation for GNU @code{gettext} utilities. Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on all copies. @ignore Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the results, provided the printed document carries copying permission notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual). @end ignore Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one. Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved by the Foundation. @end ifinfo @titlepage @title GNU gettext tools, version @value{VERSION} @subtitle Native Language Support Library and Tools @subtitle Edition @value{EDITION}, @value{UPDATED} @author Ulrich Drepper @author Jim Meyering @author @value{Francois} Pinard @page @vskip 0pt plus 1filll Copyright @copyright{} 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved on all copies. Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one. Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved by the Foundation. @end titlepage @ifinfo @node Top, Translation Intro, (dir), (dir) @top GNU @code{gettext} utilities @menu * Translation Intro:: Notes on the GNU Translation Project * NLS:: Introduction to Native Language Support * System operation:: How does GNU @code{gettext} fit into the systems locale handling? * Tools:: Using provided tools for generating catalogs * Internal aspects:: Internal aspects * Just do it:: Internationalizing your program * PO mode:: An Emacs mode for updating @file{.po} files --- The Detailed Node Listing --- Notes on the GNU Translation Project * INSTALL matters:: * Translating teams:: * Available packages:: Introduction to Native Language Support * Localization:: Localization (@dfn{l10n}) * Internationalization:: Internationalization * Purpose:: Purpose of GNU @code{gettext} utilities * What to:: What to internationalize * Prospects:: Prospects of localization in the GNU project What to internationalize * Codesets:: Characters and Codesets * Currency:: Currency * Dates:: Dates * Numbers:: Numbers * Messages:: Messages How does GNU @code{gettext} fit into the systems locale handling? * catgets:: About @code{catgets} * gettext:: About @code{gettext} * Comparison:: Comparing the two interfaces About @code{catgets} * Interface to catgets:: The interface * Problems with catgets:: Problems with the @code{catgets} interface?! About @code{gettext} * Interface to gettext:: The interface * Ambiguities:: Solving ambiguities * Locating catalogs:: Locating message catalog files Internal aspects * Fileformat:: Internationalizing your program * Overview to changes:: * Dealing with flat directory structures:: * Dealing with non-flat directory structures:: Dealing with non-flat directory structures * Adopting the configuration process:: * Changing your sources:: * The building process:: An Emacs mode for updating @file{.po} files * Introduction:: Introduction * Installation:: Installation * About PO file format:: PO mode and @file{.po} File Format * Main PO commands:: Main commands for PO mode * Entry Positioning:: Entry Positioning * Untranslated Entries:: Untranslated Entries * Obsolete entries:: Obsolete entries * Modifying Translations:: Modifying Translations * Modifying Comments:: Modifying Comments * C sources context:: C sources context * Incoming PO:: Incoming PO mode features @end menu @end ifinfo @node Translation Intro, NLS, Top, Top @chapter Notes on the GNU Translation Project @set STATUS June 1995 @c This chapter is meant to be extracted into a file named @file{NLS}, @c to be later included in GNU packages using GNU @code{gettext}. A few GNU packages provide native language translation for their messages. This chapter gives the installer some useful hints. It explains how users should proceed for getting the programs to use the available translations. It tells how people wanting to contribute and work at translations should contact the appropriate team. @menu * INSTALL matters:: * Translating teams:: * Available packages:: @end menu @node INSTALL matters, Translating teams, Translation Intro, Translation Intro @section INSTALL matters Some GNU packages are @dfn{localizable} when properly installed; the programs they contain can be made to speak your own native language. Most such packages use GNU @code{gettext}. Some other packages have their own ways to internationalization, predating GNU @code{gettext}. If you found this @file{NLS} file inside a GNU distribution, you may assume that this distribution does use GNU @code{gettext}, itself available at your nearest GNU archive site. By default, this package will be installed to allow translation of messages. It will automatically detect whether the system provides usable @code{catgets} or @code{gettext} functions. If neither is present, the GNU @code{gettext} library will be used. Installers may use special options at configuration time for changing this behaviour. The commands: @example ./configure --with-gnu-gettext ./configure --disable-nls @end example @noindent will respectively bypass system @code{catgets} or @code{gettext} to use GNU @code{gettext}, or else, totally disable translation of messages. Internationalized packages have usually many @file{@var{xx}.po} files, where @var{xx} gives an ISO 639 two-letter code identifying the language. Unless translations are disabled, all those available are installed together with the package. However, the environment variable @code{LINGUAS} may be set, prior to configuration, to limit the installed set. @code{LINGUAS} should then contain a space separated list of two-letter codes, stating which languages are allowed. As a user, if your language has been installed for this package, you only have to set the @code{LANG} environment variable to the appropriate @samp{@var{xx}} prior to using the programs in the package. For example, let's suppose that you speak German. At the shell prompt, merely execute @w{@samp{setenv LANG de}} (in @code{csh}) or @w{@samp{export LANG; LANG=de}} (in @code{sh}). This can be done from your @file{.login} or @file{.profile} file. @node Translating teams, Available packages, INSTALL matters, Translation Intro @section Translating teams GNU is going international! The GNU Translation Project is a way to get maintainers, translators and users all together, so GNU will gradually become able to speak many native languages. The GNU @code{gettext} tool set contains @emph{everything} maintainers need for internationalizing their packages for messages. It also contains quite useful tools for helping translators at localizing messages to their native language, once a package has already been internationalized. To achieve the GNU Translation Project, we need many interested people who like their own language and write it well, and who are also able to synergize with other translators speaking the same language. If you'd like to volunteer to @emph{work} at translating messages, please send mail to your translating team. Each team has its own mailing list, courtesy of Linux International. You may reach your translating team at the address @file{XX@@li.org}, replacing @var{XX} by the two-letter ISO 639 code for your language. Language codes are @emph{not} the same as country codes given in ISO 3166. The following translating teams exist, as of @value{STATUS}: @quotation Chinese (zh), Czech (cs), Danish (da), Dutch (nl), Esperanto (eo), Finnish (fi), French (fr), Irish (ga), German (de), Greek (el), Italian (it), Japanese (ja), Indonesian (in), Norwegian (no), Polish (pl), Portuguese (pt), Russian (ru), Spanish (es), Swedish (sv) and Turkish (tr). @end quotation @noindent For example, you may reach the Chinese translating team by writing to @file{zh@@li.org}. When you become a member of the translating team for your own language, you may subscribe to its list. For example, Swedish people can send a message to @w{@file{sv-request@@li.org}}, having this message body: @example subscribe @end example Keep in mind that team members should be interested in @emph{working} at translations, or at solving translational difficulties, rather than merely lurking around. If your team does not exist yet and you want to start one, please write to @w{@file{gnu-translation@@prep.ai.mit.edu}}; you will then reach the GNU coordinator for all translator teams. @node Available packages, , Translating teams, Translation Intro @section Available packages Languages are not equally supported in all GNU packages. The following matrix shows the current state of GNU internationalization, as of @value{STATUS}. Listed are: internationalized packages, and languages for which work is in progress, or about to start. @example See note cs de es fi fr it ja nl pt sv \ .-------------------------------. chess (4) | * * | clisp (3) | * * | diffutils (2) | . - | fileutils | - | flex (1) | . - | m4 (2) | + + + - + | gettext | * * | ptx (2) | + + + | recode (2) | + . + + + | sharutils (2) | + + + + + | shellutils | - | tar | * . * . * * | wdiff (2) | + + + + | `-------------------------------' cs de es fi fr it ja nl pt sv @end example The interpretation legend is: @table @samp @item . interest shown, or invitation made @item - being undertaken, or work in progress @item + submitted, and now ready for pretest @item * distributed through an official release @end table Notes: @table @asis @item (1) This package has its translatable strings marked, but does not use GNU @code{gettext}. A convenience patch may be available separately. @item (2) This package is planned to switch to GNU @code{gettext}. For the time being, it uses temporary means for internationalization. @item (3) This package is translated to specific languages by methods predating GNU @code{gettext}. Translations are kept in the sources and memory, rather than installed in external message catalogs. @item (4) This package is translated to specific languages by methods predating GNU @code{gettext}. Translations are all kept on disk files, and sources contain numbers where one normally expects strings. @end table If @value{STATUS} seems to be old, you may fetch a more recent copy of this @file{NLS} file on most GNU archive sites. @node NLS, System operation, Translation Intro, Top @chapter Introduction to Native Language Support @menu * Localization:: Localization (@dfn{l10n}) * Internationalization:: Internationalization * Purpose:: Purpose of GNU @code{gettext} utilities * What to:: What to internationalize * Prospects:: Prospects of localization in the GNU project @end menu @node Localization, Internationalization, NLS, NLS @section Localization (@dfn{l10n}) The GNU @code{gettext} utilities are a set of tools that provides a framework to help other GNU packages produce multilingual messages. Other internationalization aspects are not handled here but perhaps will also be handled in future versions. GNU @code{gettext} is currently undergoing beta testing. By @dfn{localization}, one means the operation by which, in a set of programs sufficiently aware of those things, one gives the program the needed informations so that it can handle its input and output in a fashion which is correct in the selected locale. The programming environment puts several functions to the programmers disposal which allow this runtime configuration. Users achieve localization of programs by setting proper values to special environment variables, prior to executing those programs. @node Internationalization, Purpose, Localization, NLS @section Internationalization By @dfn{internationalization}, one refers to the operation by which a program, or a set of programs, is made aware and able of further localizations, for many countries. The word @emph{internationalization} is a long word. People sometimes use @dfn{i18n} instead, because there are 18 intervening letters between the initial @samp{i} and the final @samp{n}. Program developers may use various techniques to internationalize their programs, some of them have been standardized. @node Purpose, What to, Internationalization, NLS @section Purpose of GNU @code{gettext} utilities GNU @code{gettext} is a set of tools meant to facilitate one aspect of internationalization of other programs, that is, to make easy for users to later @emph{localize} those programs. By the provided means programmers can easily make their program use the native language of the user for its messages, if the messages of the program are translated and the user selects to use them. @node What to, Prospects, Purpose, NLS @section What to internationalize Native Language Support for messages are only the first step of internationalization. Today GNU @code{gettext} does not provide more help. But there are many attributes that are needed to define a country's cultural conventions. These attributes include beside the country's native language, the formatting of the date and time, the representation of numbers, the symbols for currency, etc. These local "rules" are termed the country's locale. The locale represents the knowledge needed to support the country's native attributes. There are 5 major areas which may vary between countries and hence locales. @menu * Codesets:: Characters and Codesets * Currency:: Currency * Dates:: Dates * Numbers:: Numbers * Messages:: Messages @end menu @node Codesets, Currency, What to, What to @subsection Characters and Codesets The codeset most commonly used through out the USA and most English speaking parts of the world is the ASCII codeset. However, there are many characters needed by various locales that are not found within this codeset. The 8-bit ISO 8859-1 code set has most of the special characters needed to handle the major European languages. However, in many cases, the ISO 8859-1 font is not adequate. Hence each locale will need to specify which codeset they need to use and will need to have the appropriate character handling routines to cope with the codeset. @node Currency, Dates, Codesets, What to @subsection Currency The symbols used vary from country to country as does the position used by the symbol. Software needs to be able to transparently display currency figures in the native mode for each locale. @node Dates, Numbers, Currency, What to @subsection Dates The format of date varies between locales. eg, Christmas day in 1994, is written as 12/25/94 in the USA and as 25/12/94 in Australia. Some locales require time to be specified in 24-hour mode rather than as AM or PM. @node Numbers, Messages, Dates, What to @subsection Numbers Numbers can be represented differently in different locales. eg, the following numbers are all written correctly for their respective locales: @example 12,345.67 English 12.345,67 French 1,2345.67 Asia @end example @node Messages, , Numbers, What to @subsection Messages The most obvious area is the language support within a locale. This is where GNU @code{gettext} provide an easy for developers and users to easily change the language that the software uses to communicate to the user. @node Prospects, , What to, NLS @section Prospects of localization in the GNU project In the near future we see no chance that beside message handling more components of locale will be made available for use in other GNU packages. The reason fot his is that most modern system provide a more or less reasonable support for at least some of the missing components. Another point is that the GNU libc and Linux will get a new and complete implementation of the whole locale functionality which could be adopted by system lacking a reasonable locale support. @node System operation, Tools, NLS, Top @chapter How does GNU @code{gettext} fit into the systems locale handling? One aim of the current message catalog implementation provided by GNU @code{gettext} was to use the systems message catalog handling, if the installer wishes to do so. So we perhaps should first take a look at the solutions we know about. The people in the POSIX committee does not manage to agree on one of the semi--official standards which we'll describe below. In fact they couldn't agree on anything, so nothing decide only to include an example of an interface. The major Unix vendors are split in the usage of the two most important specifications: X/Opens catgets vs. Uniforums gettext interface. We'll describe them both and later explain our solution of this dilemma. @menu * catgets:: About @code{catgets} * gettext:: About @code{gettext} * Comparison:: Comparing the two interfaces @end menu @node catgets, gettext, System operation, System operation @section About @code{catgets} The @code{catgets} implementation is defined in the X/Open Protability Guide, Volume 3, XSI Supplementary Definitions, Chapter 5. But the process of creating this standard seemed to be to slow for some of the Unix vendors so they created their implementations on preliminary versions of the standard. Of course this leads again to problems while writing platform independend programs: even the usage of @code{catgets} does nor guarantee a unique interface. Another, personal comment on this that only a bunch of committee members could have made this interface. They never really tried to program using this interface. It is a fast, memory-saving implementation, an user can happily live with it. But programmers hate it (at least me and some others do@dots{}) But we must not forget one point: after all the trouble with transfering the rights on Unix(tm) they at last came to X/Open, the very same who published this specifications. This leads me to making the prediction that this interface will be in future Unix standards and therefore part of all Unix implementation (implementations, which are @emph{allowed} to wear this name). @menu * Interface to catgets:: The interface * Problems with catgets:: Problems with the @code{catgets} interface?! @end menu @node Interface to catgets, Problems with catgets, catgets, catgets @subsection The interface The interface to the @code{catgets} implementation consists of three functions which correspond to those used in file access: @code{catopen} to open the catalog for using, @code{catgets} for accessing the message tables, and @code{catclose} for closing after work is done. Prototypes for the functions and the needed definitions are in the @code{} header file. @code{catopen} is used like in this: @example nl_catd catd = catopen ("catalog_name", 0); @end example The function takes as the argument the name of the catalog. This usual refers to the name of the program or the package. The second parameter is not further specified in the standard. I don't even know whether it is implemented consistently among various systems. So the common advice is to use @code{0} as the value. The return value is a handle to the message catalog, equivalent to handles to file returned by @code{open}. This handle is of course used in the @code{catgets} function which can be used like this: @example char *translation = catgets (catd, set_no, msg_id, "original string"); @end example The first parameter is this catalog descriptor. The second parameter specifies the set of messages in this catalog, in which the message described by @code{msg_id} is obtained. @code{catgets} therefore uses a three-stage adressing: @format catalog name -> set number -> message ID -> translation @end format @c Anybody else loving Haskell??? :-) -- Uli The fourth argument is not used to address the translation. It is given as a default value in case when one of the addressing stages fail. One important thing to remember is that although the return type of catgets is @code{char *} the resulting string @emph{must not} be changed. It should better @code{const char *}, but the standard is published in 1988, one year before ANSI C. The last of these function functions is used and behaves as expected: @example catclose (catd); @end example After this no @code{catgets} call using the descriptor is legal anymore. @node Problems with catgets, , Interface to catgets, catgets @subsection Problems with the @code{catgets} interface?! Now that this descriptions seemed to be really easy where are the problem we speak of. In fact the interface could be used in a reasonable way, but constructing the message catalogs is a pain. The reason for this lies in the third argument of @code{catgets}: the unique message ID. This has to be a numeric value. Perhaps you could imagine the problems keeping such list while changing the source code. Add a new message here, remove one there. Of course there have been developed a lot of tools helping to organize this chaos but one as the other fails in one aspect or the other. We don't want to say that the other approach has no problems but they are far more easily to manage. @node gettext, Comparison, catgets, System operation @section About @code{gettext} The definition of the @code{gettext} interface comes from a Uniforum specification and it is followed by at least one major Unix vendor (Sun) in its last developments. The main points about this solution is that it does not follow the method of normal file handling (open-use-close) and that it does not burden the programmer so many task, esp the unique key handling. Of course here is also a unique key needed, but this key is the message itself (how long or short it is). @xref{Comparison} for a more detailed comparison of the two methods. The following section contains a rather detailed description of the interface. We make it that detailed because this is the interface we chose for the GNU @code{gettext} Library. Programmers interested in using this library will be interested in this description. @menu * Interface to gettext:: The interface * Ambiguities:: Solving ambiguities * Locating catalogs:: Locating message catalog files @end menu @node Interface to gettext, Ambiguities, gettext, gettext @subsection The interface The minimal functionality an interface must have is a) to select a domain the strings are coming from (a single domain is not reasonable because its construction and maintenance is difficult, perhaps impossible) and b) to access a string in a selected domain. This is principally the description of the @code{gettext} interface. It has an global domain which unqualified usages reference. Of course this domain is selectable by the user. @example char *textdomain (const char *domain_name); @end example This provides the possibility to change or query the current status of the current global domain of the @code{LC_MESSAGE} category. The argument os a null-terminated string, whose characters must be legal in the use in filenames. If the @var{domain_name} argument is @code{NULL}, the function return the current value. If this no value has been set before, the name of the default domain is returned: @emph{messages}. Please note that although the return value of @code{textdomain} is of type @code{char *} no changin is allowed. It is also important to know that no checks of the availability are made. If the name is not available you will see this by the fact that no translations are provided. To use a domain set by @code{textdomain} the function @example char *gettext (const char *msgid); @end example is to be used. This is the simplest reasonable form one can imagine. The translation of the string @var{msgid} is returned if it is available in the current domain. If not available the argument itself is returned. If the argument is @code{NULL} the result is undefined. One things which should come into mind is that no explicit dependency to the used domain is given. The current value of the domain for the @code{LC_MESSAGES} locale is used. If this changes between two executions of the same @code{gettext} call in the program, both calls reference a different message catalog. For the easiest case, which is normally used in internationalized GNU packages, once at the beginning of execution a call to @code{textdomain} is issued, setting the domain to a unique name, normally the package name. In the following code all strings which have to be translated are filtered through the gettext function. That's all, the package speaks your language. @node Ambiguities, Locating catalogs, Interface to gettext, gettext @subsection Solving ambiguities While this single name domain work good for most applications there might be the need to get translations from more than one domain. Of course one could switch between different domains with calls to @code{textdomain}, but this is really not convenient nor is it fast. A possible situation could be one case we are currently discussing: all error messages of functions in the set of common used functions should go into a seperate domain @code{error}. By this mean we would only need to translate them once. For this reasons there are two more functions to retrieve strings: @example char *dgettext (const char *domain_name, const char *msgid); char *dcgettext (const char *domain_name, const char *msgid, int category); @end example Both take an additional argument at the first place, which corresponds to the argument of @code{textdomain}. The third argument of @code{dcgettext} allows to use another locale but @code{LC_MESSAGES}. But I really don't know where this can be useful. If the @var{domain_name} is @code{NULL} or @var{category} has an value beside the known ones, the result is undefined. A second ambiguity can arise by the fact, that perhaps more than one domain has the same name. This can be solved by specifying where the needed message catalog files can be found. @example char *bindtextdomain (const char *domain_name, const char *dir_name); @end example Calling this function binds the given domain to a file in the specified directory (how this file is determined follows below). Esp a file in the systems default place is not favoured against the spefied file anymore (as it would be by using @code{textdomain}). A @code{NULL} pointer for the @var{dir_name} parameter returns the binding associated with @var{domain_name}. If @var{domain_name} itself is @code{NULL} nothing happens and a @code{NULL} pointer is returned. Here again as for all the other functions is true that none of the return value must be changed! @node Locating catalogs, , Ambiguities, gettext @subsection Locating message catalog files Because many different languages for many different packages have to be stored we need some way to add these information to file message catalog files. The way usually used in Unix environments is have this encoding in the file name. This is also done here. The directory name given in @code{dcgettext}s second argument (or the default directory), followed by the value and name of the locale and the domain name are concatenated: @example dir_name/locale/LC_XXX/domain_name.mo @end example The default value for @var{dir_name} is system specific. For the GNU library it's: @example /usr/local/share/locale @end example @noindent @var{locale} is the value of the locale whose name is this @var{LC_XXX}. For @code{gettext} and @code{dgettext} this locale is always @var{LC_MESSAGES}. @code{dcgettext} specifies the locale. The value of the locale is determined by calling @code{setlocale(LC_XXX, NULL)}. @footnote{Some system, eg Ultrix, don't have @var{LC_MESSAGES}. Here we use an more or less arbitrary value for it.} @footnote{When the system does not support @code{setlocale} its behaviour in setting the locale values is simulated by looking at the environment variables.} @node Comparison, , gettext, System operation @section Comparing the two interfaces @c FIXME: arguments to catgets vs. gettext @node Tools, Internal aspects, System operation, Top @chapter Using provided tools for generating catalogs @example original C source ---. +---> Emacs po-mode ---. message data base ---' | | .-------------------------------------------' | `-> C source ---> xgettext ---> PACKAGE.po ---. +---> tupdate ---. LANG.po ------' | ^ | .--------------------------------------------------------------' | ` - - - - - - - - . `-> temp LANG.po -----. . +---> Emacs po-mode ---> new LANG.po ---. translation DB ---' | | .-------------------------- msgfmt <--------------------------' | `-> LANG.mo ---> install ---> /usr/.../PACKAGE.mo ---. +---> "Hello world!" running package ---------' @end example @node Internal aspects, Just do it, Tools, Top @chapter Internal aspects @menu * Fileformat:: @end menu @node Fileformat, , Internal aspects, Internal aspects @section Fileformat The format of the generated .mo files is best described by a picture. The first two words serve the identification. The magic number will always signal GNU .mo files. But note that the number is stored in the byte order of the generating machine. I.e. the magic number really is two numbers: @code{0x950412de} and @code{0xde120495}. The second word describes the current revision of the file format. For now the revision is 0. This might changed in future version but it assures that the readers can distinguish new .mo files from old ones so that both can be handled correctly. Following a number of pointers to the table in the file two arrays with offsets of the strings can be found. The first contains the offsets original strings and it is sorted. This enables the use of simple binary search. To find the corresponding trnslation one has to access the array slot in the second array with the same index. The size of the hash table @code{S} can be zero. In this case hash table itself is not contained in the file. Some people might prefer this because hashing does not yield to a @emph{that} big speed win. The hash table contains indeces to the sorted array of strings in the file. Conflict resolution is done by double hashing. The @code{msgfmt} program has an option which determines the alignment of the strings in the .mo file. I.e. the NUL terminated strings at the end of the file are all seperately aligned to this boundary. For RISC machine a correct alignment will speed things up. @example byte +------------------------------------------+ 0 | magic number = 0x950412de | | | 4 | file format revision = 0 | | | 8 | number of strings | == N | | 12 | offset of table with original strings | == O | | 16 | offset of table with translation strings | == T | | 20 | size of hashing table | == S | | 24 | offset of hashing table | == H | | . . . (possibly more entries later) . . . | | O | length&offset 0th string -----------------+ O + 8 | length&offset 1st string -------------------+ ... ... | | O + ((N-1)*8)| length&offset (N-1)th string | | | | | | | T | length&offset 0th translation ----------------+ T + 8 | length&offset 1st translation ------------------+ ... ... | | | | T + ((N-1)*8)| length&offset (N-1)th translation | | | | | | | | | | | H | start hash table | | | | | ... ... | | | | H + S * 4 | end hash table | | | | | | | | | | | | NUL terminated 0th string <---------------+ | | | | | | | | | NUL terminated 1st string <-----------------+ | | | | | | ... ... | | | | | | | NUL terminated 0th translation <--------------+ | | | | | NUL terminated 1st translation <----------------+ | | ... ... | | +------------------------------------------+ @end example @node Just do it, PO mode, Internal aspects, Top @chapter Internationalizing your program The following description is a result of experiences we gained while internationalizing other GNU packages. But we are sure it will be possible to use this information even in non-GNU package which might have a different structure. We will describe the process for two different scenarios: for a flat directory structure and for a non-flat. Because GNU @code{gettext} is also structure non-flat it is easier to deal with this situation. Some maintainers use this as an opportunity to change their projects structure. @quotation For @emph{now} we can only decsribe the non-flat situation. The rest will follow when we have more experiences with this. @end quotation @quotation Please take all this information with a grain of salt. It might change some more experiences because GNU @code{gettext} is still in beta test. @end quotation @menu * Overview to changes:: * Dealing with flat directory structures:: * Dealing with non-flat directory structures:: @end menu @node Overview to changes, Dealing with flat directory structures, Just do it, Just do it @section Overview to changes There are quite a lot things which have to be addressed but it is astonishing how wasy it is to do. Generally there are *** points: @itemize @bullet @item get the new sources and control files in your repository @item change the Makefiles for the new project files and directories @item change the Autoconf configuration and rule base @item get the translations in your project @end itemize The fourth point will not be handled here because all the rest of this manual is about this. For the rest we want to follow one rule: @quotation Do not duplicate any file if it is not necessary. @end quotation This means we should use all the files the GNU @code{gettext} package provides as long as they are usable. Therefore the your first action should be to unpack and install GNU @code{gettext} on your system. Leave the source untared somewhere on your disk. The trick is to solely use symbolic links to get the files you need in the tree of your program. By this mean you can easily upgrade the GNU @code{gettext} package while all your other projects will also benefit from it. @node Dealing with flat directory structures, Dealing with non-flat directory structures, Overview to changes, Just do it @section Dealing with flat directory structures The only thing we can tell here now is that for fitting in a flat directory structure the @code{intl} directory contains a shell script named @file{combine-sh}. This will be used to combine all the C files into a single C file and the same for the header files. In the end you will have to add these two files to your project. @node Dealing with non-flat directory structures, , Dealing with flat directory structures, Just do it @section Dealing with non-flat directory structures Your first step should be to run the shell script makelinks from the @code{intl} directory in the GNU @code{gettext} distribution. Your position should be the bottom directory of the project and the argument the script gets is the directory where it can find the GNU @code{gettext} @emph{sources}. After this you will have two new directories: @file{intl} and @file{po}. @file{intl} contains the C source code needed and also a ready @file{Makefile.in}. The @file{po} directory only contains a file Makefile.in.in (yes, two times .in). @menu * Adopting the configuration process:: * Changing your sources:: * The building process:: @end menu @node Adopting the configuration process, Changing your sources, Dealing with non-flat directory structures, Dealing with non-flat directory structures @subsection Adopting the configuration process We assume here that the project uses Cygnus' @code{configure} program. If you don't use it you should nevertheless get the needed information from the following description. For any information provided in the following description you can refer to the source code of the GNU @code{gettext} package. This package is intended to be a good example and master implementation for using its functionality. If your configuration process follows the rules of the GNU coding standard the new Makefiles should be correctly handle if we make them known in the configure.in script. Simply add them to the AC_OUTPUT line: @example AC_OUTPUT([... intl/Makefile po/Makefile.in], ...) @end example A second change of the configure.in file is necessary because it does not contain yet the checks for the internationalization support functions and informations. Because this piece of autoconf code will be the same for all projects using GNU @code{gettext} it is intended to be put in the standard autoconf distribution. But until this is done you have to apppend the content of the file @code{aclocal.m4} to your own one (or create such a file). The content of this file may vary as we get more experience with strange systems out there. To use the functionality this new autoconf functions provide you simply have to add a line like @example ud_GNU_GETTEXT @end example @noindent to your configure.in file. Another change to configure.in makes the available catalogs known to the script. Do this using the lines @example ALL_LINGUAS="@var{available languages}" @end example where @var{all languages} should be something like @var{de fr}, which means that german and french catalogs are available. The test instruction makes sure that you can specify the set of really installed message catalogs at the runtime of @code{autoconf}. Two further changes to @file{configure.in} build two needed files. For one this is the header @file{libintl.h}. The reason for using this was is that systems using the Uniforum message handling functions already have a file of this name. The second file which needs to be generated is @file{po/Makefile}. as we have seen above only the file @file{po/Makefile.in} is created by the @code{AC_OUTPUT} instruction. We have to use this two step way because some information we have to put in the @file{Makefile} are specific in each project and it can have any length so that it is not possible to put it in with @code{autoconf} using @code{sed}. This leads to a format of the @file{configure.in} file like this @example @dots{} ALL_LINGUAS="@var{available languages}" dnl Checks for programs. @dots{} AC_PATH_PROG(PERL, perl, /usr/local/bin/perl) @dots{} ud_GNU_GETTEXT @dots{} AC_LINK_FILES($nls_cv_header_libgt, $nls_cv_header_intl) AC_OUTPUT([@var{existing configuration files} intl/Makefile \ intl/tupdate.perl po/Makefile.in], [sed -e "/TRANSCSRCS =/r po/POTFILES" po/Makefile.in > po/Makefile; @var{existing additional actions}]) @end example @node Changing your sources, The building process, Adopting the configuration process, Dealing with non-flat directory structures @subsection Changing your sources The changes to the source code fall into three categories. First you have to make the internationalization functions known. This is easy and you only have to use the following line in every source file which needs message translation: @example #include @end example The next category is to initialize the locale data. This should be done with more or less the same code in every program: @example int main (argc, argv) int argc; char argv; @{ @dots{} setlocale (LC_ALL, ""); bindtextdomain (PACKAGE, LOCALEDIR); textdomain (PACKAGE); @dots{} @} @end example @var{PACKAGE} and @var{LOCALEDIR} should be provided either by @file{config.h} or by the Makefile. For now consult the @code{gettext} sources for more information. The last things is to find all messages in all source file which have to be translated. For this process you could use the Emacs po-mode. @c @ref ??? @node The building process, , Changing your sources, Dealing with non-flat directory structures @subsection The building process @node PO mode, , Just do it, Top @chapter An Emacs mode for updating @file{.po} files @menu * Introduction:: Introduction * Installation:: Installation * About PO file format:: PO mode and @file{.po} File Format * Main PO commands:: Main commands for PO mode * Entry Positioning:: Entry Positioning * Untranslated Entries:: Untranslated Entries * Obsolete entries:: Obsolete entries * Modifying Translations:: Modifying Translations * Modifying Comments:: Modifying Comments * C sources context:: C sources context * Incoming PO:: Incoming PO mode features @end menu @node Introduction, Installation, PO mode, PO mode @section Introduction The letters PO in @file{.po} files means Portable Object, to distinguish it from @file{.mo} files, where MO stands for Machine Object. @file{.po} files are best created by the @code{xgettext} program, and later updated or refreshed through the @code{tupdate} program. @code{xgettext} extracts all marked messages from a set of C files and initializes a @file{.po} file with empty translations. @code{tupdate} takes care of adjusting @file{.po} files between releases of the corresponding sources, commenting obsolete entries, initializing new ones, and updating all source line references. PO mode is an Emacs LISP mode specifically created for helping those who translate messages from GNU programs into their native language, by providing a cosy environment for editing or modifying Uniforum/Solaris @file{.po} files. PO mode is mainly geared towards editing a @file{.po} file, while browsing auxiliary @file{.po} files, and the set of C program sources from which the main @file{.po} file has been derived. It can also validate such @file{.po} files, and recreate them while interactively marking program strings as translatable. Here, we use @emph{he} when speaking of the programmer, @emph{she} when speaking of the translator, and @emph{they} when speaking of the end users of the translated program. This is only a convenience for clarifying the documentation. It is absolutely not meant to imply that some roles are more appropriate to males or females. PO mode has been written to help @emph{her} far more than to help @emph{him}, and we just like to think about it this way! PO mode has been written in 1995 by @value{Francois} Pinard, with the collaboration of Greg McGary, as a contribution to Ulrich Drepper's GNU @code{gettext} package. @node Installation, About PO file format, Introduction, PO mode @section Installation For installing PO mode, you first need to move the @file{po-mode.el} somewhere GNU Emacs will find it. The @file{po-mode.el} may be found within the GNU @code{gettext} distribution, which is itself available on a GNU archive site near you. Then, you might want modify your file @file{.emacs}, once and for all, so it contains a few lines looking like: @example (setq auto-mode-alist (cons '("\\.pox?\\'" . po-mode) auto-mode-alist)) (autoload 'po-mode "po-mode") @end example Later, whenever you edit some @file{.po} or @file{.pox} file, Emacs will load @file{po-mode.el} as needed, and automatically activate PO mode commands for the associated buffer. The string @emph{PO} appears in the mode line for any buffer for which PO mode is active. Many @file{.po} files may be active at once in a single Emacs session. @node About PO file format, Main PO commands, Installation, PO mode @section PO mode and @file{.po} File Format The precise details of @file{.po} mode format are described elsewhere in this document. For the purpose of PO mode, very little has to be known about the format details, as PO mode takes care of them for you. The general structure of a @file{.po} file should be well understood, however. A @file{.po} file is made up of many entries, each entry holding the relation between an original untranslated string and its corresponding translation. All entries in a given @file{.po} file usually pertain to a single project, and all translations are expressed in a single target language. On the screen, one @file{.po} file @dfn{entry}, looks like this: @example @var{white-space} # @var{translator-comments} #. @var{automatic-comments} #: @var{lineref-list} msgid @var{untranslated-string} msgstr @var{translated-string} @end example Entries begin with some optional white space. Usually, when generated through GNU @code{gettext} tools, there is exactly one blank line between entries. Then comments follow, on lines all starting with the character @kbd{#}. There are two kinds of comments: those which have some white space immediately following the @kbd{#}, which comments are created and maintained exclusively by the translator, and those which have some non-white character just after the @kbd{#}, which comments are created and maintained automatically by GNU @code{gettext} tools. All comments, of any kind, are optional. After white space and comments, entries show two strings, giving first the untranslated string as it appears in the original program sources, and then, the translation of this string. The original string is introduced by the keyword @code{msgid}, and the translation, by @code{msgstr}. The two strings, untranslated and translated, are quoted in various ways in the @file{.po} file, using @kbd{"} delimiters and @kbd{\} escapes, but the translator does not really have to pay attention to the precise quoting format, as PO mode fully intend to take care of quoting for her. The @code{msgid} strings, as well as automatic comments, are produced and managed by other GNU @code{gettext} tools, and PO mode does not provide means for the translator to alter these. The most she can do is merely deleting them, and only by deleting the whole entry. On the other hand, the @code{msgstr} string, as well as translator comments, are really meant for the translator, and PO mode gives her the full control she needs. It happens that some lines, usually whitespace or comments, follow the very last entry of a @file{.po} file. Such lines are not part of any entry, and PO mode is unable to take action on those lines. @node Main PO commands, Entry Positioning, About PO file format, PO mode @section Main commands for PO mode When Emacs finds a @file{.po} file in a window, PO mode is activated for that window. This puts the window read-only and establishes a po-mode-map, which is a genuine Emacs mode, in that way that it is not derived from text mode in any way. The main PO commands are those who do not fit in the other categories in subsequent sections, they allow for quitting PO mode or managing windows in special ways. @table @kbd @item u Undo last modification to the @file{.po} file. @item q Quit processing and save the @file{.po} file. @item o Temporary leave the @file{.po} file window. @item h Show help about PO mode. @item = Give some @file{.po} file statistics. @item v Batch validate the format of the whole @file{.po} file. @end table The command @kbd{u} (@code{po-undo}) interfaces to the GNU Emacs @emph{undo} facility. @xref{Undo, , Undoing Changes, emacs, The Emacs Editor}. Each time @kbd{u} is typed, modifications the translator did to the @file{.po} file are undone a little more. For the purpose of undoing, each PO mode command is atomic. This is especially true for the @kbd{@key{RET}} command: the whole edition made by using one such command is undone at once, even if the edition itself implied several actions. The command @kbd{q} (@code{po-quit}) is used when the translator is done with the @file{.po} file. If the file has been modified, it is saved on disk first. However, prior to all this, the commands check if some untranslated message remains in the @file{.po} file and, if yes, the translator is asked if she really wants to leave working with this @file{.po} file. This is the preferred way of getting rid of an Emacs @file{.po} file buffer. Merely killing it through the usual command @w{@kbd{C-x k}} (@code{kill-buffer}), say, has the unnice effect of leaving a PO internal work buffer behind. The command @kbd{o} (@code{po-other-window}) is another, softer way, to leave PO mode, temporarily. It just moves the cursor in some other Emacs window, and pops one if necessary. For example, if the translator just got PO mode to show some source context in some other, she might discover some apparent bug in the program source that needs correction. This command allows the translator to change sex, become a programmer, and have the cursor right into the window containing the program she (or rather @emph{he}) wants to modify. By later getting the cursor back in the @file{.po} file window, or by asking Emacs to edit this file once again, PO mode is then recovered. The command @kbd{h} (@code{po-help}) displays a summary of all available PO mode commands. The translator should then type any character to resume normal PO mode operations. The command @kbd{?} has the same effect as @kbd{h}. The command @kbd{=} (@code{po-statistics}) computes the total number of entries in the @file{.po} file, the ordinal of the current entry (counted from 1), the number of untranslated entries, the number of obsolete entries, and displays all these numbers. The command @kbd{v} (@code{po-validate}) launches @code{msgfmt} in verbose mode over the current @file{.po} file. This command first offers to save the current @file{.po} file on disk. The @code{msgfmt} tool, from GNU @code{gettext}, has the purpose is creating an @file{.mo} file out of a @file{.po} file, and PO mode uses the features of this program for checking the overall format of a @file{.po} file, as well as all individual entries. The program @code{msgfmt} runs asynchronously with Emacs, so the translator regains control immediately while her @file{.po} file is being studied. Error output is collected in the GNU Emacs @samp{*compilation*} buffer, displayed in another window. The regular GNU Emacs command @kbd{C-x`} (@code{next-error}), as well as other usual compile commands, allow the translator to reposition quickly to the offending parts of the @file{.po} file. Once the cursor on the line in error, the translator may decide for any PO mode action which would help correcting the error. The special command @kbd{M-x po-normalize}, which has no associate keys, revises all entries, ensuring that strings of both original and translated entries use uniform internal quoting in the @file{.po} file. It also removes any crumb after the last entry. This command may be useful for @file{.po} files freshly imported from elsewhere, or if we ever improve on the canonical quoting format we use. This canonical format is not only meant for getting cleaner @file{.po} files, but also for greatly speeding up @code{msgid} string lookup for some incoming PO mode commands. @kbd{M-x po-normalize} presently makes three passes over the entries. The first implements heuristics for converting @file{.po} files for GNU @code{gettext} 0.6 and earlier, in which @code{msgid} and @code{msgstr} fields were using K&R style C string syntax for multi-line strings. These heuristics may fail for comments not related to obsolete entries and ending with a backslash; they also depend on subsequent passes for finalizing the proper commenting of continued lines for obsolete entries. This first pass might disappear once all oldish @file{.po} files would have been adjusted. The second and third pass normalize all @code{msgid} and @code{msgstr} strings respectively. They also clean out trailing backslashes which XView's @code{msgfmt} is using for continued lines. @node Entry Positioning, Untranslated Entries, Main PO commands, PO mode @section Entry Positioning The cursor in a @file{.po} file window is almost always part of an entry. The only exceptions are the special case when the cursor is after the last entry in the file, or when the @file{.po} file is empty. The entry where the cursor is found to be is said to be the current entry. Many PO mode commands operate on the current entry, so moving the cursor does more than allowing the translator to browse the @file{.po} file, this also selects on which entry commands operate. Some PO mode commands alter the position of the cursor in a specialized way. A few of those special purpose positioning are described here, the others are described in following sections. @table @kbd @item . Redisplay the current entry. @item n @itemx SPC Select the entry after the current one. @item p @itemx DEL Select the entry before the current one. @item < Select the first entry in the @file{.po} file. @item > Select the last entry in the @file{.po} file. @item m Record the location of the current entry for later use. @item l Return to a previously saved entry location. @item x Exchange the current entry location with the previously saved one. @end table Any GNU Emacs command able to reposition the cursor may be used to select the current entry in PO mode, including commands which move by characters, lines, paragraphs, screens or pages, and search commands. However, there is a kind of standard way to display the current entry in PO mode, which usual GNU Emacs commands moving the cursor do not especially try to enforce. The command @kbd{.} (@code{po-current-entry}) has the sole purpose of redisplaying the current entry properly, after the current entry has been changed by means external to PO mode, or the Emacs screen otherwise altered. The commands @kbd{n} (@code{po-next-entry}) and @kbd{p} (@code{po-previous-entry}) move the cursor the entry following, or preceding, the current one. If @kbd{n} is given while the cursor is on the last entry of the @file{.po} file, or if @kbd{p} is given while the cursor is on the first entry, no move is done. @kbd{@key{SPC}} and @kbd{@key{DEL}} are alternate keys for @kbd{n} and @kbd{p}, respectively. The commands @kbd{<} (@code{po-first-entry}) and @kbd{>} (@code{po-last-entry}) move the cursor to the first entry, or last entry, of the @file{.po} file. When the cursor is located past the last entry in a @file{.po} file, most PO mode commands will return an error saying @samp{After last entry}. However, the commands @kbd{<} and @kbd{>} have the special property of being able to work even when the cursor is not into some PO file entry, and you may use them for nicely correcting this situation. But even these commands will fail on a truly empty @file{.po} file. There are development plans for PO mode for it to interactively fill an empty @file{.po} file from sources. @xref{Incoming PO}. The translator may decide, before working at the translation of a particular entry, that she needs browsing the remainder of the @file{.po} file, maybe for finding the terminology or phraseology used in related entries. She can of course use the standard Emacs idioms for saving the current cursor location in some register, and use that register for getting back, or else, to use the location ring. PO mode offers another approach, by which cursor locations may be saved unto a special stack. The command @kbd{m} (@code{po-push-location}) merely adds the location of current entry to the stack, pushing the already saved locations under the new one. The command @kbd{l} (@code{po-pop-location}) consumes the top stack element and reposition the cursor to the entry associated with that top element. This position is then lost, for the next @kbd{l} will move the cursor to the previously saved location, and so on until locations remain on the stack. If the translator wants the position to be kept on the location stack, maybe for taking a mere look at the entry associated with the top element, then go elsewhere with the intent of getting back later, she ought to use @kbd{m} immediately after @kbd{l}. The command @kbd{x} (@code{po-exchange-location}) simultaneously reposition the cursor to the entry associated with the top element of the stack of saved locations, and replace that top element with the location of the current entry before the move. Consequently, repeating the @kbd{x} command toggles alternatively between two entries. For achieving this, the translator will position the cursor on the first entry, use @kbd{m}, then position to the second entry, and merely use @kbd{x} for making the switch. @node Untranslated Entries, Obsolete entries, Entry Positioning, PO mode @section Untranslated Entries When @code{xgettext} originally creates a @file{.po} file, unless told otherwise, it initializes the @code{msgid} field with the untranslated string, and leaves the @code{msgstr} string to be empty. Such entries, having an empty translation, are said to be @dfn{untranslated} entries. Later, when the programmer slightly modifies some string right in the program, this change is later reflected in the @file{.po} file by the appearance of a new untranslated entry for the modified string. The usual commands moving from entry to entry consider untranslated entries on the same level as active entries. Untranslated entries are easily recognizable by the fact they end with @w{@samp{msgstr ""}}. The work of the translator might be (quite naively) seen as the process of seeking after an untranslated entry, editing a translation for it, and repeating these actions until no untranslated entries remain. Some commands are more specifically related to untranslated entry processing. @table @kbd @item e Find the next untranslated entry. @item M-e Find the previous untranslated entry. @item k Turn the current entry into an untranslated one. @end table The commands @key{e} (@code{po-next-empty-entry}) and @key{M-e} (@code{po-previous-empty}) move forwards or backwards, chasing for an obsolete entry. If none is found, the search is extended and wraps around in the @file{.po} file buffer. An entry can be turned back into an untranslated entry by merely emptying its translation, using the command @key{k} (@code{po-kill-msgstr}). @xref{Modifying Translations}. Also, when time comes to quit working on a @file{.po} file buffer with the @key{q} command, the translator is asked for confirmation, if some untranslated string still exists. @node Obsolete entries, Modifying Translations, Untranslated Entries, PO mode @section Obsolete entries By @dfn{obsolete} @file{.po} entries, we mean those entries which are commented out, usually by @code{tupdate} when it founds that the translation is not needed anymore by the package being localized. The usual commands moving from entry to entry consider obsolete entries on the same level as active entries. Obsolete entries are easily recognizable by the fact that all their lines start with @kbd{#}, even those lines containing @code{msgid} or @code{msgstr}. Commands exist for emptying the translation or reinitializing it to the original untranslated string. Commands interfacing with the kill ring may force some previously saved text into the translation. The user may interactively edit the translation. All these commands may apply to obsolete entries, carefully leaving the entry obsolete after the fact. Moreover, some commands are more specifically related to obsolete entry processing. @table @kbd @item M-n @itemx M-@key{SPC} Find the next obsolete entry. @item M-p @itemx M-@key{DEL} Find the previous obsolete entry. @item z Make an active entry obsolete, or zap out an obsolete entry. @end table The commands @key{M-n} (@code{po-next-obsolete-entry}) and @key{M-p} (@code{po-previous-obsolete-entry}) move forwards or backwards, chasing for an obsolete entry. If none is found, the search is extended and wraps around in the @file{.po} file buffer. The commands @key{M-@key{SPC}} and @key{M-@key{DEL}} are synonymous to @key{M-n} and @key{M-p}, respectively. PO mode does not provide ways for un-commenting an obsolete entry and making it active, because this would reintroduce an original untranslated string which does not correspond to any marked string in the program sources. This goes with the philosophy of never introducing useless @code{msgid} values. However, it is possible to comment out an active entry, so making it obsolete. GNU @code{gettext} utilities will later react to the disappearance of a translation by using the untranslated string. The command @kbd{z} (@code{po-fade-out-entry}) pushes the current entry a little further towards annihilation. If the entry is active, then the entry is merely commented out. If the entry is already obsolete, then it is completely deleted from the @file{.po} file. It is easy to recycle the translation so deleted into some other @file{.po} file entry, usually one which is untranslated. @xref{Modifying Translations}. Here is a quite interesting problem to solve for later development of PO mode, for those nights you are not sleepy. The idea would be that PO mode might become bright enough, one of these days, to make good guesses at retrieving the most probable candidate, among all obsolete entries, for initializing the translation of a newly appeared string. I think it might be a quite hard problem to do this algorithmically, as we have to develop good and efficient measures of string similarity. Right now, PO mode completely lets the decision to the translator, when the time comes to find the adequate obsolete translation, it merely tries to provide handy tools for helping her to do so. @node Modifying Translations, Modifying Comments, Obsolete entries, PO mode @section Modifying Translations PO mode prevents direct edition of the @file{.po} file, by the usual means Emacs give for altering a buffer's contents. By doing so, it pretends helping the translator to avoid little clerical errors about the overall file format, or the proper quoting of strings, as those errors would be easily made. Other kinds of errors are still possible, but some may be catched and diagnosed by the batch validation process, which the translator may always trigger by the @kbd{v} command. For all other errors, the translator has to rely on her own judgment, and also on the linguistic reports submitted to her by the users of the translated package, having the same mother tongue. When the time comes to create a translation, correct a error diagnosed mechanically or reported by a user, the translator have to resort to using the following commands for modifying the translations. @table @kbd @item RET Interactively edit the translation. @item TAB Reinitialize the translation with the original, untranslated string. @item k Save the translation on the kill ring, and delete it. @item w Save the translation on the kill ring, without deleting it. @item y Replace the translation, taking the new from the kill ring. @end table The command @kbd{RET} (@code{po-edit-msgstr}) opens a new Emacs window containing a copy of the translation taken from the current @file{.po} file entry, all ready for edition, fully modifiable and with the complete extent of GNU Emacs modifying commands. The string is presented to the translator expunged of all quoting marks, and she will modify the @emph{unquoted} string in this window to heart's content. Once done, the regular Emacs command @kbd{M-C-c} (@code{exit-recursive-edit}) may be used to return the edited translation into the @file{.po} file, replacing the original translation. The keys @w{@kbd{C-c C-c}} are bound so they have the same effect as @kbd{M-C-c}. If the translator becomes unsatisfied with her translation to the extent she prefers keeping the translation which was existent prior to the @kbd{RET} command, she may use the regular Emacs command @kbd{C-]} (@code{abort-recursive-edit}) to merely get rid of edition, while preserving the original translation. Another way would be for her to exit normally with @w{@kbd{C-c C-c}}, then type @code{u} once for undoing the whole effect of last edition. While editing her translation, the translator should pay attention at not inserting unwanted @kbd{@key{RET}} (carriage returns) characters at the end of the translated string if those are not meant to be there, or removing such characters when they are required. Since these characters are not visible in the editing buffer, they are easily to introduce my mistake. To help her, @kbd{@key{RET}} automatically puts the character @kbd{<} at the end of the string being edited, but this @kbd{<} is not really part of the string. On exiting the editing window with @w{@kbd{C-c C-c}}, PO mode automatically removes such @kbd{<} and all whitespace added after it. If the translator adds characters after the terminating @kbd{<}, it looses its delimiting property and integrally becomes part of the string. If she removes the delimiting @kbd{<}, then the edited string is taken @emph{as is}, with all trailing newlines, even if invisible. Also, if the translated string ought to end itself with a genuine @kbd{<}, then the delimiting @kbd{<} may not be removed; so the string should appear, in the editing window, as ending with two @kbd{<} in a row. When a translation (or a comment) is being edited, the translator may move the cursor back into the @file{.po} file buffer and freely move to other entries, and browsing at will. The edited entry will be recovered as soon as the edit ceases, because this is this entry only which is being modified. If, with an edition still opened, the translator wanders in the @file{.po} file buffer, she cannot modify any other entry. If she tries to, PO mode will react by suggesting that she aborts the current edit, or else, by inviting her to finish the current edit prior to any other modification. The command @kbd{TAB} (@code{po-msgid-to-msgstr}) initializes, or reinitializes the translation with the original string. This command is normally used when the translator wants to redo a fresh translation of the original string, disregarding any previous work. In fact, whether it is best to start a translation with an empty string, or rather with a copy of the original string, is a matter of taste or habit. Sometimes, the source mother tongue language and the target language are so different that is simply best to start writing on an empty page. At other times, the source and target languages are so close that it would be a waste to retype a number of words already being written in the original string. A translator may also like having the original string right under her eyes, as she will progressively overwrite the original text with the translation, even if this requires some extra editing work to get rid of the original. The command @kbd{k} (@code{po-kill-msgstr}) merely empties the translation string, so turning the entry into an untranslated one. But while doing so, its previous contents is put apart in a special place, known as the kill ring. The command @kbd{w} (@code{po-kill-ring-save-msgstr}) has also the effect of taking a copy of the translation unto the kill ring, but it otherwise leaves the entry alone, and does @emph{not} remove the translation from the entry. Both commands use exactly the Emacs kill ring, which is shared between buffers, and which is well known already to GNU Emacs lovers. The translator may use @kbd{k} or @kbd{w} many times in the course of her work, as the kill ring may hold several saved translations. From the kill ring, strings may later be reinserted in various Emacs buffers. In particular, the kill ring may be used for moving translation strings between different entries of a single @file{.po} file buffer, or if the translator is handling many such buffers at once, even between @file{.po} files. To facilitate exchanges with buffers which are not in PO mode, the translation string put on the kill ring by the @kbd{k} command is fully unquoted before being saved: external quotes are removed, multi-lines strings are concatenated, and backslashed escaped sequences are turned into their corresponding characters. In the special case of obsolete entries, the translation is also uncommented prior to saving. The command @kbd{y} (@code{po-yank-msgstr}) completely replaces the translation of the current entry by a string taken from the kill ring. Following GNU Emacs terminology, we then say that the replacement string is @dfn{yanked} into the @file{.po} file buffer. @xref{Yanking, , , emacs, The Emacs Editor}. The first time @kbd{y} is used, the translation receives the value of the most recent addition to the kill ring. If @kbd{y} is typed once again, immediately, without intervening keystrokes, the translation just inserted is taken away and replaced by the second most recent addition to the kill ring. By repeating @kbd{y} many times in a row, the translator may travel along the the kill ring for saved strings, until she finds the string she really wanted. When a string is yanked into a @file{.po} file entry, it is fully and automatically requoted for complying with the format @file{.po} files should have. Further, if the entry is obsolete, PO mode then appropriately push the inserted string inside comments. Once again, translators should not burden themselves with quoting considerations besides, of course, the necessity of the translated string itself respective to the program using it. Note that @kbd{k} or @kbd{w} are not the only commands pushing strings on the kill ring, as almost any PO mode command replacing translation strings (or the translator comments) automatically save the old string on the kill ring. The main exceptions to this general rule are the yanking commands themselves. To better illustrate the operation of killing and yanking, let's use an actual example, taken from a common situation. When the programmer slightly modifies some string right in the program, his change is later reflected in the @file{.po} file by the appearance of a new untranslated entry for the modified string, and the fact that the entry translating the original or unmodified string becomes obsolete. In many cases, the translator might spare herself some work by retrieving the unmodified translation from the obsolete entry, then initializing the untranslated entry @code{msgstr} field with this retrieved translation. Once this done, the obsolete entry is not wanted anymore, and may be safely deleted. When the translator finds an untranslated entry and suspects that a slight variant of the translation exists, she immediately uses @kbd{m} to mark the current entry location, then starts chasing obsolete entries with @kbd{M-SPC}, hoping to find some translation corresponding to the unmodified string. Once found, she uses the @kbd{z} command for delete the obsolete entry, knowing that @kbd{z} also @emph{kills} the translation, that is, pushes the translation on the kill ring. Then, @kbd{l} returns to the initial untranslated entry, @kbd{y} then @emph{yanks} the saved translation right into the @code{msgstr} field. The translator is then free to use @kbd{@key{RET}} for fine tuning the translation contents, and maybe to later use @kbd{e}, then @kbd{m} again, for going on with the next untranslated string. When some sequence of keys has to be typed over and over again, the translator may find comfortable to become more acquainted with the GNU Emacs capability of learning these sequences and playing them back under request. @xref{Keyboard Macros, , , emacs, The Emacs Editor}. @node Modifying Comments, C sources context, Modifying Translations, PO mode @section Modifying Comments Any translation work done seriously will raise many linguistic difficulties, for which decisions have to be made, and the choices further documented. These documents may be saved within the @file{.po} file in form of translator comments, which the translator is free to create, delete, or modify at will. These comments may be useful to herself when she return PO mode prevents direct edition of the @file{.po} file, by the usual means Emacs give for altering a buffer's contents. By doing so, it pretends helping the translator to avoid little clerical errors about the overall file format, or the proper quoting of strings, as those errors would be easily made. Other kinds of errors are still possible, but some may be catched and diagnosed by the batch validation process, which the translator may always trigger by the @kbd{v} command. For all other errors, the translator has to rely on her own judgment, and also on the linguistic reports submitted to her by the users of the translated package, having the same mother tongue. When the time comes to create a translation, correct a error diagnosed mechanically or reported by a user, the translator have to resort to using the following commands for modifying the translations. @table @kbd @item M-RET Interactively edit the translator comments. @item M-k Save the translator comments on the kill ring, and delete it. @item M-w Save the translator comments on the kill ring, without deleting it. @item M-y Replace the translator comments, taking the new from the kill ring. @end table Those commands parallel PO mode commands for modifying the translation strings, and behave much the same way as them, except that they handle this part of @file{.po} file comments meant for translator usage, rather than the translation strings. So, the descriptions given below are slightly succint, because the full details have already been given. @xref{Modifying Translations}. The command @kbd{M-RET} (@code{po-edit-comment}) opens a new Emacs window containing a copy of the translator comments the current @file{.po} file entry. If there is no such comments, PO mode understands that the translator wants to add a comment to the entry, and she is presented an empty screen. Comment marks (@kbd{#}) and the space following them are automatically removed before edition, and reinstated after. For translator comments pertaining to obsolete entries, the uncommenting and recommenting operations are done twice. The command @kbd{#} also has the same effect as @kbd{M-RET}, and might be easier to type. Once in the editing window, the keys @w{@kbd{C-c C-c}} allow the translator to tell she is finished with editing the comment. The command @kbd{M-k} (@code{po-kill-comment}) get rid of all translator comments, while saving those comments on the kill ring. The command @kbd{M-w} (@code{po-kill-ring-save-comment}) takes a copy of the translator comments on the kill ring, but leaves them undisturbed in the current entry. The command @kbd{M-y} (@code{po-yank-comment}) completely replaces the translator comments by a string taken at the front of the kill ring. When this command is immediately repeated, the comments just inserted are withdrawn, and replaced by other strings taken along the kill ring. On the kill ring, all strings have the same nature. There is no @emph{translation} strings and @emph{comments} string. So, for example, let's presume the translator has just finished editing a translation, and wants to create a new translator comments for documenting why the previous translation was not good, just to remember what was the problem. Foreseeing that, in her documentation, she will quote the previous translation, she may initialize the translator comments with the previous translation, still at the head of the kill ring. Because editing already pushed the previous translation on the kill ring, she just has to type @kbd{M-w} prior to @kbd{#}, and the previous translation will be right there, all ready for being introduced by some explanatory text. On the other hand, presume there are some translator comments already and that the translator wants to add to those comments, instead of wholly replacing them. Then, she should edit the comment right away with @kbd{#}. Once inside the editing window, she can use the regular GNU Emacs commands @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}) and @kbd{M-y} (@code{yank-pop}) for getting the previous translation where she likes. @node C sources context, Incoming PO, Modifying Comments, PO mode @section C sources context PO mode is particularily powerful when used with @file{.po} files created through GNU @code{gettext} utilities, as those utilities insert special comments in the @code{.po} files they generate. Some of these special comments relate the @file{.po} file entry to exactly where the untranslated string appears in the program sources. When the translator gets to an untranslated entry, she is fairly often faced with an original string which is not as informative as it normally should, being succint, cryptic, or otherwise ambiguous. Before chosing how to translate the string, she needs to understand better what the string really means and how tight the translation has to be. Most of times, when problems arise, the only way left to make her judgment is looking at the true program sources from where this string originated, searching for surrounding comments the programmer might have put in there, and looking around for helping clues of @emph{any} kind. Surely, when looking at program sources, the translator will receive more help if she is a fluent programmer. However, even if she is not versed in programming and feels a little lost in C code, the translator should not be shy at taking a look, once in a while. It is most probable that she will still be able to find some of the hints she needs. She will learn quickly to not feel uncomfortable in program code, paying more attention to programmer's comments, variable and function names (if he dared chosing them well), and overall organization, than to programmation itself. The following commands are meant to help the translator at getting program source context for a @file{.po} file entry. @table @kbd @item c Resume the display of a program source context, or cycle through them. @item M-c Display of a program source context selected by menu. @item d Add a directory to the search path for source files. @item M-d Delete a directory from the search path for source files. @end table The commands @kbd{c} (@code{po-cycle-reference}) and @kbd{M-c} (@code{po-select-reference}) both open another window displaying some source program file, and already positioned in such a way that it shows an actual use of the current string to translate. By doing so, the command gives source program context for the string. But if the entry has no source context references, or if all references are unresolved along the search path for program sources, then the command diagnoses this as an error. Even if @kbd{c} (or @kbd{M-c}) opens a new window, the cursor stays in the @file{.po} file window. If the translator really wants to get into the program source window, she ought to do it explicitely, maybe by using command @kbd{o}. When @kbd{c} is typed for the first time, or for a @file{.po} file entry which is different of the last one used for getting source context, then the command reacts by giving the first context available for this entry, if any. If some context has already been recently displayed for the current @file{.po} entry, and the translator wandered to do other things, typing @kbd{c} again will merely resume, in another window, the context last displayed. In particular, if the translator moved the cursor away from the context in the source file, the command will bring the cursor back to the context. By using @kbd{c} many times in a row, with no interning other commands, PO mode will cycle to the next available contexts for this particular entry, getting back to the first context once the last has been shown. The command @kbd{M-c} behaves differently. Instead of cycling through references, it lets the translator choose of particular reference among many, and displays that reference. It is best used with completion, if the translator types @kbd{TAB} immediately after @kbd{M-c}, in response to the question, she will be offerred a menu of all possible values, as a reminder of which are the acceptable answers. This command is useful only where there are really many contexts available for a single string to translate. Program source files are usually found relative to where the @file{.po} file stands, as the @file{.po} file is usually generated by the programmer in such a way to guarantee that this works. However, it might happen that the @file{.po} file has been moved, or is edited in a different place than its normal location. When this happens, the translator should tell PO mode in which directory sits the genuine @file{.po} file. Many such directories may be specified, and all together, they constitute what is called the @dfn{search path} for program sources. The command @kbd{d} (@code{po-add-path}) is used to interactively enter a new directory at the front of the search path, and the command @kbd{M-d} (@code{po-delete-path}) is used to select, with completion, one of the directories she does not want anymore on the search path. @node Incoming PO, , C sources context, PO mode @section Incoming PO mode features Some features have been voluntarily delayed so PO mode may be born faster. They all rely on the ability for PO mode to scan an already existing @file{.po} file for a particular string encoded into the @code{msgid} field of some entry. There are many different ways for encoding a particular string into a @file{.po} file entry, because there are so many different ways to split and quote multi-line strings, and even, to represent special characters by backslahsed escaped sequences. PO mode has internally all the built-in machinery for implementing this recognition easily, but not for implementing it efficiently. We have a solution for this problem, which should be implemented in the next release of PO mode containing new features. One set of incoming features is meant more for the programmer than for the translator, and will allow him to interactively mark which strings, in a set of program sources, are translatable, and which are not. Even if it is a fairly easy job for a programmer to find and mark such strings by other means, PO mode should offer means by which this work is made more comfortable. Further, this might give translators who feel a little like programmers, or programmers who feel a little like translators, a tool letting them work at marking translatable strings in the program sources, while simultaneously producing a set of translation in some language, for the package being internationalized. Another feature will let the translator maintain a compendium of already achieved translations. A @dfn{compendium} is a special @file{.po} file containing a set of translations recurring in many different packages. The translator will be given commands for adding entries to her compendium, and later initializing untranslated entries, or updating already translated entries, from translations kept in the compendium. A final feature should help the knowledgeable translator to take advantage of translations already achieved in other languages she just happens to know, by providing these other language translation as additional context for her own work. Each @file{.po} file existing for the same package the translator is working on, but targetted to a different mother tongue language, is called an @dfn{auxiliary} @file{.po} file. Commands will exist for declaring and handling auxiliary @file{.po} files, and also for showing contexts for the entry under work. It is yet to decide if PO mode would help the translator, or otherwise irritate her, by forcing a more fixed window disposition while she is doing her work. We originally had quite precise ideas about how windows should behave, but on the other hand, anyone used to GNU Emacs is often happy to keep full control. Maybe a fixed window disposition might be offerred as a PO mode option that the translator might activate or deactivate at will, so it could be offerred on an experimental basis. If nobody feels a real need for using it, or a compulsion for writing it, we might as well drop this whole idea. The incentive for doing it should come from translators rather than programmers, as opinions from an experienced translator are surely more worth to me than opinions from programmers @emph{thinking} about how others should do translation. @contents @bye gettext-0.7/doc/stamp-vti100644 230 226 12 5776100047 14253 0ustar pinardguesttimestamp gettext-0.7/doc/texinfo.tex100644 230 226 435365 5772420360 14730 0ustar pinardguest%% TeX macros to handle texinfo files % Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc. %This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or %modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as %published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at %your option) any later version. %This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be %useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty %of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU %General Public License for more details. %You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License %along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write %to Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, %USA. %In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program. %You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve %what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding! % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@prep.ai.mit.edu. % Please include a *precise* test case in each bug report. % Make it possible to create a .fmt file just by loading this file: % if the underlying format is not loaded, start by loading it now. % Added by gildea November 1993. \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi % This automatically updates the version number based on RCS. \def\deftexinfoversion$#1: #2 ${\def\texinfoversion{#2}} \deftexinfoversion$Revision: 2.145 $ \message{Loading texinfo package [Version \texinfoversion]:} % If in a .fmt file, print the version number % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because % they might have appeared in the input file name. \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}\message{} \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} % Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine. \let\ptextilde=\~ \let\ptexlbrace=\{ \let\ptexrbrace=\} \let\ptexdots=\dots \let\ptexdot=\. \let\ptexstar=\* \let\ptexend=\end \let\ptexbullet=\bullet \let\ptexb=\b \let\ptexc=\c \let\ptexi=\i \let\ptext=\t \let\ptexl=\l \let\ptexL=\L % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. {\catcode`@ = 11 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\ } } \let\~ = \tie % And make it available as @~. \message{Basics,} \chardef\other=12 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it % starts a new line in the output. \newlinechar = `^^J % Set up fixed words for English. \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined{\gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}}\fi% \def\putwordInfo{Info}% \ifx\putwordSee\undefined{\gdef\putwordSee{See}}\fi% \ifx\putwordsee\undefined{\gdef\putwordsee{see}}\fi% \ifx\putwordfile\undefined{\gdef\putwordfile{file}}\fi% \ifx\putwordpage\undefined{\gdef\putwordpage{page}}\fi% \ifx\putwordsection\undefined{\gdef\putwordsection{section}}\fi% \ifx\putwordSection\undefined{\gdef\putwordSection{Section}}\fi% \ifx\putwordTableofContents\undefined{\gdef\putwordTableofContents{Table of Contents}}\fi% \ifx\putwordShortContents\undefined{\gdef\putwordShortContents{Short Contents}}\fi% \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined{\gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}}\fi% % Ignore a token. % \def\gobble#1{} \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix} \hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers} \hyphenation{eshell} % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. \newdimen \bindingoffset \bindingoffset=0pt \newdimen \normaloffset \normaloffset=\hoffset \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight \pagewidth=\hsize \pageheight=\vsize % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. % \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2 \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1 \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen }% %---------------------Begin change----------------------- % %%%% For @cropmarks command. % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 % \newdimen\cornerlong \newdimen\cornerthick \newdimen \topandbottommargin \newdimen \outerhsize \newdimen \outervsize \cornerlong=1pc\cornerthick=.3pt % These set size of cropmarks \outerhsize=7in %\outervsize=9.5in % Alternative @smallbook page size is 9.25in \outervsize=9.25in \topandbottommargin=.75in % %---------------------End change----------------------- % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents % does insertions itself, but you have to call it yourself. \chardef\PAGE=255 \output={\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} \def\onepageout#1{\hoffset=\normaloffset \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi {\escapechar=`\\\relax % makes sure backslash is used in output files. \shipout\vbox{{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline} \pagebody{#1}% {\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}}}% \advancepageno \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi} %%%% For @cropmarks command %%%% % Here is a modification of the main output routine for Near East Publications % This provides right-angle cropmarks at all four corners. % The contents of the page are centerlined into the cropmarks, % and any desired binding offset is added as an \hskip on either % site of the centerlined box. (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) % \def\croppageout#1{\hoffset=0pt % make sure this doesn't mess things up {\escapechar=`\\\relax % makes sure backslash is used in output files. \shipout \vbox to \outervsize{\hsize=\outerhsize \vbox{\line{\ewtop\hfill\ewtop}} \nointerlineskip \line{\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop} \hfill \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}} \vskip \topandbottommargin \centerline{\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi \vbox{ {\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline} \pagebody{#1} {\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}} \ifodd\pageno\else\hskip\bindingoffset\fi} \vskip \topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill \boxmaxdepth\cornerthick \line{\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot} \hfill \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}} \nointerlineskip \vbox{\line{\ewbot\hfill\ewbot}} }} \advancepageno \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi} % % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks \def\cropmarks{\let\onepageout=\croppageout } \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} {\catcode`\@ =11 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} } % % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) % \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} \def\nstop{\vbox {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} \def\nsbot{\vbox {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. % \def\parsearg#1{% \let\next = #1% \begingroup \obeylines \futurelet\temp\parseargx } % If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or % the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done. \def\parseargx{% % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces. \ifx\obeyedspace\temp \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace \else \expandafter\parseargline \fi } % Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call). {\obeyspaces % \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}} {\obeylines % \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. % % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment. % Result of each macro is put in \toks0. \argremovec #1\c\relax % \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax % % % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg. \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}% }% } % Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX % do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call % in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is % just to delimit the argument to the \c. \def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}} \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}} % \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g., % @end itemize @c foo % will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the % `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the % result to \toks0. % % This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces % in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded. % Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever % does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed % here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of % \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument % that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it. % \def\removeactivespaces#1{% \begingroup \ignoreactivespaces \edef\temp{#1}% \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}% \endgroup } % Change the active space to expand to nothing. % \begingroup \obeyspaces \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty} \endgroup \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} %% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away %% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup) \newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi} \def\ENVcheck{% \ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment. Type Return to continue.} \endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage % @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now. \newhelp\EMsimple{Type to continue.} \outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx} \def\beginxxx #1{% \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax {\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else \csname #1\endcsname\fi} % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. % \def\end{\parsearg\endxxx} \def\endxxx #1{% \removeactivespaces{#1}% \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}% % \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo. \errhelp = \EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}% \else \unmatchedenderror\endthing \fi \else % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started. \csname E\endthing\endcsname \fi } % There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error. % \def\unmatchedenderror#1{% \errhelp = \EMsimple \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}% } % Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error. % \def\defineunmatchedend#1{% \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}% } % Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in % \nonfillstart and \quotations). \newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt \def\singlespace{% % Why was this kern here? It messes up equalizing space above and below % environments. --karl, 6may93 %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip %\kern \baselineskip}% \setleading \singlespaceskip } %% Simple single-character @ commands % @@ prints an @ % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). \def\@{{\tt \char '100}} % This is turned off because it was never documented % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' %% but suppressing ligatures. %\def\`{{`}} %\def\'{{'}} % Used to generate quoted braces. \def\mylbrace {{\tt \char '173}} \def\myrbrace {{\tt \char '175}} \let\{=\mylbrace \let\}=\myrbrace % @: forces normal size whitespace following. \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } % @* forces a line break. \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} % @. is an end-of-sentence period. \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 } % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. \gdef\enddots{$\mathinner{\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp}$\spacefactor=3000} % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. \gdef\!{!\spacefactor=3000 } % @? is an end-of-sentence query. \gdef\?{?\spacefactor=3000 } % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and % the text is small, which looks bad. % \def\group{\begingroup \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% \fi % % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of % the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space % above. But it's pretty close. \def\Egroup{% \egroup % End the \vtop. \endgroup % End the \group. }% % \vtop\bgroup % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it. % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group % and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself. % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line. \everypar = {\strut}% % % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's % normal interline spacing. \offinterlineskip % % OK, but now we have to do something about blank % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've % turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an % empty paragraph. \ifx\par\lisppar \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}% % % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par. \obeylines \fi % % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. \comment } % % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. % \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% where each line of input produces a line of output.} % @need space-in-mils % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in \def\need{\parsearg\needx} % Old definition--didn't work. %\def\needx #1{\par % %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally %% if the depth of the box does not fit. %{\baselineskip=0pt% %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\penalty 10000 %\prevdepth=-1000pt %}} \def\needx#1{% % Go into vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a % paragraph. \par % % Don't add any leading before our big empty box, but allow a page % break, since the best break might be right here. \allowbreak \nointerlineskip \vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}% % % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. % % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. \penalty9999 % % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. \kern -#1\mil % % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. \nobreak } % @br forces paragraph break \let\br = \par % @dots{} output some dots \def\dots{$\ldots$} % @page forces the start of a new page \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} % @exdent text.... % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. % That's how much \exdent should take out. \newskip\exdentamount % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. \def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy} \def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}} % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. \def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy} \def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} %\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}} % @include file insert text of that file as input. \def\include{\parsearg\includezzz} %Use \input\thisfile to avoid blank after \input, which may be an active %char (in which case the blank would become the \input argument). %The grouping keeps the value of \thisfile correct even when @include %is nested. \def\includezzz #1{\begingroup \def\thisfile{#1}\input\thisfile \endgroup} \def\thisfile{} % @center line outputs that line, centered \def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz} \def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip \advance\hsize by -\rightskip \centerline{#1}}} % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space \def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx} \def\spxxx #1{\par \vskip #1\baselineskip} % @comment ...line which is ignored... % @c is the same as @comment % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment \def\comment{\catcode 64=\other \catcode 123=\other \catcode 125=\other% \parsearg \commentxxx} \def\commentxxx #1{\catcode 64=0 \catcode 123=1 \catcode 125=2 } \let\c=\comment % Prevent errors for section commands. % Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals. \def\ignoresections{% \let\chapter=\relax \let\unnumbered=\relax \let\top=\relax \let\unnumberedsec=\relax \let\unnumberedsection=\relax \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax \let\section=\relax \let\subsec=\relax \let\subsubsec=\relax \let\subsection=\relax \let\subsubsection=\relax \let\appendix=\relax \let\appendixsec=\relax \let\appendixsection=\relax \let\appendixsubsec=\relax \let\appendixsubsection=\relax \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax \let\contents=\relax \let\smallbook=\relax \let\titlepage=\relax } % Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source % and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used % incorrectly. % \def\ignoremorecommands{% \let\defcv = \relax \let\deffn = \relax \let\deffnx = \relax \let\defindex = \relax \let\defivar = \relax \let\defmac = \relax \let\defmethod = \relax \let\defop = \relax \let\defopt = \relax \let\defspec = \relax \let\deftp = \relax \let\deftypefn = \relax \let\deftypefun = \relax \let\deftypevar = \relax \let\deftypevr = \relax \let\defun = \relax \let\defvar = \relax \let\defvr = \relax \let\ref = \relax \let\xref = \relax \let\printindex = \relax \let\pxref = \relax \let\settitle = \relax \let\include = \relax \let\lowersections = \relax \let\down = \relax \let\raisesections = \relax \let\up = \relax \let\set = \relax \let\clear = \relax \let\item = \relax \let\message = \relax } % Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore. % \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} % Also ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @html, @menu, and @direntry text. % \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} \def\html{\doignore{html}} \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} % Ignore text until a line `@end #1'. % \def\doignore#1{\begingroup % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. \ignoresections % % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'. \long\def\doignoretext##1\end #1{\enddoignore}% % % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. \catcode32 = 10 % % And now expand that command. \doignoretext } % What we do to finish off ignored text. % \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% \newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse \def\obstexwarn{% \ifwarnedobs\relax\else % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0. % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines. \immediate\write16{} \immediate\write16{***WARNING*** for users of Unix TeX 3.0!} \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).} \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.} \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.} \immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.} \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the} \immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution} \immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.} \immediate\write16{} \warnedobstrue \fi } % **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a % workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed), % uncomment the following line: %%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax % Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for % purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command. % \def\nestedignore#1{% \obstexwarn % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end % command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font. % \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. \ignoresections % % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the % @end command again. \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}% % % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we % undefine them. % % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately; % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors. \ignoremorecommands % % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define % all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites % might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of % stuff compared to the main input. % \nullfont \let\tenrm = \nullfont \let\tenit = \nullfont \let\tensl = \nullfont \let\tenbf = \nullfont \let\tentt = \nullfont \let\smallcaps = \nullfont \let\tensf = \nullfont % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in % smallexample) \let\indrm = \nullfont \let\indit = \nullfont \let\indsl = \nullfont \let\indbf = \nullfont \let\indtt = \nullfont \let\indsc = \nullfont \let\indsf = \nullfont % % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts. \tracinglostchars = 0 % % Don't bother to do space factor calculations. \frenchspacing % % Don't report underfull hboxes. \hbadness = 10000 % % Do minimal line-breaking. \pretolerance = 10000 % % Do not execute instructions in @tex \def\tex{\doignore{tex}} } % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. % % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we % didn't need it. % \def\set{\parsearg\setxxx} \def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% \def\temp{#2}% \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. \fi } % Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or % \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into % an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'. \def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}} % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. % \def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx} \def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax} % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. % \def\value#1{\expandafter \ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax {\{No value for ``#1''\}} \else \csname SET#1\endcsname \fi} % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined % with @set. % \def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx} \def\ifsetxxx #1{% \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax \expandafter\ifsetfail \else \expandafter\ifsetsucceed \fi } \def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}} \def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}} \defineunmatchedend{ifset} % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. % \def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx} \def\ifclearxxx #1{% \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax \expandafter\ifclearsucceed \else \expandafter\ifclearfail \fi } \def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}} \def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}} \defineunmatchedend{ifclear} % @iftex always succeeds; we read the text following, through @end % iftex). But `@end iftex' should be valid only after an @iftex. % \def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}} \defineunmatchedend{iftex} % We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it % at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no % effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must % define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't % just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since % the @ifset might be nested.) % \def\conditionalsucceed#1{% \edef\temp{% % Remember the current value of \E#1. \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}% % % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value. \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}% }% \temp } % We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the % control sequences after we've constructed them. % \def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. % \def\asis#1{#1} % @math means output in math mode. % We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control % sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written. Then, % we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they % should be, according to the definition of Texinfo). So we must use a % control sequence to switch into and out of math mode. % % This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it % seems unlikely it will ever be needed there. % \let\implicitmath = $ \def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath} % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. \def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath} \def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath} \def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz} \def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]} \def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} \let\nwnode=\node \let\lastnode=\relax \def\donoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}\fi \global\let\lastnode=\relax} \def\unnumbnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\unnumbsetref{\lastnode}\fi \global\let\lastnode=\relax} \def\appendixnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\appendixsetref{\lastnode}\fi \global\let\lastnode=\relax} \let\refill=\relax % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. \def\setfilename{% \readauxfile \opencontents \openindices \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. \comment % Ignore the actual filename. } \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} \message{fonts,} % Font-change commands. % Texinfo supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. % So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc. \newfam\sffam \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf} \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. %% Try out Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf \let\mainmagstep=\magstephalf % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the % specified font prefix (normally `cm'). \def\setfont#1#2{\font#1=\fontprefix#2} % Use cm as the default font prefix. % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix % before you read in texinfo.tex. \ifx\fontprefix\undefined \def\fontprefix{cm} \fi \ifx\bigger\relax \let\mainmagstep=\magstep1 \setfont\textrm{r12} \setfont\texttt{tt12} \else \setfont\textrm{r10 scaled \mainmagstep} \setfont\texttt{tt10 scaled \mainmagstep} \fi % Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10. % cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10 % looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10. \setfont\textbf{b10 scaled \mainmagstep} \setfont\textit{ti10 scaled \mainmagstep} \setfont\textsl{sl10 scaled \mainmagstep} \setfont\textsf{ss10 scaled \mainmagstep} \setfont\textsc{csc10 scaled \mainmagstep} \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep % A few fonts for @defun, etc. \setfont\defbf{bx10 scaled \magstep1} %was 1314 \setfont\deftt{tt10 scaled \magstep1} \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf} % Fonts for indices and small examples. % We actually use the slanted font rather than the italic, % because texinfo normally uses the slanted fonts for that. % Do not make many font distinctions in general in the index, since they % aren't very useful. \setfont\ninett{tt9} \setfont\indrm{r9} \setfont\indit{sl9} \let\indsl=\indit \let\indtt=\ninett \let\indsf=\indrm \let\indbf=\indrm \setfont\indsc{csc10 at 9pt} \font\indi=cmmi9 \font\indsy=cmsy9 % Fonts for headings \setfont\chaprm{bx12 scaled \magstep2} \setfont\chapit{ti12 scaled \magstep2} \setfont\chapsl{sl12 scaled \magstep2} \setfont\chaptt{tt12 scaled \magstep2} \setfont\chapsf{ss12 scaled \magstep2} \let\chapbf=\chaprm \setfont\chapsc{csc10 scaled\magstep3} \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 \setfont\secrm{bx12 scaled \magstep1} \setfont\secit{ti12 scaled \magstep1} \setfont\secsl{sl12 scaled \magstep1} \setfont\sectt{tt12 scaled \magstep1} \setfont\secsf{ss12 scaled \magstep1} \setfont\secbf{bx12 scaled \magstep1} \setfont\secsc{csc10 scaled\magstep2} \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 % \setfont\ssecrm{bx10 scaled \magstep1} % This size an font looked bad. % \setfont\ssecit{cmti10 scaled \magstep1} % The letters were too crowded. % \setfont\ssecsl{sl10 scaled \magstep1} % \setfont\ssectt{tt10 scaled \magstep1} % \setfont\ssecsf{ss10 scaled \magstep1} %\setfont\ssecrm{b10 scaled 1315} % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx. %\setfont\ssecit{ti10 scaled 1315} % Also, the size is a little larger than %\setfont\ssecsl{sl10 scaled 1315} % being scaled magstep1. %\setfont\ssectt{tt10 scaled 1315} %\setfont\ssecsf{ss10 scaled 1315} %\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm \setfont\ssecrm{bx12 scaled \magstephalf} \setfont\ssecit{ti12 scaled \magstephalf} \setfont\ssecsl{sl12 scaled \magstephalf} \setfont\ssectt{tt12 scaled \magstephalf} \setfont\ssecsf{ss12 scaled \magstephalf} \setfont\ssecbf{bx12 scaled \magstephalf} \setfont\ssecsc{csc10 scaled \magstep1} \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 % The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5, % but that is not a standard magnification. % Fonts for title page: \setfont\titlerm{bx12 scaled \magstep3} \let\authorrm = \secrm % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we % don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would % also require loading a lot more fonts). % \def\resetmathfonts{% \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf } % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead % of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work % in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most % cases, not the current. Plain TeX does, for example, % \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \tenbf} By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need % to redefine \bf itself. \def\textfonts{% \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \resetmathfonts} \def\chapfonts{% \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \resetmathfonts} \def\secfonts{% \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \resetmathfonts} \def\subsecfonts{% \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \resetmathfonts} \def\indexfonts{% \let\tenrm=\indrm \let\tenit=\indit \let\tensl=\indsl \let\tenbf=\indbf \let\tentt=\indtt \let\smallcaps=\indsc \let\tensf=\indsf \let\teni=\indi \let\tensy=\indsy \resetmathfonts} % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. % \textfonts % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 % Fonts for short table of contents. \setfont\shortcontrm{r12} \setfont\shortcontbf{bx12} \setfont\shortcontsl{sl12} %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction % unless the following character is such as not to need one. \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi} \def\smartitalic#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} \let\i=\smartitalic \let\var=\smartitalic \let\dfn=\smartitalic \let\emph=\smartitalic \let\cite=\smartitalic \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} \let\strong=\b % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. % \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } \def\t#1{% {\tt \nohyphenation \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}% \null } \let\ttfont = \t %\def\samp #1{`{\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}'\null} \def\samp #1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} \def\key #1{{\tt \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} \let\file=\samp % @code is a modification of @t, % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. \def\tclose#1{% {% % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font % % Switch to typewriter. \tt % % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% % % Turn off hyphenation. \nohyphenation % \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1% }% \null } % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code. % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overful hboxes % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate an a dash. % -- rms. { \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active \global\def\code{\begingroup \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder \codex} % The following is used by \doprintindex to insure that long function names % wrap around. It is necessary for - and _ to be active before the index is % read from the file, as \entry parses the arguments long before \code is % ever called. -- mycroft \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash \catcode`\_=\active \let_\realunder} } \def\realdash{-} \def\realunder{_} \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} \def\codeunder{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}} \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} %\let\exp=\tclose %Was temporary % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, % then @kbd has no effect. \def\xkey{\key} \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% \else\tclose{\look}\fi \else\tclose{\look}\fi} % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of % @dmn{}pt. % \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} \def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} % \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font % Use of \lowercase was suggested. \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font \message{page headings,} \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. \def\titlefont#1{{\titlerm #1}} \newif\ifseenauthor \newif\iffinishedtitlepage \def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz} \def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} \def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm % I deinstalled the following change because \cmr12 is undefined. % This change was not in the ChangeLog anyway. --rms. % \let\subtitlerm=\cmr12 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}% % \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}% % % Leave some space at the very top of the page. \vglue\titlepagetopglue % % Now you can print the title using @title. \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}% \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefont{##1}} % print a rule at the page bottom also. \finishedtitlepagefalse \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}% % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. \finishedtitlepagetrue % % Now you can put text using @subtitle. \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}% \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}% % % @author should come last, but may come many times. \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}% \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}% % % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. \let\oldpage = \page \def\page{% \iffinishedtitlepage\else \finishtitlepage \fi \oldpage \let\page = \oldpage \hbox{}}% % \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}} } \def\Etitlepage{% \iffinishedtitlepage\else \finishtitlepage \fi % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. \oldpage \endgroup \HEADINGSon } \def\finishtitlepage{% \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize \vskip\titlepagebottomglue \finishedtitlepagetrue } %%% Set up page headings and footings. \let\thispage=\folio \newtoks \evenheadline % Token sequence for heading line of even pages \newtoks \oddheadline % Token sequence for heading line of odd pages \newtoks \evenfootline % Token sequence for footing line of even pages \newtoks \oddfootline % Token sequence for footing line of odd pages % Now make Tex use those variables \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} \let\HEADINGShook=\relax % Commands to set those variables. % For example, this is what @headings on does % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle % @evenfooting @thisfile|| % @oddfooting ||@thisfile \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} \def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx} \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} \def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx} {\catcode`\@=0 % \gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} \gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} \gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \gdef\everyheadingxxx #1{\everyheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} \gdef\everyheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}} \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} \gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} \gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% \global\oddfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} \gdef\everyfootingxxx #1{\everyfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} \gdef\everyfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}} \global\oddfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} % }% unbind the catcode of @. % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. % @headings off turns them off. % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. % By default, they are off. \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} \def\HEADINGSoff{ \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} \HEADINGSoff % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top % edge of all pages. \def\HEADINGSdouble{ %\pagealignmacro \global\pageno=1 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} } % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, % page number on top right. \def\HEADINGSsingle{ %\pagealignmacro \global\pageno=1 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} } \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} } \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% \global\evenfootline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil} \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} } % Subroutines used in generating headings % Produces Day Month Year style of output. \def\today{\number\day\space \ifcase\month\or January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi \space\number\year} % Use this if you want the Month Day, Year style of output. %\def\today{\ifcase\month\or %January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or %July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi %\space\number\day, \number\year} % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings % It generates no output of its own \def\thistitle{No Title} \def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz} \def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}} \message{tables,} % @tabs -- simple alignment % These don't work. For one thing, \+ is defined as outer. % So these macros cannot even be defined. %\def\tabs{\parsearg\tabszzz} %\def\tabszzz #1{\settabs\+#1\cr} %\def\tabline{\parsearg\tablinezzz} %\def\tablinezzz #1{\+#1\cr} %\def\&{&} % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x). % default indentation of table text \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in % margin between end of table item and start of table text. \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin \newdimen\itemmax % Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with % these defs. % They also define \itemindex % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} \def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz} \def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz} \def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz} \def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz} \def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}% \itemzzz {#1}} \def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}% \itemzzz {#1}} \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % \advance\hsize by -\rightskip \advance\hsize by -\tableindent \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}% \itemindex{#1}% \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. % % Be sure we are not still in the middle of a paragraph. %{\parskip = 0in %\par %}% % % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax % % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, % but leave it ragged-right. \begingroup \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent \advance\hsize by\tableindent \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil \leavevmode\unhbox0\par \endgroup % % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. \nobreak \vskip-\parskip % % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. Unfortunately % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following % \baselineskip glue. \nobreak \endgroup \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse \else % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. Since that % text will be indented by \tableindent, we make the item text be in % a zero-width box. \noindent \rlap{\hskip -\tableindent\box0}\ignorespaces% \endgroup% \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue% \fi } \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}} \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}} \def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}} \def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}} \def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}} \def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}} %% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work \def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}} \def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex} {\obeylines\obeyspaces% \gdef\tablex #1^^M{% \tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}} \def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex} {\obeylines\obeyspaces% \gdef\ftablex #1^^M{% \tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley \def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% \let\Etable=\relax}} \def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex} {\obeylines\obeyspaces% \gdef\vtablex #1^^M{% \tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley \def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% \let\Etable=\relax}} \def\dontindex #1{} \def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}% \def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}% {\obeyspaces % \gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup% \tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}} \def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{% \aboveenvbreak % \begingroup % \def\Edescription{\Etable}% Neccessary kludge. \let\itemindex=#1% \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi % \ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi % \ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi % \def\itemfont{#2}% \itemmax=\tableindent % \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin % \advance \leftskip by \tableindent % \exdentamount=\tableindent \parindent = 0pt \parskip = \smallskipamount \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi% \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% \let\item = \internalBitem % \let\itemx = \internalBitemx % \let\kitem = \internalBkitem % \let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx % \let\xitem = \internalBxitem % \let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx % } % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize \newcount \itemno \def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz} \def\itemizezzz #1{% \begingroup % ended by the @end itemsize \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize} } \def\itemizey #1#2{% \aboveenvbreak % \itemmax=\itemindent % \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin % \advance \leftskip by \itemindent % \exdentamount=\itemindent \parindent = 0pt % \parskip = \smallskipamount % \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi% \def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% \def\itemcontents{#1}% \let\item=\itemizeitem} % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. % These are `.?!:;,' \def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000 \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 } % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. % \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No % argument is the same as `1'. % \def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz} \def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate % % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. \def\thearg{#1}% \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi % % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark \ifx\rest\empty % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and % not equal to itself. % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. % % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from % continuing to look for a . % \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) \else % It's a letter. \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter \else \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter \fi \fi \else % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. \numericenumerate \fi } % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is % given in \thearg. % \def\numericenumerate{% \itemno = \thearg \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% } % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. \def\lowercaseenumerate{% \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg \startenumeration{% % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. \ifnum\itemno=0 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger alphabet}% \fi \char\lccode\itemno }% } % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. \def\uppercaseenumerate{% \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg \startenumeration{% % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. \ifnum\itemno=0 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger alphabet} \fi \char\uccode\itemno }% } % Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. % \def\startenumeration#1{% \advance\itemno by -1 \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr } % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg % to @enumerate. % \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} % Definition of @item while inside @itemize. \def\itemizeitem{% \advance\itemno by 1 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% \ifhmode \errmessage{\in hmode at itemizeitem}\fi {\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}% \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% \flushcr} % @multitable macros % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94 % % @multitable ... @endmultitable will make as many columns as desired. % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. % To make preamble: % % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: % @multitable @percentofhsize .2 .3 .5 % @item ... % % Numbers following @percentofhsize are the percent of the total % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many % columns as desired. % Or use a template: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} % @item ... % using the widest term desired in each column. % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. % @item, @tab, @multicolumn or @endmulticolumn do not need to be on their % own lines, but it will not hurt if they are. % Sample multitable: % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col % @item % first col stuff % @tab % second col stuff % @tab % third col % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. % % They will wrap at the width determined by the template. % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. % @endmultitable % Default dimensions may be reset by user. % @intableparskip will set vertical space between paragraphs in table. % @intableparindent will set paragraph indent in table. % @spacebetweencols will set horizontal space to be left between columns. % @spacebetweenlines will set vertical space to be left between lines. %%%% % Dimensions \newdimen\intableparskip \newdimen\intableparindent \newdimen\spacebetweencols \newdimen\spacebetweenlines \intableparskip=0pt \intableparindent=6pt \spacebetweencols=12pt \spacebetweenlines=12pt %%%% % Macros used to set up halign preamble: \let\endsetuptable\relax \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} \let\percentofhsize\relax \def\xpercentofhsize{\percentofhsize} \newif\ifsetpercent \newcount\colcount \def\setuptable#1{\def\firstarg{#1}% \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable\let\go\relax% \else \ifx\firstarg\xpercentofhsize\global\setpercenttrue% \else \ifsetpercent \if#1.\else% \global\advance\colcount by1 % \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#1\hsize}% \fi \else \global\advance\colcount by1 \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% \fi% \fi% \let\go\setuptable% \fi\go} %%%% % multitable syntax \def\tab{&} %%%% % @multitable ... @endmultitable definitions: \def\multitable#1\item{\bgroup \let\item\cr \tolerance=9500 \hbadness=9500 \parskip=\intableparskip \parindent=\intableparindent \overfullrule=0pt \global\colcount=0\relax% \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\global\everycr{}\cr\egroup\egroup}% % To parse everything between @multitable and @item : \def\one{#1}\expandafter\setuptable\one\endsetuptable % Need to reset this to 0 after \setuptable. \global\colcount=0\relax% % % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will % be used as many times as user calls for columns. % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and % continue for many paragraphs if desired. \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax% \vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other % we will add a \leftskip of \spacebetweencols to all columns after % the first one. % If a template has been used, we will add \spacebetweencols % to the width of each template entry. % If user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize % we will use that dimension as the width of the column, and % the \leftskip will keep entries from bumping into each other. % Table will start at left margin and final column will justify at % right margin. \ifnum\colcount=1 \else \ifsetpercent \else % If user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize % we will advance \hsize by \spacebetweencols \advance\hsize by \spacebetweencols \fi % In either case we will make \leftskip=\spacebetweencols: \leftskip=\spacebetweencols \fi \noindent##}\cr% % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one. % The table preamble % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width. \global\everycr{\noalign{\nointerlineskip\vskip\spacebetweenlines \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. \global\colcount=0\relax}}} \message{indexing,} % Index generation facilities % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite % except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex. {\catcode`\@=11 \gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}} % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. % It automatically defines \fooindex such that % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long % for the sake of vms. \def\newindex #1{ \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex \noexpand\doindex {#1}} } % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. \def\newcodeindex #1{ \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex \noexpand\docodeindex {#1}} } \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. \def\synindex #1 #2 {% \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex \noexpand\doindex {#2}}% } % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo % inside @code. \def\syncodeindex #1 #2 {% \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex \noexpand\docodeindex {#2}}% } % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, % and it is "foo", the name of the index. % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} \def\indexdummies{% % Take care of the plain tex accent commands. \def\"{\realbackslash "}% \def\`{\realbackslash `}% \def\'{\realbackslash '}% \def\^{\realbackslash ^}% \def\~{\realbackslash ~}% \def\={\realbackslash =}% \def\b{\realbackslash b}% \def\c{\realbackslash c}% \def\d{\realbackslash d}% \def\u{\realbackslash u}% \def\v{\realbackslash v}% \def\H{\realbackslash H}% % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters. \def\oe{\realbackslash oe}% \def\ae{\realbackslash ae}% \def\aa{\realbackslash aa}% \def\OE{\realbackslash OE}% \def\AE{\realbackslash AE}% \def\AA{\realbackslash AA}% \def\o{\realbackslash o}% \def\O{\realbackslash O}% \def\l{\realbackslash l}% \def\L{\realbackslash L}% \def\ss{\realbackslash ss}% % Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry. \def\_{{\realbackslash _}}% \def\w{\realbackslash w }% \def\bf{\realbackslash bf }% \def\rm{\realbackslash rm }% \def\sl{\realbackslash sl }% \def\sf{\realbackslash sf}% \def\tt{\realbackslash tt}% \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}% \def\less{\realbackslash less}% \def\hat{\realbackslash hat}% \def\char{\realbackslash char}% \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}% \def\dots{\realbackslash dots }% \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright }% \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}% \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}% \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}% \def\t##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}% \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}% \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}% \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}% \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}% \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}% \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}% \def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}% \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}% \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}% \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}% } % \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands. % This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by. \def\indexdummyfont#1{#1} \def\indexdummytex{TeX} \def\indexdummydots{...} \def\indexnofonts{% % Just ignore accents. \let\"=\indexdummyfont \let\`=\indexdummyfont \let\'=\indexdummyfont \let\^=\indexdummyfont \let\~=\indexdummyfont \let\==\indexdummyfont \let\b=\indexdummyfont \let\c=\indexdummyfont \let\d=\indexdummyfont \let\u=\indexdummyfont \let\v=\indexdummyfont \let\H=\indexdummyfont % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters. \def\oe{oe}% \def\ae{ae}% \def\aa{aa}% \def\OE{OE}% \def\AE{AE}% \def\AA{AA}% \def\o{o}% \def\O{O}% \def\l{l}% \def\L{L}% \def\ss{ss}% \let\w=\indexdummyfont \let\t=\indexdummyfont \let\r=\indexdummyfont \let\i=\indexdummyfont \let\b=\indexdummyfont \let\emph=\indexdummyfont \let\strong=\indexdummyfont \let\cite=\indexdummyfont \let\sc=\indexdummyfont %Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |... %\let\tt=\indexdummyfont \let\tclose=\indexdummyfont \let\code=\indexdummyfont \let\file=\indexdummyfont \let\samp=\indexdummyfont \let\kbd=\indexdummyfont \let\key=\indexdummyfont \let\var=\indexdummyfont \let\TeX=\indexdummytex \let\dots=\indexdummydots } % To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape. % We must first make another character (@) an escape % so we do not become unable to do a definition. {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}} \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. \let\SETmarginindex=\relax %initialize! % workhorse for all \fooindexes % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there \def\doind #1#2{% % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else% \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}% \fi% {\count10=\lastpenalty % {\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage \escapechar=`\\% {\let\folio=0% Expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash in the indx. % % Now process the index-string once, with all font commands turned off, % to get the string to sort the index by. {\indexnofonts \xdef\temp1{#2}% }% % Now produce the complete index entry. We process the index-string again, % this time with font commands expanded, to get what to print in the index. \edef\temp{% \write \csname#1indfile\endcsname{% \realbackslash entry {\temp1}{\folio}{#2}}}% \temp }% }\penalty\count10}} \def\dosubind #1#2#3{% {\count10=\lastpenalty % {\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage \escapechar=`\\% {\let\folio=0% \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% % % Now process the index-string once, with all font commands turned off, % to get the string to sort the index by. {\indexnofonts \xdef\temp1{#2 #3}% }% % Now produce the complete index entry. We process the index-string again, % this time with font commands expanded, to get what to print in the index. \edef\temp{% \write \csname#1indfile\endcsname{% \realbackslash entry {\temp1}{\folio}{#2}{#3}}}% \temp }% }\penalty\count10}} % The index entry written in the file actually looks like % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} % or % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files % containing these kinds of lines: % \initial {c} % before the first topic whose initial is c % \entry {topic}{pagelist} % for a topic that is used without subtopics % \primary {topic} % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} % for each subtopic. % Define the user-accessible indexing commands % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. \def\findex {\fnindex} \def\kindex {\kyindex} \def\cindex {\cpindex} \def\vindex {\vrindex} \def\tindex {\tpindex} \def\pindex {\pgindex} \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} {\obeylines % \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. % This is what you call to cause a particular index to get printed. % Write % @unnumbered Function Index % @printindex fn \def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex} \def\doprintindex#1{% \tex \dobreak \chapheadingskip {10000} \catcode`\%=\other\catcode`\&=\other\catcode`\#=\other \catcode`\$=\other \catcode`\~=\other \indexbreaks % % The following don't help, since the chars were translated % when the raw index was written, and their fonts were discarded % due to \indexnofonts. %\catcode`\"=\active %\catcode`\^=\active %\catcode`\_=\active %\catcode`\|=\active %\catcode`\<=\active %\catcode`\>=\active % % \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx} \indexfonts\rm \tolerance=9500 \advance\baselineskip -1pt \begindoublecolumns % % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. \openin 1 \jobname.#1s \ifeof 1 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure % there is some text. (Index is nonexistent) \else % % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so % it can discover if there is anything in it. \read 1 to \temp \ifeof 1 (Index is empty) \else \input \jobname.#1s \fi \fi \closein 1 \enddoublecolumns \Etex } % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. % Change them to control the appearance of the index. % Same as \bigskipamount except no shrink. % \balancecolumns gets confused if there is any shrink. \newskip\initialskipamount \initialskipamount 12pt plus4pt \def\initial #1{% {\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt \ifdim\lastskip<\initialskipamount \removelastskip \penalty-200 \vskip \initialskipamount\fi \line{\secbf#1\hfill}\kern 2pt\penalty10000}} % This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2 % flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents % entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. % \def\entry #1#2{\begingroup % % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't % affect previous text. \par % % Do not fill out the last line with white space. \parfillskip = 0in % % No extra space above this paragraph. \parskip = 0in % % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. \finalhyphendemerits = 0 % % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. % % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. \hangindent=2em % % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line % with blank space. \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil % % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking % parameters we've set above will have an effect. \noindent % % Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it. #1% % The following is kluged to not output a line of dots in the index if % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be % cursed by a Unix daemon. \def\tempa{{\rm }}% \def\tempb{#2}% \edef\tempc{\tempa}% \edef\tempd{\tempb}% \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else% % % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) \hfil\penalty50 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. % % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull % \hbox ensues. \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph. \fi% \par \endgroup} % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em. \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm \def\secondary #1#2{ {\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in \hangindent =1in \hangafter=1 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par }} %% Define two-column mode, which is used in indexes. %% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416. \catcode `\@=11 \newbox\partialpage \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % Grab any single-column material above us. \output = {\global\setbox\partialpage =\vbox{\unvbox255\kern -\topskip \kern \baselineskip}}% \eject % % Now switch to the double-column output routine. \output={\doublecolumnout}% % % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the % execution time, so we may as well do it once. % % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +- < % 1pt) as it did when we hard-coded it. % % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) % been clobbered. % \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize % % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) \vsize = 2\vsize \doublecolumnpagegoal } \def\enddoublecolumns{\eject \endgroup \pagegoal=\vsize \unvbox\partialpage} \def\doublecolumnsplit{\splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth \global\dimen@=\pageheight \global\advance\dimen@ by-\ht\partialpage \global\setbox1=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \global\setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox1} \global\setbox3=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \global\setbox2=\vbox{\unvbox3} \ifdim\ht0>\dimen@ \setbox255=\vbox{\unvbox0\unvbox2} \global\setbox255=\copy5 \fi \ifdim\ht2>\dimen@ \setbox255=\vbox{\unvbox0\unvbox2} \global\setbox255=\copy5 \fi } \def\doublecolumnpagegoal{% \dimen@=\vsize \advance\dimen@ by-2\ht\partialpage \global\pagegoal=\dimen@ } \def\pagesofar{\unvbox\partialpage % \hsize=\doublecolumnhsize % have to restore this since output routine \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}} \def\doublecolumnout{% \setbox5=\copy255 {\vbadness=10000 \doublecolumnsplit} \ifvbox255 \setbox0=\vtop to\dimen@{\unvbox0} \setbox2=\vtop to\dimen@{\unvbox2} \onepageout\pagesofar \unvbox255 \penalty\outputpenalty \else \setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox5} \ifvbox0 \dimen@=\ht0 \advance\dimen@ by\topskip \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip \divide\dimen@ by2 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth {\vbadness=10000 \loop \global\setbox5=\copy0 \setbox1=\vsplit5 to\dimen@ \setbox3=\vsplit5 to\dimen@ \ifvbox5 \global\advance\dimen@ by1pt \repeat \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1} \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3} \global\setbox\partialpage=\vbox{\pagesofar} \doublecolumnpagegoal } \fi \fi } \catcode `\@=\other \message{sectioning,} % Define chapters, sections, etc. \newcount \chapno \newcount \secno \secno=0 \newcount \subsecno \subsecno=0 \newcount \subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... \newcount \appendixno \appendixno = `\@ \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} \newwrite \contentsfile % This is called from \setfilename. \def\opencontents{\openout \contentsfile = \jobname.toc} % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. % page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise \def\thischapter{} \def\thissection{} \def\seccheck#1{\if \pageno<0 % \errmessage{@#1 not allowed after generating table of contents}\fi % } \def\chapternofonts{% \let\rawbackslash=\relax% \let\frenchspacing=\relax% \def\result{\realbackslash result} \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv} \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion} \def\print{\realbackslash print} \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX} \def\dots{\realbackslash dots} \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright} \def\tt{\realbackslash tt} \def\bf{\realbackslash bf } \def\w{\realbackslash w} \def\less{\realbackslash less} \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr} \def\hat{\realbackslash hat} \def\char{\realbackslash char} \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}} \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}} \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}} \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}} \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}} \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}} \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}} \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}} % These are redefined because @smartitalic wouldn't work inside xdef. \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}} \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}} \def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}} \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}} \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}} } \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name % Choose a numbered-heading macro % #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections % #2 is text for heading \def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 \ifcase\absseclevel \chapterzzz{#2} \or \seczzz{#2} \or \numberedsubseczzz{#2} \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2} \else \ifnum \absseclevel<0 \chapterzzz{#2} \else \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2} \fi \fi } % like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels \def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 \ifcase\absseclevel \appendixzzz{#2} \or \appendixsectionzzz{#2} \or \appendixsubseczzz{#2} \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2} \else \ifnum \absseclevel<0 \appendixzzz{#2} \else \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2} \fi \fi } % like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels \def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 \ifcase\absseclevel \unnumberedzzz{#2} \or \unnumberedseczzz{#2} \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2} \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2} \else \ifnum \absseclevel<0 \unnumberedzzz{#2} \else \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2} \fi \fi } \def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title} \outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy} \def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz \def\chapterzzz #1{\seccheck{chapter}% \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter \the\chapno}% \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}% \gdef\thissection{#1}% \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter % because we don't want its macros evaluated now. \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry {#1}{\the\chapno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \donoderef % \global\let\section = \numberedsec \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec }} \outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy} \def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz \def\appendixzzz #1{\seccheck{appendix}% \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \appendixno by 1 \message{Appendix \appendixletter}% \chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}% \gdef\thissection{#1}% \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \appendixnoderef % \global\let\section = \appendixsec \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec }} \outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} \outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} \def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz \def\unnumberedzzz #1{\seccheck{unnumbered}% \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 % % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant % to be executed, not expanded). % % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use % \the to achieve this: TeX expands \the only once, % simply yielding the contents of the . \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}% % \unnumbchapmacro {#1}% \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry {#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \unnumbnoderef % \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec }} \outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy} \def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz \def\seczzz #1{\seccheck{section}% \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry % {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \donoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\appenixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} \outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} \def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz \def\appendixsectionzzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsection}% \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry % {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \appendixnoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy} \def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz \def\unnumberedseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsec}% \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \unnumbnoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy} \def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz \def\numberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsection}% \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry % {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \donoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy} \def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz \def\appendixsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsec}% \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry % {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \appendixnoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy} \def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz \def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsec}% \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \unnumbnoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy} \def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz \def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsubsection}% \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % \subsubsecheading {#1} {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry % {#1} {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno} {\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \donoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy} \def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz \def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsubsec}% \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % \subsubsecheading {#1} {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{#1}% {\appendixletter} {\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \appendixnoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} \outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy} \def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsubsec}% \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% {\chapternofonts% \edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% \escapechar=`\\% \write \contentsfile \temp % \unnumbnoderef % \penalty 10000 % }} % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo. % Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work. \def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} \def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} \def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz} \def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz} \def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz} \def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz} \def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz} \def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz} \def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz} \def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz} \def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz} \def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz} \def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz} % These macros control what the section commands do, according % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. \global\let\section = \numberedsec \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and % such: % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit % overlong headings to fold. % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. \def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz} \def\majorheadingzzz #1{% {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt\raggedright \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200} \def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz} \def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak % {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt\raggedright \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200} \def\heading{\parsearg\secheadingi} \def\subheading{\parsearg\subsecheadingi} \def\subsubheading{\parsearg\subsubsecheadingi} % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) \newskip \chapheadingskip \chapheadingskip = 30pt plus 8pt minus 4pt \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi} \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} \def\CHAPPAGoff{ \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} \def\CHAPPAGon{ \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} \def\CHAPPAGodd{ \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} \CHAPPAGon \def\CHAPFplain{ \global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain} \def\chfplain #1#2{% \pchapsepmacro {% \chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt\raggedright \rm #2\enspace #1}% }% \bigskip \penalty5000 } \def\unnchfplain #1{% \pchapsepmacro % {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt\raggedright \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 % } \CHAPFplain % The default \def\unnchfopen #1{% \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt\raggedright \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 % } \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% \par\penalty 5000 % } \def\CHAPFopen{ \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen} % Parameter controlling skip before section headings. \newskip \subsecheadingskip \subsecheadingskip = 17pt plus 8pt minus 4pt \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}} \newskip \secheadingskip \secheadingskip = 21pt plus 8pt minus 4pt \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}} % @paragraphindent is defined for the Info formatting commands only. \let\paragraphindent=\comment % Section fonts are the base font at magstep2, which produces % a size a bit more than 14 points in the default situation. \def\secheading #1#2#3{\secheadingi {#2.#3\enspace #1}} \def\plainsecheading #1{\secheadingi {#1}} \def\secheadingi #1{{\advance \secheadingskip by \parskip % \secheadingbreak}% {\secfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt\raggedright \rm #1\hfill}}% \ifdim \parskip<10pt \kern 10pt\kern -\parskip\fi \penalty 10000 } % Subsection fonts are the base font at magstep1, % which produces a size of 12 points. \def\subsecheading #1#2#3#4{\subsecheadingi {#2.#3.#4\enspace #1}} \def\subsecheadingi #1{{\advance \subsecheadingskip by \parskip % \subsecheadingbreak}% {\subsecfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt\raggedright \rm #1\hfill}}% \ifdim \parskip<10pt \kern 10pt\kern -\parskip\fi \penalty 10000 } \def\subsubsecfonts{\subsecfonts} % Maybe this should change: % Perhaps make sssec fonts scaled % magstep half \def\subsubsecheading #1#2#3#4#5{\subsubsecheadingi {#2.#3.#4.#5\enspace #1}} \def\subsubsecheadingi #1{{\advance \subsecheadingskip by \parskip % \subsecheadingbreak}% {\subsubsecfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt\raggedright \rm #1\hfill}}% \ifdim \parskip<10pt \kern 10pt\kern -\parskip\fi \penalty 10000} \message{toc printing,} % Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written % to \contentsfile. \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in \def\startcontents#1{% \pagealignmacro \immediate\closeout \contentsfile \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = -1 % Request roman numbered pages. \fi % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. % It is abundantly clear what they are. \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}% \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11 \catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. } % Normal (long) toc. \outer\def\contents{% \startcontents{\putwordTableofContents}% \input \jobname.toc \endgroup \vfill \eject } % And just the chapters. \outer\def\summarycontents{% \startcontents{\putwordShortContents}% % \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. \secfonts \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl \rm \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{} \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{} \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{} \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{} \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{} \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{} \input \jobname.toc \endgroup \vfill \eject } \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. % The first argument is the chapter or section name. % The last argument is the page number. % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... % Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents. \def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}} % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{% \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno{#3}}% } % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. % The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. % We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry % command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry % for both, but it doesn't seem worth it. \setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix } \newdimen\shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth = \wd0 \def\shortchaplabel#1{% % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned. \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}% \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi % % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after % the label; that gets put in in \shortchapentry above.) \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}% } \def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}} \def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno{#2}}} % Sections. \def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}} \def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}} % Subsections. \def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}} \def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}} % And subsubsections. \def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{% \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}} \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}} % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the % page number. % % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we would want to be at chapters % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. \def\dochapentry#1#2{% \penalty-300 \vskip\baselineskip \begingroup \chapentryfonts \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% \endgroup \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip } \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% \endgroup} \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% \endgroup} \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% \endgroup} % Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for % the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We % can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist % of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.) % \def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup \hyphenpenalty = 10000 \entry{#1}{#2}% \endgroup} % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} \let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts \let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts \message{environments,} % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. % Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts. \newbox\dblarrowbox \newbox\longdblarrowbox \newbox\pushcharbox \newbox\bullbox \newbox\equivbox \newbox\errorbox \let\ptexequiv = \equiv %{\tentt %\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil} %\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil} %\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil} %\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil} % Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook) %\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex % depth .1ex\hfil} %} \def\point{$\star$} \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt} \global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. \vbox{ \hrule height\dimen2 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. \hrule height\dimen2} \hfil} % The @error{} command. \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. \def\tex{\begingroup \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie \catcode `\%=14 \catcode 43=12 \catcode`\"=12 \catcode`\==12 \catcode`\|=12 \catcode`\<=12 \catcode`\>=12 \escapechar=`\\ % \let\~=\ptextilde \let\{=\ptexlbrace \let\}=\ptexrbrace \let\.=\ptexdot \let\*=\ptexstar \let\dots=\ptexdots \def\@{@}% \let\bullet=\ptexbullet \let\b=\ptexb \let\c=\ptexc \let\i=\ptexi \let\t=\ptext \let\l=\ptexl \let\L=\ptexL % \let\Etex=\endgroup} % Define @lisp ... @endlisp. % @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things, % including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous). % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't % have any width. \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input % should produce a line of output anyway. % {\obeyspaces % \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}} % Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is % for use in \parsearg. {\sepspaces% \global\let\obeyedspace= } % This space is always present above and below environments. \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip % \def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip \endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount \removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}} \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins. \let\nonarrowing=\relax %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% % \cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around argument \font\circle=lcircle10 \newdimen\circthick \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle % \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr \hskip\rskip}} \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr \hskip\rskip}} % \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip \long\def\cartouche{% \begingroup \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*. \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip \advance\cartinner by-\rskip \cartouter=\hsize \advance\cartouter by 18pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either % side, and for 6pt waste from % each corner char \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. \let\nonarrowing=\comment \vbox\bgroup \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt \carttop \hbox\bgroup \hskip\lskip \vrule\kern3pt \vbox\bgroup \hsize=\cartinner \kern3pt \begingroup \baselineskip=\normbskip \lineskip=\normlskip \parskip=\normpskip \vskip -\parskip \def\Ecartouche{% \endgroup \kern3pt \egroup \kern3pt\vrule \hskip\rskip \egroup \cartbot \egroup \endgroup }} % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, % inside a group. \def\nonfillstart{% \aboveenvbreak \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. \singlespace \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output \parskip = 0pt \parindent = 0pt \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing % at next level down. \ifx\nonarrowing\relax \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing \let\exdent=\nofillexdent \let\nonarrowing=\relax \fi } % To ending an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph % (via \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we % keep the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue % will be inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the % document, after the environment. % \def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% % This macro is \def\lisp{\begingroup \nonfillstart \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish \tt \rawbackslash % have \ input char produce \ char from current font \gobble } % Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the % environment, so the error checking in \end will work. % % We must call \lisp last in the definition, since it reads the % return following the @example (or whatever) command. % \def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} \def\smallexample{\begingroup \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} \def\smalllisp{\begingroup \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} % @smallexample and @smalllisp. This is not used unless the @smallbook % command is given. Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. % \def\smalllispx{\begingroup \nonfillstart \let\Esmalllisp = \nonfillfinish \let\Esmallexample = \nonfillfinish % % Smaller interline space and fonts for small examples. \setleading{10pt}% \indexfonts \tt \rawbackslash % make \ output the \ character from the current font (tt) \gobble } % This is @display; same as @lisp except use roman font. % \def\display{\begingroup \nonfillstart \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish \gobble } % This is @format; same as @display except don't narrow margins. % \def\format{\begingroup \let\nonarrowing = t \nonfillstart \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish \gobble } % @flushleft (same as @format) and @flushright. % \def\flushleft{\begingroup \let\nonarrowing = t \nonfillstart \let\Eflushleft = \nonfillfinish \gobble } \def\flushright{\begingroup \let\nonarrowing = t \nonfillstart \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill \gobble} % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) % and narrows the margins. % \def\quotation{% \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip \singlespace \parindent=0pt % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment... \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}% % % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. \ifx\nonarrowing\relax \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing \let\nonarrowing = \relax \fi } \message{defuns,} % Define formatter for defuns % First, allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally \def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname} \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt \newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt \newcount\parencount % define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things. % \functionparens affects the group it is contained in. \def\activeparens{% \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active} % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) {\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm) % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack \gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 } \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} % This is used to turn on special parens % but make & act ordinary (given that it's active). \gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr} % Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions. % This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses. \gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested % \global\advance\parencount by 1 } % % This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens. \gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 } % \gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0. % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (. \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi \global\advance \parencount by -1 } % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards \gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ } % \gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr} } % End of definition inside \activeparens %% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the %% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] \def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}} \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}} \def\ampnr{\&} \def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}} \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}} % First, defname, which formats the header line itself. % #1 should be the function name. % #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function". \def\defname #1#2{% % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were % outside the @def... \dimen2=\leftskip \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent \dimen3=\rightskip \advance\dimen3 by -\defbodyindent \noindent % \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}% \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1 % % Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) % ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin, % but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins, % so that \rightline will obey them. \advance \hsize by -\dimen2 \advance \hsize by -\dimen3 \rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}}}% % Make all lines underfull and no complaints: \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent {\df #1}\enskip % Generate function name } % Actually process the body of a definition % #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun. % #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx. % #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header, % such as \defunheader. \def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody \medbreak % % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies % so that it will exit this group. \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}% \parindent=0in \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent \begingroup % \catcode 61=\active % 61 is `=' \obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3} \def\defmethparsebody #1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV % \medbreak % % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies % so that it will exit this group. \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% \parindent=0in \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}} \def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % \medbreak % % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies % so that it will exit this group. \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% \parindent=0in \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} % These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones % except that they do not make parens into active characters. % These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments. \def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody \medbreak % % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies % so that it will exit this group. \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}% \parindent=0in \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent \begingroup % \catcode 61=\active % \obeylines\spacesplit#3} % This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for % some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals. % \def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{% \begingroup\inENV % \medbreak % % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies % so that it will exit this group. \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% \parindent=0in \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent \begingroup\obeylines } \def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {% \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% \spacesplit{#3{#4}}% } % This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the % type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct % termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh. % \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody % % So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That % way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and % won't strip off the braces. % \def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {% \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty } % Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the % braces (if any). That's what this does, putting the result in \tptemp. % \def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{\def\tptemp{#1}}% % After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final % thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3 % (which might be empty) the arguments. % \def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{% \removeemptybraces#2\relax #1{\tptemp}{#3}% }% \def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % \medbreak % % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies % so that it will exit this group. \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% \parindent=0in \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent \exdentamount=\defbodyindent \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} % Split up #2 at the first space token. % call #1 with two arguments: % the first is all of #2 before the space token, % the second is all of #2 after that space token. % If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg % and the second is passed as empty. {\obeylines \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}% \long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{% \ifx\relax #3% #1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}} % So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions. % Define @defun. % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun % Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up \def\defunargs #1{\functionparens \sl % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. \hyphenchar\tensl=0 #1% \hyphenchar\tensl=45 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{unbalanced parens in @def arguments}\fi% \interlinepenalty=10000 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000% } \def\deftypefunargs #1{% % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. % Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special. \boldbraxnoamp \tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars \interlinepenalty=10000 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000% } % Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed. % @deffn Command forward-char nchars \def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader} \def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup % \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody } % @defun == @deffn Function \def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader} \def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index \begingroup\defname {#1}{Function}% \defunargs {#2}\endgroup % \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody } % @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) \def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader} % #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args. \def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax} % #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args. \def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{% \doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Function}% \deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup % \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody } % @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) \def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader} % \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$ % puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null. \def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi} % #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args. \def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax} % #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args. \def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{% \doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index \begingroup \normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents % at least some C++ text from working \defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}% \deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup % \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody } % @defmac == @deffn Macro \def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader} \def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index \begingroup\defname {#1}{Macro}% \defunargs {#2}\endgroup % \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody } % @defspec == @deffn Special Form \def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader} \def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index \begingroup\defname {#1}{Special Form}% \defunargs {#2}\endgroup % \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody } % This definition is run if you use @defunx % anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx. \def\deffnx #1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}} \def\defunx #1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}} \def\defmacx #1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}} \def\defspecx #1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}} \def\deftypefnx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}} \def\deftypeunx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypeunx in invalid context}} % @defmethod, and so on % @defop {Funny Method} foo-class frobnicate argument \def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}% \defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype} \def\defopheader #1#2#3{% \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% Make entry in function index \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype{} on #1}% \defunargs {#3}\endgroup % } % @defmethod == @defop Method \def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader} \def\defmethodheader #1#2#3{% \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% entry in function index \begingroup\defname {#2}{Method on #1}% \defunargs {#3}\endgroup % } % @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag \def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}% \defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype} \def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{% \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype{} of #1}% \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup % } % @defivar == @defcv {Instance Variable} \def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader} \def\defivarheader #1#2#3{% \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index \begingroup\defname {#2}{Instance Variable of #1}% \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup % } % These definitions are run if you use @defmethodx, etc., % anywhere other than immediately after a @defmethod, etc. \def\defopx #1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}} \def\defmethodx #1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}} \def\defcvx #1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}} \def\defivarx #1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}} % Now @defvar % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar. % This is actually simple: just print them in roman. % This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up \def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1% \interlinepenalty=10000 \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000} % @defvr Counter foo-count \def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader} \def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}% \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup} % @defvar == @defvr Variable \def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader} \def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index \begingroup\defname {#1}{Variable}% \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % } % @defopt == @defvr {User Option} \def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader} \def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index \begingroup\defname {#1}{User Option}% \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % } % @deftypevar int foobar \def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader} % #1 is the data type. #2 is the name. \def\deftypevarheader #1#2{% \doind {vr}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in variables index \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Variable}% \interlinepenalty=10000 \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000 \endgroup} % @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable \def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader} \def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#3}}% \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1} \interlinepenalty=10000 \endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000 \endgroup} % This definition is run if you use @defvarx % anywhere other than immediately after a @defvar or @defvarx. \def\defvrx #1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}} \def\defvarx #1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}} \def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}} \def\deftypevarx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}} \def\deftypevrx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}} % Now define @deftp % Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar. \def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}} % @deftp Class window height width ... \def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader} \def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}% \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup} % This definition is run if you use @deftpx, etc % anywhere other than immediately after a @deftp, etc. \def\deftpx #1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}} \message{cross reference,} % Define cross-reference macros \newwrite \auxfile \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. % \setref{foo} defines a cross-reference point named foo. \def\setref#1{% \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% \dosetq{#1-snt}{Ysectionnumberandtype}} \def\unnumbsetref#1{% \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% \dosetq{#1-snt}{Ynothing}} \def\appendixsetref#1{% \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% \dosetq{#1-snt}{Yappendixletterandtype}} % \xref, \pxref, and \ref generate cross-references to specified points. % For \xrefX, #1 is the node name, #2 the name of the Info % cross-reference, #3 the printed node name, #4 the name of the Info % file, #5 the name of the printed manual. All but the node name can be % omitted. % \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}% \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}% \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}% \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt % No printed node name was explicitly given. \ifx\SETxref-automatic-section-title\relax % % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. \ifdim \wd1>0pt% % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% \else \ifhavexrefs % We know the real title if we have the xref values. \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}}% \else % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% \fi% \fi \def\printednodename{#1-title}% \else % Use the node name inside the square brackets. \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% \fi \fi % % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' in \cite{\printedmanual}% \else % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. {\turnoffactive \refx{#1-snt}{}}% \space [\printednodename],\space \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% \fi \endgroup} % \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros % Use \turnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore % work in node names. \def\dosetq #1#2{{\let\folio=0 \turnoffactive \auxhat% \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq {#1}{#2}}}% \next}} % \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into % CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...} % When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character \def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}} % Things to be expanded by \internalsetq \def\Ypagenumber{\folio} \def\Ytitle{\thissection} \def\Ynothing{} \def\Ysectionnumberandtype{% \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno % \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno % \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 % \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno % \else % \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno % \fi \fi \fi } \def\Yappendixletterandtype{% \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}% \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno % \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 % \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno % \else % \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno % \fi \fi \fi } \gdef\xreftie{'tie} % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. % \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0. \else \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space} \fi % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. \def\refx#1#2{% \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax % If not defined, say something at least. $\langle$un\-de\-fined$\rangle$% \ifhavexrefs \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% \else \ifwarnedxrefs\else \global\warnedxrefstrue \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% \fi \fi \else % It's defined, so just use it. \csname X#1\endcsname \fi #2% Output the suffix in any case. } % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. \def\xrdef #1#2{ {\catcode`\'=\other\expandafter \gdef \csname X#1\endcsname {#2}}} \def\readauxfile{% \begingroup \catcode `\^^@=\other \catcode `\=\other \catcode `\=\other \catcode `\^^C=\other \catcode `\^^D=\other \catcode `\^^E=\other \catcode `\^^F=\other \catcode `\^^G=\other \catcode `\^^H=\other \catcode `\ =\other \catcode `\^^L=\other \catcode `\=\other \catcode `\=\other \catcode `\=\other \catcode `\=\other \catcode `\=\other \catcode `\=\other \catcode `\=\other \catcode `\=\other \catcode `\=\other \catcode `\=\other \catcode `\=\other \catcode `\=\other \catcode 26=\other \catcode `\^^[=\other \catcode `\^^\=\other \catcode `\^^]=\other \catcode `\^^^=\other \catcode `\^^_=\other \catcode `\@=\other \catcode `\^=\other \catcode `\~=\other \catcode `\[=\other \catcode `\]=\other \catcode`\"=\other \catcode`\_=\other \catcode`\|=\other \catcode`\<=\other \catcode`\>=\other \catcode `\$=\other \catcode `\#=\other \catcode `\&=\other % `\+ does not work, so use 43. \catcode 43=\other % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters {% \count 1=128 \def\loop{% \catcode\count 1=\other \advance\count 1 by 1 \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi }% }% % the aux file uses ' as the escape. % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names. % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^ % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish, % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in. \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 \catcode `\%=\other \catcode `\'=0 \catcode`\^=7 % to make ^^e4 etc usable in xref tags \catcode `\\=\other \openin 1 \jobname.aux \ifeof 1 \else \closein 1 \input \jobname.aux \global\havexrefstrue \global\warnedobstrue \fi % Open the new aux file. Tex will close it automatically at exit. \openout \auxfile=\jobname.aux \endgroup} % Footnotes. \newcount \footnoteno % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is % removed. \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.. \let\footnotestyle=\comment \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote {\catcode `\@=11 % % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. \gdef\footnote{% \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% % % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. \let\@sf\empty \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi % % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. \unskip \thisfootno\@sf \footnotezzz }% % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. % \long\gdef\footnotezzz#1{\insert\footins{% % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. % So reset some parameters. \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\z@skip \spaceskip\z@skip \xspaceskip\z@skip \parindent\defaultparindent % % Hang the footnote text off the number. \hang \textindent{\thisfootno}% % % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. \footstrut #1\strut}% } }%end \catcode `\@=11 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. % \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} % \def\setleading#1{% \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip \normalbaselines \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip }% } % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). % \def\|{% % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. \leavevmode % % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. \vadjust{% % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. \vskip-\baselineskip % % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. \llap{% % % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt % % This is the space between the bar and the text. \hskip 12pt }% }% } % For a final copy, take out the rectangles % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). % \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} % End of control word definitions. \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} \def\openindices{% \newindex{cp}% \newcodeindex{fn}% \newcodeindex{vr}% \newcodeindex{tp}% \newcodeindex{ky}% \newcodeindex{pg}% } % Set some numeric style parameters, for 8.5 x 11 format. %\hsize = 6.5in \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt \parindent = \defaultparindent \parskip 18pt plus 1pt \setleading{15pt} \advance\topskip by 1.2cm % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. \vbadness=10000 % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. \widowpenalty=10000 \clubpenalty=10000 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on % \hsize. This makes it come to about 9pt for the 8.5x11 format. % \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% \else \emergencystretch = \hsize \divide\emergencystretch by 45 \fi % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 format (or else 7x9.25) \def\smallbook{ % These values for secheadingskip and subsecheadingskip are % experiments. RJC 7 Aug 1992 \global\secheadingskip = 17pt plus 6pt minus 3pt \global\subsecheadingskip = 14pt plus 6pt minus 3pt \global\lispnarrowing = 0.3in \setleading{12pt} \advance\topskip by -1cm \global\parskip 3pt plus 1pt \global\hsize = 5in \global\vsize=7.5in \global\tolerance=700 \global\hfuzz=1pt \global\contentsrightmargin=0pt \global\deftypemargin=0pt \global\defbodyindent=.5cm \global\pagewidth=\hsize \global\pageheight=\vsize \global\let\smalllisp=\smalllispx \global\let\smallexample=\smalllispx \global\def\Esmallexample{\Esmalllisp} } % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. \def\afourpaper{ \global\tolerance=700 \global\hfuzz=1pt \setleading{12pt} \global\parskip 15pt plus 1pt \global\vsize= 53\baselineskip \advance\vsize by \topskip %\global\hsize= 5.85in % A4 wide 10pt \global\hsize= 6.5in \global\outerhsize=\hsize \global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in \global\outervsize=\vsize \global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in \global\pagewidth=\hsize \global\pageheight=\vsize } % Allow control of the text dimensions. Parameters in order: textheight; % textwidth; \voffset; \hoffset (!); binding offset. All require a dimension; % header is additional; added length extends the bottom of the page. \def\changepagesizes#1#2#3#4#5{ \global\vsize= #1 \advance\vsize by \topskip \global\voffset= #3 \global\hsize= #2 \global\outerhsize=\hsize \global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in \global\outervsize=\vsize \global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in \global\pagewidth=\hsize \global\pageheight=\vsize \global\normaloffset= #4 \global\bindingoffset= #5} % This layout is compatible with Latex on A4 paper. \def\afourlatex{\changepagesizes{22cm}{15cm}{7mm}{4.6mm}{5mm}} % Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format. \def\afourwide{\afourpaper \changepagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}} % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. \catcode`\"=\other \catcode`\~=\other \catcode`\^=\other \catcode`\_=\other \catcode`\|=\other \catcode`\<=\other \catcode`\>=\other \catcode`\+=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} \def\normaltilde{~} \def\normalcaret{^} \def\normalunderscore{_} \def\normalverticalbar{|} \def\normalless{<} \def\normalgreater{>} \def\normalplus{+} % This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont % where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts, % where something hairier probably needs to be done. % % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. % \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\the\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} % Turn off all special characters except @ % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. \catcode`\"=\active \def\activedoublequote{{\tt \char '042}} \let"=\activedoublequote \catcode`\~=\active \def~{{\tt \char '176}} \chardef\hat=`\^ \catcode`\^=\active \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat}} \def^{{\tt \hat}} \catcode`\_=\active \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} % Subroutine for the previous macro. \def\_{\lvvmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}} % \lvvmode is equivalent in function to \leavevmode. % Using \leavevmode runs into trouble when written out to % an index file due to the expansion of \leavevmode into ``\unhbox % \voidb@x'' ---which looks to TeX like ``\unhbox \voidb\x'' due to our % magic tricks with @. \def\lvvmode{\vbox to 0pt{}} \catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt \char '174}} \chardef \less=`\< \catcode`\<=\active \def<{{\tt \less}} \chardef \gtr=`\> \catcode`\>=\active \def>{{\tt \gtr}} \catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} %\catcode 27=\active %\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$} % Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time. {\catcode`\==\active \global\def={{\tt \char 61}}} \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} \catcode`\@=0 % \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font \global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\ %{\catcode`\\=\other %@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}} % \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx. {\catcode`\\=\active @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }} % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font. \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}} % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. \escapechar=`\@ % \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q \catcode`\\=\active % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters % even after parsing them. @def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote @let\=@realbackslash @let~=@normaltilde @let^=@normalcaret @let_=@normalunderscore @let|=@normalverticalbar @let<=@normalless @let>=@normalgreater @let+=@normalplus} @def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote @let\=@normalbackslash @let~=@normaltilde @let^=@normalcaret @let_=@normalunderscore @let|=@normalverticalbar @let<=@normalless @let>=@normalgreater @let+=@normalplus} % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. @otherifyactive % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing % a backslash. % @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} @global@let\ = @eatinput % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. % @gdef@fixbackslash{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active} %% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. The @rm below %% makes sure that the current font starts out as the newly loaded cmr10 @catcode`@$=@other @catcode`@%=@other @catcode`@&=@other @catcode`@#=@other @textfonts @rm @c Local variables: @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" @c End: gettext-0.7/doc/version.texi100644 230 226 73 5776100046 14772 0ustar pinardguest@set EDITION 0.7 @set UPDATED 4 July 1995 @set VERSION 0.7